WO2024048436A1 - Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device - Google Patents

Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024048436A1
WO2024048436A1 PCT/JP2023/030663 JP2023030663W WO2024048436A1 WO 2024048436 A1 WO2024048436 A1 WO 2024048436A1 JP 2023030663 W JP2023030663 W JP 2023030663W WO 2024048436 A1 WO2024048436 A1 WO 2024048436A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
compound
formula
resin composition
represented
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2023/030663
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
大輔 浅川
友 小澤
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Publication of WO2024048436A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024048436A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B15/00Layered products comprising a layer of metal
    • B32B15/04Layered products comprising a layer of metal comprising metal as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material
    • B32B15/08Layered products comprising a layer of metal comprising metal as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material of synthetic resin
    • B32B15/088Layered products comprising a layer of metal comprising metal as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material of synthetic resin comprising polyamides
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D487/00Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00
    • C07D487/02Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D487/04Ortho-condensed systems
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F289/00Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerising monomers on to macromolecular compounds not provided for in groups C08F251/00 - C08F287/00
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08KUse of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients
    • C08K5/00Use of organic ingredients
    • C08K5/16Nitrogen-containing compounds
    • C08K5/205Compounds containing groups, e.g. carbamates
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08KUse of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients
    • C08K5/00Use of organic ingredients
    • C08K5/16Nitrogen-containing compounds
    • C08K5/29Compounds containing one or more carbon-to-nitrogen double bonds
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08KUse of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients
    • C08K5/00Use of organic ingredients
    • C08K5/16Nitrogen-containing compounds
    • C08K5/34Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen in the ring
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08KUse of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients
    • C08K5/00Use of organic ingredients
    • C08K5/16Nitrogen-containing compounds
    • C08K5/34Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen in the ring
    • C08K5/35Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen in the ring having also oxygen in the ring
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08KUse of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients
    • C08K5/00Use of organic ingredients
    • C08K5/36Sulfur-, selenium-, or tellurium-containing compounds
    • C08K5/45Heterocyclic compounds having sulfur in the ring
    • C08K5/46Heterocyclic compounds having sulfur in the ring with oxygen or nitrogen in the ring
    • C08K5/47Thiazoles
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08LCOMPOSITIONS OF MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS
    • C08L79/00Compositions of macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions forming in the main chain of the macromolecule a linkage containing nitrogen with or without oxygen or carbon only, not provided for in groups C08L61/00 - C08L77/00
    • C08L79/04Polycondensates having nitrogen-containing heterocyclic rings in the main chain; Polyhydrazides; Polyamide acids or similar polyimide precursors
    • C08L79/08Polyimides; Polyester-imides; Polyamide-imides; Polyamide acids or similar polyimide precursors
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L23/00Details of semiconductor or other solid state devices
    • H01L23/28Encapsulations, e.g. encapsulating layers, coatings, e.g. for protection
    • H01L23/29Encapsulations, e.g. encapsulating layers, coatings, e.g. for protection characterised by the material, e.g. carbon
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L23/00Details of semiconductor or other solid state devices
    • H01L23/28Encapsulations, e.g. encapsulating layers, coatings, e.g. for protection
    • H01L23/31Encapsulations, e.g. encapsulating layers, coatings, e.g. for protection characterised by the arrangement or shape

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a resin composition, a cured product, a laminate, a method for producing a cured product, a method for producing a laminate, a method for producing a semiconductor device, and a semiconductor device.
  • resin materials manufactured from resin compositions containing resin are utilized in various fields.
  • cyclized resins such as polyimide have excellent heat resistance and insulation properties, and are therefore used in a variety of applications.
  • the above-mentioned uses are not particularly limited, but in the case of semiconductor devices for mounting, for example, they may be used as materials for insulating films and sealing materials, or as protective films. It is also used as a base film and coverlay for flexible substrates.
  • a cyclized resin such as polyimide is used in the form of a resin composition containing the cyclized resin or a precursor of the cyclized resin such as a polyimide precursor.
  • a resin composition is applied to a base material by coating, for example, to form a photosensitive film, and then, as necessary, exposure, development, heating, etc. are performed to form a cured product on the base material.
  • the precursor of the cyclized resin such as a polyimide precursor, is cyclized, for example, by heating, and becomes a cyclized resin such as polyimide in the cured product.
  • the resin composition can be applied by known coating methods, there is a high degree of freedom in designing the shape, size, application position, etc. of the resin composition when it is applied. It can be said that it has excellent characteristics.
  • cyclized resins such as polyimide
  • Patent Document 1 describes at least one polymer precursor selected from the group consisting of a polyimide precursor and a polybenzoxazole precursor, a nonionic compound B, and a polymerizable compound and a photosensitive compound.
  • the compound B includes a partial structure containing two or more nitrogen atoms and an electron-withdrawing group, and at least one of the nitrogen atoms in the partial structure contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of:
  • the distance 1 between two nitrogen atoms is 2 atoms or less, and the distance 2 between any of the nitrogen atoms for which the distance 1 is 2 atoms or less and the electron-withdrawing group is 1 atom or less.
  • Curable resin compositions are described.
  • Patent Document 2 describes (A) a polyimide precursor; (B) having a plurality of amino groups protected with a group that can be deprotected by acid or base or heat, and having a molecular weight of 250 to 600; a base-protected compound in which the plurality of amino groups are aliphatic chain or alicyclic amino groups, and the solubility parameter value is 20.0 or more and 24.0 or less; and (C) a photopolymerization initiator.
  • a negative-working photosensitive resin composition is described.
  • a resin composition for obtaining a cured product is required to have excellent adhesion to a substrate even after the resulting cured product is exposed to high-temperature conditions.
  • the present invention includes a resin composition that has excellent adhesion to a base material even after the obtained cured product is exposed to high temperature conditions, a cured product obtained by curing the above resin composition, and the above cured product.
  • the present invention aims to provide a laminate, a method for producing the cured product, a method for producing the laminate, a method for producing a semiconductor device including the method for producing the cured product, and a semiconductor device including the cured product.
  • Compound a1 Protected primary amine structure, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyrimidine ring, Schiff base group, phenolic hydroxyl group, group represented by the following formula (1-1), the following formula (1-2) )
  • Compound a2 having at least one structure selected from the group consisting of a group represented by the following formula (1-4): a protected primary alkylamine structure, and Having a group represented by any of the following formulas (1-1) to (1-4)
  • X 1 represents -C(R x ) 2 -, -NR x -, -S-, or -O-
  • X 2 to N-
  • X 1 is -C(R x ) 2 - or -O-
  • at least two of X 2 to X 7 represent N-
  • X 1 is -NR
  • each R X independently represents a bonding
  • each R X independently represents a bonding site with another structure represented by *, a hydrogen atom, or a monovalent substituent
  • one of X 8 , X 13 and X 14 contains R x which is a bonding site with another structure represented by *, and in the group represented by formula (1-2), There is only one R x which is a binding site with another structure.
  • R x which is a bonding site with another structure represented by *.
  • the compound a1 is selected from the group consisting of a protected primary amine structure, a group represented by formula (1-1), and a group represented by formula (1-2).
  • ⁇ 4> The resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 3>, wherein the compound A is a compound represented by the following formula (A-2) or formula (A-3).
  • R 7 each independently represents an alkyl group that may have a substituent, a plurality of R 7 may be combined to form a ring structure, and R 8 is represented by formula ( At least one structure selected from the group consisting of a group represented by any one of 1-1) to formula (1-4), an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, a pyrimidine ring, a Schiff base, and a phenolic hydroxyl group.
  • L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • R 9 is a group represented by any one of formulas (1-1) to (1-4), an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, a pyrimidine ring, a Schiff base group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, represents an organic group having at least one type of structure selected from the group consisting of, and L 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • L 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • ⁇ 7> The resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 6>, further comprising a photopolymerization initiator and a polymerizable compound.
  • ⁇ 8> The resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 7>, which is used for forming an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer.
  • ⁇ 9> A cured product obtained by curing the resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 8>.
  • ⁇ 10> A laminate including two or more layers made of the cured product according to ⁇ 9>, and a metal layer between any of the layers made of the cured product.
  • ⁇ 11> A method for producing a cured product, comprising a film forming step of applying the resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 8> onto a substrate to form a film.
  • the method for producing a cured product according to ⁇ 11> comprising an exposure step of selectively exposing the film to light, and a development step of developing the film using a developer to form a pattern.
  • the method for producing a cured product according to ⁇ 11> or ⁇ 12> which includes a heating step of heating the film at 50 to 450°C.
  • a method for producing a laminate including the method for producing a cured product according to any one of ⁇ 11> to ⁇ 13>.
  • ⁇ 15> A method for manufacturing a semiconductor device, comprising the method for manufacturing a cured product according to any one of ⁇ 11> to ⁇ 13>.
  • ⁇ 16> A semiconductor device comprising the cured product according to ⁇ 9>.
  • a resin composition that has excellent adhesion to a substrate even after the obtained cured product is exposed to high temperature conditions, a cured product obtained by curing the resin composition, and a cured product obtained by curing the resin composition.
  • a laminate including the above, a method for producing the cured product, a method for producing the laminate, a method for producing a semiconductor device including the method for producing the cured product, and a semiconductor device including the cured product.
  • a numerical range expressed using the symbol " ⁇ ” means a range that includes the numerical values written before and after " ⁇ " as the lower limit and upper limit, respectively.
  • the term “step” includes not only independent steps but also steps that cannot be clearly distinguished from other steps as long as the intended effect of the step can be achieved.
  • substitution or unsubstitution includes a group having a substituent (atomic group) as well as a group having no substituent (atomic group).
  • alkyl group includes not only an alkyl group without a substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • exposure includes not only exposure using light but also exposure using particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams, unless otherwise specified. Examples of the light used for exposure include actinic rays or radiation such as the bright line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays typified by excimer lasers, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, and electron beams.
  • (meth)acrylate means both “acrylate” and “methacrylate”, or either “(meth)acrylate”
  • (meth)acrylic means both “acrylic” and “methacrylic”
  • (meth)acryloyl means either or both of "acryloyl” and “methacryloyl.”
  • Me in the structural formula represents a methyl group
  • Et represents an ethyl group
  • Bu represents a butyl group
  • Ph represents a phenyl group.
  • the total solid content refers to the total mass of all components of the composition excluding the solvent.
  • the solid content concentration is the mass percentage of other components excluding the solvent with respect to the total mass of the composition.
  • weight average molecular weight (Mw) and number average molecular weight (Mn) are values measured using gel permeation chromatography (GPC), and are defined as polystyrene equivalent values.
  • weight average molecular weight (Mw) and number average molecular weight (Mn) are expressed using, for example, HLC-8220GPC (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) and guard column HZ-L, TSKgel Super HZM-M, TSKgel.
  • THF tetrahydrofuran
  • NMP N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone
  • a detector with a wavelength of 254 nm of UV rays is used for detection in the GPC measurement.
  • each layer constituting a laminate when the positional relationship of each layer constituting a laminate is described as "upper” or “lower", there is another layer above or below the reference layer among the plurality of layers of interest. It would be good if there was. That is, a third layer or element may be further interposed between the reference layer and the other layer, and the reference layer and the other layer do not need to be in contact with each other.
  • the direction in which layers are stacked on the base material is referred to as "top”, or if there is a resin composition layer, the direction from the base material to the resin composition layer is referred to as "top”. , the opposite direction is called "down".
  • the composition may contain, as each component contained in the composition, two or more compounds corresponding to that component. Further, unless otherwise specified, the content of each component in the composition means the total content of all compounds corresponding to that component.
  • the temperature is 23° C.
  • the atmospheric pressure is 101,325 Pa (1 atm)
  • the relative humidity is 50% RH. In this specification, combinations of preferred aspects are more preferred aspects.
  • the resin composition of the present invention includes at least one resin selected from the group consisting of cyclized resins and precursors thereof, and a compound A that corresponds to at least one of the following compounds a1 and compound a2.
  • Compound a1 Protected primary amine structure, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyrimidine ring, Schiff base group, phenolic hydroxyl group, group represented by the following formula (1-1), the following formula (1-2)
  • Compound a2 having at least one structure selected from the group consisting of a group represented by the following formula (1-4): a protected primary alkylamine structure, and Having a group represented by any of the following formulas (1-1) to (1-4)
  • X 1 represents -C(R x ) 2 -, -NR x -, -S-, or -O-
  • X 2 to N-, and when X 1 is -C(R x ) 2 - or
  • each R X independently represents a bonding site with another structure represented by *, a hydrogen atom, or a monovalent substituent
  • one of X 8 , X 13 and X 14 contains R x which is a bonding site with another structure represented by *, and in the group represented by formula (1-2), There is only one R x that is a binding site with other structures.
  • R x represents a bonding site with another structure represented by *.
  • the resin composition of the present invention is preferably used to form a photosensitive film that is subjected to exposure and development, and is preferably used to form a film that is subjected to exposure and development using a developer containing an organic solvent.
  • the resin composition of the present invention can be used, for example, to form an insulating film of a semiconductor device, an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer, a stress buffer film, etc., and can be used for forming an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer. preferable.
  • the resin composition of the present invention is used for forming an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer.
  • the resin composition of the present invention may be used to form a photosensitive film to be subjected to positive development, or may be used to form a photosensitive film to be subjected to negative development.
  • negative development refers to development in which non-exposed areas are removed by development during exposure and development
  • positive development refers to development in which exposed areas are removed by development.
  • the above-mentioned exposure method, the above-mentioned developer, and the above-mentioned development method include, for example, the exposure method explained in the exposure step in the explanation of the method for producing a cured product, and the developer and development method explained in the development step. is used.
  • a cured product having excellent adhesion to a substrate can be obtained even after being exposed to high-temperature conditions.
  • a substrate particularly a metal substrate, particularly a copper substrate
  • the resin composition of the present invention contains at least one resin selected from the group consisting of cyclized resins and precursors thereof, and a compound A having a specific structure.
  • the cured product obtained from the resin composition of the present invention has excellent adhesion to a substrate (particularly a metal substrate, particularly a copper substrate) even after being exposed to high temperature conditions.
  • a compound corresponding to compound a1 has a protected primary amine structure (Structure 1), a structure having a wide ⁇ conjugated plane, a structure having multiple nitrogen atoms, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and a nitrogen atom. structure (Structure 2).
  • the compound corresponding to compound a2 includes a protected primary alkylamine structure (Structure 3) and an azole structure (Structure 4) having at least two or more nitrogen atoms.
  • Patent Documents 1 and 2 do not describe a precursor of a cyclized resin and a composition containing Compound A.
  • the resin composition of the present invention contains at least one resin (specific resin) selected from the group consisting of cyclized resins and precursors thereof.
  • the cyclized resin is preferably a resin containing an imide ring structure or an oxazole ring structure in its main chain structure.
  • the "main chain” refers to the relatively longest bond chain in the resin molecule, and the “side chain” refers to other bond chains.
  • the cyclized resin include polyimide, polybenzoxazole, polyamideimide, and the like.
  • the precursor of cyclized resin refers to a resin that undergoes a chemical structure change due to external stimulation to become a cyclized resin.
  • a resin that undergoes a chemical structure change due to heat to become a cyclized resin, and that undergoes a ring-closing reaction due to heat More preferred is a resin that becomes a cyclized resin by forming a ring structure.
  • the precursor of the cyclized resin include a polyimide precursor, a polybenzoxazole precursor, a polyamideimide precursor, and the like. That is, the resin composition contains, as the specific resin, at least one resin selected from the group consisting of polyimide, polyimide precursor, polybenzoxazole, polybenzoxazole precursor, polyamideimide, and polyamideimide precursor. It is preferable.
  • the resin composition contains polyimide or a polyimide precursor as the specific resin. It is preferable that the specific resin has a polymerizable group, and more preferably a radically polymerizable group.
  • the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a radical polymerization initiator, and more preferably contains a radical polymerization initiator and a radical crosslinking agent.
  • a sensitizer can be included if necessary.
  • a negative photosensitive film is formed from such a resin composition.
  • the specific resin may have a polarity converting group such as an acid-decomposable group.
  • the resin composition preferably contains a photoacid generator. From such a resin composition, for example, a chemically amplified positive or negative photosensitive film is formed.
  • the polyimide precursor used in the present invention is not particularly limited in its type, but preferably contains a repeating unit represented by the following formula (2).
  • a 1 and A 2 each independently represent an oxygen atom or -NR z -
  • R 111 represents a divalent organic group
  • R 115 represents a tetravalent organic group
  • R 113 and R 114 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group
  • R z represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.
  • a 1 and A 2 in formula (2) each independently represent an oxygen atom or -NR z -, and preferably an oxygen atom.
  • Rz represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R 111 in formula (2) represents a divalent organic group.
  • divalent organic groups include groups containing straight-chain or branched aliphatic groups, cyclic aliphatic groups, and aromatic groups, including straight-chain or branched aliphatic groups having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, A group consisting of a cyclic aliphatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, an aromatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, or a combination thereof is preferable, and a group containing an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is more preferable.
  • the hydrocarbon group in the chain may be substituted with a group containing a hetero atom, and in the above cyclic aliphatic group and aromatic group, the hydrocarbon group in the chain may be substituted with a hetero atom. may be substituted with a group containing.
  • R 111 in formula (2) include groups represented by -Ar- and -Ar-L-Ar-, with a group represented by -Ar-L-Ar- being preferred.
  • Ar is each independently an aromatic group
  • L is a single bond or an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, -O-, -CO -, -S-, -SO 2 -, -NHCO-, or a combination of two or more of the above.
  • R 111 is derived from a diamine.
  • diamines used in the production of polyimide precursors include linear or branched aliphatic, cyclic aliphatic, and aromatic diamines.
  • One type of diamine may be used, or two or more types may be used.
  • R 111 is a linear or branched aliphatic group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a cyclic aliphatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, an aromatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, or any of these.
  • a diamine containing a combination of groups is preferable, and a diamine containing an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is more preferable.
  • the hydrocarbon group in the chain may be substituted with a group containing a hetero atom.
  • the hydrocarbon group in the chain may be substituted with a group containing a hetero atom. may be substituted with a group containing.
  • groups containing aromatic groups include the following.
  • diamine specifically, 1,2-diaminoethane, 1,2-diaminopropane, 1,3-diaminopropane, 1,4-diaminobutane or 1,6-diaminohexane; 1,2- or 1,3-diaminocyclopentane, 1,2-, 1,3- or 1,4-diaminocyclohexane, 1,2-, 1,3- or 1,4-bis(aminomethyl)cyclohexane , bis-(4-aminocyclohexyl)methane, bis-(3-aminocyclohexyl)methane, 4,4'-diamino-3,3'-dimethylcyclohexylmethane and isophoronediamine; m- or p-phenylenediamine, diaminotoluene, 4,4'- or 3,3'-diaminobiphenyl, 4,4'-diaminodipheny
  • diamines (DA-1) to (DA-18) described in paragraphs 0030 to 0031 of International Publication No. 2017/038598.
  • diamines having two or more alkylene glycol units in the main chain described in paragraphs 0032 to 0034 of International Publication No. 2017/038598 are also preferably used.
  • R 111 is preferably represented by -Ar-L-Ar-.
  • Ar is each independently an aromatic group
  • L is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, -O-, -CO-, -S- , -SO 2 -, -NHCO-, or a combination of two or more of the above.
  • Ar is preferably a phenylene group
  • L is preferably an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a fluorine atom, -O-, -CO-, -S- or -SO 2 - .
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group here is preferably an alkylene group.
  • R 111 is preferably a divalent organic group represented by the following formula (51) or formula (61).
  • a divalent organic group represented by formula (61) is more preferable.
  • R 50 to R 57 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or a monovalent organic group, and at least one of R 50 to R 57 is a fluorine atom, a methyl group, or a trifluoro It is a methyl group, and each * independently represents a bonding site with the nitrogen atom in formula (2).
  • the monovalent organic groups R 50 to R 57 include unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms), and unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms). Examples include fluorinated alkyl groups.
  • R 58 and R 59 each independently represent a fluorine atom, a methyl group, or a trifluoromethyl group, and * each independently represents a bonding site with the nitrogen atom in formula (2). represent.
  • Examples of the diamine giving the structure of formula (51) or formula (61) include 2,2'-dimethylbenzidine, 2,2'-bis(trifluoromethyl)-4,4'-diaminobiphenyl, 2,2'- Bis(fluoro)-4,4'-diaminobiphenyl, 4,4'-diaminoctafluorobiphenyl, and the like. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • R 115 in formula (2) represents a tetravalent organic group.
  • a tetravalent organic group containing an aromatic ring is preferable, and a group represented by the following formula (5) or formula (6) is more preferable.
  • * each independently represents a bonding site with another structure.
  • R 112 is a single bond or a divalent linking group, and is a single bond or an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, -O-, A group selected from -CO-, -S-, -SO 2 -, -NHCO-, and combinations thereof is preferable, and the number of carbon atoms optionally substituted with a single bond or a fluorine atom is preferable.
  • it is a group selected from 1 to 3 alkylene groups, -O-, -CO-, -S- and -SO 2 -, including -CH 2 -, -C(CF 3 ) 2 -, - More preferably, it is a divalent group selected from the group consisting of C(CH 3 ) 2 -, -O-, -CO-, -S- and -SO 2 -.
  • R 115 include a tetracarboxylic acid residue remaining after removal of an anhydride group from a tetracarboxylic dianhydride.
  • the polyimide precursor may contain only one type of tetracarboxylic dianhydride residue, or may contain two or more types of tetracarboxylic dianhydride residues as the structure corresponding to R115 .
  • the tetracarboxylic dianhydride is represented by the following formula (O).
  • R 115 represents a tetravalent organic group.
  • the preferred range of R 115 is the same as the preferred range of R 115 in formula (2).
  • tetracarboxylic dianhydride examples include pyromellitic dianhydride (PMDA), 3,3',4,4'-biphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3',4,4'- Diphenylsulfidetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3',4,4'-diphenylsulfonetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3',4,4'-benzophenonetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3' , 4,4'-diphenylmethanetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,2',3,3'-diphenylmethanetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,3,3',4'-biphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,3,3',4'-benzophenonetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 4,4'-oxydiphthalic dianhydride, 2,3,
  • preferred examples include tetracarboxylic dianhydrides (DAA-1) to (DAA-5) described in paragraph 0038 of International Publication No. 2017/038598.
  • R 111 and R 115 may have an OH group. More specifically, R 111 includes a residue of a bisaminophenol derivative.
  • R 113 and R 114 in formula (2) each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.
  • the monovalent organic group preferably includes a linear or branched alkyl group, a cyclic alkyl group, an aromatic group, or a polyalkyleneoxy group.
  • at least one of R 113 and R 114 contains a polymerizable group, and it is more preferable that both of them contain a polymerizable group.
  • the polymerizable group is a group that can undergo a crosslinking reaction by the action of heat, radicals, etc., and a radically polymerizable group is preferable.
  • the polymerizable group examples include a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, an alkoxymethyl group, a hydroxymethyl group, an acyloxymethyl group, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, a benzoxazolyl group, a blocked isocyanate group, and an amino group. It will be done.
  • the radically polymerizable group contained in the polyimide precursor is preferably a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
  • Examples of the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, an allyl group, an isoallyl group, a 2-methylallyl group, a group having an aromatic ring directly bonded to a vinyl group (for example, a vinyl phenyl group, etc.), and a (meth)acrylamide group.
  • (meth)acryloyloxy group a group represented by the following formula (III), and the like, with the group represented by the following formula (III) being preferred.
  • R 200 represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group, or a methylol group, and preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • * represents a bonding site with another structure.
  • R 201 represents an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, -CH 2 CH(OH)CH 2 -, a cycloalkylene group or a polyalkyleneoxy group.
  • R 201 examples include alkylene groups such as ethylene group, propylene group, trimethylene group, tetramethylene group, pentamethylene group, hexamethylene group, octamethylene group, and dodecamethylene group, 1,2-butanediyl group, 1, Examples include 3-butanediyl group, -CH 2 CH (OH) CH 2 -, polyalkyleneoxy group, alkylene groups such as ethylene group and propylene group, -CH 2 CH (OH) CH 2 -, cyclohexyl group, polyalkylene group.
  • An oxy group is more preferred, and an alkylene group such as an ethylene group or a propylene group, or a polyalkyleneoxy group is even more preferred.
  • a polyalkyleneoxy group refers to a group in which two or more alkyleneoxy groups are directly bonded.
  • the alkylene groups in the plurality of alkyleneoxy groups contained in the polyalkyleneoxy group may be the same or different.
  • the arrangement of the alkyleneoxy groups in the polyalkyleneoxy group may be a random arrangement or an arrangement having blocks. Alternatively, an arrangement having an alternating pattern or the like may be used.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group (including the number of carbon atoms in the substituent when the alkylene group has a substituent) is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 2 to 10, and 2 to 6.
  • the alkylene group may have a substituent.
  • Preferred substituents include alkyl groups, aryl groups, halogen atoms, and the like.
  • the number of alkyleneoxy groups contained in the polyalkyleneoxy group is preferably 2 to 20, more preferably 2 to 10, and even more preferably 2 to 6.
  • polyalkyleneoxy groups include polyethyleneoxy groups, polypropyleneoxy groups, polytrimethyleneoxy groups, polytetramethyleneoxy groups, or multiple ethyleneoxy groups and multiple propyleneoxy groups.
  • a group bonded to an oxy group is preferable, a polyethyleneoxy group or a polypropyleneoxy group is more preferable, and a polyethyleneoxy group is even more preferable.
  • the ethyleneoxy groups and propyleneoxy groups may be arranged randomly, or may be arranged to form blocks. , may be arranged in an alternating pattern. Preferred embodiments of the repeating number of ethyleneoxy groups, etc. in these groups are as described above.
  • R 113 is a hydrogen atom or when R 114 is a hydrogen atom, even if the polyimide precursor forms a counter salt with a tertiary amine compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
  • a tertiary amine compound having such an ethylenically unsaturated bond is N,N-dimethylaminopropyl methacrylate.
  • R 113 and R 114 may be a polarity converting group such as an acid-decomposable group.
  • the acid-decomposable group is not particularly limited as long as it decomposes under the action of an acid to produce an alkali-soluble group such as a phenolic hydroxy group or a carboxy group, but examples include an acetal group, a ketal group, a silyl group, and a silyl ether group. , a tertiary alkyl ester group, etc. are preferable, and from the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity, an acetal group or a ketal group is more preferable.
  • acid-decomposable groups include tert-butoxycarbonyl group, isopropoxycarbonyl group, tetrahydropyranyl group, tetrahydrofuranyl group, ethoxyethyl group, methoxyethyl group, ethoxymethyl group, trimethylsilyl group, tert-butoxycarbonylmethyl group. group, trimethylsilyl ether group, etc. From the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity, ethoxyethyl group or tetrahydrofuranyl group is preferred.
  • the polyimide precursor has a fluorine atom in its structure.
  • the fluorine atom content in the polyimide precursor is preferably 10% by mass or more, and preferably 20% by mass or less.
  • the polyimide precursor may be copolymerized with an aliphatic group having a siloxane structure.
  • examples include embodiments in which bis(3-aminopropyl)tetramethyldisiloxane, bis(p-aminophenyl)octamethylpentasiloxane, etc. are used as the diamine.
  • the amount of carboxyl groups in the polyimide precursor is preferably 0.05 to 0.30 mmol/g, more preferably 0.10 to 0.25 mmol/g.
  • the esterification rate (the molar amount of carboxy ester relative to the total molar amount of carboxy groups and carboxy ester) in the polyimide precursor is preferably 90% or more, more preferably 95% or more, and 98% or more.
  • the upper limit of the esterification rate is not particularly limited, and may be 100% or less.
  • the repeating unit represented by formula (2) is preferably a repeating unit represented by formula (2-A). That is, it is preferable that at least one type of polyimide precursor used in the present invention is a precursor having a repeating unit represented by formula (2-A). When the polyimide precursor contains a repeating unit represented by formula (2-A), it becomes possible to further widen the exposure latitude.
  • a 1 and A 2 represent an oxygen atom
  • R 111 and R 112 each independently represent a divalent organic group
  • R 113 and R 114 each independently, It represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group
  • at least one of R 113 and R 114 is a group containing a polymerizable group, and preferably both are groups containing a polymerizable group.
  • a 1 , A 2 , R 111 , R 113 and R 114 each independently have the same meaning as A 1 , A 2 , R 111 , R 113 and R 114 in formula (2), and their preferred ranges are also the same.
  • R 112 has the same meaning as R 112 in formula (5), and the preferred ranges are also the same.
  • the polyimide precursor may contain one type of repeating unit represented by formula (2), or may contain two or more types. Furthermore, it may contain structural isomers of the repeating unit represented by formula (2). In addition to the repeating unit of formula (2) above, the polyimide precursor may also contain other types of repeating units.
  • An embodiment of the polyimide precursor in the present invention includes an embodiment in which the content of the repeating unit represented by formula (2) is 50 mol% or more of the total repeating units.
  • the total content is more preferably 70 mol% or more, still more preferably 90 mol% or more, and particularly preferably more than 90 mol%.
  • the upper limit of the total content is not particularly limited, and all repeating units in the polyimide precursor excluding the terminal may be repeating units represented by formula (2).
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polyimide precursor is preferably 5,000 to 100,000, more preferably 10,000 to 50,000, and even more preferably 15,000 to 40,000.
  • the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the polyimide precursor is preferably 2,000 to 40,000, more preferably 3,000 to 30,000, and even more preferably 4,000 to 20,000.
  • the molecular weight dispersity of the polyimide precursor is preferably 1.5 or more, more preferably 1.8 or more, and even more preferably 2.0 or more.
  • the upper limit of the degree of molecular weight dispersion of the polyimide precursor is not particularly determined, for example, it is preferably 7.0 or less, more preferably 6.5 or less, and even more preferably 6.0 or less.
  • the molecular weight dispersity is a value calculated from weight average molecular weight/number average molecular weight.
  • the resin composition contains multiple types of polyimide precursors as the specific resin, it is preferable that the weight average molecular weight, number average molecular weight, and degree of dispersion of at least one type of polyimide precursor are within the above ranges.
  • the weight average molecular weight, number average molecular weight, and degree of dispersion calculated from the plurality of types of polyimide precursors as one resin are each within the above ranges.
  • the polyimide used in the present invention may be an alkali-soluble polyimide, or may be a polyimide soluble in a developer containing an organic solvent as a main component.
  • the alkali-soluble polyimide refers to a polyimide that dissolves 0.1 g or more at 23°C in 100 g of a 2.38% by mass tetramethylammonium aqueous solution, and from the perspective of pattern formation, 0.5 g or more.
  • the polyimide is preferably a polyimide that dissolves, and more preferably a polyimide that dissolves 1.0 g or more.
  • the upper limit of the amount dissolved is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100 g or less.
  • the polyimide is preferably a polyimide having a plurality of imide structures in its main chain from the viewpoint of film strength and insulation properties of the organic film obtained.
  • the polyimide has a fluorine atom.
  • the fluorine atom is preferably included in, for example, R 132 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later or R 131 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later, and is preferably included in R 131 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later. It is more preferable that R 132 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) or R 131 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described below be included as a fluorinated alkyl group.
  • the amount of fluorine atoms based on the total mass of the polyimide is preferably 5% by mass or more, and preferably 20% by mass or less.
  • the polyimide contains silicon atoms.
  • the silicon atom is preferably included in R 131 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later, and is preferably included in R 131 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later.
  • the silicon atom or the organically modified (poly)siloxane structure may be included in the side chain of the polyimide, but is preferably included in the main chain of the polyimide.
  • the amount of silicon atoms based on the total mass of the polyimide is preferably 1% by mass or more, and more preferably 20% by mass or less.
  • the polyimide preferably has ethylenically unsaturated bonds.
  • Polyimide may have an ethylenically unsaturated bond at the end of the main chain or in a side chain, but it is preferable to have it in a side chain.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond preferably has radical polymerizability.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferably included in R 132 or R 131 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described below, and is preferably included in R 132 or R 131 as a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond. is more preferable.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferably included in R 131 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described below, and more preferably included in R 131 as a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
  • groups having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include groups having an optionally substituted vinyl group directly bonded to an aromatic ring such as a vinyl group, an allyl group, or a vinyl phenyl group, a (meth)acrylamide group, and a (meth)acrylamide group.
  • examples include an acryloyloxy group and a group represented by the following formula (IV).
  • R 20 represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group, or a methylol group, and preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • the alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms may be linear, branched, cyclic, or a combination thereof.
  • the alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms is preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R 21 is preferably a group represented by any of the following formulas (R1) to (R3), and more preferably a group represented by formula (R1).
  • L represents a single bond, an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, a (poly)alkyleneoxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, or a group combining two or more of these; represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, * represents a bonding site with another structure, and ⁇ represents a bonding site with the oxygen atom to which R 21 in formula (IV) is bonded.
  • a preferred embodiment of the alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms or the (poly)alkyleneoxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms as L is R 21 in formula (IV).
  • the preferred embodiments are the same as the alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms or the (poly)alkyleneoxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • X is preferably an oxygen atom.
  • * has the same meaning as * in formula (IV), and preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • the structure represented by formula (R1) includes, for example, a polyimide having a hydroxy group such as a phenolic hydroxy group, and a compound having an isocyanato group and an ethylenically unsaturated bond (for example, 2-isocyanatoethyl methacrylate). Obtained by reaction.
  • the structure represented by formula (R2) can be obtained, for example, by reacting a polyimide having a carboxyl group with a compound having a hydroxyl group and an ethylenically unsaturated bond (for example, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, etc.).
  • the structure represented by formula (R3) can be obtained by, for example, reacting a polyimide having a hydroxy group such as a phenolic hydroxy group with a compound having a glycidyl group and an ethylenically unsaturated bond (for example, glycidyl methacrylate). can get.
  • * represents a bonding site with another structure, and is preferably a bonding site with the main chain of polyimide.
  • the amount of ethylenically unsaturated bonds relative to the total mass of the polyimide is preferably 0.0001 to 0.1 mol/g, more preferably 0.0005 to 0.05 mol/g.
  • the polyimide may have a polymerizable group other than the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
  • examples of polymerizable groups other than groups having ethylenically unsaturated bonds include cyclic ether groups such as epoxy groups and oxetanyl groups, alkoxymethyl groups such as methoxymethyl groups, and methylol groups.
  • a polymerizable group other than the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferably included in R 131 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described below, for example.
  • the amount of polymerizable groups other than the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond relative to the total mass of the polyimide is preferably 0.0001 to 0.1 mol/g, and preferably 0.001 to 0.05 mol/g. More preferred.
  • the polyimide may have a polarity converting group such as an acid-decomposable group.
  • the acid-decomposable group in the polyimide is the same as the acid-decomposable group explained for R 113 and R 114 in the above formula (2), and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • the polarity converting group is contained, for example, in R 131 and R 132 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described below, the terminal of polyimide, and the like.
  • the acid value of the polyimide is preferably 30 mgKOH/g or more, more preferably 50 mgKOH/g or more, and 70 mgKOH/g or more. It is more preferable that The acid value is preferably 500 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 400 mgKOH/g or less, and even more preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less.
  • the acid value of the polyimide is preferably 1 to 35 mgKOH/g, more preferably 2 to 30 mgKOH/g.
  • the acid value is measured by a known method, for example, by the method described in JIS K 0070:1992.
  • the acid group contained in the polyimide is preferably an acid group having a pKa of 0 to 10, more preferably an acid group having a pKa of 3 to 8, from the viewpoint of achieving both storage stability and developability.
  • pKa is a dissociation reaction in which hydrogen ions are released from an acid, and its equilibrium constant Ka is expressed by its negative common logarithm pKa.
  • pKa is a value calculated by ACD/ChemSketch (registered trademark) unless otherwise specified.
  • the acid group is a polyhydric acid such as phosphoric acid
  • the above pKa is the first dissociation constant.
  • the polyimide preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of a carboxy group and a phenolic hydroxy group, and more preferably a phenolic hydroxy group.
  • the polyimide has a phenolic hydroxy group.
  • the polyimide may have a phenolic hydroxy group at the end of the main chain or at the side chain.
  • the phenolic hydroxy group is preferably included, for example, in R 132 or R 131 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described below.
  • the amount of phenolic hydroxy groups based on the total mass of the polyimide is preferably 0.1 to 30 mol/g, more preferably 1 to 20 mol/g.
  • the polyimide used in the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is a polymer compound having an imide structure, but it preferably contains a repeating unit represented by the following formula (4).
  • R 131 represents a divalent organic group
  • R 132 represents a tetravalent organic group.
  • the polymerizable group may be located at at least one of R 131 and R 132 , or may be located at the terminal end of the polyimide as shown in the following formula (4-1) or formula (4-2). It may be located in Formula (4-1)
  • R 133 is a polymerizable group, and the other groups have the same meanings as in formula (4).
  • Formula (4-2) At least one of R 134 and R 135 is a polymerizable group, and if it is not a polymerizable group, it is an organic group, and the other groups have the same meanings as in formula (4).
  • R 131 represents a divalent organic group.
  • the divalent organic group include those similar to R 111 in formula (2), and the preferred ranges are also the same.
  • R 131 include diamine residues remaining after removal of the amino group of diamine. Examples of diamines include aliphatic, cycloaliphatic, and aromatic diamines. A specific example is R 111 in formula (2) of the polyimide precursor.
  • R 131 is preferably a diamine residue having at least two alkylene glycol units in its main chain in order to more effectively suppress the occurrence of warpage during firing. More preferred are diamine residues containing two or more ethylene glycol chains, propylene glycol chains, or both in one molecule, and even more preferred are diamine residues containing no aromatic ring among the above diamines. It is.
  • diamines containing two or more ethylene glycol chains, propylene glycol chains, or both in one molecule include Jeffamine (registered trademark) KH-511, ED-600, ED-900, ED-2003, and EDR.
  • 1-(2-(2-(2-aminopropoxy)ethoxy) Examples include, but are not limited to, propoxy)propan-2-amine, 1-(1-(1-(2-aminopropoxy)propan-2-yl)oxy)propan-2-amine, and the like.
  • R 132 represents a tetravalent organic group.
  • examples of the tetravalent organic group include those similar to R 115 in formula (2), and the preferred ranges are also the same.
  • R 132 examples include a tetracarboxylic acid residue remaining after the anhydride group is removed from the tetracarboxylic dianhydride.
  • a specific example is R 115 in formula (2) of the polyimide precursor. From the viewpoint of the strength of the organic film, R 132 is preferably an aromatic diamine residue having 1 to 4 aromatic rings.
  • R 131 and R 132 has an OH group. More specifically, as R 131 , 2,2-bis(3-hydroxy-4-aminophenyl)propane, 2,2-bis(3-hydroxy-4-aminophenyl)hexafluoropropane, 2,2- Bis(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)propane, 2,2-bis(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)hexafluoropropane, and the above (DA-1) to (DA-18) are listed as preferred examples. As R 132 , the above (DAA-1) to (DAA-5) are mentioned as more preferable examples.
  • the polyimide has a fluorine atom in its structure.
  • the content of fluorine atoms in the polyimide is preferably 10% by mass or more, and more preferably 20% by mass or less.
  • the polyimide may be copolymerized with an aliphatic group having a siloxane structure.
  • the diamine component include bis(3-aminopropyl)tetramethyldisiloxane and bis(p-aminophenyl)octamethylpentasiloxane.
  • the main chain end of the polyimide must be capped with a terminal capping agent such as a monoamine, acid anhydride, monocarboxylic acid, monoacid chloride compound, or monoactive ester compound. is preferred.
  • monoamines include aniline, 2-ethynylaniline, 3-ethynylaniline, 4-ethynylaniline, 5-amino-8-hydroxyquinoline, 1-hydroxy-7 -aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-4-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 2 -Hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-6- Aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 2-aminobenzoic acid, 3-aminobenzo
  • the imidization rate (also referred to as "ring closure rate") of polyimide is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, from the viewpoint of film strength, insulation properties, etc. of the organic film obtained. More preferably, it is 90% or more.
  • the upper limit of the imidization rate is not particularly limited, and may be 100% or less.
  • the above imidization rate is measured, for example, by the following method. The infrared absorption spectrum of polyimide is measured, and the peak intensity P1 near 1377 cm ⁇ 1 , which is an absorption peak derived from the imide structure, is determined. Next, the polyimide is heat-treated at 350° C.
  • the polyimide may include repeating units represented by the above formula (4) in which all of the repeating units have the same combination of R 131 and R 132 , or two or more repeating units with different combinations of R 131 and R 132 .
  • the repeating unit represented by the above formula (4) may be included.
  • the polyimide may contain other types of repeating units.
  • Other types of repeating units include, for example, the repeating unit represented by the above formula (2).
  • Polyimide can be produced, for example, by reacting tetracarboxylic dianhydride and diamine (partly replaced with an acid anhydride) at low temperature; A method of reacting a diester with a diamine (substituted with an end-capping agent that is a compound or a monoacid chloride compound or a monoactive ester compound) with a diamine, and a diester is obtained with a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and an alcohol, and then a diamine (partly of which is a monoamine) is reacted with a diamine.
  • a diester is obtained by reacting tetracarboxylic dianhydride and alcohol in the presence of a condensing agent, and then the remaining dicarboxylic acid is converted into an acid chloride, and a diamine (some of which is substituted with a monoamine) is reacted with a condensing agent.
  • a polyimide precursor is obtained using a method such as reacting with a terminal capping agent), and this is completely imidized using a known imidization reaction method, or an imidization reaction is performed during the process. It can be synthesized by stopping the polymer and introducing a partial imide structure, or by blending a fully imidized polymer with its polyimide precursor to introduce a partial imide structure. . Further, other known polyimide synthesis methods can also be applied.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polyimide is preferably 5,000 to 100,000, more preferably 10,000 to 50,000, even more preferably 15,000 to 40,000. By setting the weight average molecular weight to 5,000 or more, the bending resistance of the cured film can be improved. In order to obtain an organic film with excellent mechanical properties (for example, elongation at break), the weight average molecular weight is particularly preferably 15,000 or more.
  • the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the polyimide is preferably 2,000 to 40,000, more preferably 3,000 to 30,000, and even more preferably 4,000 to 20,000.
  • the molecular weight dispersity of the polyimide is preferably 1.5 or more, more preferably 1.8 or more, and even more preferably 2.0 or more.
  • the upper limit of the degree of dispersion of the molecular weight of polyimide is not particularly determined, for example, it is preferably 7.0 or less, more preferably 6.5 or less, and even more preferably 6.0 or less.
  • the weight average molecular weight, number average molecular weight, and degree of dispersion of at least one type of polyimide are within the above ranges. It is also preferable that the weight average molecular weight, number average molecular weight, and degree of dispersion calculated by considering the plurality of types of polyimides as one resin are each within the above ranges.
  • polybenzoxazole precursor examples include compounds described in paragraphs 0073 to 0095 of International Publication No. 2022/145355. The above description is incorporated herein.
  • polybenzoxazole examples include compounds described in paragraphs 0096 to 0103 of International Publication No. 2022/145355. The above description is incorporated herein.
  • polyamideimide precursor examples include compounds described in paragraphs 0104 to 0119 of International Publication No. 2022/145355. The above description is incorporated herein.
  • polyamideimide examples include compounds described in paragraphs 0120 to 0133 of International Publication No. 2022/145355. The above description is incorporated herein.
  • polyimide precursors can be obtained by reacting tetracarboxylic dianhydride and diamine at low temperature, by reacting tetracarboxylic dianhydride and diamine at low temperature to obtain polyamic acid, and by using a condensing agent or an alkylating agent.
  • a method of esterifying using a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and an alcohol a method of obtaining a diester with a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and an alcohol, and then reacting it with a diamine in the presence of a condensing agent, a method of obtaining a diester with a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and an alcohol, The remaining dicarboxylic acid can then be acid-halogenated using a halogenating agent and reacted with a diamine.
  • a method in which a diester is obtained from a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and an alcohol, and then the remaining dicarboxylic acid is acid-halogenated using a halogenating agent and reacted with a diamine is more preferable.
  • the condensing agent include dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, diisopropylcarbodiimide, 1-ethoxycarbonyl-2-ethoxy-1,2-dihydroquinoline, 1,1-carbonyldioxy-di-1,2,3-benzotriazole, N, Examples include N'-disuccinimidyl carbonate and trifluoroacetic anhydride.
  • alkylating agent examples include N,N-dimethylformamide dimethyl acetal, N,N-dimethylformamide diethyl acetal, N,N-dialkylformamide dialkyl acetal, trimethyl orthoformate, and triethyl orthoformate.
  • halogenating agent examples include thionyl chloride, oxalyl chloride, phosphorus oxychloride, and the like.
  • an organic solvent In the method for producing polyimide precursors, etc., it is preferable to use an organic solvent during the reaction.
  • the number of organic solvents may be one or two or more.
  • the organic solvent can be determined as appropriate depending on the raw material, and examples include pyridine, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether (diglyme), N-methylpyrrolidone, N-ethylpyrrolidone, ethyl propionate, dimethylacetamide, dimethylformamide, tetrahydrofuran, ⁇ -butyrolactone, etc. is exemplified.
  • a basic compound In the method for producing polyimide precursors, etc., it is preferable to add a basic compound during the reaction.
  • the number of basic compounds may be one or two or more.
  • the basic compound can be determined as appropriate depending on the raw material, but triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, pyridine, 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene, N,N-dimethyl-4-amino Examples include pyridine.
  • -Terminal sealing agent- In the production method of polyimide precursors, etc., in order to further improve storage stability, it is preferable to seal the carboxylic acid anhydride, acid anhydride derivative, or amino group remaining at the end of the resin such as the polyimide precursor.
  • examples of the terminal capping agent include monoalcohol, phenol, thiol, thiophenol, monoamine, etc. From the viewpoint of properties, it is more preferable to use monoalcohols, phenols, and monoamines.
  • Preferred monoalcohol compounds include primary alcohols such as methanol, ethanol, propanol, butanol, hexanol, octanol, dodecinol, benzyl alcohol, 2-phenylethanol, 2-methoxyethanol, 2-chloromethanol, furfuryl alcohol, and isopropanol. , 2-butanol, cyclohexyl alcohol, cyclopentanol, secondary alcohols such as 1-methoxy-2-propanol, and tertiary alcohols such as t-butyl alcohol and adamantane alcohol.
  • primary alcohols such as methanol, ethanol, propanol, butanol, hexanol, octanol, dodecinol, benzyl alcohol, 2-phenylethanol, 2-methoxyethanol, 2-chloromethanol, furfuryl alcohol, and isopropanol.
  • 2-butanol cyclohexyl alcohol
  • Preferred phenolic compounds include phenols such as phenol, methoxyphenol, methylphenol, naphthalen-1-ol, naphthalen-2-ol, and hydroxystyrene.
  • Preferred monoamine compounds include aniline, 2-ethynylaniline, 3-ethynylaniline, 4-ethynylaniline, 5-amino-8-hydroxyquinoline, 1-hydroxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-6- Aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-4-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1- Carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-6-aminona
  • sealing agents for amino groups include carboxylic acid anhydrides, carboxylic acid chlorides, carboxylic acid bromides, sulfonic acid chlorides, sulfonic anhydrides, and sulfonic acid carboxylic acid anhydrides, with carboxylic acid anhydrides and carboxylic acid chlorides being more preferred. preferable.
  • Preferred carboxylic anhydride compounds include acetic anhydride, propionic anhydride, oxalic anhydride, succinic anhydride, maleic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, benzoic anhydride, 5-norbornene-2,3-dicarboxylic anhydride, and the like.
  • Preferred carboxylic acid chloride compounds include acetyl chloride, acrylic acid chloride, propionyl chloride, methacrylic acid chloride, pivaloyl chloride, cyclohexane carbonyl chloride, 2-ethylhexanoyl chloride, cinnamoyl chloride, and 1-adamantane carbonyl chloride. , heptafluorobutyryl chloride, stearic acid chloride, benzoyl chloride, and the like.
  • the method for producing a polyimide precursor or the like may include a step of precipitating a solid. Specifically, after filtering off the water-absorbed by-products of the dehydration condensation agent coexisting in the reaction solution, the obtained product is added to a poor solvent such as water, aliphatic lower alcohol, or a mixture thereof.
  • a polyimide precursor or the like can be obtained by depositing the polymer component as a solid and drying it. In order to improve the degree of purification, operations such as redissolving the polyimide precursor, reprecipitation, drying, etc. may be repeated.
  • the method may include a step of removing ionic impurities using an ion exchange resin.
  • the content of the specific resin in the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 30% by mass or more, and 40% by mass or more based on the total solid content of the resin composition. It is even more preferable that the amount is 50% by mass or more. Further, the content of the resin in the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 99.5% by mass or less, more preferably 99% by mass or less, and 98% by mass or less based on the total solid content of the resin composition. % or less, even more preferably 97% by mass or less, even more preferably 95% by mass or less.
  • the resin composition of the present invention may contain only one type of specific resin, or may contain two or more types of specific resin. When two or more types are included, it is preferable that the total amount falls within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention contains at least two types of resin.
  • the resin composition of the present invention may contain a total of two or more types of specific resin and other resins described below, or may contain two or more types of specific resin, but may contain a specific resin. It is preferable to include two or more types.
  • the resin composition of the present invention contains two or more specific resins, for example, two or more polyimides that are polyimide precursors and have different dianhydride-derived structures (R 115 in the above formula (2))
  • a precursor is included.
  • the resin composition of the present invention may contain the above-mentioned specific resin and another resin different from the specific resin (hereinafter also simply referred to as "other resin").
  • Other resins include phenolic resin, polyamide, epoxy resin, polysiloxane, resin containing siloxane structure, (meth)acrylic resin, (meth)acrylamide resin, urethane resin, butyral resin, styryl resin, polyether resin, polyester resin. etc.
  • phenolic resin polyamide
  • epoxy resin polysiloxane
  • resin containing siloxane structure phenolic resin, polyamide, epoxy resin, polysiloxane, resin containing siloxane structure
  • a (meth)acrylic resin by further adding a (meth)acrylic resin, a resin composition with excellent coating properties can be obtained, and a pattern (
  • a polymerizable group having a high polymerizable group value with a weight average molecular weight of 20,000 or less may be used instead of or in addition to the polymerizable compound described below.
  • a polymerizable group having a high polymerizable group value with a weight average molecular weight of 20,000 or less for example, the molar amount of polymerizable groups contained in 1 g of resin
  • a (meth)acrylic resin having a concentration of 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 3 mol/g or more
  • it is possible to improve the coating properties of the resin composition, the solvent resistance of the pattern (cured product), etc. can.
  • the content of the other resins is preferably 0.01% by mass or more, and 0.05% by mass or more based on the total solid content of the resin composition. It is more preferably 1% by mass or more, even more preferably 2% by mass or more, even more preferably 5% by mass or more, and even more preferably 10% by mass or more. More preferred.
  • the content of other resins in the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 80% by mass or less, more preferably 75% by mass or less, and 70% by mass based on the total solid content of the resin composition. It is more preferably at most 60% by mass, even more preferably at most 50% by mass.
  • the content of other resins may be low.
  • the content of the other resin is preferably 20% by mass or less, more preferably 15% by mass or less, and 10% by mass or less based on the total solid content of the resin composition. is more preferable, even more preferably 5% by mass or less, even more preferably 1% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit of the content is not particularly limited, and may be 0% by mass or more.
  • the resin composition of the present invention may contain only one type of other resin, or may contain two or more types of other resins. When two or more types are included, it is preferable that the total amount falls within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention contains Compound A.
  • Compound A is a compound corresponding to at least one of compound a1 and compound a2 below.
  • Compound a1 Protected primary amine structure, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyrimidine ring, Schiff base group, phenolic hydroxyl group, group represented by formula (1-1), formula (1-2)
  • Compound a2 having at least one type of structure (hereinafter also referred to as "specific structure a1") selected from the group consisting of the group represented by the formula (1-4) and the group represented by the formula (1-4): It has a primary alkylamine structure and a group represented by any one of formulas (1-1) to (1-4).
  • the primary amine structure refers to a structure in which one hydrogen atom out of three hydrogen atoms of ammonia is substituted with an organic group.
  • a protected primary amine structure refers to a structure in which one of the hydrogen atoms of the primary amine structure is bonded to a protecting group.
  • Compound a1 may have only one protected primary amine structure, or may have two or more protected primary amine structures.
  • the number of protected primary amine structures in compound a1 is preferably 1 to 4, more preferably 1 or 2.
  • an embodiment in which there is only one protected primary amine structure is also one of the preferred embodiments of the present invention.
  • the above-mentioned protecting group is not particularly limited and includes known protecting groups for amino groups, such as tertiary alkyloxycarbonyl group, 9-fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl (Fmoc) group, or the following formula (P- A group represented by 1) is preferable, a tertiary alkyloxycarbonyl group or an Fmoc group is more preferable from the viewpoint of solubility of the compound itself, and a tertiary alkyloxycarbonyl group or an Fmoc group is more preferable from the viewpoint of chemical resistance of the obtained cured product. More preferred is a class alkyloxycarbonyl group.
  • the tertiary alkyl group in the tertiary alkyloxycarbonyl group refers to a group having a structure in which three carbon atoms are bonded to the carbon atom at the bonding point.
  • the bonding point of a tertiary alkyl group refers to the atom at the position where the tertiary alkyl group is bonded to another structure.
  • L 1 represents a hydrocarbon group
  • * represents a bonding site with the nitrogen atom to be protected in the primary amine structure to be protected.
  • L1 is preferably a group containing at least an aromatic hydrocarbon group, more preferably a group formed by a combination of an aromatic hydrocarbon group and a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and preferably a group having the following structure. More preferred.
  • * represents a bonding site with a nitrogen atom in the primary amine structure to be protected
  • # represents a bonding site with a hydroxy group in formula (P-1).
  • the oxazole ring, thiazole ring, and pyrimidine ring may further have a fused ring.
  • the condensed ring is preferably an aromatic 6-membered ring structure, and more preferably a benzene ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, or pyrimidine ring.
  • the Schiff base group refers to a group represented by the following formula (S-1).
  • * represents a bonding site with a carbon atom, preferably a bonding site with a hydrocarbon group.
  • Compound a1 is a substituent for a hydrogen atom in a hydrocarbon group that has specific structure a1 directly bonded to the nitrogen atom in the protected primary amine structure, or is bonded to the nitrogen atom in the protected primary amine structure. It is preferable that the specific structure a1 be a bonded structure.
  • the hydrocarbon group is preferably an alkyl group whose hydrogen atom may be further substituted with a substituent different from the specific structure a1. Preferred embodiments of the protecting group are the same as those for compound a1.
  • the hydrocarbon group and the specific structure a1 may be bonded via a linking group.
  • the linking group is not particularly limited, but examples include -O-, -NR N -, and the like. Preferred embodiments of R N are as described above.
  • compound a1 has a group represented by formula (1-1) and a group represented by formula (1-2) among specific structures a1. It is preferable that at least one structure selected from the group consisting of:
  • Compound a2 is a compound having a protected primary alkylamine structure and a group represented by any of the following formulas (1-1) to (1-4).
  • the primary alkylamine structure refers to a structure in which one hydrogen atom out of three hydrogen atoms of ammonia is substituted with an alkyl group.
  • the hydrogen atom in the above alkyl group is a group represented by any one of formulas (1-1) to (1-4), or a group represented by any one of formulas (1-1) to (1-4). is preferably substituted with a group containing a group represented by formula (1-1) to formula (1-4).
  • the hydrogen atom in the alkyl group may be further substituted with another substituent as long as the effects of the present invention can be obtained.
  • Compound a2 may have only one protected primary alkylamine structure, or may have two or more protected primary alkylamine structures.
  • the number of protected primary alkylamine structures in compound a2 is preferably 1 to 4, more preferably 1 or 2.
  • an embodiment in which there is only one protected primary alkylamine structure is also one of the preferred embodiments of the present invention.
  • each R X independently represents a bonding site with another structure represented by *, a hydrogen atom, or a monovalent substituent and one of X 4 to X 7 contains R x which is a bonding site with another structure represented by *, and in the group represented by formula (1-1), There is only one R x which is a binding site with the structure.
  • each R X independently represents a bonding site with another structure represented by *, a hydrogen atom, or a monovalent substituent
  • one of X 8 , X 13 and X 14 contains Rx which is a binding site with another structure represented by *, and in the group represented by formula (1-2), There is only one Rx, which is a binding site with another structure.
  • R x represents a bonding site with another structure represented by *.
  • X 1 is preferably -NR x -, more preferably -NH-.
  • Rx which is a binding site with another structure represented by *, is preferably present at X7 .
  • R X is preferably a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and even more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • X 14 is preferably -O- or -S-, more preferably -S-.
  • R x which is a binding site with another structure represented by *, is preferably present at X 13 .
  • R X is preferably a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and even more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R X is preferably a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and even more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R x which is a binding site with another structure represented by *, is preferably present at X 19 .
  • Compound A is preferably a compound that decomposes under the action of light, heat, or a base to generate a primary amine. More preferably, it is a compound that decomposes upon action to generate an aliphatic primary amine.
  • the decomposition described above is preferably removal of a protecting group (deprotection).
  • the primary amine refers to a compound in which one hydrogen atom out of three hydrogen atoms of ammonia is substituted with an organic group.
  • an aliphatic primary amine refers to a compound in which one hydrogen atom out of three hydrogen atoms of ammonia is substituted with an aliphatic group.
  • the hydrogen atom in the above aliphatic group may be substituted with another structure.
  • compound A is a compound that generates an aliphatic primary amine
  • the hydrogen atom in the aliphatic group is substituted with a group containing the above-mentioned specific structure a1 or a group represented by formula (1-3). It is preferable that the substituent is substituted with a group represented by the above-mentioned specific structure a1 or formula (1-3).
  • Compound A decomposes under the action of light and generates a primary amine (preferably an aliphatic primary amine) can be confirmed by the following method.
  • Composition A was prepared by dissolving compound A in a solvent, and after irradiating it with light with a wavelength of 190 to 800 nm for 30 seconds at an exposure intensity of 25 W/cm 2 under 1 atm and 25°C, HPLC ( If the amount of decomposition is determined by a method such as high-performance liquid chromatography and 0.01 mol% or more of primary amine is generated based on the total molar amount of Compound A, Compound A is converted into a primary amine by the action of light. is determined to occur.
  • the amount of the primary amine generated is preferably 0.1 mol% or more, more preferably 0.5 mol% or more.
  • the upper limit of the amount of the primary amine generated is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 1000 mol% or less.
  • the concentration of compound A in the composition A is the same as the concentration in the resin composition, and the type of solvent in the composition is the same as the solvent contained in the resin composition. It can be done. Further, when the resin composition does not contain a solvent, the concentration of compound A in composition A can be about 1.0% by mass with respect to the total mass of composition A, and the solvent type is N-methyl- 2-pyrrolidone and the like can be used.
  • a primary amine preferably an aliphatic primary amine
  • the primary amine is generated by.
  • the lower limit of the temperature at which the primary amine is generated is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of storage stability of the composition, it is preferably, for example, 100° C. or higher.
  • Whether or not a certain compound A generates a primary amine at a certain temperature of X° C. is determined by the following method. After heating 1 mole of Compound A in a closed container under 1 atmosphere at the above-mentioned temperature of If the primary amine is generated, it is determined that Compound A generates a primary amine upon heating at X°C. Whether or not the generated compound is a primary amine is confirmed, for example, by using 1 H-NMR.
  • the amount of the primary amine generated is preferably 0.1 mol or more, more preferably 0.5 mol or more.
  • the upper limit of the amount of the primary amine generated is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 1000 mol or less.
  • compound A When compound A generates a primary amine (preferably an aliphatic primary amine) by the action of a base, compound A has a structure in which the primary amine structure is protected by a base-decomposable protecting group. It is preferable.
  • the base-decomposable protecting group for example, known protecting groups for amino groups that can be deprotected with a base can be used.
  • a group in which a primary amine is protected by such a protecting group a group having a carbamate structure is preferable, and examples include a 9-fluorenylmethyl carbamate group, a 1,1-dimethyl-2-cyanomethyl carbamate group, and a para-nitromethyl carbamate group.
  • Compound A when Compound A has a structure that generates a primary amine under the action of a base, Compound A may also be a compound that generates a primary amine under the action of heat. Whether Compound A generates a primary amine by the action of a base can be determined by the following method. The determination is made by adding a basic compound to a solution of compound A and then titrating to measure the amine value. Specifically, composition A is prepared by dissolving compound A in a solvent, and piperidine or triethylamine is added to composition A at 1 mol/L under 1 atm and 25°C to dissolve compound A.
  • the amount of the primary amine generated is preferably 0.1 mol% or more, more preferably 0.5 mol% or more.
  • the upper limit of the amount of the primary amine generated is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 1000 mol% or less.
  • the amount of the primary amine generated can be measured by titration using a known method to determine the amine value.
  • the concentration of compound A in the composition A is the same as the concentration in the resin composition, and the type of solvent in the composition is the same as the solvent contained in the resin composition. It can be done. Further, when the resin composition does not contain a solvent, the concentration of compound A in composition A can be about 1.0% by mass with respect to the total mass of composition A, and the solvent type is N-methyl- 2-pyrrolidone and the like can be used.
  • the primary amine generated from compound A preferably contains the above-mentioned specific structure a1 or a group represented by formula (1-3). Specific examples of primary amines generated from compound A are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • Compound A is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (A-1).
  • R A is a group represented by any one of formulas (1-1) to (1-4), an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, a pyrimidine ring, a Schiff base group, and a phenolic group.
  • LA represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • R P represents a protecting group for an amino group.
  • R A is preferably a group having the above specific structure a1 or a group represented by formula (1-3); It is also preferable that it is a group represented by: Among these, R A is a group represented by formula (1-1), a group represented by formula (1-2), a group represented by formula (1-3), or a group representing these groups. It is preferably a group having the formula (1-1), a group represented by the formula (1-2), or a group represented by the formula (1-3).
  • L A is preferably a single bond, an alkyleneoxy group, or an alkyleneimino group, and a single bond, an alkyleneoxy group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, or an alkyleneimino group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms. is more preferred, a single bond, an alkyleneoxy group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms, or an alkyleneimino group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms is even more preferred, and a single bond, an ethyleneoxy group, or an ethyleneimino group is particularly preferred.
  • an alkyleneoxy group is a group represented by -RO-
  • an alkyleneimino group is a group represented by -RN(R N )-
  • R represents an alkylene group.
  • R N are as described above.
  • L A is an alkyleneoxy group
  • the oxygen atom contained in the alkyleneoxy group and R A in formula (A-1) bond directly without using a linking group.
  • L A is an alkylene imino group
  • the nitrogen atom contained in the alkylene imino group and R A in formula (A-1) bond directly without using a linking group.
  • R P represents a protecting group for an amino group described in formula (A-1).
  • the protecting group is not particularly limited and includes known protecting groups for amino groups, but a tertiary alkyloxycarbonyl group, an Fmoc group, or a group represented by the above formula (P-1) is preferred; A tertiary alkyloxycarbonyl group or an Fmoc group is more preferred, and a tertiary alkyloxycarbonyl group is even more preferred.
  • Compound A is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (A-2) or formula (A-3).
  • R 7 each independently represents an alkyl group that may have a substituent, a plurality of R 7 may be combined to form a ring structure
  • R 8 is represented by formula ( At least one type selected from the group consisting of a group represented by any one of 1-1) to formula (1-4), an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, a pyrimidine ring, a Schiff base, and a phenolic hydroxyl group.
  • L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • R 9 is a group represented by any one of formulas (1-1) to (1-4), an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, a pyrimidine ring, a Schiff base group, and a phenolic group. It represents an organic group having at least one type of structure selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl groups, and L 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • R 7 is each independently preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and preferably a methyl group. More preferred.
  • the ring structure formed by combining a plurality of R 7s is preferably an aliphatic ring structure, more preferably a saturated aliphatic ring structure, and even more preferably a cyclopentane ring.
  • Preferred embodiments of L 1 and R 8 in formula (A-2) are the same as those of L A and R A in formula (A-1), respectively.
  • Preferred embodiments of L 2 and R 9 in formula (A-3) are the same as those of L A and R A in formula (A-1), respectively.
  • the molecular weight of compound A is preferably 180 to 2,000, more preferably 200 to 1,000, and even more preferably 220 to 800.
  • Compound A can be synthesized, for example, by the method described in Examples below. Further, it may be synthesized using other known synthesis methods, and the synthesis method is not particularly limited.
  • compound A examples include, but are not limited to, F-1 to F-20 used in Examples.
  • the content of compound A based on the total solid content of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 0.02% by mass or more, even more preferably 0.05% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 0.10% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 8% by mass or less, even more preferably 6% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 4% by mass or less.
  • One type of compound A may be used alone, but two or more types may be used in combination. When two or more types are used together, it is preferable that the total amount falls within the above range.
  • the content of compound A relative to 100 parts by mass of the specific resin is preferably 0.05 to 8 parts by mass, more preferably 0.10 to 5 parts by mass.
  • the resin composition of the present invention may contain an organometallic complex from the viewpoint of chemical resistance.
  • the organometallic complex is not particularly limited as long as it is an organic complex compound containing a metal atom, but it is preferably a complex compound containing a metal atom and an organic group, and a compound in which an organic group is coordinated to a metal atom. are more preferred, and metallocene compounds are even more preferred.
  • the metallocene compound refers to an organometallic complex having two cyclopentadienyl anion derivatives which may have substituents as ⁇ 5-ligands.
  • the organic group is not particularly limited, but preferably a hydrocarbon group or a group consisting of a combination of a hydrocarbon group and a heteroatom.
  • a hydrocarbon group As the heteroatom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, and a nitrogen atom are preferable.
  • At least one of the above organic groups is preferably a cyclic group, and more preferably at least two are cyclic groups.
  • the cyclic group is preferably selected from a 5-membered cyclic group and a 6-membered cyclic group, and more preferably a 5-membered cyclic group.
  • the above-mentioned cyclic group may be a hydrocarbon ring or a heterocycle, but a hydrocarbon ring is preferable.
  • As the 5-membered cyclic group a cyclopentadienyl group is preferred.
  • the organometallic complex preferably contains 2 to 4 cyclic groups in one molecule.
  • the metal contained in the organometallic complex is not particularly limited, but it is preferably a metal that falls under Group 4 elements, and more preferably at least one metal selected from the group consisting of titanium, zirconium, and hafnium.
  • at least one metal selected from the group consisting of titanium and zirconium is more preferable, and titanium is particularly preferable.
  • the organometallic complex may contain two or more metal atoms or only one metal atom, but preferably contains only one metal atom.
  • the organometallic complex may contain two or more metal atoms, it may contain only one kind of metal atom, or it may contain two or more kinds of metal atoms.
  • the organometallic complex is preferably a ferrocene compound, a titanocene compound, a zirconocene compound, or a hafnocene compound, more preferably a titanocene compound, a zirconocene compound, or a hafnocene compound, and even more preferably a titanocene compound or a zirconocene compound.
  • titanocene compounds are particularly preferred.
  • the organometallic complex has the ability to initiate photoradical polymerization.
  • having the ability to initiate photoradical polymerization means being able to generate free radicals that can initiate radical polymerization by irradiation with light. For example, when a composition containing a radical cross-linking agent and an organometallic complex is irradiated with light in a wavelength range in which the organometallic complex absorbs light and in which the radical cross-linker does not absorb light, radicals By checking whether the crosslinking agent disappears, it is possible to check whether the photoradical polymerization initiation ability exists.
  • the organometallic complex has the ability to initiate photoradical polymerization
  • the organometallic complex is preferably a metallocene compound, more preferably a titanocene compound, a zirconocene compound, or a hafnocene compound, and preferably a titanocene compound or a zirconocene compound. are more preferred, and titanocene compounds are particularly preferred.
  • the organometallic complex contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of titanocene compounds, tetraalkoxytitanium compounds, titanium acylate compounds, titanium chelate compounds, zirconocene compounds, and hafnocene compounds.
  • the compound is a type of compound, more preferably at least one compound selected from the group consisting of titanocene compounds, zirconocene compounds and hafnocene compounds, and at least one compound selected from the group consisting of titanocene compounds and zirconocene compounds. More preferably, it is a species compound, and particularly preferably a titanocene compound.
  • the molecular weight of the organometallic complex is preferably 50 to 2,000, more preferably 100 to 1,000.
  • each R is independently a substituent.
  • each R is independently selected from an aromatic group, an alkyl group, a halogen atom, and an alkylsulfonyloxy group.
  • the metal atom represented by M in formula (P) is preferably an iron atom, a titanium atom, a zirconium atom, or a hafnium atom, more preferably a titanium atom, a zirconium atom, or a hafnium atom, and even more preferably a titanium atom or a zirconium atom. Atoms are particularly preferred.
  • the aromatic group for R in formula (P) includes an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, such as a phenyl group, a 1-naphthyl group, or , 2-naphthyl group, etc.
  • the alkyl group for R in formula (P) is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, such as a methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, octyl group, isopropyl group. , t-butyl group, isopentyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, 2-methylhexyl group, cyclopentyl group, and the like.
  • Examples of the halogen atom in R include F, Cl, Br, and I.
  • the alkyl group constituting the alkylsulfonyloxy group in R above is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an octyl group, Examples include isopropyl group, t-butyl group, isopentyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, 2-methylhexyl group, and cyclopentyl group.
  • the above R may further have a substituent.
  • substituents include halogen atoms (F, Cl, Br, I), hydroxy groups, carboxy groups, amino groups, cyano groups, aryl groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups, acyl groups, alkoxycarbonyl groups, aryloxy Examples include carbonyl group, acyloxy group, monoalkylamino group, dialkylamino group, monoarylamino group, and diarylamino group.
  • organometallic complexes include, but are not limited to, tetraisopropoxytitanium, tetrakis(2-ethylhexyloxy)titanium, diisopropoxybis(ethylacetoacetate)titanium, diisopropoxybis(acetylacetonato)titanium, Bis( ⁇ 5-2,4-cyclopentadien-1-yl)bis(2,6-difluoro-3-(1H-pyrrol-1-yl)phenyl)titanium, pentamethylcyclopentadienyltitanium trimethoxide, bis ( ⁇ 5-2,4-cyclopentadien-1-yl)bis(2,6-difluorophenyl)titanium and the following compounds may be mentioned.
  • the content of the organometallic complex is preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass based on the total solid content of the resin composition.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 1.0% by mass or more, even more preferably 1.5% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 3.0% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 25% by mass or less.
  • One type or two or more types of organometallic complexes can be used. When two or more types are used, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention contains a polymerizable compound.
  • the resin composition of the present invention contains a photopolymerization initiator and a polymerizable compound, which will be described later.
  • the polymerizable compound include radical crosslinking agents and other crosslinking agents.
  • the resin composition of the present invention contains a radical crosslinking agent.
  • a radical crosslinking agent is a compound having a radically polymerizable group.
  • the radically polymerizable group a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferable.
  • the group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, an allyl group, a vinyl phenyl group, a (meth)acryloyl group, a maleimide group, and a (meth)acrylamide group.
  • (meth)acryloyl group, (meth)acrylamide group, and vinylphenyl group are preferable, and from the viewpoint of reactivity, (meth)acryloyl group is more preferable.
  • the radical crosslinking agent is preferably a compound having one or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds, more preferably a compound having two or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds.
  • the radical crosslinking agent may have three or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds.
  • the compound having two or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds is preferably a compound having 2 to 15 ethylenically unsaturated bonds, more preferably a compound having 2 to 10 ethylenically unsaturated bonds, and more preferably a compound having 2 to 6 ethylenically unsaturated bonds. More preferred are compounds having the following.
  • the resin composition of the present invention contains a compound having two ethylenically unsaturated bonds and a compound having three or more of the above ethylenically unsaturated bonds. It is also preferable.
  • the molecular weight of the radical crosslinking agent is preferably 2,000 or less, more preferably 1,500 or less, and even more preferably 900 or less.
  • the lower limit of the molecular weight of the radical crosslinking agent is preferably 100 or more.
  • radical crosslinking agents include unsaturated carboxylic acids (for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.), their esters, and amides. These are esters of saturated carboxylic acids and polyhydric alcohol compounds, and amides of unsaturated carboxylic acids and polyhydric amine compounds.
  • addition reaction products of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides having nucleophilic substituents such as hydroxy groups, amino groups, and sulfanyl groups with monofunctional or polyfunctional isocyanates or epoxies, and monofunctional or polyfunctional A dehydration condensation reaction product with a functional carboxylic acid is also preferably used.
  • the radical crosslinking agent is also preferably a compound having a boiling point of 100°C or higher under normal pressure.
  • Examples of the compound having a boiling point of 100° C. or higher under normal pressure include the compounds described in paragraph 0203 of International Publication No. 2021/112189. This content is incorporated herein.
  • Preferred radical crosslinking agents other than those mentioned above include radically polymerizable compounds described in paragraphs 0204 to 0208 of International Publication No. 2021/112189. This content is incorporated herein.
  • radical crosslinking agents examples include dipentaerythritol triacrylate (commercially available product: KAYARAD D-330 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.)), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (commercially available product: KAYARAD D-320 (made by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) Co., Ltd.), A-TMMT (Shin Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.)), dipentaerythritol penta(meth)acrylate (commercially available products include KAYARAD D-310 (Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.)), dipenta Erythritol hexa(meth)acrylate (commercially available products are KAYARAD DPHA (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and A-DPH (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)), and these (meth)acryloyl groups are ethylene glyco
  • radical crosslinking agents include, for example, SR-494, which is a tetrafunctional acrylate with four ethyleneoxy chains, and SR-209, 231, and 239, which are difunctional methacrylates with four ethyleneoxy chains (all of which are sold by Sartomer Co., Ltd.). (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), DPCA-60, a hexafunctional acrylate with six pentyleneoxy chains, TPA-330, a trifunctional acrylate with three isobutyleneoxy chains (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), and urethane oligomers.
  • SR-494 which is a tetrafunctional acrylate with four ethyleneoxy chains
  • SR-209, 231, and 239 which are difunctional methacrylates with four ethyleneoxy chains (all of which are sold by Sartomer Co., Ltd.).
  • DPCA-60 a hexafunctional acrylate with six penty
  • urethane acrylates as described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 48-041708, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 51-037193, Japanese Patent Publication No. 02-032293, and Japanese Patent Publication No. 02-016765, Urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide skeleton described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 58-049860, Japanese Patent Publication No. 56-017654, Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-039417, and Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-039418 are also suitable.
  • radical crosslinking agent compounds having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in the molecule, which are described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A-01-105238, can also be used. can.
  • the radical crosslinking agent may be a radical crosslinking agent having an acid group such as a carboxy group or a phosphoric acid group.
  • the radical crosslinking agent having an acid group is preferably an ester of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid, and the unreacted hydroxy group of the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is reacted with a non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride to form an acid group.
  • a radical crosslinking agent having the following is more preferable.
  • the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is pentaerythritol or dipentaerythritol. It is a compound that is Commercially available products include, for example, polybasic acid-modified acrylic oligomers manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd., such as M-510 and M-520.
  • the acid value of the radical crosslinking agent having an acid group is preferably 0.1 to 300 mgKOH/g, more preferably 1 to 100 mgKOH/g. If the acid value of the radical crosslinking agent is within the above range, it will have excellent handling properties during production and excellent developability. Moreover, it has good polymerizability. The above acid value is measured in accordance with the description of JIS K 0070:1992.
  • bifunctional methacrylate or acrylate as the resin composition from the viewpoint of pattern resolution and film stretchability.
  • Specific compounds include triethylene glycol diacrylate, triethylene glycol dimethacrylate, tetraethylene glycol dimethacrylate, tetraethylene glycol diacrylate, PEG (polyethylene glycol) 200 diacrylate, PEG 200 dimethacrylate, PEG 600 diacrylate, and PEG 600 diacrylate.
  • PEG200 diacrylate refers to polyethylene glycol diacrylate in which the formula weight of polyethylene glycol chains is about 200.
  • a monofunctional radical crosslinking agent can be preferably used as the radical crosslinking agent from the viewpoint of suppressing warpage of the pattern (cured product).
  • monofunctional radical crosslinking agents include n-butyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, butoxyethyl (meth)acrylate, carbitol (meth)acrylate, and cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate.
  • (meth)acrylate benzyl (meth)acrylate, phenoxyethyl (meth)acrylate, N-methylol (meth)acrylamide, glycidyl (meth)acrylate, polyethylene glycol mono(meth)acrylate, polypropylene glycol mono(meth)acrylate, etc.
  • Acrylic acid derivatives, N-vinyl compounds such as N-vinylpyrrolidone and N-vinylcaprolactam, allyl glycidyl ether, and the like are preferably used.
  • the monofunctional radical crosslinking agent a compound having a boiling point of 100° C. or higher at normal pressure is also preferred in order to suppress volatilization before exposure.
  • examples of the radical crosslinking agent having two or more functional groups include allyl compounds such as diallyl phthalate and triallyl trimellitate.
  • the content of the radical crosslinking agent is preferably more than 0% by mass and 60% by mass or less based on the total solid content of the resin composition.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 5% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 50% by mass or less, and even more preferably 30% by mass or less.
  • One type of radical crosslinking agent may be used alone, or a mixture of two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used together, it is preferable that the total amount falls within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention contains another crosslinking agent different from the above-mentioned radical crosslinking agent.
  • Other crosslinking agents refer to crosslinking agents other than the above-mentioned radical crosslinking agents, and the above-mentioned photoacid generators or photobase generators are photosensitive to other compounds in the composition or their reaction products.
  • the compound has a plurality of groups in its molecule that promote the reaction of forming a covalent bond between the compounds, and the reaction of forming a covalent bond with other compounds in the composition or the reaction products thereof is preferably Compounds having multiple groups in the molecule that are promoted by the action of acids or bases are preferred.
  • the acid or base is preferably an acid or base generated from a photoacid generator or a photobase generator in the exposure step.
  • Other crosslinking agents include compounds described in paragraphs 0179 to 0207 of International Publication No. 2022/145355. The above description is incorporated herein.
  • the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a polymerization initiator.
  • the polymerization initiator may be a thermal polymerization initiator or a photopolymerization initiator, but it is particularly preferable to include a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is preferably a radical photopolymerization initiator.
  • the photoradical polymerization initiator is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from known photoradical polymerization initiators. For example, a photoradical polymerization initiator that is sensitive to light in the ultraviolet to visible range is preferable. Alternatively, it may be an activator that acts with a photoexcited sensitizer to generate active radicals.
  • the photoradical polymerization initiator contains at least one compound having a molar absorption coefficient of at least about 50 L ⁇ mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 within the wavelength range of about 240 to 800 nm (preferably 330 to 500 nm). It is preferable.
  • the molar extinction coefficient of a compound can be measured using a known method. For example, it is preferable to measure at a concentration of 0.01 g/L using an ethyl acetate solvent with an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer (Cary-5 spectrophotometer manufactured by Varian).
  • any known compound can be used.
  • halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives e.g., compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, compounds having a trihalomethyl group, etc.
  • acylphosphine compounds such as acylphosphine oxide, hexaarylbiimidazole, oxime derivatives, etc.
  • oxime compounds organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ketooxime ethers, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds such as aminoacetophenone, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds such as hydroxyacetophenone, azo compounds, azide compounds, Examples include metallocene compounds, organic boron compounds, iron arene complexes, and the like.
  • JP2016-027357A and paragraphs 0138 to 0151 of International Publication No. 2015/199219 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
  • ketone compound examples include compounds described in paragraph 0087 of JP-A-2015-087611, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • Kayacure-DETX-S manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. is also suitably used.
  • a hydroxyacetophenone compound, an aminoacetophenone compound, and an acylphosphine compound can be suitably used as the photoradical polymerization initiator. More specifically, for example, the aminoacetophenone-based initiator described in JP-A-10-291969 and the acylphosphine oxide-based initiator described in Japanese Patent No. 4225898 can be used, the content of which is herein incorporated by reference. Incorporated.
  • ⁇ -hydroxyketone initiators examples include Omnirad 184, Omnirad 1173, Omnirad 2959, Omnirad 127 (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), IRGACURE 184 (IRGACURE is a registered trademark), DA ROCUR 1173, IRGACURE 500, IRGACURE -2959 and IRGACURE 127 (manufactured by BASF) can be used.
  • ⁇ -aminoketone initiators examples include Omnirad 907, Omnirad 369, Omnirad 369E, Omnirad 379EG (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), IRGACURE 907, IRGACURE 369. , and IRGACURE 379 (manufactured by BASF) can be used.
  • aminoacetophenone initiator the acylphosphine oxide initiator, and the metallocene compound, for example, the compounds described in paragraphs 0161 to 0163 of International Publication No. 2021/112189 can also be suitably used. This content is incorporated herein.
  • photoradical polymerization initiator include oxime compounds.
  • an oxime compound By using an oxime compound, it becomes possible to improve exposure latitude more effectively.
  • Oxime compounds are particularly preferred because they have a wide exposure latitude (exposure margin) and also act as photocuring accelerators.
  • oxime compounds include compounds described in JP-A-2001-233842, compounds described in JP-A 2000-080068, compounds described in JP-A 2006-342166, J. C. S. Perkin II (1979, pp. 1653-1660); C. S. Compounds described in Perkin II (1979, pp. 156-162), compounds described in Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995, pp. 202-232), JP-A-2000-0 Compounds described in Publication No. 66385, Compounds described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2004-534797, compounds described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-019766, compounds described in Patent No. 6065596, compounds described in International Publication No. 2015/152153, International Publication No.
  • Preferred oxime compounds include, for example, compounds with the following structures, 3-(benzoyloxy(imino))butan-2-one, 3-(acetoxy(imino))butan-2-one, 3-(propionyloxy( imino))butan-2-one, 2-(acetoxy(imino))pentan-3-one, 2-(acetoxy(imino))-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-(benzoyloxy(imino)) -1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3-((4-toluenesulfonyloxy)imino)butan-2-one, and 2-(ethoxycarbonyloxy(imino))-1-phenylpropan-1-one, etc.
  • an oxime compound as a photoradical polymerization initiator.
  • oxime compounds include IRGACURE OXE 01, IRGACURE OXE 02, IRGACURE OXE 03, IRGACURE OXE 04 (manufactured by BASF), and ADEKA Optomer N-1919 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation, JP-A-2012-014052).
  • Examples of the photoradical polymerization initiator include oxime compounds having a fluorene ring described in paragraphs 0169 to 0171 of International Publication No. 2021/112189, and oximes having a skeleton in which at least one benzene ring of a carbazole ring is a naphthalene ring.
  • Compounds, oxime compounds having a fluorine atom can also be used.
  • an oxime compound having a nitro group, an oxime compound having a benzofuran skeleton, and an oxime compound having a substituent having a hydroxy group bonded to a carbazole skeleton described in paragraphs 0208 to 0210 of International Publication No. 2021/020359 may be used. You can also do it. Their contents are incorporated herein.
  • oxime compound OX an oxime compound having an aromatic ring group Ar OX1 (hereinafter also referred to as oxime compound OX) in which an electron-withdrawing group is introduced into the aromatic ring.
  • Examples of the electron-withdrawing group possessed by the aromatic ring group Ar OX1 include an acyl group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, an alkylsulfinyl group, an arylsulfinyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, and a cyano group,
  • An acyl group and a nitro group are preferred, an acyl group is more preferred because a film with excellent light resistance can be easily formed, and a benzoyl group is even more preferred.
  • the benzoyl group may have a substituent.
  • substituents include halogen atoms, cyano groups, nitro groups, hydroxy groups, alkyl groups, alkoxy groups, aryl groups, aryloxy groups, heterocyclic groups, heterocyclic oxy groups, alkenyl groups, alkylsulfanyl groups, arylsulfanyl groups, It is preferably an acyl group or an amino group, and more preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclicoxy group, an alkylsulfanyl group, an arylsulfanyl group, or an amino group. More preferably, it is a sulfanyl group or an amino group.
  • the oxime compound OX is preferably at least one selected from a compound represented by formula (OX1) and a compound represented by formula (OX2), and more preferably a compound represented by formula (OX2). preferable.
  • R X3 to R X14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent. However, at least one of R X10 to R X14 is an electron-withdrawing group.
  • R X12 is preferably an electron-withdrawing group
  • R X10 , R X11 , R X13 , and R X14 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
  • oxime compound OX examples include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0083 to 0105 of Japanese Patent No. 4,600,600, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • Particularly preferable oxime compounds include oxime compounds having a specific substituent group as shown in JP-A No. 2007-269779, and oxime compounds having a thioaryl group as shown in JP-A No. 2009-191061. Incorporated herein.
  • photoradical polymerization initiators include trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyl dimethyl ketal compounds, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, and triaryl compounds. selected from the group consisting of imidazole dimers, onium salt compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds and derivatives thereof, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes and salts thereof, halomethyloxadiazole compounds, and 3-aryl substituted coumarin compounds.
  • Compounds such as
  • the photoradical polymerization initiator is a trihalomethyltriazine compound, an ⁇ -aminoketone compound, an acylphosphine compound, a phosphine oxide compound, a metallocene compound, an oxime compound, a triarylimidazole dimer, an onium salt compound, a benzophenone compound, an acetophenone compound, At least one compound selected from the group consisting of trihalomethyltriazine compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triarylimidazole dimers, and benzophenone compounds is more preferred, and metallocene compounds or oxime compounds are even more preferred.
  • a difunctional, trifunctional or more functional photoradical polymerization initiator may be used as the photoradical polymerization initiator.
  • a radical photopolymerization initiator two or more radicals are generated from one molecule of the radical photopolymerization initiator, so that good sensitivity can be obtained.
  • the crystallinity decreases and the solubility in solvents improves, making it difficult to precipitate over time, thereby improving the stability of the resin composition over time.
  • Specific examples of bifunctional or trifunctional or more functional photoradical polymerization initiators include those listed in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2010-527339, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2011-524436, International Publication No.
  • the resin composition contains a photopolymerization initiator
  • its content is preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass, and 0.5% by mass based on the total solid content of the resin composition. It is more preferably from 1.0 to 10% by weight, and even more preferably from 1.0 to 10% by weight.
  • the photopolymerization initiator may contain only one type, or may contain two or more types. When containing two or more types of photopolymerization initiators, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range. Note that since the photopolymerization initiator may also function as a thermal polymerization initiator, crosslinking by the photopolymerization initiator may be further promoted by heating with an oven, a hot plate, or the like.
  • the resin composition may contain a sensitizer.
  • a sensitizer absorbs specific actinic radiation and becomes electronically excited.
  • the sensitizer in an electronically excited state comes into contact with a thermal radical polymerization initiator, a photoradical polymerization initiator, etc., and effects such as electron transfer, energy transfer, and heat generation occur.
  • the thermal radical polymerization initiator and the photo radical polymerization initiator undergo a chemical change and are decomposed to generate radicals, acids, or bases.
  • Usable sensitizers include benzophenone series, Michler's ketone series, coumarin series, pyrazole azo series, anilinoazo series, triphenylmethane series, anthraquinone series, anthracene series, anthrapyridone series, benzylidene series, oxonol series, and pyrazolotriazole azo series.
  • pyridone azo type cyanine type, phenothiazine type, pyrrolopyrazole azomethine type, xanthene type, phthalocyanine type, penzopyran type, indigo type and the like can be used.
  • sensitizer examples include Michler's ketone, 4,4'-bis(diethylamino)benzophenone, 2,5-bis(4'-diethylaminobenzal)cyclopentane, 2,6-bis(4'-diethylaminobenzal) Cyclohexanone, 2,6-bis(4'-diethylaminobenzal)-4-methylcyclohexanone, 4,4'-bis(dimethylamino)chalcone, 4,4'-bis(diethylamino)chalcone, p-dimethylaminocinnamyl Denindanone, p-dimethylaminobenzylideneindanone, 2-(p-dimethylaminophenylbiphenylene)-benzothiazole, 2-(p-dimethylaminophenylvinylene)benzothiazole, 2-(p-dimethylaminophenylvinylene)iso Naphthothiazole, 1,3-
  • the content of the sensitizer is preferably 0.01 to 20% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 15% by mass, based on the total solid content of the resin composition. More preferably 0.5 to 10% by mass.
  • the sensitizers may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the resin composition of the present invention may contain a chain transfer agent.
  • Chain transfer agents are defined, for example, in the Polymer Dictionary, 3rd edition (edited by the Society of Polymer Science and Technology, 2005), pages 683-684.
  • Examples of chain transfer agents include compounds having -S-S-, -SO 2 -S-, -N-O-, SH, PH, SiH, and GeH in the molecule, and RAFT (Reversible Addition Fragmentation chain Transfer).
  • Dithiobenzoate, trithiocarbonate, dithiocarbamate, xanthate compounds and the like having a thiocarbonylthio group used in polymerization are used. These can generate radicals by donating hydrogen to low-activity radicals, or can generate radicals by being oxidized and then deprotonated.
  • thiol compounds can be preferably used.
  • the content of the chain transfer agent is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass, and 0.1 to 10 parts by mass based on 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the resin composition. More preferably, 0.5 to 5 parts by mass is even more preferred.
  • the number of chain transfer agents may be one, or two or more. When there are two or more types of chain transfer agents, it is preferable that the total is within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention may also contain a base generator.
  • the base generator is a compound that can generate a base by physical or chemical action.
  • Preferred base generators include thermal base generators and photobase generators.
  • the resin composition contains a base generator.
  • the resin composition contains a thermal base generator, the cyclization reaction of the precursor can be promoted by heating, for example, and the cured product has good mechanical properties and chemical resistance. The performance as an interlayer insulating film for wiring layers is improved.
  • the base generator may be an ionic base generator or a nonionic base generator. Examples of the base generated from the base generator include secondary amines and tertiary amines.
  • the base generator is not particularly limited, and any known base generator can be used.
  • Known base generators include, for example, carbamoyloxime compounds, carbamoylhydroxylamine compounds, carbamic acid compounds, formamide compounds, acetamide compounds, carbamate compounds, benzyl carbamate compounds, nitrobenzyl carbamate compounds, sulfonamide compounds, imidazole derivative compounds, and amine imides. compounds, pyridine derivative compounds, ⁇ -aminoacetophenone derivative compounds, quaternary ammonium salt derivative compounds, iminium salts, pyridinium salts, ⁇ -lactone ring derivative compounds, amine imide compounds, phthalimide derivative compounds, acyloxyimino compounds, and the like.
  • Specific examples of nonionic base generators include compounds described in paragraphs 0249 to 0275 of International Publication No. 2022/145355. The above description is incorporated herein.
  • Examples of the base generator include, but are not limited to, the following compounds.
  • the molecular weight of the nonionic base generator is preferably 800 or less, more preferably 600 or less, and even more preferably 500 or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 100 or more, more preferably 200 or more, and even more preferably 300 or more.
  • Specific preferred compounds of the ionic base generator include, for example, the compounds described in paragraph numbers 0148 to 0163 of International Publication No. 2018/038002.
  • ammonium salts include, but are not limited to, the following compounds.
  • iminium salts include, but are not limited to, the following compounds.
  • the content of the base generator is preferably 0.1 to 50 parts by weight based on 100 parts by weight of the resin in the resin composition.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 0.3 parts by mass or more, and even more preferably 0.5 parts by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 30 parts by mass or less, even more preferably 20 parts by mass or less, even more preferably 10 parts by mass or less, even more preferably 5 parts by mass or less, and particularly preferably 4 parts by mass or less.
  • One type or two or more types of base generators can be used. When two or more types are used, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a solvent. Any known solvent can be used as the solvent.
  • the solvent is preferably an organic solvent. Examples of the organic solvent include compounds such as esters, ethers, ketones, cyclic hydrocarbons, sulfoxides, amides, ureas, and alcohols.
  • esters include ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, hexyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, ⁇ -butyrolactone.
  • alkyloxyacetates e.g., methyl alkyloxyacetate, ethyl alkyloxyacetate, butyl alkyloxyacetate (e.g., methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate) , methyl ethoxy acetate, ethyl ethoxy acetate, etc.
  • 3-alkyloxypropionate alkyl esters e.g., methyl 3-alkyloxypropionate, ethyl 3-alkyloxypropionate, etc.
  • alkyl 2-alkyloxypropionate esters e.g., methyl 2-alkyloxypropionate, 2-alkyloxypropionate
  • propyl 2-alkyloxypropionate etc.
  • Methyl 2-alkyloxy-2-methylpropionate and ethyl 2-alkyloxy-2-methylpropionate for example, methyl 2-methoxy-2-methylpropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxy-2-methylpropionate, etc.
  • Methyl pyruvate, ethyl pyruvate, propyl pyruvate, methyl acetoacetate, ethyl acetoacetate, methyl 2-oxobutanoate, ethyl 2-oxobutanoate, ethyl hexanoate, ethyl heptanoate, dimethyl malonate, diethyl malonate, etc. are preferred. It is mentioned as something.
  • ethers include ethylene glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, diethylene glycol ethyl methyl ether, diethylene glycol butyl methyl ether, triethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetraethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, Methyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol dimethyl ether, propylene glycol dimethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, ethylene glycol Suitable examples include monobutyl ether acetate
  • Suitable ketones include, for example, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, 2-heptanone, 3-heptanone, 3-methylcyclohexanone, levoglucosenone, dihydrolevoglucosenone, and the like.
  • Suitable examples of cyclic hydrocarbons include aromatic hydrocarbons such as toluene, xylene, and anisole, and cyclic terpenes such as limonene.
  • Suitable examples of sulfoxides include dimethyl sulfoxide.
  • Amides include N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-ethyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-cyclohexyl-2-pyrrolidone, N,N-dimethylacetamide, N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylisobutyramide, Preferred examples include 3-methoxy-N,N-dimethylpropionamide, 3-butoxy-N,N-dimethylpropionamide, N-formylmorpholine, and N-acetylmorpholine.
  • Suitable ureas include N,N,N',N'-tetramethylurea, 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinone, and the like.
  • Alcohols include methanol, ethanol, 1-propanol, 2-propanol, 1-butanol, 1-pentanol, 1-hexanol, benzyl alcohol, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, 1-methoxy-2-propanol, 2-ethoxyethanol, Diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monohexyl ether, triethylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monoethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether, polypropylene glycol, tetraethylene glycol, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, ethylene glycol monobenzyl ether, Examples include ethylene glycol monophenyl ether, methylphenyl carbinol, n-amyl alcohol, methyl amyl alcohol, and diacetone alcohol.
  • solvent selected from methyl ether acetate, levoglucosenone, and dihydrolevoglucosenone, or a mixed solvent composed of two or more types is preferable.
  • Particularly preferred is the combination of amide, ⁇ -butyrolactone and dimethyl sulfoxide, or the combination of N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and ethyl lactate.
  • toluene is further added to the solvent used in combination in an amount of about 1 to 10% by mass based on the total mass of the solvent.
  • an embodiment containing ⁇ -valerolactone as a solvent is also one of the preferred embodiments of the present invention.
  • the content of ⁇ -valerolactone based on the total mass of the solvent is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 60% by mass or more, and still more preferably 70% by mass or more. preferable.
  • the upper limit of the content is not particularly limited and may be 100% by mass. The above content may be determined in consideration of the solubility of components such as the specific resin contained in the resin composition.
  • dimethyl sulfoxide and ⁇ -valerolactone when dimethyl sulfoxide and ⁇ -valerolactone are used together, it is preferable to contain 60 to 90% by mass of ⁇ -valerolactone and 10 to 40% by mass of dimethyl sulfoxide, based on the total mass of the solvent. It is more preferable to contain ⁇ 90% by mass of ⁇ -valerolactone and 10 to 30% by mass of dimethyl sulfoxide, and more preferably to contain 75 to 85% by mass of ⁇ -valerolactone and 15 to 25% by mass of dimethyl sulfoxide. More preferred.
  • the content of the solvent is preferably such that the total solids concentration of the resin composition of the present invention is 5 to 80% by mass, and preferably 5 to 75% by mass. More preferably, the amount is 10 to 70% by mass, and even more preferably 20 to 70% by mass.
  • the solvent content may be adjusted depending on the desired thickness of the coating and the application method. When two or more types of solvents are contained, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a metal adhesion improver from the viewpoint of improving adhesion to metal materials used for electrodes, wiring, etc.
  • metal adhesion improvers include silane coupling agents having alkoxysilyl groups, aluminum adhesion aids, titanium adhesion aids, compounds having a sulfonamide structure and thiourea structure, phosphoric acid derivative compounds, and ⁇ -keto esters. compounds, amino compounds, etc.
  • silane coupling agent examples include the compounds described in paragraph 0316 of International Publication No. 2021/112189 and the compounds described in paragraphs 0067 to 0078 of JP 2018-173573, the contents of which are not included herein. Incorporated. It is also preferable to use two or more different silane coupling agents as described in paragraphs 0050 to 0058 of JP-A-2011-128358. It is also preferable to use the following compounds as the silane coupling agent. In the following formula, Me represents a methyl group and Et represents an ethyl group. Further, the following R includes a structure derived from a blocking agent in a blocked isocyanate group.
  • the blocking agent may be selected depending on the desorption temperature, and includes alcohol compounds, phenol compounds, pyrazole compounds, triazole compounds, lactam compounds, active methylene compounds, and the like. For example, from the viewpoint of desiring a desorption temperature of 160 to 180°C, caprolactam and the like are preferred. Commercially available products of such compounds include X-12-1293 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.).
  • silane coupling agents examples include vinyltrimethoxysilane, vinyltriethoxysilane, 2-(3,4-epoxycyclohexyl)ethyltrimethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropylmethyldimethoxysilane, and 3-glycidoxypropylmethyldimethoxysilane.
  • an oligomer type compound having a plurality of alkoxysilyl groups can also be used as the silane coupling agent.
  • examples of such oligomer type compounds include compounds containing a repeating unit represented by the following formula (S-1).
  • R S1 represents a monovalent organic group
  • R S2 represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, or an alkoxy group
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 2.
  • R S1 preferably has a structure containing a polymerizable group.
  • Examples of the polymerizable group include a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, a benzoxazolyl group, a blocked isocyanate group, and an amino group.
  • Examples of the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, an allyl group, an isoallyl group, a 2-methylallyl group, a group having an aromatic ring directly bonded to a vinyl group (for example, a vinyl phenyl group, etc.), and a (meth)acrylamide group.
  • R S2 is preferably an alkoxy group, more preferably a methoxy group or an ethoxy group.
  • n represents an integer from 0 to 2, preferably 1.
  • n is 1 or 2 in at least one of the plurality of repeating units represented by formula (S-1) contained in the oligomer type compound, and n is 1 or 2 in at least two. More preferably, n is 2, and even more preferably n is 1 in at least two cases.
  • Commercially available products can be used as such oligomer type compounds, and examples of commercially available products include KR-513 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.).
  • Aluminum-based adhesion aid examples include aluminum tris (ethyl acetoacetate), aluminum tris (acetylacetonate), ethylacetoacetate aluminum diisopropylate, and the like.
  • the content of the metal adhesion improver is preferably 0.01 to 30 parts by weight, more preferably 0.1 to 10 parts by weight, and even more preferably 0.5 to 5 parts by weight, based on 100 parts by weight of the specific resin.
  • the content of the metal adhesion improver is preferably 0.01 to 30 parts by weight, more preferably 0.1 to 10 parts by weight, and even more preferably 0.5 to 5 parts by weight, based on 100 parts by weight of the specific resin.
  • the resin composition of the present invention further contains an aromatic heterocyclic compound different from the compound A described above.
  • Such compounds include migration inhibitors.
  • the resin composition of the present invention further contains a migration inhibitor.
  • a migration inhibitor for example, when a resin composition is applied to a metal layer (or metal wiring) to form a film, metal ions derived from the metal layer (or metal wiring) may migrate into the film. can be effectively suppressed.
  • the compound corresponding to the above-mentioned compound A does not correspond to a migration inhibitor.
  • Migration inhibitors are not particularly limited, but include heterocycles (pyrrole ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, imidazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyrazole ring, isoxazole ring, isothiazole ring, tetrazole ring, pyridine ring) , pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, piperidine ring, piperazine ring, morpholine ring, 2H-pyran ring and 6H-pyran ring, triazine ring), compounds having thioureas and sulfanyl groups, hindered phenol type compounds, salicylic acid derivative compounds, and hydrazide derivative compounds.
  • heterocycles pyrrole ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, imidazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyrazole
  • triazole compounds such as 1,2,4-triazole, benzotriazole, 3-amino-1,2,4-triazole, 3,5-diamino-1,2,4-triazole, 1H-tetrazole, 5- Tetrazole compounds such as phenyltetrazole and 5-amino-1H-tetrazole can be preferably used.
  • an ion trapping agent that traps anions such as halogen ions can also be used.
  • Other migration inhibitors include the rust inhibitors described in paragraph 0094 of JP-A-2013-015701, the compounds described in paragraphs 0073 to 0076 of JP-A-2009-283711, and the compounds described in JP-A-2011-059656.
  • Compounds described in paragraph 0052, compounds described in paragraphs 0114, 0116, and 0118 of JP 2012-194520, compounds described in paragraph 0166 of WO 2015/199219, etc. can be used, and the contents thereof is incorporated herein.
  • migration inhibitors include the following compounds.
  • the content of the migration inhibitor is preferably 0.01 to 5.0% by mass, and 0.01 to 5.0% by mass based on the total solid content of the resin composition.
  • the amount is more preferably 0.05 to 2.0% by weight, and even more preferably 0.1 to 1.0% by weight.
  • Only one type of migration inhibitor may be used, or two or more types may be used. When there are two or more types of migration inhibitors, it is preferable that the total is within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention contains a polymerization inhibitor.
  • the polymerization inhibitor include phenolic compounds, quinone compounds, amino compounds, N-oxyl free radical compounds, nitro compounds, nitroso compounds, heteroaromatic compounds, and metal compounds.
  • Specific compounds of the polymerization inhibitor include the compound described in paragraph 0310 of International Publication No. 2021/112189, p-hydroquinone, o-hydroquinone, 4-hydroxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1- Examples include oxyl free radical, phenoxazine, 1,4,4-trimethyl-2,3-diazabicyclo[3.2.2]non-2-ene-N,N-dioxide, and the like. This content is incorporated herein.
  • the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01 to 20% by mass, and 0.02 to 20% by mass based on the total solid content of the resin composition. It is more preferably 15% by mass, and even more preferably 0.05 to 10% by mass.
  • Only one type of polymerization inhibitor may be used, or two or more types may be used. When there are two or more types of polymerization inhibitors, it is preferable that the total is within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention contains a compound (light absorber) whose absorbance at the exposure wavelength decreases upon exposure.
  • Whether or not a certain compound a contained in the resin composition corresponds to a light absorber can be determined by the following method. First, a solution of compound a with the same concentration as that contained in the resin composition is prepared, and the molar extinction coefficient (mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ L ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 , also referred to as “molar extinction coefficient 1”) of compound a at the wavelength of exposure light is determined. ). The above measurement is performed quickly so as to minimize the influence of changes such as a decrease in the molar extinction coefficient of compound a.
  • the solvent in the above solution when the resin composition contains a solvent, that solvent is used, and when the resin composition does not contain a solvent, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone is used.
  • the solution of compound a is irradiated with exposure light.
  • the exposure amount is 500 mJ as an integrated amount for 1 mol of compound a.
  • the molar extinction coefficient (mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ L ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 , also referred to as “molar extinction coefficient 2”) of compound a at the wavelength of the exposure light is measured.
  • the attenuation rate is preferably 10% or more, more preferably 20% or more.
  • the lower limit of the above-mentioned attenuation rate is not particularly limited, and may be 0% or more.
  • the wavelength of the exposure light may be any wavelength at which the photosensitive film is exposed. Further, the wavelength of the exposure light is preferably a wavelength to which the photopolymerization initiator contained in the resin composition is sensitive.
  • a photopolymerization initiator having sensitivity to a certain wavelength means that a polymerization initiation species is generated when the photopolymerization initiator is exposed to light at a certain wavelength.
  • the wavelength of the exposure light is (1) semiconductor laser (wavelength: 830 nm, 532 nm, 488 nm, 405 nm, 375 nm, 355 nm, etc.), (2) metal halide lamp, (3) high pressure mercury lamp, G-line (wavelength 436nm), H-line (wavelength 405nm), I-line (wavelength 365nm), Broad (3 wavelengths of g, h, i-line), (4) Excimer laser, KrF excimer laser (wavelength 248nm), ArF excimer Laser (wavelength 193 nm), F2 excimer laser (wavelength 157 nm), (5) Extreme ultraviolet light; EUV (wavelength 13.6 nm), (6) Electron beam, (7) YAG laser second harmonic 532 nm, third harmonic Examples include 355 nm.
  • the wavelength of the exposure light may be selected, for example, from a wavelength to which the photopolymerization initiator is sensitive, preferably the h-line (wavelength: 405 nm) or the i-line (wavelength: 365 nm), and more preferably the i-line (wavelength: 365 nm).
  • the light absorber may be a compound that generates radical polymerization initiation species upon exposure to light, but from the viewpoint of resolution and chemical resistance, it is preferably a compound that does not generate radical polymerization initiation species upon exposure. Whether the light absorber is a compound that generates radical polymerization initiating species upon exposure to light is determined by the following method. A solution containing a light absorber and a radical crosslinking agent at the same concentration as that contained in the resin composition is prepared. When the resin composition contains a radical crosslinking agent, the same compound as the radical crosslinking agent contained in the resin composition is used at the same concentration as the radical crosslinking agent in the solution.
  • the resin composition does not contain a radical crosslinker, methyl methacrylate is used at a concentration five times that of the light absorber. After that, exposure light is irradiated. The exposure amount is 500 mJ as an integrated amount.
  • the polymerization of the polymerizable compound is determined by, for example, high performance liquid chromatography, and if the ratio of the molar amount of the polymerizable compound to the total molar amount of the polymerizable compound is 10% or less, it is determined that the light absorber is It is determined that the compound does not generate radical polymerization initiation species upon exposure to light.
  • the molar amount ratio is preferably 5% or less, more preferably 3% or less.
  • the lower limit of the above molar amount ratio is not particularly limited, and may be 0%.
  • the wavelength of the exposure light may be any wavelength at which the photosensitive film is exposed. Further, the wavelength of the exposure light is preferably a wavelength to which the photopolymerization initiator contained in the resin composition is sensitive.
  • Examples of the compound that generates a radical polymerization initiator upon exposure to light include the same compounds as the above-mentioned photoradical polymerization initiators.
  • the composition contains a photoradical polymerization initiator as a light absorber
  • the one having the lowest ability to initiate polymerization of the generated radical species is the light absorber
  • the others are the photopolymerization initiators.
  • Examples of compounds that do not generate radical polymerization initiation species upon exposure include photoacid generators, photobase generators, and dyes whose absorption wavelength changes upon exposure.
  • the light absorber is preferably a naphthoquinone diazide compound or a dye whose absorbance changes upon exposure, and more preferably a naphthoquinone diazide compound. It is also conceivable to use a combination of a photoacid generator or a photobase generator and a compound whose absorbance at the exposure wavelength decreases depending on the pH, as the light absorber.
  • Naphthoquinonediazide compound examples include compounds that produce indenecarboxylic acid upon exposure and have a low absorbance at the exposure wavelength, and compounds having a 1,2-naphthoquinonediazide structure are preferred.
  • the naphthoquinone diazide compound is preferably a naphthoquinone diazide sulfonic acid ester of a hydroxy compound.
  • compounds represented by any of the following formulas (H1) to (H6) are preferred.
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a monovalent organic group
  • R 3 and R 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group
  • n1, n2, m1 and m2 are each independently an integer of 0 to 5
  • at least one of m1 and m2 is an integer of 1 to 5.
  • Z represents a tetravalent organic group
  • L 1 , L 2 , L 3 and L 4 each independently represent a single bond or a divalent organic group
  • R 5 , R 6 , R 7 and R8 each independently represent a monovalent organic group
  • n3, n4, n5 and n6 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 3
  • m3, m4, m5 and m6 each independently represent 0 ⁇ 2, and at least one of m3, m4, m5, and m6 is 1 or 2.
  • R 9 and R 10 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group
  • L 5 each independently represents a divalent organic group
  • n7 represents an integer from 3 to 8. represent.
  • L 6 represents a divalent organic group
  • L 7 and L 8 each independently represent a divalent organic group containing an aliphatic tertiary or quaternary carbon.
  • R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , R 14 , R 15 , R 16 , R 17 , R 18 , R 19 and R 20 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or a monovalent organic represents a group
  • L 9 , L 10 and L 11 each independently represent a single bond or a divalent organic group
  • m7, m8, m9, m10 each independently represent an integer from 0 to 2, m7, At least one of m8, m9, and m10 is 1 or 2.
  • R 42 , R 43 , R 44 , and R 45 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group
  • R 46 and R 47 each independently represent a monovalent organic group.
  • n16 and n17 each independently represent an integer from 0 to 4
  • m11 and m12 each independently represent an integer from 0 to 4
  • at least one of m11 and m12 is an integer from 1 to 4. be.
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently preferably a monovalent organic group having 1 to 60 carbon atoms, more preferably a monovalent organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the monovalent organic group in R 1 and R 2 include a hydrocarbon group that may have a substituent, such as an aromatic hydrocarbon group that may have a substituent such as a hydroxy group. Can be mentioned.
  • R 3 and R 4 are each independently preferably a monovalent organic group having 1 to 60 carbon atoms, more preferably a monovalent organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. .
  • Examples of the monovalent organic group in R 3 and R 4 include a hydrocarbon group that may have a substituent, such as a hydrocarbon group that may have a substituent such as a hydroxy group.
  • n1 and n2 are each independently preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
  • m1 and m2 are preferably both 1.
  • the compound represented by formula (H1) is preferably a compound represented by any one of formulas (H1-1) to (H1-5).
  • R 21 , R 22 and R 23 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, preferably a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and hydrogen An atom or a group represented by the following formula (R-1) is more preferable.
  • R 29 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an alkoxy group
  • n13 represents an integer of 0 to 2
  • * represents a bonding site with another structure.
  • n8, n9 and n10 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 2, preferably 0 or 1.
  • R 24 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • n14, n15 and n16 each independently represent an integer from 0 to 2.
  • R 30 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
  • R 25 , R 26 , R 27 and R 28 each independently represent a monovalent organic group, and are represented by a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or the above formula (R-1). It is preferable that it is a group.
  • n11, n12 and n13 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 2, preferably 0 or 1.
  • the compound represented by formula (H1-1) is preferably a compound represented by any one of the following formulas (H1-1-1) to (H1-1-4).
  • the compound represented by the formula (H1-2) is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (H1-2-1) or (H1-2-2).
  • Z is preferably a tetravalent group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably a group represented by any of the following formulas (Z-1) to (Z-4).
  • * represents a bonding site with another structure.
  • L 1 , L 2 , L 3 and L 4 are preferably each independently a single bond or a methylene group.
  • R 5 , R 6 , R 7 and R 8 are each independently preferably an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • n3, n4, n5 and n6 are each independently preferably an integer of 0 to 2, more preferably 0 or 1.
  • m3, m4, m5 and m6 are each independently preferably 1 or 2, more preferably 1.
  • Examples of the compound represented by formula (H2) include compounds having the following structure.
  • R 9 and R 10 each independently preferably represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • each L 5 is preferably independently a group represented by the following formula (L-1).
  • R 30 represents a monovalent organic group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms
  • n14 represents an integer of 1 to 5
  • * represents a bonding site with another structure.
  • n7 is preferably an integer of 4 to 6. Examples of the compound represented by formula (H3) include the following compounds.
  • each n independently represents an integer of 0 to 9.
  • L 7 and L 8 are each independently preferably a divalent organic group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms. Examples of the compound represented by formula (H4) include the following compounds.
  • R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , R 14 , R 15 , R 16 , R 17 , R 18 , R 19 and R 20 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl , an alkoxy group, an allyl group or an acyl group.
  • R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, or an aryl group
  • R 34 , R 35 , R 36 and R 37 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group
  • n15 is an integer of 1 to 5
  • R 38 , R 39 , R 40 and R 41 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group
  • Examples of the compound represented by formula (H5) include the following compounds.
  • R 42 , R 43 , R 44 , and R 45 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, preferably a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. , a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R 46 and R 47 are each independently preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or an aryl group, and more preferably an alkyl group.
  • n16 and n17 are each independently preferably an integer of 0 to 2, more preferably 0 or 1.
  • n16 and n17 are each independently preferably an integer of 1 to 3, more preferably 2 or 3. Examples of the compound represented by formula (H6) include the following compounds.
  • hydroxy compounds include 2,3,4-trihydroxybenzophenone, 2,4,4'-trihydroxybenzophenone, 2,4,6-trihydroxybenzophenone, 2,3,4-trihydroxy-2'- Methylbenzophenone, 2,3,4,4'-tetrahydroxybenzophenone, 2,2',4,4'-tetrahydroxybenzophenone, 2,4,6,3',4'-pentahydroxybenzophenone, 2,3, 4,2',4'-pentahydroxybenzophenone, 2,3,4,2',5'-pentahydroxybenzophenone, 2,4,6,3',4',5'-hexahydroxybenzophenone, 2,3 , 4,3',4',5'-hexahydroxybenzophenone and other polyhydroxybenzophenones; Polyhydroxyphenylalkyl ketones such as 2,3,4-trihydroxyacetophenone, 2,3,4-trihydroxyphenylpentyl ketone, 2,3,4-trihydroxyphenylhexyl ketone, Bis(
  • polyhydroxybiphenyls Bis(polyhydroxy) sulfides such as 4,4'-thiobis(1,3-dihydroxy)benzene, Bis(polyhydroxyphenyl) ethers such as 2,2',4,4'-tetrahydroxydiphenyl ether, Bis(polyhydroxyphenyl) sulfoxides such as 2,2',4,4'-tetrahydroxydiphenyl sulfoxide, Bis(polyhydroxyphenyl)sulfones such as 2,2',4,4'-diphenylsulfone, Tris(4-hydroxyphenyl)methane, 4,4',4''-trihydroxy-3,5,3',5'-tetramethyltriphenylmethane, 4,4',3'',4''-tetrahydroxy- 3,5,3',5'-tetramethyltriphenylmethane, 4-[bis(3,5-dimethyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)methyl]-2-methoxy-phenol, 4,
  • JP-A-4-253058 Polyhydroxy compounds described in JP-A-5-224410, such as ⁇ , ⁇ , ⁇ ′, ⁇ ′, ⁇ ′′, ⁇ ′′-hexakis-(4-hydroxyphenyl)-1,3,5-triethylbenzene, etc. JP-A-5-303200, EP-530148 of polyhydroxy compounds, 1,2,2,3-tetra(p-hydroxyphenyl)propane, 1,3,3,5-tetra(p-hydroxyphenyl)pentane, etc.
  • naphthoquinone diazide sulfonic acid examples include 6-diazo 5,6-dihydro-5-oxo-1-naphthalene sulfonic acid, 1,2-naphthoquinone-(2)-diazo-5-sulfonic acid, and mixtures thereof. It may also be used as
  • the method for producing naphthoquinone diazide sulfonyl ester of a hydroxy compound is not particularly limited, but for example, naphthoquinone diazide sulfonic acid is converted into a sulfonyl chloride with chlorosulfonic acid or thionyl chloride, and the resulting naphthoquinone diazide sulfonyl chloride is condensed with a hydroxy compound. Obtained by reaction.
  • esterification is performed by reacting a predetermined amount of a hydroxy compound and naphthoquinonediazide sulfonyl chloride in a solvent such as dioxane, acetone, or tetrahydrofuran in the presence of a basic catalyst such as triethylamine, and the resulting product is washed with water. , can be obtained by drying.
  • a solvent such as dioxane, acetone, or tetrahydrofuran
  • a basic catalyst such as triethylamine
  • the esterification rate of the naphthoquinonediazide sulfonic acid ester is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10% or more, more preferably 20% or more. Further, the upper limit of the esterification rate is not particularly limited, and may be 100%. The esterification rate can be confirmed by 1 H-NMR or the like as the proportion of esterified groups among the hydroxy groups of the hydroxy compound.
  • the resin composition of the present invention may optionally contain various additives, such as surfactants, higher fatty acid derivatives, thermal polymerization initiators, inorganic particles, ultraviolet absorbers, etc., as long as the effects of the present invention can be obtained. Contains organic titanium compounds, antioxidants, photoacid generators, anti-aggregation agents, phenolic compounds, other polymer compounds, plasticizers, and other auxiliary agents (e.g. antifoaming agents, flame retardants, etc.). You can stay there.
  • the resin composition of the present invention may also contain a urea compound, a carbodiimide compound, or an isourea compound. By appropriately containing these components, properties such as film physical properties can be adjusted.
  • the viscosity of the resin composition of the present invention can be adjusted by adjusting the solid content concentration of the resin composition. From the viewpoint of coating film thickness, it is preferably 1,000 mm 2 /s to 12,000 mm 2 /s, more preferably 2,000 mm 2 /s to 10,000 mm 2 /s, and 2,500 mm 2 /s to 8,000 mm. 2 /s is more preferable. Within the above range, it becomes easy to obtain a coating film with high uniformity.
  • the water content of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably less than 2.0% by mass, more preferably less than 1.5% by mass, and even more preferably less than 1.0% by mass. If it is less than 2.0%, the storage stability of the resin composition will improve.
  • Methods for maintaining the moisture content include adjusting the humidity during storage conditions and reducing the porosity of the storage container during storage.
  • the metal content of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably less than 5 mass ppm (parts per million), more preferably less than 1 mass ppm, and even more preferably less than 0.5 mass ppm, from the viewpoint of insulation.
  • metals include sodium, potassium, magnesium, calcium, iron, copper, chromium, and nickel, but metals included as complexes of organic compounds and metals are excluded. When a plurality of metals are included, the total of these metals is preferably within the above range.
  • a method for reducing metal impurities that is unintentionally included in the resin composition of the present invention is to select a raw material with a low metal content as a raw material constituting the resin composition of the present invention.
  • Methods include filtering the raw materials constituting the product, lining the inside of the apparatus with polytetrafluoroethylene, etc., and performing distillation under conditions that suppress contamination as much as possible.
  • the resin composition of the present invention has a halogen atom content of preferably less than 500 mass ppm, more preferably less than 300 mass ppm, and more preferably less than 200 mass ppm from the viewpoint of wiring corrosion. is even more preferable.
  • those present in the form of halogen ions are preferably less than 5 ppm by mass, more preferably less than 1 ppm by mass, and even more preferably less than 0.5 ppm by mass.
  • the halogen atom include a chlorine atom and a bromine atom. It is preferable that the total of chlorine atoms and bromine atoms, or the total of chlorine ions and bromine ions, is each within the above range.
  • Preferred methods for adjusting the content of halogen atoms include ion exchange treatment.
  • the storage container may be a multilayer bottle whose inner wall is made of 6 types of 6 layers of resin, or a container with 7 layers of 6 types of resin. It is also preferred to use structured bottles. Examples of such a container include the container described in JP-A No. 2015-123351.
  • a cured product of the resin composition By curing the resin composition of the present invention, a cured product of the resin composition can be obtained.
  • the cured product of the present invention is a cured product obtained by curing a resin composition.
  • the resin composition is preferably cured by heating, and the heating temperature is more preferably 120°C to 400°C, even more preferably 140°C to 380°C, and particularly preferably 170°C to 350°C.
  • the form of the cured product of the resin composition is not particularly limited, and can be selected depending on the purpose, such as film, rod, sphere, or pellet form. In the present invention, the cured product is preferably in the form of a film.
  • the thickness of the cured product is preferably 0.5 ⁇ m or more and 150 ⁇ m or less.
  • the shrinkage rate when the resin composition of the present invention is cured is preferably 50% or less, more preferably 45% or less, and even more preferably 40% or less.
  • the imidization reaction rate of the cured product of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, and even more preferably 90% or more. If it is 70% or more, the cured product may have excellent mechanical properties.
  • the elongation at break of the cured product of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 30% or more, more preferably 40% or more, and even more preferably 50% or more.
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the cured product of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 180°C or higher, more preferably 210°C or higher, and even more preferably 230°C or higher.
  • the resin composition of the present invention can be prepared by mixing the above components.
  • the mixing method is not particularly limited and can be performed by a conventionally known method. Examples of the mixing method include mixing using a stirring blade, mixing using a ball mill, and mixing using a rotating tank.
  • the temperature during mixing is preferably 10 to 30°C, more preferably 15 to 25°C.
  • the filter pore diameter is, for example, preferably 5 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 1 ⁇ m or less, even more preferably 0.5 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 0.1 ⁇ m or less.
  • the material of the filter is preferably polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene or nylon. When the material of the filter is polyethylene, it is more preferably HDPE (high density polyethylene).
  • the filter may be washed in advance with an organic solvent. In the filter filtration step, a plurality of types of filters may be connected in series or in parallel. When using multiple types of filters, filters with different pore sizes or materials may be used in combination.
  • connection mode examples include a mode in which an HDPE filter with a pore diameter of 1 ⁇ m is connected in series as the first stage and an HDPE filter with a pore diameter of 0.2 ⁇ m as the second stage. Additionally, various materials may be filtered multiple times. When filtration is performed multiple times, circulation filtration may be used. Alternatively, filtration may be performed under pressure.
  • the pressure to be applied is preferably, for example, 0.01 MPa or more and 1.0 MPa or less, more preferably 0.03 MPa or more and 0.9 MPa or less, still more preferably 0.05 MPa or more and 0.7 MPa or less, and 0.01 MPa or more and 0.9 MPa or less, still more preferably 0.05 MPa or more and 0.7 MPa or less, and 0.01 MPa or more and 0.9 MPa or less, for example. Even more preferably 0.05 MPa or more and 0.5 MPa or less.
  • impurity removal treatment using an adsorbent may be performed. Filter filtration and impurity removal treatment using an adsorbent may be combined.
  • a known adsorbent can be used. Examples include inorganic adsorbents such as silica gel and zeolite, and organic adsorbents such as activated carbon. After filtration using a filter, the resin composition filled in the bottle may be placed under reduced pressure and degassed.
  • the method for producing a cured product of the present invention preferably includes a film forming step of applying the resin composition onto a base material to form a film.
  • the method for producing a cured product includes the above film forming step, an exposure step of selectively exposing the film formed in the film forming step, and developing the film exposed in the exposure step using a developer to form a pattern. It is more preferable to include a developing step.
  • the method for producing a cured product includes the film formation step, the exposure step, the development step, a heating step of heating the pattern obtained in the development step, and a post-development exposure step of exposing the pattern obtained in the development step. It is particularly preferable to include at least one of them.
  • the method for producing a cured product includes the film forming step and the step of heating the film. The details of each step will be explained below.
  • the resin composition of the present invention can be used in a film forming step in which a film is formed by applying it on a substrate.
  • the method for producing a cured product of the present invention preferably includes a film forming step of applying the resin composition onto a base material to form a film.
  • the type of base material can be appropriately determined depending on the purpose and is not particularly limited.
  • the base material include semiconductor manufacturing base materials such as silicon, silicon nitride, polysilicon, silicon oxide, and amorphous silicon, quartz, glass, optical films, ceramic materials, vapor deposited films, magnetic films, reflective films, Ni, Cu,
  • a metal base material such as Cr or Fe (for example, a base material formed from a metal, or a base material on which a metal layer is formed by, for example, plating or vapor deposition), paper, SOG (Spin On Examples include glass), TFT (thin film transistor) array substrates, mold substrates, and electrode plates for plasma display panels (PDP).
  • the base material is particularly preferably a semiconductor production base material, and more preferably a silicon base material, a Cu base material, and a mold base material. These base materials may be provided with a layer such as an adhesive layer or an oxidized layer made of hexamethyldisilazane (HMDS) or the like on the surface.
  • the shape of the base material is not particularly limited, and may be circular or rectangular. As for the size of the base material, if it is circular, the diameter is preferably 100 to 450 mm, more preferably 200 to 450 mm. If it is rectangular, the length of the short side is preferably 100 to 1000 mm, more preferably 200 to 700 mm.
  • a plate-shaped, preferably panel-shaped base material (substrate) is used as the base material.
  • the resin layer or metal layer serves as the base material.
  • Coating is preferred as a means for applying the resin composition onto the substrate.
  • the methods to be applied include dip coating method, air knife coating method, curtain coating method, wire bar coating method, gravure coating method, extrusion coating method, spray coating method, spin coating method, slit coating method, Examples include inkjet method. From the viewpoint of uniformity of film thickness, spin coating method, slit coating method, spray coating method, or inkjet method is preferable, and from the viewpoint of uniformity of film thickness and productivity, spin coating method and slit coating method are preferable. A coating method is more preferred. A film with a desired thickness can be obtained by adjusting the solid content concentration and application conditions of the resin composition depending on the means to be applied.
  • the coating method can be appropriately selected depending on the shape of the substrate, and for circular substrates such as wafers, spin coating, spray coating, inkjet methods, etc. are preferable, and for rectangular substrates, slit coating, spray coating, etc. method, inkjet method, etc. are preferred.
  • spin coating it can be applied, for example, at a rotation speed of 500 to 3,500 rpm for about 10 seconds to 3 minutes. It is also possible to apply a method in which a coating film that has been previously formed on a temporary support by the above-mentioned application method is transferred onto a base material.
  • the transfer method the production method described in paragraphs 0023, 0036 to 0051 of JP-A No.
  • 2006-023696 and paragraphs 0096 to 0108 of JP-A No. 2006-047592 can be suitably used. Further, a step of removing excess film may be performed at the end of the base material. Examples of such processes include edge bead rinsing (EBR), back rinsing, and the like.
  • EBR edge bead rinsing
  • a pre-wet process may be employed in which various solvents are applied to the base material before the resin composition is applied to the base material to improve the wettability of the base material, and then the resin composition is applied.
  • the film may be subjected to a step of drying the formed film (layer) (drying step) in order to remove the solvent.
  • the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a drying step of drying the film formed in the film forming step.
  • the drying step is preferably performed after the film forming step and before the exposure step.
  • the drying temperature of the membrane in the drying step is preferably 50 to 150°C, more preferably 70 to 130°C, even more preferably 90 to 110°C.
  • drying may be performed under reduced pressure.
  • the drying time is exemplified as 30 seconds to 20 minutes, preferably 1 minute to 10 minutes, and more preferably 2 minutes to 7 minutes.
  • the film may be subjected to an exposure process that selectively exposes the film.
  • the method for producing a cured product may include an exposure step of selectively exposing the film formed in the film forming step. Selectively exposing means exposing a portion of the film. Furthermore, by selectively exposing the film, an exposed region (exposed portion) and an unexposed region (non-exposed portion) are formed in the film.
  • the exposure amount is not particularly limited as long as it can cure the resin composition of the present invention, but for example, it is preferably 50 to 10,000 mJ/cm 2 and more preferably 200 to 8,000 mJ/cm 2 in terms of exposure energy at a wavelength of 365 nm. preferable.
  • the exposure wavelength can be appropriately determined in the range of 190 to 1,000 nm, preferably 240 to 550 nm.
  • the exposure wavelength is: (1) semiconductor laser (wavelength: 830 nm, 532 nm, 488 nm, 405 nm, 375 nm, 355 nm, etc.), (2) metal halide lamp, (3) high pressure mercury lamp, G-line (wavelength: 436 nm), h line (wavelength 405 nm), i line (wavelength 365 nm), broad (three wavelengths of g, h, i line), (4) excimer laser, KrF excimer laser (wavelength 248 nm), ArF excimer laser (wavelength 193 nm) ), F2 excimer laser (wavelength 157 nm), (5) extreme ultraviolet light; EUV (wavelength 13.6 nm), (6) electron beam, (7) YAG laser second harmonic 532 nm, third harmonic 355 nm, etc.
  • semiconductor laser wavelength: 830 nm, 532 nm, 488 nm, 405 nm, 375 nm,
  • the resin composition of the present invention exposure using a high-pressure mercury lamp is particularly preferable, and exposure using i-line is more preferable from the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity.
  • the method of exposure is not particularly limited, and may be any method as long as at least a portion of the film made of the resin composition of the present invention is exposed to light, and examples thereof include exposure using a photomask, exposure using a laser direct imaging method, etc. .
  • the film may be subjected to a heating step after exposure (post-exposure heating step). That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a post-exposure heating step of heating the film exposed in the exposure step.
  • the post-exposure heating step can be performed after the exposure step and before the development step.
  • the heating temperature in the post-exposure heating step is preferably 50°C to 140°C, more preferably 60°C to 120°C.
  • the heating time in the post-exposure heating step is preferably 30 seconds to 300 minutes, more preferably 1 minute to 10 minutes.
  • the temperature increase rate in the post-exposure heating step is preferably 1 to 12°C/min, more preferably 2 to 10°C/min, and even more preferably 3 to 10°C/min, from the temperature at the start of heating to the maximum heating temperature. Further, the temperature increase rate may be changed as appropriate during heating.
  • the heating means in the post-exposure heating step is not particularly limited, and a known hot plate, oven, infrared heater, etc. can be used. It is also preferable that the heating be performed in an atmosphere with a low oxygen concentration, such as by flowing an inert gas such as nitrogen, helium, or argon.
  • the exposed film may be subjected to a development step of developing a pattern using a developer. That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a development step of developing the film exposed in the exposure step using a developer to form a pattern. By performing development, one of the exposed and non-exposed areas of the film is removed and a pattern is formed.
  • development in which the non-exposed portions of the film are removed in the developing step is referred to as negative development
  • development in which the exposed portions of the film are removed in the development step is referred to as positive development.
  • Examples of the developer used in the development step include an alkaline aqueous solution or a developer containing an organic solvent.
  • basic compounds that the alkaline aqueous solution may contain include inorganic alkalis, primary amines, secondary amines, tertiary amines, and quaternary ammonium salts.
  • TMAH tetramethylammonium hydroxide
  • potassium hydroxide sodium carbonate, sodium hydroxide, sodium silicate, sodium metasilicate, ammonia, ethylamine, n-propylamine, diethylamine, di-n-butylamine, triethylamine, methyldiethylamine , dimethylethanolamine, triethanolamine, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, tetrapentylammonium hydroxide, tetrahexylammonium hydroxide, tetraoctylammonium hydroxide, ethyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, Butyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, methyltriamylammonium hydroxide, dibutyldipentylammonium hydroxide, dimethylbis(2-hydroxyethyl)ammoni
  • the compound described in paragraph 0387 of International Publication No. 2021/112189 can be used as the organic solvent.
  • alcohols include methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropanol, butanol, pentanol, octanol, diethylene glycol, propylene glycol, methylisobutylcarbinol, triethylene glycol, etc.
  • Amides include N-methylpyrrolidone, N-ethylpyrrolidone, Dimethylformamide and the like are also suitable.
  • the developer contains an organic solvent
  • one type of organic solvent or a mixture of two or more types can be used.
  • a developer containing at least one member selected from the group consisting of cyclopentanone, ⁇ -butyrolactone, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, and cyclohexanone is particularly preferred.
  • a developer containing at least one selected from the group consisting of and dimethyl sulfoxide is more preferred, and a developer containing cyclopentanone is particularly preferred.
  • the content of the organic solvent relative to the total mass of the developer is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, and 80% by mass or more. is more preferable, and particularly preferably 90% by mass or more. Moreover, the said content may be 100 mass %.
  • the developer may further contain at least one of a basic compound and a base generator.
  • the developer may further contain at least one of the basic compound and the base generator in the developer permeates into the pattern, performance such as elongation at break of the pattern may be improved.
  • an organic base is preferable from the viewpoint of reliability when remaining in the cured film (adhesion to the substrate when the cured product is further heated).
  • a basic compound having an amino group is preferable, and primary amines, secondary amines, tertiary amines, ammonium salts, tertiary amides, etc.
  • a primary amine, a secondary amine, a tertiary amine or an ammonium salt is preferred, a secondary amine, a tertiary amine or an ammonium salt is more preferred, a secondary amine or a tertiary amine is even more preferred, and a tertiary amine is particularly preferred.
  • the basic compound is preferably one that does not easily remain in the cured film (obtained cured product), and from the viewpoint of promoting cyclization, it It is preferable that the residual amount is not likely to decrease before heating.
  • the boiling point of the basic compound is preferably 30°C to 350°C, more preferably 80°C to 270°C, and even more preferably 100°C to 230°C at normal pressure (101,325 Pa).
  • the boiling point of the basic compound is preferably higher than the boiling point of the organic solvent contained in the developer minus 20°C, and more preferably higher than the boiling point of the organic solvent contained in the developer.
  • the basic compound used preferably has a boiling point of 80°C or higher, more preferably 100°C or higher.
  • the developer may contain only one type of basic compound, or may contain two or more types of basic compounds.
  • basic compounds include ethanolamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, ethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, hexylamine, dodecylamine, cyclohexylamine, cyclohexylmethylamine, cyclohexyldimethylamine, aniline, N-methylaniline, N, N-dimethylaniline, diphenylamine, pyridine, butylamine, isobutylamine, dibutylamine, tributylamine, dicyclohexylamine, DBU (diazabicycloundecene), DABCO (1,4-diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane), N , N-diisopropylethylamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, ethylenediamine, butanediamine, 1,5-diaminopentane, N-methylhexy
  • the preferred embodiments of the base generator are the same as the preferred embodiments of the base generator contained in the above-mentioned composition.
  • the base generator is preferably a thermal base generator.
  • the content of the basic compound or base generator is preferably 10% by mass or less, and 5% by mass or less based on the total mass of the developer. More preferred.
  • the lower limit of the above content is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, for example. If the basic compound or base generator is solid in the environment in which the developer is used, the content of the basic compound or base generator should be 70 to 100% by mass based on the total solid content of the developer. is also preferable.
  • the developer may contain only one type of at least one of a basic compound and a base generator, or may contain two or more types. When at least one of the basic compound and the base generator is two or more types, it is preferable that the total is within the above range.
  • the developer may further contain other components.
  • other components include known surfactants and known antifoaming agents.
  • the method of supplying the developer is not particularly limited as long as the desired pattern can be formed, and methods include immersing the base material on which the film is formed in the developer, and supplying the developer to the film formed on the base material using a nozzle.
  • a method of supplying with a spray nozzle is more preferable.
  • the base material is spun to remove the developer from the base material, and after spin drying, the developer is continuously supplied again using the straight nozzle, the base material is spun, and the developer is applied to the base material.
  • a process of removing from above may be adopted, or this process may be repeated multiple times.
  • Methods for supplying the developer in the development process include a process in which the developer is continuously supplied to the base material, a process in which the developer is kept in a substantially stationary state on the base material, and a process in which the developer is applied to the base material using ultrasonic waves. Examples include a step of vibrating with the like, and a step of combining these.
  • the development time is preferably 10 seconds to 10 minutes, more preferably 20 seconds to 5 minutes.
  • the temperature of the developer during development is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10 to 45°C, more preferably 18 to 30°C.
  • the pattern may be further cleaned (rinsed) with a rinse solution.
  • a method such as supplying a rinsing liquid before the developer in contact with the pattern is completely dried may be adopted.
  • the developing solution is an alkaline aqueous solution
  • water can be used as the rinsing solution, for example.
  • a solvent different from the solvent contained in the developer e.g., water, an organic solvent different from the organic solvent contained in the developer
  • the rinsing solution is used as the rinsing solution. be able to.
  • Examples of the organic solvent when the rinsing liquid contains an organic solvent include the same organic solvents as those exemplified in the case where the above-mentioned developer contains an organic solvent.
  • the organic solvent contained in the rinsing liquid is preferably an organic solvent different from the organic solvent contained in the developer, and more preferably an organic solvent in which the pattern has a lower solubility than the organic solvent contained in the developer.
  • the rinsing liquid contains an organic solvent
  • the organic solvent is preferably cyclopentanone, ⁇ -butyrolactone, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone, cyclohexanone, PGMEA, or PGME, more preferably cyclopentanone, ⁇ -butyrolactone, dimethyl sulfoxide, PGMEA, or PGME, and cyclohexanone or PGMEA. More preferred.
  • the organic solvent is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, and even more preferably 90% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the rinsing liquid. Moreover, the organic solvent may be 100% by mass with respect to the total mass of the rinsing liquid.
  • the rinsing liquid may contain at least one of a basic compound and a base generator.
  • a basic compound and a base generator when the developer contains an organic solvent, one preferred embodiment of the present invention is an embodiment in which the rinsing solution contains the organic solvent and at least one of a basic compound and a base generator.
  • the basic compound and base generator contained in the rinsing solution include the compounds exemplified as the basic compound and base generator that may be included when the above-mentioned developer contains an organic solvent, and preferred embodiments also include. The same is true.
  • the basic compound and base generator contained in the rinsing liquid may be selected in consideration of the solubility in the solvent in the rinsing liquid.
  • the content of the basic compound or the base generator is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 5% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the rinsing liquid. preferable.
  • the lower limit of the above content is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, for example. If the basic compound or base generator is solid in the environment where the rinse solution is used, the content of the basic compound or base generator should be 70 to 100% by mass based on the total solid content of the rinse solution. is also preferable.
  • the rinsing liquid may contain only one type of at least one of the basic compound and the base generator, or may contain two or more types of the basic compound and the base generator. .
  • the total is within the above range.
  • the rinse solution may further contain other components.
  • other components include known surfactants and known antifoaming agents.
  • a method of supplying the rinsing liquid using a spray nozzle is more preferable.
  • a method of supplying the rinsing liquid using a spray nozzle is more preferable.
  • the type of nozzle and examples include straight nozzles, shower nozzles, spray nozzles, and the like.
  • the rinsing step is preferably a step in which the rinsing liquid is supplied to the exposed film through a straight nozzle or continuously, and more preferably a step in which the rinsing liquid is supplied through a spray nozzle.
  • Methods for supplying the rinsing liquid in the rinsing process include a process in which the rinsing liquid is continuously supplied to the substrate, a process in which the rinsing liquid is kept in a substantially stationary state on the substrate, and a process in which the rinsing liquid is applied to the substrate using ultrasonic waves. It is possible to adopt a process of vibrating the wafer, etc., and a process of combining these.
  • the rinsing time is preferably 10 seconds to 10 minutes, more preferably 20 seconds to 5 minutes.
  • the temperature of the rinsing liquid during rinsing is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10 to 45°C, more preferably 18 to 30°C.
  • the developing step may include a step of bringing the processing solution into contact with the pattern after processing using the developer or after cleaning the pattern with a rinse solution.
  • a method may be adopted in which the processing liquid is supplied before the developing liquid or the rinsing liquid in contact with the pattern is completely dried.
  • the treatment liquid examples include a treatment liquid containing at least one of water and an organic solvent, and at least one of a basic compound and a base generator.
  • Preferred embodiments of the organic solvent and at least one of the basic compound and base generator are the same as the preferred embodiments of the organic solvent and at least one of the basic compound and base generator used in the above-mentioned rinsing liquid.
  • the method for supplying the treatment liquid to the pattern can be the same as the method for supplying the rinsing liquid described above, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • the content of the basic compound or base generator in the treatment liquid is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 5% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the treatment liquid.
  • the lower limit of the content is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, for example.
  • the content of the basic compound or base generator is 70 to 100% by mass based on the total solid content of the treatment liquid. It's also good to have one.
  • the processing liquid contains at least one of a basic compound and a base generator
  • the processing liquid may contain only one type of at least one of the basic compound and the base generator, or may contain two or more types of the basic compound and the base generator. .
  • at least one of the basic compound and the base generator is two or more types, it is preferable that the total is within the above range.
  • the pattern obtained by the development step may be subjected to a heating step of heating the pattern obtained by the development.
  • the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a heating step of heating the pattern obtained in the developing step.
  • the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a heating step of heating a pattern obtained by another method without performing a developing step, or a film obtained by a film forming step.
  • a resin such as a polyimide precursor is cyclized to become a resin such as polyimide.
  • the heating temperature (maximum heating temperature) in the heating step is preferably 50 to 450°C, more preferably 150 to 350°C, even more preferably 150 to 250°C, even more preferably 160 to 250°C, particularly 160 to 230°C. preferable.
  • the heating step is preferably a step of promoting the cyclization reaction of the polyimide precursor within the pattern by heating and the action of a base generated from the base generator.
  • Heating in the heating step is preferably carried out at a temperature increase rate of 1 to 12° C./min from the temperature at the start of heating to the maximum heating temperature.
  • the temperature increase rate is more preferably 2 to 10°C/min, and even more preferably 3 to 10°C/min.
  • the temperature at the start of heating is preferably 20°C to 150°C, more preferably 20°C to 130°C, even more preferably 25°C to 120°C.
  • the temperature at the start of heating refers to the temperature at which the process of heating to the maximum heating temperature is started.
  • the temperature of the film (layer) after drying is, for example, 30°C higher than the boiling point of the solvent contained in the resin composition. It is preferable to raise the temperature from a lower temperature by ⁇ 200°C.
  • the heating time (heating time at the highest heating temperature) is preferably 5 to 360 minutes, more preferably 10 to 300 minutes, and even more preferably 15 to 240 minutes.
  • the heating temperature is preferably 30°C or higher, more preferably 80°C or higher, even more preferably 100°C or higher, and particularly preferably 120°C or higher.
  • the upper limit of the heating temperature is preferably 350°C or lower, more preferably 250°C or lower, and even more preferably 240°C or lower.
  • Heating may be performed in stages. As an example, the temperature is raised from 25°C to 120°C at a rate of 3°C/min, held at 120°C for 60 minutes, and the temperature is raised from 120°C to 180°C at a rate of 2°C/min, and held at 180°C for 120 minutes. , etc. may be performed. It is also preferable to perform the treatment while irradiating ultraviolet rays as described in US Pat. No. 9,159,547. Such pretreatment steps can improve the properties of the film. The pretreatment step is preferably carried out for a short time of about 10 seconds to 2 hours, more preferably 15 seconds to 30 minutes.
  • the pretreatment step may be performed in two or more steps, for example, the first pretreatment step is performed at a temperature of 100 to 150°C, and then the second pretreatment step is performed at a temperature of 150 to 200°C. Good too. Furthermore, cooling may be performed after heating, and the cooling rate in this case is preferably 1 to 5° C./min.
  • the heating step is preferably performed in an atmosphere with a low oxygen concentration, such as by flowing an inert gas such as nitrogen, helium, or argon, or under reduced pressure, from the viewpoint of preventing decomposition of the specific resin.
  • the oxygen concentration is preferably 50 ppm (volume ratio) or less, more preferably 20 ppm (volume ratio) or less.
  • the heating means in the heating step is not particularly limited, and includes, for example, a hot plate, an infrared oven, an electric oven, a hot air oven, an infrared oven, and the like.
  • the pattern obtained in the development process (in the case of performing a rinsing process, the pattern after rinsing) is subjected to a post-development exposure process in which the pattern after the development process is exposed to light, instead of or in addition to the above heating process. may be served.
  • the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a post-development exposure step of exposing the pattern obtained in the development step.
  • the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a heating step and a post-development exposure step, or may include only one of the heating step and the post-development exposure step.
  • the post-development exposure step for example, a reaction in which cyclization of a polyimide precursor, etc.
  • the post-development exposure step at least a portion of the pattern obtained in the development step may be exposed, but it is preferable that the entire pattern be exposed.
  • the exposure amount in the post-development exposure step is preferably 50 to 20,000 mJ/cm 2 , more preferably 100 to 15,000 mJ/cm 2 in terms of exposure energy at the wavelength to which the photosensitive compound is sensitive.
  • the post-development exposure step can be performed, for example, using the light source used in the above-mentioned exposure step, and it is preferable to use broadband light.
  • the pattern obtained by the development process may be subjected to a metal layer forming process of forming a metal layer on the pattern. That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention includes a metal layer forming step of forming a metal layer on the pattern obtained in the development step (preferably one that has been subjected to at least one of the heating step and the post-development exposure step). It is preferable to include.
  • metal layer existing metal species can be used without particular limitation, and examples include copper, aluminum, nickel, vanadium, titanium, chromium, cobalt, gold, tungsten, tin, silver, and alloys containing these metals. copper and aluminum are more preferred, and copper is even more preferred.
  • the method for forming the metal layer is not particularly limited, and existing methods can be applied.
  • the methods described in JP 2007-157879, JP 2001-521288, JP 2004-214501, JP 2004-101850, US Patent No. 7888181B2, and US Patent No. 9177926B2 are used. can do.
  • photolithography, PVD (physical vapor deposition), CVD (chemical vapor deposition), lift-off, electrolytic plating, electroless plating, etching, printing, and a combination thereof can be used.
  • a patterning method that combines sputtering, photolithography, and etching, and a patterning method that combines photolithography and electrolytic plating can be mentioned.
  • a preferred embodiment of plating includes electrolytic plating using copper sulfate or copper cyanide plating solution.
  • the thickness of the metal layer is preferably 0.01 to 50 ⁇ m, more preferably 1 to 10 ⁇ m at the thickest part.
  • Fields to which the method for producing a cured product of the present invention or the cured product can be applied include insulating films for electronic devices, interlayer insulating films for rewiring layers, stress buffer films, and the like. Other methods include forming a pattern by etching a sealing film, a substrate material (a base film or coverlay of a flexible printed circuit board, an interlayer insulating film), or an insulating film for mounting purposes as described above.
  • a substrate material a base film or coverlay of a flexible printed circuit board, an interlayer insulating film
  • an insulating film for mounting purposes as described above.
  • the method for producing a cured product of the present invention or the cured product of the present invention can be used for producing plates such as offset plates or screen plates, for etching molded parts, and for use in protective lacquers and dielectric layers in electronics, particularly microelectronics. It can also be used for manufacturing.
  • the laminate of the present invention refers to a structure having a plurality of layers made of the cured product of the present invention.
  • the laminate is a laminate including two or more layers made of cured material, and may be a laminate in which three or more layers are laminated. At least one of the two or more layers made of the cured product contained in the laminate is a layer made of the cured product of the present invention, and shrinkage of the cured product or deformation of the cured product due to the shrinkage, etc. From the viewpoint of suppression, it is also preferable that all the layers made of the cured product contained in the above-mentioned laminate are layers made of the cured product of the present invention.
  • the method for producing a laminate of the present invention preferably includes the method for producing a cured product of the present invention, and more preferably includes repeating the method for producing a cured product of the present invention multiple times.
  • the laminate of the present invention preferably includes two or more layers made of a cured product and includes a metal layer between any of the layers made of the cured product.
  • the metal layer is preferably formed by the metal layer forming step. That is, it is preferable that the method for producing a laminate of the present invention further includes a metal layer forming step of forming a metal layer on the layer made of the cured product during the method for producing the cured product which is performed multiple times.
  • a preferred embodiment of the metal layer forming step is as described above.
  • a laminate including at least a layered structure in which three layers, a layer made of a first cured product, a metal layer, and a layer made of a second cured product are laminated in this order is preferred. It will be done. It is preferable that the layer made of the first cured product and the layer made of the second cured product are both layers made of the cured product of the present invention.
  • the resin composition of the present invention used for forming the layer consisting of the first cured product and the resin composition of the present invention used for forming the layer consisting of the second cured product have the same composition. It may be a product or a composition having a different composition.
  • the metal layer in the laminate of the present invention is preferably used as metal wiring such as a rewiring layer.
  • the method for manufacturing a laminate of the present invention includes a lamination step.
  • the lamination process refers to (a) film formation process (layer formation process), (b) exposure process, (c) development process, (d) heating process and development on the surface of the pattern (resin layer) or metal layer again. This is a series of steps including performing at least one of the post-exposure steps in this order.
  • an embodiment may be adopted in which at least one of (a) the film forming step and (d) the heating step and the post-development exposure step are repeated.
  • a metal layer forming step may be included after at least one of the (d) heating step and the post-development exposure step.
  • the lamination step may further include the above-mentioned drying step and the like as appropriate.
  • a surface activation treatment step may be performed after the exposure step, the heating step, or the metal layer forming step.
  • Plasma treatment is exemplified as the surface activation treatment. Details of the surface activation treatment will be described later.
  • the above lamination step is preferably performed 2 to 20 times, more preferably 2 to 9 times.
  • Each of the above layers may have the same composition, shape, thickness, etc., or may have different compositions, shapes, thicknesses, etc.
  • a cured product (resin layer) of the resin composition of the present invention is further formed to cover the metal layer.
  • the following steps are repeated in the following order: (a) film formation step, (b) exposure step, (c) development step, (d) at least one of the heating step and post-development exposure step, and (e) metal layer formation step.
  • an embodiment may be mentioned in which (a) a film forming step, (d) at least one of a heating step and a post-development exposure step, and (e) a metal layer forming step are repeated in this order.
  • the method for producing a laminate of the present invention preferably includes a surface activation treatment step of surface activation treatment of at least a portion of the metal layer and the resin composition layer.
  • the surface activation treatment step is usually performed after the metal layer forming step, but after the development step (preferably after at least one of the heating step and the post-development exposure step), the resin composition layer is subjected to the surface activation treatment. After performing this step, the metal layer forming step may be performed.
  • the surface activation treatment may be performed on at least a portion of the metal layer, or may be performed on at least a portion of the resin composition layer after exposure, or the surface activation treatment may be performed on at least a portion of the metal layer and the resin composition layer after exposure.
  • the surface activation treatment is preferably performed on at least a part of the metal layer, and it is preferable that the surface activation treatment is performed on part or all of the region of the metal layer on which the resin composition layer is to be formed.
  • the surface activation treatment is also performed on part or all of the resin composition layer (resin layer) after exposure.
  • the resin composition layer when the resin composition layer is hardened, such as when performing negative development, it is less likely to be damaged by surface treatment and adhesion is likely to be improved.
  • the surface activation treatment can be performed, for example, by the method described in paragraph 0415 of International Publication No. 2021/112189. This content is incorporated herein.
  • the present invention also discloses a semiconductor device containing the cured product or laminate of the present invention.
  • the present invention also discloses a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device, including a method for manufacturing a cured product of the present invention or a method for manufacturing a laminate.
  • a semiconductor device using the resin composition of the present invention for forming an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer the descriptions in paragraphs 0213 to 0218 of JP 2016-027357A and the description in FIG. 1 can be referred to, Their contents are incorporated herein.
  • the molecular weight of Resin 1 was measured by gel permeation chromatography (standard polystyrene standard), the weight average molecular weight (Mw) was 20,000. It was confirmed by 1 H-NMR that the structure of Resin 1 was represented by the following formula (P-1).
  • the molar amount of carboxyester whose alcohol-derived structure is a 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate-derived structure (i.e., methacryloxyethyloxycarbonyl group) relative to the total molar amount of all carboxy groups and carboxyesters contained in resin 1. was 95.6 mol%, and the molar amount of carboxyester whose alcohol-derived structure is an ethyl alcohol-derived structure (that is, ethoxycarbonyl group) was 4.2 mol%.
  • resin 2 with an Mw of 5,000, resin 2 with an Mw of 10,000, and resin 2 with an Mw of 30,000 can also be used.
  • the molar amount of carboxyester whose alcohol-derived structure is a 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate-derived structure (i.e., methacryloxyethyloxycarbonyl group) relative to the total molar amount of all the carboxy groups and carboxyesters contained in the resin 2. was 94.5 mol%, and the molar amount of carboxyester whose alcohol-derived structure is an ethyl alcohol-derived structure (that is, ethoxycarbonyl group) was 4.0 mol%.
  • Resin 10 was obtained by filtration, stirred again in 1 liter of methanol for 30 minutes and filtered again. The obtained resin was dried at 40° C. for one day under reduced pressure to obtain Resin 10.
  • Mw weight average molecular weight
  • 1 H-NMR confirmed that the structure of resin 10 was a structure represented by the following formula (P-10).
  • Examples and comparative examples> In each Example, the components listed in the table below were mixed to obtain each resin composition. Further, in a comparative example, the components listed in the table below were mixed to obtain a comparative composition. Specifically, the content (compounding amount) of each component listed in the table other than the solvent was the amount (parts by mass) listed in the "parts by mass” column in each column of the table. The content (compounding amount) of the solvent is determined so that the solid content concentration of the composition is the value (mass %) of "solid content concentration” in the table, and the ratio of the content of each solvent to the total mass of the solvent (mass %) is determined. The ratio) was set to be the ratio described in the "Ratio" column in the table. The obtained resin composition and comparative composition were pressure-filtered using a polytetrafluoroethylene filter with a pore width of 0.8 ⁇ m. Furthermore, in the table, the description "-" indicates that the composition does not contain the corresponding component.
  • ⁇ I-1 to I-5 Compounds with the following structure ⁇ I-6: Omnirad 1312 (manufactured by IGM) ⁇ I-7: Omnirad TPO H (manufactured by IGM)
  • Silane coupling agent (metal adhesion improver)] - C-1 to C-3 Compounds with the following structure.
  • Et represents an ethyl group.
  • ⁇ C-4 X-12-1293 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., silane coupling agent with protected isocyanate group)
  • ⁇ C-5 KR-513 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., silane coupling agent that is an acrylic group-containing oligomer)
  • Tris-PA trade name, manufactured by Kagaku Kogyo Co., Ltd.
  • Tris-PA trade name, manufactured by Kagaku Kogyo Co., Ltd.
  • 47.49 g 0.07 mol
  • 1,2-naphthoquinonediazide-5-sulfonic acid chloride in an amount corresponding to 83.3 mol% of the OH group.
  • the flask was adjusted to 30°C in a constant temperature bath.
  • 17.9 g of triethylamine was dissolved in 18 g of acetone and charged into a dropping funnel, which was then dropped into the flask over 30 minutes.
  • F-1 to F-20 Compounds with the following structure.
  • F-1 to F-20 are compounds corresponding to the above-mentioned compound A.
  • FR-1 Compound with the following structure.
  • FR-1 is a compound that does not fall under the above-mentioned compound A.
  • F-4-1 was obtained as a crude product by concentration below.
  • 13.1 g of F-4-1, 180 mL of 1 M aqueous sodium hydroxide solution, and 375 mL of ethanol were mixed at room temperature and stirred for 72 hours.
  • 120 mL of 1 M hydrochloric acid was added dropwise to neutralize the reaction solution (pH 7), and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 5 hours.
  • the reaction solution was extracted three times with 133 mL of dichloromethane, the organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate, and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure to obtain a crude product.
  • the obtained solid was suspended in 100 mL of water, stirred at room temperature for 1 hour, and then the solution and solid were separated by filtration. Furthermore, the solid collected by filtration was suspended in 20 mL of ethyl acetate, and after stirring at 60° C. for 1 hour, the solution and solid were separated by filtration. The obtained solid was air-dried to obtain 1.28 g of target product F-4 (yield 18%).
  • the resin composition layer or the comparative composition layer on the copper substrate was exposed to an exposure energy of 500 mJ/ cm2 , and in the examples where "negative" was written in the "Development conditions" column of the table, a 100 ⁇ m square square shape was formed.
  • “Positive” is written in the "Development Conditions” column of the table, a photomask with a non-mask area formed thereon is used, and a photomask with a 100 ⁇ m square mask area formed thereon is used. It was exposed to light having the exposure wavelength (nm) described in the "Exposure wavelength (nm)" column.
  • exposure was performed using a stepper as a light source.
  • a direct exposure device (Adtech DE-6UH III) is used as the light source, and a laser direct imaging exposure is performed on a 100 ⁇ m square area without using a photomask. went. Thereafter, development was performed for 60 seconds using the developer shown in the table to obtain a square resin layer of 100 ⁇ m square.
  • TMAH aqueous solution means a 2.38% by mass aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide.
  • the exposed resin composition layer is heated at a rate of 10°C/min in a nitrogen atmosphere using a hot plate.
  • Shear force was measured on a 100 ⁇ m square cured product on a copper substrate using a bond tester (Condor Sigma, manufactured by XYZTEC) in an environment of 25 ° C. and 65% relative humidity (RH). , evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. The evaluation results are listed in the column of "Adhesion after heat resistance test" in the table. It can be said that the greater the shearing force, the better the adhesion of the cured film after the heat resistance test. -Evaluation criteria- A: Shear force exceeded 30 gf. B: Shear force exceeded 25 gf and was 30 gf or less. C: Shear force exceeded 20 gf and was 25 gf or less. D: Shear force was 20 gf or less. Moreover, 1 gf is 0.00980665N.
  • composition stability The resin composition or comparative composition prepared in each Example or Comparative Example was allowed to stand at 38° C. for 3 days under light shielding conditions. After the above-mentioned standing is completed, the viscosity is measured using a viscometer (Toki Sangyo RE-85L), and compared with the initial state (before the above-mentioned standing), the viscosity change rate after the above-mentioned standing is completed is determined. It was calculated according to the following formula and evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. The evaluation results are listed in the "composition stability" column of the table. It can be said that the smaller the viscosity change rate, the more excellent the composition stability is.
  • Viscosity change rate (%)
  • C The absolute value of the viscosity change rate was more than 5% and less than 8%.
  • D The absolute value of the viscosity change rate was more than 8% and less than 10%.
  • E The absolute value of the above viscosity change rate exceeded 10%.
  • the cured product formed from the resin composition of the present invention has excellent adhesion even after the heat resistance test.
  • the comparative composition according to Comparative Example 1 does not contain Compound A. It can be seen that such comparative compositions have poor adhesion after the heat resistance test.
  • Example 101 The resin composition used in Example 1 was applied in a layered manner by spin coating to the surface of the thin copper layer of the resin base material on which the thin copper layer was formed, and dried at 100°C for 5 minutes to determine the film thickness. After forming a 20 ⁇ m photoresist film, it was exposed using a stepper (NSR1505 i6, manufactured by Nikon Corporation). Exposure was performed at a wavelength of 365 nm through a mask (a binary mask with a 1:1 line-and-space pattern and a line width of 10 ⁇ m). After the above exposure, it was developed with cyclopentanone for 2 minutes and rinsed with PGMEA for 30 seconds to obtain a layer pattern.
  • NSR1505 i6 a binary mask with a 1:1 line-and-space pattern and a line width of 10 ⁇ m
  • the temperature was raised at a rate of 10° C./min in a nitrogen atmosphere, and after reaching 230° C., the temperature was maintained at 230° C. for 180 minutes to form an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer.
  • This interlayer insulating film for rewiring layer had excellent insulation properties. Furthermore, when a semiconductor device was manufactured using this interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer, it was confirmed that it operated without any problems.

Abstract

Provided are: a resin composition comprising at least one resin selected from the group consisting of cyclic resins and precursors thereof, and compound A corresponding to at least one of compound a1 and compound a2; a cured product; a laminate; a method for producing a cured product; a method for producing a laminate; a method for producing a semiconductor device; and a semiconductor device. Compound a1 has a protected primary amine structure and a specific structure. Compound a2 has a protected primary alkyl amine structure and a specific group.

Description

樹脂組成物、硬化物、積層体、硬化物の製造方法、積層体の製造方法、半導体デバイスの製造方法、及び、半導体デバイスResin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
 本発明は、樹脂組成物、硬化物、積層体、硬化物の製造方法、積層体の製造方法、半導体デバイスの製造方法、及び、半導体デバイスに関する。 The present invention relates to a resin composition, a cured product, a laminate, a method for producing a cured product, a method for producing a laminate, a method for producing a semiconductor device, and a semiconductor device.
 現代では様々な分野において、樹脂を含む樹脂組成物から製造された樹脂材料を活用することが行われている。
 例えば、ポリイミド等の環化樹脂は、耐熱性及び絶縁性等に優れるため、様々な用途に適用されている。上記用途としては、特に限定されないが、実装用の半導体デバイスを例に挙げると、絶縁膜や封止材の材料、又は、保護膜としての利用が挙げられる。また、フレキシブル基板のベースフィルムやカバーレイなどとしても用いられている。
BACKGROUND ART In modern times, resin materials manufactured from resin compositions containing resin are utilized in various fields.
For example, cyclized resins such as polyimide have excellent heat resistance and insulation properties, and are therefore used in a variety of applications. The above-mentioned uses are not particularly limited, but in the case of semiconductor devices for mounting, for example, they may be used as materials for insulating films and sealing materials, or as protective films. It is also used as a base film and coverlay for flexible substrates.
 例えば上述した用途において、ポリイミド等の環化樹脂は、環化樹脂、又は、ポリイミド前駆体等の環化樹脂の前駆体を含む樹脂組成物の形態で用いられる。
 このような樹脂組成物を、例えば塗布等により基材に適用して感光膜を形成し、その後、必要に応じて露光、現像、加熱等を行うことにより、硬化物を基材上に形成することができる。
 ポリイミド前駆体等の上記環化樹脂の前駆体は、例えば加熱により環化され、硬化物中でポリイミド等の環化樹脂となる。
 樹脂組成物は、公知の塗布方法等により適用可能であるため、例えば、適用される樹脂組成物の適用時の形状、大きさ、適用位置等の設計の自由度が高いなど、製造上の適応性に優れるといえる。ポリイミド等の環化樹脂が有する高い性能に加え、このような製造上の適応性に優れる観点から、上述の樹脂組成物の産業上の応用展開がますます期待されている。
For example, in the above-mentioned applications, a cyclized resin such as polyimide is used in the form of a resin composition containing the cyclized resin or a precursor of the cyclized resin such as a polyimide precursor.
Such a resin composition is applied to a base material by coating, for example, to form a photosensitive film, and then, as necessary, exposure, development, heating, etc. are performed to form a cured product on the base material. be able to.
The precursor of the cyclized resin, such as a polyimide precursor, is cyclized, for example, by heating, and becomes a cyclized resin such as polyimide in the cured product.
Since the resin composition can be applied by known coating methods, there is a high degree of freedom in designing the shape, size, application position, etc. of the resin composition when it is applied. It can be said that it has excellent characteristics. In addition to the high performance of cyclized resins such as polyimide, there are increasing expectations for the industrial application of the above-mentioned resin compositions due to their excellent manufacturing adaptability.
 例えば、特許文献1には、ポリイミド前駆体及びポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体よりなる群から選択された少なくとも1種のポリマー前駆体、非イオン性である化合物B、並びに、重合性化合物及び感光性化合物よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含み、上記化合物Bが、2以上の窒素原子を含む部分構造と、電子求引性基と、を含み、上記部分構造における上記窒素原子のうち少なくとも2つの窒素原子間の距離1が2原子以下であり、上記距離1が2原子以下である窒素原子のうちいずれかの窒素原子と上記電子求引性基との距離2が1原子以下である硬化性樹脂組成物が記載されている。
 特許文献2には、(A)ポリイミド前駆体;(B)酸又は塩基又は熱で脱保護される基で保護された複数のアミノ基を有し、分子量が250~600であり、上記保護された複数のアミノ基が脂肪族鎖状もしくは脂環式アミノ基であり、かつ、溶解度パラメーターの値が20.0以上24.0以下である、塩基保護化合物;及び(C)光重合開始剤を含む、ネガ型感光性樹脂組成物が記載されている。
For example, Patent Document 1 describes at least one polymer precursor selected from the group consisting of a polyimide precursor and a polybenzoxazole precursor, a nonionic compound B, and a polymerizable compound and a photosensitive compound. The compound B includes a partial structure containing two or more nitrogen atoms and an electron-withdrawing group, and at least one of the nitrogen atoms in the partial structure contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of: The distance 1 between two nitrogen atoms is 2 atoms or less, and the distance 2 between any of the nitrogen atoms for which the distance 1 is 2 atoms or less and the electron-withdrawing group is 1 atom or less. Curable resin compositions are described.
Patent Document 2 describes (A) a polyimide precursor; (B) having a plurality of amino groups protected with a group that can be deprotected by acid or base or heat, and having a molecular weight of 250 to 600; a base-protected compound in which the plurality of amino groups are aliphatic chain or alicyclic amino groups, and the solubility parameter value is 20.0 or more and 24.0 or less; and (C) a photopolymerization initiator. A negative-working photosensitive resin composition is described.
国際公開第2020/179671号International Publication No. 2020/179671 国際公開第2019/107250号International Publication No. 2019/107250
 硬化物を得るための樹脂組成物において、得られる硬化物が高温条件に晒された後であっても、基材との密着性に優れることが求められている。 A resin composition for obtaining a cured product is required to have excellent adhesion to a substrate even after the resulting cured product is exposed to high-temperature conditions.
 本発明は、得られる硬化物が高温条件に晒された後であっても、基材との密着性に優れる樹脂組成物、上記樹脂組成物を硬化してなる硬化物、上記硬化物を含む積層体、上記硬化物の製造方法、上記積層体の製造方法、上記硬化物の製造方法を含む半導体デバイスの製造方法、及び、上記硬化物を含む半導体デバイスを提供することを目的とする。 The present invention includes a resin composition that has excellent adhesion to a base material even after the obtained cured product is exposed to high temperature conditions, a cured product obtained by curing the above resin composition, and the above cured product. The present invention aims to provide a laminate, a method for producing the cured product, a method for producing the laminate, a method for producing a semiconductor device including the method for producing the cured product, and a semiconductor device including the cured product.
 本発明の代表的な実施態様の例を以下に示す。
<1> 環化樹脂及びその前駆体よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の樹脂と、
 下記化合物a1及び化合物a2の少なくとも一方に該当する化合物Aとを含む
 樹脂組成物。
化合物a1:保護された第1級アミン構造、並びに、オキサゾール環、チアゾール環、ピリミジン環、シッフ塩基基、フェノール性水酸基、下記式(1-1)で表される基、下記式(1-2)で表される基、及び、下記式(1-4)で表される基よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の構造を有する
化合物a2:保護された第1級アルキルアミン構造、及び、下記式(1-1)~式(1-4)のいずれかで表される基を有する
 式(1-1)中、Xは-C(R-、-NR-、-S-又は-O-を表し、X~Xはそれぞれ独立に、=CR-又は=N-を表し、Xが-C(R-又は-O-である場合、X~Xのうち少なくとも2つが=N-を表し、Xが-NR-又は-S-である場合、X~Xのうち少なくとも1つが=N-を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、*で表される他の構造との結合部位、水素原子又は1価の置換基を表し、X~Xの1つが、*で表される他の構造との結合部位であるRを含み、式(1-1)で表される基において*で表される他の構造との結合部位であるRは1つのみである。
 式(1-2)中、X14は-C(R-、-NR-、-S-又は-O-を表し、X~X13はそれぞれ独立に、=CR-又は=N-を表し、X14が-C(R-又は-O-である場合、X~X13のうち少なくとも2つが=N-を表し、X14が-NR-又は-S-である場合、X~X13のうち少なくとも1つが=N-を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、*で表される他の構造との結合部位、水素原子又は1価の置換基を表し、X、X13及びX14の1つが、*で表される他の構造との結合部位であるRを含み、式(1-2)で表される基において*で表される他の構造との結合部位であるRは1つのみである。
 式(1-3)中、X15は-C(R-、-NR-、-S-又は-O-を表し、X16~X18はそれぞれ独立に、=CR-又は=N-を表し、X15が-C(R-又は-O-である場合、X16~X18のうち少なくとも2つが=N-を表し、X13が-NR-又は-S-である場合、X16~X18のうち少なくとも1つが=N-を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の置換基を表す。
 式(1-4)中、X19~X26はそれぞれ独立に、=CR-又は=N-を表し、X19~X26のうち少なくとも2つが=N-を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、*で表される他の構造との結合部位、水素原子又は1価の置換基を表し、X19~X26の1つが、*で表される他の構造との結合部位であるRを含み、式(1-4)で表される基において*で表される他の構造との結合部位であるRは1つのみである。
<2> 上記化合物Aが、光、熱又は塩基の作用により分解し脂肪族第1級アミンを発生させる化合物である、<1>に記載の樹脂組成物。
<3> 上記化合物a1が、保護された第1級アミン構造、並びに、式(1-1)で表される基、及び、式(1-2)で表される基よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の構造を有する、<1>又は<2>に記載の樹脂組成物。
<4> 上記化合物Aが下記式(A-2)又は式(A-3)で表される化合物である、<1>~<3>のいずれか1項に記載の樹脂組成物。

 式(A-2)中、Rはそれぞれ独立に、置換基を有してもよいアルキル基を表し、複数のRが結合して環構造を形成してもよく、Rは式(1-1)~式(1-4)のいずれかで表される基、オキサゾール環、チアゾール環、ピリミジン環、シッフ塩基機、フェノール性水酸基、よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の構造を有する有機基を表し、Lは単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 式(A-3)中、Rは式(1-1)~式(1-4)のいずれかで表される基、オキサゾール環、チアゾール環、ピリミジン環、シッフ塩基基、フェノール性水酸基、よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の構造を有する有機基を表し、Lは単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
<5> 上記樹脂がポリイミド又はポリイミド前駆体である、<1>~<4>のいずれか1項に記載の樹脂組成物。
<6> 上記化合物Aとは異なる芳香族複素環化合物を更に含む、<1>~<5>のいずれか1項に記載の樹脂組成物。
<7> 光重合開始剤と重合性化合物を更に含む、<1>~<6>のいずれか1項に記載の樹脂組成物。
<8> 再配線層用層間絶縁膜の形成に用いられる、<1>~<7>のいずれか1項に記載の樹脂組成物。
<9> <1>~<8>のいずれか1項に記載の樹脂組成物を硬化してなる硬化物。
<10> <9>に記載の硬化物からなる層を2層以上含み、上記硬化物からなる層同士のいずれかの間に金属層を含む積層体。
<11> <1>~<8>のいずれか1項に記載の樹脂組成物を基材上に適用して膜を形成する膜形成工程を含む、硬化物の製造方法。
<12> 上記膜を選択的に露光する露光工程及び上記膜を現像液を用いて現像してパターンを形成する現像工程を含む、<11>に記載の硬化物の製造方法。
<13> 上記膜を50~450℃で加熱する加熱工程を含む、<11>又は<12>に記載の硬化物の製造方法。
<14> <11>~<13>のいずれか1項に記載の硬化物の製造方法を含む、積層体の製造方法。
<15> <11>~<13>のいずれか1項に記載の硬化物の製造方法を含む、半導体デバイスの製造方法。
<16> <9>に記載の硬化物を含む、半導体デバイス。
Examples of representative embodiments of the invention are shown below.
<1> At least one resin selected from the group consisting of cyclized resins and precursors thereof;
A resin composition comprising a compound A corresponding to at least one of the following compound a1 and compound a2.
Compound a1: Protected primary amine structure, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyrimidine ring, Schiff base group, phenolic hydroxyl group, group represented by the following formula (1-1), the following formula (1-2) ) Compound a2 having at least one structure selected from the group consisting of a group represented by the following formula (1-4): a protected primary alkylamine structure, and Having a group represented by any of the following formulas (1-1) to (1-4)
In formula (1-1), X 1 represents -C(R x ) 2 -, -NR x -, -S-, or -O- , and X 2 to =N-, and when X 1 is -C(R x ) 2 - or -O-, at least two of X 2 to X 7 represent =N-, and X 1 is -NR When S-, at least one of X 2 to X 7 represents =N-, and each R X independently represents a bonding site with another structure represented by *, a hydrogen atom, or a monovalent substituent and one of X 4 to X 7 contains R x which is a bonding site with another structure represented by *, and in the group represented by formula (1-1), There is only one R x which is a binding site with the structure.
In formula (1-2), X 14 represents -C(R x ) 2 -, -NR x -, -S-, or -O- , and X 8 to =N-, and when X 14 is -C(R x ) 2 - or -O-, at least two of X 8 to X 13 represent =N-, and X 14 is -NR When S-, at least one of X 8 to X 13 represents =N-, and each R X independently represents a bonding site with another structure represented by *, a hydrogen atom, or a monovalent substituent , one of X 8 , X 13 and X 14 contains R x which is a bonding site with another structure represented by *, and in the group represented by formula (1-2), There is only one R x which is a binding site with another structure.
In formula (1-3), X 15 represents -C(R x ) 2 -, -NR x -, -S-, or -O- , and X 16 to =N-, and when X 15 is -C(R x ) 2 - or -O-, at least two of X 16 to X 18 represent =N-, and X 13 is -NR When S-, at least one of X 16 to X 18 represents =N-, and R X each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent.
In formula (1-4), X 19 to X 26 each independently represents =CR X - or =N-, at least two of X 19 to X 26 represent =N-, and R R represents a bonding site with another structure represented by *, a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, and one of X 19 to X 26 is a bonding site with another structure represented by * In the group represented by formula (1-4), there is only one R x which is a bonding site with another structure represented by *.
<2> The resin composition according to <1>, wherein the compound A is a compound that is decomposed by the action of light, heat, or a base to generate an aliphatic primary amine.
<3> The compound a1 is selected from the group consisting of a protected primary amine structure, a group represented by formula (1-1), and a group represented by formula (1-2). The resin composition according to <1> or <2>, which has at least one type of structure.
<4> The resin composition according to any one of <1> to <3>, wherein the compound A is a compound represented by the following formula (A-2) or formula (A-3).

In formula (A-2), R 7 each independently represents an alkyl group that may have a substituent, a plurality of R 7 may be combined to form a ring structure, and R 8 is represented by formula ( At least one structure selected from the group consisting of a group represented by any one of 1-1) to formula (1-4), an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, a pyrimidine ring, a Schiff base, and a phenolic hydroxyl group. L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
In formula (A-3), R 9 is a group represented by any one of formulas (1-1) to (1-4), an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, a pyrimidine ring, a Schiff base group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, represents an organic group having at least one type of structure selected from the group consisting of, and L 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
<5> The resin composition according to any one of <1> to <4>, wherein the resin is polyimide or a polyimide precursor.
<6> The resin composition according to any one of <1> to <5>, further comprising an aromatic heterocyclic compound different from the compound A.
<7> The resin composition according to any one of <1> to <6>, further comprising a photopolymerization initiator and a polymerizable compound.
<8> The resin composition according to any one of <1> to <7>, which is used for forming an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer.
<9> A cured product obtained by curing the resin composition according to any one of <1> to <8>.
<10> A laminate including two or more layers made of the cured product according to <9>, and a metal layer between any of the layers made of the cured product.
<11> A method for producing a cured product, comprising a film forming step of applying the resin composition according to any one of <1> to <8> onto a substrate to form a film.
<12> The method for producing a cured product according to <11>, comprising an exposure step of selectively exposing the film to light, and a development step of developing the film using a developer to form a pattern.
<13> The method for producing a cured product according to <11> or <12>, which includes a heating step of heating the film at 50 to 450°C.
<14> A method for producing a laminate, including the method for producing a cured product according to any one of <11> to <13>.
<15> A method for manufacturing a semiconductor device, comprising the method for manufacturing a cured product according to any one of <11> to <13>.
<16> A semiconductor device comprising the cured product according to <9>.
 本発明によれば、得られる硬化物が高温条件に晒された後であっても、基材との密着性に優れる樹脂組成物、上記樹脂組成物を硬化してなる硬化物、上記硬化物を含む積層体、上記硬化物の製造方法、上記積層体の製造方法、上記硬化物の製造方法を含む半導体デバイスの製造方法、及び、上記硬化物を含む半導体デバイスが提供される。 According to the present invention, there is provided a resin composition that has excellent adhesion to a substrate even after the obtained cured product is exposed to high temperature conditions, a cured product obtained by curing the resin composition, and a cured product obtained by curing the resin composition. A laminate including the above, a method for producing the cured product, a method for producing the laminate, a method for producing a semiconductor device including the method for producing the cured product, and a semiconductor device including the cured product.
 以下、本発明の主要な実施形態について説明する。しかしながら、本発明は、明示した実施形態に限られるものではない。
 本明細書において「~」という記号を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値をそれぞれ下限値及び上限値として含む範囲を意味する。
 本明細書において「工程」との語は、独立した工程だけではなく、その工程の所期の作用が達成できる限りにおいて、他の工程と明確に区別できない工程も含む意味である。
 本明細書における基(原子団)の表記において、置換及び無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有しない基(原子団)と共に置換基を有する基(原子団)をも包含する。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有しないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含する。
 本明細書において「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、光を用いた露光のみならず、電子線、イオンビーム等の粒子線を用いた露光も含む。また、露光に用いられる光としては、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV光)、X線、電子線等の活性光線又は放射線が挙げられる。
 本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリレート」は、「アクリレート」及び「メタクリレート」の両方、又は、いずれかを意味し、「(メタ)アクリル」は、「アクリル」及び「メタクリル」の両方、又は、いずれかを意味し、「(メタ)アクリロイル」は、「アクリロイル」及び「メタクリロイル」の両方、又は、いずれかを意味する。
 本明細書において、構造式中のMeはメチル基を表し、Etはエチル基を表し、Buはブチル基を表し、Phはフェニル基を表す。
 本明細書において、全固形分とは、組成物の全成分から溶剤を除いた成分の総質量をいう。また本明細書において、固形分濃度とは、組成物の総質量に対する、溶剤を除く他の成分の質量百分率である。
 本明細書において、重量平均分子量(Mw)及び数平均分子量(Mn)は、特に述べない限り、ゲル浸透クロマトグラフィ(GPC)法を用いて測定した値であり、ポリスチレン換算値として定義される。本明細書において、重量平均分子量(Mw)及び数平均分子量(Mn)は、例えば、HLC-8220GPC(東ソー(株)製)を用い、カラムとしてガードカラムHZ-L、TSKgel Super HZM-M、TSKgel Super HZ4000、TSKgel Super HZ3000、及び、TSKgel Super HZ2000(以上、東ソー(株)製)を直列に連結して用いることによって求めることができる。それらの分子量は特に述べない限り、溶離液としてTHF(テトラヒドロフラン)を用いて測定したものとする。ただし、溶解性が低い場合など、溶離液としてTHFが適していない場合にはNMP(N-メチル-2-ピロリドン)を用いることもできる。また、GPC測定における検出は特に述べない限り、UV線(紫外線)の波長254nm検出器を使用したものとする。
 本明細書において、積層体を構成する各層の位置関係について、「上」又は「下」と記載したときには、注目している複数の層のうち基準となる層の上側又は下側に他の層があればよい。すなわち、基準となる層と上記他の層の間に、更に第3の層や要素が介在していてもよく、基準となる層と上記他の層は接している必要はない。特に断らない限り、基材に対し層が積み重なっていく方向を「上」と称し、又は、樹脂組成物層がある場合には、基材から樹脂組成物層へ向かう方向を「上」と称し、その反対方向を「下」と称する。なお、このような上下方向の設定は、本明細書中における便宜のためであり、実際の態様においては、本明細書における「上」方向は、鉛直上向きと異なることもありうる。
 本明細書において、特段の記載がない限り、組成物は、組成物に含まれる各成分として、その成分に該当する2種以上の化合物を含んでもよい。また、特段の記載がない限り、組成物における各成分の含有量とは、その成分に該当する全ての化合物の合計含有量を意味する。
 本明細書において、特に述べない限り、温度は23℃、気圧は101,325Pa(1気圧)、相対湿度は50%RHである。
 本明細書において、好ましい態様の組み合わせは、より好ましい態様である。
Main embodiments of the present invention will be described below. However, the invention is not limited to the illustrated embodiments.
In this specification, a numerical range expressed using the symbol "~" means a range that includes the numerical values written before and after "~" as the lower limit and upper limit, respectively.
As used herein, the term "step" includes not only independent steps but also steps that cannot be clearly distinguished from other steps as long as the intended effect of the step can be achieved.
In the description of a group (atomic group) in this specification, the description that does not indicate substitution or unsubstitution includes a group having a substituent (atomic group) as well as a group having no substituent (atomic group). For example, "alkyl group" includes not only an alkyl group without a substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
In this specification, "exposure" includes not only exposure using light but also exposure using particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams, unless otherwise specified. Examples of the light used for exposure include actinic rays or radiation such as the bright line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays typified by excimer lasers, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, and electron beams.
As used herein, "(meth)acrylate" means both "acrylate" and "methacrylate", or either "(meth)acrylate", and "(meth)acrylic" means both "acrylic" and "methacrylic", or , and "(meth)acryloyl" means either or both of "acryloyl" and "methacryloyl."
In this specification, Me in the structural formula represents a methyl group, Et represents an ethyl group, Bu represents a butyl group, and Ph represents a phenyl group.
In this specification, the total solid content refers to the total mass of all components of the composition excluding the solvent. Further, in this specification, the solid content concentration is the mass percentage of other components excluding the solvent with respect to the total mass of the composition.
In this specification, unless otherwise stated, weight average molecular weight (Mw) and number average molecular weight (Mn) are values measured using gel permeation chromatography (GPC), and are defined as polystyrene equivalent values. In this specification, weight average molecular weight (Mw) and number average molecular weight (Mn) are expressed using, for example, HLC-8220GPC (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) and guard column HZ-L, TSKgel Super HZM-M, TSKgel. It can be determined by using Super HZ4000, TSKgel Super HZ3000, and TSKgel Super HZ2000 (all manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) connected in series. Unless otherwise stated, those molecular weights are measured using THF (tetrahydrofuran) as an eluent. However, if THF is not suitable as an eluent, such as when the solubility is low, NMP (N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone) can also be used. Furthermore, unless otherwise specified, a detector with a wavelength of 254 nm of UV rays (ultraviolet rays) is used for detection in the GPC measurement.
In this specification, when the positional relationship of each layer constituting a laminate is described as "upper" or "lower", there is another layer above or below the reference layer among the plurality of layers of interest. It would be good if there was. That is, a third layer or element may be further interposed between the reference layer and the other layer, and the reference layer and the other layer do not need to be in contact with each other. Unless otherwise specified, the direction in which layers are stacked on the base material is referred to as "top", or if there is a resin composition layer, the direction from the base material to the resin composition layer is referred to as "top". , the opposite direction is called "down". Note that such a setting in the vertical direction is for convenience in this specification, and in an actual embodiment, the "up" direction in this specification may be different from vertically upward.
In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the composition may contain, as each component contained in the composition, two or more compounds corresponding to that component. Further, unless otherwise specified, the content of each component in the composition means the total content of all compounds corresponding to that component.
In this specification, unless otherwise stated, the temperature is 23° C., the atmospheric pressure is 101,325 Pa (1 atm), and the relative humidity is 50% RH.
In this specification, combinations of preferred aspects are more preferred aspects.
(樹脂組成物)
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、環化樹脂及びその前駆体よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の樹脂と、下記化合物a1及び化合物a2の少なくとも一方に該当する化合物Aとを含む。
化合物a1:保護された第1級アミン構造、並びに、オキサゾール環、チアゾール環、ピリミジン環、シッフ塩基基、フェノール性水酸基、下記式(1-1)で表される基、下記式(1-2)で表される基、及び、下記式(1-4)で表される基よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の構造を有する
化合物a2:保護された第1級アルキルアミン構造、及び、下記式(1-1)~式(1-4)のいずれかで表される基を有する

 式(1-1)中、Xは-C(R-、-NR-、-S-又は-O-を表し、X~Xはそれぞれ独立に、=CR-又は=N-を表し、Xが-C(R-又は-O-である場合、X~Xのうち少なくとも2つが=N-を表し、Xが-NR-又は-S-である場合、X~Xのうち少なくとも1つが=N-を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、*で表される他の構造との結合部位、水素原子又は1価の置換基を表し、X~Xの1つが、*で表される他の構造との結合部位であるRを含み、式(1-1)で表される基において*で表される他の構造との結合部位であるRは1つのみである。
 式(1-2)中、X14は-C(R-、-NR-、-S-又は-O-を表し、X~X13はそれぞれ独立に、=CR-又は=N-を表し、X14が-C(R-又は-O-である場合、X~X13のうち少なくとも2つが=N-を表し、X14が-NR-又は-S-である場合、X~X13のうち少なくとも1つが=N-を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、*で表される他の構造との結合部位、水素原子又は1価の置換基を表し、X、X13及びX14の1つが、*で表される他の構造との結合部位であるRを含み、式(1-2)で表される基において*で表される他の構造との結合部位であるRは1つのみである。
 式(1-3)中、X15は-C(R-、-NR-、-S-又は-O-を表し、X16~X18はそれぞれ独立に、=CR-又は=N-を表し、X15が-C(R-又は-O-である場合、X16~X18のうち少なくとも2つが=N-を表し、X13が-NR-又は-S-である場合、X16~X18のうち少なくとも1つが=N-を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の置換基を表す。
 式(1-4)中、X19~X26はそれぞれ独立に、=CR-又は=N-を表し、X19~X26のうち少なくとも2つが=N-を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、*で表される他の構造との結合部位、水素原子又は1価の置換基を表し、X19~X26の1つが、*で表される他の構造との結合部位であるRを含み、式(1-4)で表される基において*で表される他の構造との結合部位であるRは1つのみである。
(Resin composition)
The resin composition of the present invention includes at least one resin selected from the group consisting of cyclized resins and precursors thereof, and a compound A that corresponds to at least one of the following compounds a1 and compound a2.
Compound a1: Protected primary amine structure, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyrimidine ring, Schiff base group, phenolic hydroxyl group, group represented by the following formula (1-1), the following formula (1-2) ) Compound a2 having at least one structure selected from the group consisting of a group represented by the following formula (1-4): a protected primary alkylamine structure, and Having a group represented by any of the following formulas (1-1) to (1-4)

In formula (1-1), X 1 represents -C(R x ) 2 -, -NR x -, -S-, or -O- , and X 2 to =N-, and when X 1 is -C(R x ) 2 - or -O-, at least two of X 2 to X 7 represent =N-, and X 1 is -NR When S-, at least one of X 2 to X 7 represents =N-, and each R X independently represents a bonding site with another structure represented by *, a hydrogen atom, or a monovalent substituent and one of X 4 to X 7 contains R x which is a bonding site with another structure represented by *, and in the group represented by formula (1-1), There is only one R x that is a binding site with the structure.
In formula (1-2), X 14 represents -C(R x ) 2 -, -NR x -, -S-, or -O- , and X 8 to =N-, and when X 14 is -C(R x ) 2 - or -O-, at least two of X 8 to X 13 represent =N-, and X 14 is -NR When S-, at least one of X 8 to X 13 represents =N-, and each R X independently represents a bonding site with another structure represented by *, a hydrogen atom, or a monovalent substituent , one of X 8 , X 13 and X 14 contains R x which is a bonding site with another structure represented by *, and in the group represented by formula (1-2), There is only one R x that is a binding site with other structures.
In formula (1-3), X 15 represents -C(R x ) 2 -, -NR x -, -S-, or -O- , and X 16 to =N-, and when X 15 is -C(R x ) 2 - or -O-, at least two of X 16 to X 18 represent =N-, and X 13 is -NR When S-, at least one of X 16 to X 18 represents =N-, and R X each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent.
In formula (1-4), X 19 to X 26 each independently represents =CR X - or =N-, at least two of X 19 to X 26 represent =N-, and R R represents a bonding site with another structure represented by *, a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, and one of X 19 to X 26 is a bonding site with another structure represented by * In the group represented by formula (1-4), there is only one R x which is a bonding site with another structure represented by *.
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、露光及び現像に供される感光膜の形成に用いられることが好ましく、露光及び有機溶剤を含む現像液を用いた現像に供される膜の形成に用いられることが好ましい。
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、例えば、半導体デバイスの絶縁膜、再配線層用層間絶縁膜、ストレスバッファ膜等の形成に用いることができ、再配線層用層間絶縁膜の形成に用いられることが好ましい。
 特に、本発明の樹脂組成物が、再配線層用層間絶縁膜の形成に用いられることは、本発明の好ましい態様の1つである。
 また、本発明の樹脂組成物は、ポジ型現像に供される感光膜の形成に用いられてもよいし、ネガ型現像に供される感光膜の形成に用いられてもよい。
 本発明において、ネガ型現像とは、露光及び現像において、現像により非露光部が除去される現像をいい、ポジ型現像とは、現像により露光部が除去される現像をいう。
 上記露光の方法、上記現像液、及び、上記現像の方法としては、例えば、後述する硬化物の製造方法の説明における露光工程において説明された露光方法、現像工程において説明された現像液及び現像方法が使用される。
The resin composition of the present invention is preferably used to form a photosensitive film that is subjected to exposure and development, and is preferably used to form a film that is subjected to exposure and development using a developer containing an organic solvent. preferable.
The resin composition of the present invention can be used, for example, to form an insulating film of a semiconductor device, an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer, a stress buffer film, etc., and can be used for forming an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer. preferable.
In particular, it is one of the preferred embodiments of the present invention that the resin composition of the present invention is used for forming an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer.
Further, the resin composition of the present invention may be used to form a photosensitive film to be subjected to positive development, or may be used to form a photosensitive film to be subjected to negative development.
In the present invention, negative development refers to development in which non-exposed areas are removed by development during exposure and development, and positive development refers to development in which exposed areas are removed by development.
The above-mentioned exposure method, the above-mentioned developer, and the above-mentioned development method include, for example, the exposure method explained in the exposure step in the explanation of the method for producing a cured product, and the developer and development method explained in the development step. is used.
 本発明の樹脂組成物によれば、高温条件に晒された後であっても、基材(特に、金属基材、更には、銅基材)との密着性に優れる硬化物が得られる。
 上記効果が得られるメカニズムは不明であるが、下記のように推測される。
According to the resin composition of the present invention, a cured product having excellent adhesion to a substrate (particularly a metal substrate, particularly a copper substrate) can be obtained even after being exposed to high-temperature conditions.
Although the mechanism by which the above effects are obtained is unknown, it is assumed as follows.
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、環化樹脂及びその前駆体よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の樹脂と、特定の構造を有する化合物Aとを含む。
 本発明の樹脂組成物から得られた硬化物は、高温条件に晒された後であっても基材(特に、金属基材、更には銅基材)との密着性に優れる。
 上記効果が得られるメカニズムは定かではないが、以下のように推測される。
 化合物a1に該当する化合物は、保護された第1級アミン構造(構造1)と、広いπ共役平面を有する構造、複数個の窒素原子を有する構造、酸素原子又は硫黄原子と窒素原子とを有する構造のいずれかである構造(構造2)とを含む。加熱による硬化等において、第1級アミン構造における保護が外れた場合には、第1級アミン構造と、上記構造2とを含む化合物が発生する。ここで、上記化合物における構造2と上記樹脂とは相互作用が強く、上記第1級アミン構造又は構造2と基材とは吸着性が高いため、樹脂-化合物a1間の相互作用と、化合物a1-基材間の吸着により、高温条件に晒された後であっても密着性に優れると推測される。
 化合物a2に該当する化合物は、保護された第1級アルキルアミン構造(構造3)と、少なくとも2つ以上の窒素原子を有するアゾール構造(構造4)とを含む。加熱による硬化等において、第1級アルキルアミン構造における保護が外れた場合には、第1級アルキルアミン構造と、上記構造4とを含む化合物が発生する。ここで、上記化合物における第1級アルキルアミン構造と上記樹脂とは反応して共有結合を形成し、上記構造4と基材とは吸着性が高いため、樹脂-化合物a2間の相互作用と、化合物a2-基材間の吸着により、高温条件に晒された後であっても密着性に優れると推測される。
The resin composition of the present invention contains at least one resin selected from the group consisting of cyclized resins and precursors thereof, and a compound A having a specific structure.
The cured product obtained from the resin composition of the present invention has excellent adhesion to a substrate (particularly a metal substrate, particularly a copper substrate) even after being exposed to high temperature conditions.
Although the mechanism by which the above effects are obtained is not clear, it is presumed as follows.
A compound corresponding to compound a1 has a protected primary amine structure (Structure 1), a structure having a wide π conjugated plane, a structure having multiple nitrogen atoms, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and a nitrogen atom. structure (Structure 2). When the protection in the primary amine structure is removed during curing by heating, etc., a compound containing the primary amine structure and the above structure 2 is generated. Here, structure 2 in the above compound and the resin have a strong interaction, and the primary amine structure or structure 2 and the base material have high adsorption properties, so the interaction between the resin and the compound a1 and the compound a1 - It is assumed that adsorption between the base materials provides excellent adhesion even after exposure to high temperature conditions.
The compound corresponding to compound a2 includes a protected primary alkylamine structure (Structure 3) and an azole structure (Structure 4) having at least two or more nitrogen atoms. When the protection in the primary alkylamine structure is removed during curing by heating, etc., a compound containing the primary alkylamine structure and the above structure 4 is generated. Here, the primary alkylamine structure in the compound and the resin react to form a covalent bond, and since the structure 4 and the base material have high adsorption properties, the interaction between the resin and the compound a2, It is presumed that adsorption between compound a2 and the base material provides excellent adhesion even after exposure to high temperature conditions.
 ここで、特許文献1及び2には、環化樹脂の前駆体、及び、化合物Aを含む組成物については記載されていない。 Here, Patent Documents 1 and 2 do not describe a precursor of a cyclized resin and a composition containing Compound A.
 以下、本発明の樹脂組成物に含まれる成分について詳細に説明する。 Hereinafter, the components contained in the resin composition of the present invention will be explained in detail.
<特定樹脂>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、環化樹脂およびその前駆体からなる群より選ばれた少なくとも1種の樹脂(特定樹脂)を含む。
 環化樹脂は、主鎖構造中にイミド環構造又はオキサゾール環構造を含む樹脂であることが好ましい。
 本発明において、「主鎖」とは、樹脂分子中で相対的に最も長い結合鎖を表し、「側鎖」とはそれ以外の結合鎖をいう。
 環化樹脂としては、ポリイミド、ポリベンゾオキサゾール、ポリアミドイミド等が挙げられる。
 環化樹脂の前駆体とは、外部刺激により化学構造の変化を生じて環化樹脂となる樹脂をいい、熱により化学構造の変化を生じて環化樹脂となる樹脂が好ましく、熱により閉環反応を生じて環構造が形成されることにより環化樹脂となる樹脂がより好ましい。
 環化樹脂の前駆体としては、ポリイミド前駆体、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体、ポリアミドイミド前駆体等が挙げられる。
 すなわち、樹脂組成物は、特定樹脂として、ポリイミド、ポリイミド前駆体、ポリベンゾオキサゾール、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体、ポリアミドイミド、及び、ポリアミドイミド前駆体からなる群より選ばれた少なくとも1種の樹脂を含むことが好ましい。
 樹脂組成物は、特定樹脂として、ポリイミド又はポリイミド前駆体を含むことが好ましい。
 特定樹脂は重合性基を有することが好ましく、ラジカル重合性基を含むことがより好ましい。
 特定樹脂がラジカル重合性基を有する場合、本発明の樹脂組成物は、ラジカル重合開始剤を含むことが好ましく、ラジカル重合開始剤を含み、かつ、ラジカル架橋剤を含むことがより好ましい。さらに必要に応じて、増感剤を含むことができる。このような樹脂組成物からは、例えば、ネガ型感光膜が形成される。
 また、特定樹脂は、酸分解性基等の極性変換基を有していてもよい。
 特定樹脂が酸分解性基を有する場合、樹脂組成物は、光酸発生剤を含むことが好ましい。このような樹脂組成物からは、例えば、化学増幅型であるポジ型感光膜又はネガ型感光膜が形成される。
<Specific resin>
The resin composition of the present invention contains at least one resin (specific resin) selected from the group consisting of cyclized resins and precursors thereof.
The cyclized resin is preferably a resin containing an imide ring structure or an oxazole ring structure in its main chain structure.
In the present invention, the "main chain" refers to the relatively longest bond chain in the resin molecule, and the "side chain" refers to other bond chains.
Examples of the cyclized resin include polyimide, polybenzoxazole, polyamideimide, and the like.
The precursor of cyclized resin refers to a resin that undergoes a chemical structure change due to external stimulation to become a cyclized resin. Preferably, a resin that undergoes a chemical structure change due to heat to become a cyclized resin, and that undergoes a ring-closing reaction due to heat. More preferred is a resin that becomes a cyclized resin by forming a ring structure.
Examples of the precursor of the cyclized resin include a polyimide precursor, a polybenzoxazole precursor, a polyamideimide precursor, and the like.
That is, the resin composition contains, as the specific resin, at least one resin selected from the group consisting of polyimide, polyimide precursor, polybenzoxazole, polybenzoxazole precursor, polyamideimide, and polyamideimide precursor. It is preferable.
It is preferable that the resin composition contains polyimide or a polyimide precursor as the specific resin.
It is preferable that the specific resin has a polymerizable group, and more preferably a radically polymerizable group.
When the specific resin has a radically polymerizable group, the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a radical polymerization initiator, and more preferably contains a radical polymerization initiator and a radical crosslinking agent. Furthermore, a sensitizer can be included if necessary. For example, a negative photosensitive film is formed from such a resin composition.
Further, the specific resin may have a polarity converting group such as an acid-decomposable group.
When the specific resin has an acid-decomposable group, the resin composition preferably contains a photoacid generator. From such a resin composition, for example, a chemically amplified positive or negative photosensitive film is formed.
〔ポリイミド前駆体〕
 本発明で用いるポリイミド前駆体は、その種類等は特に限定されないが、下記式(2)で表される繰返し単位を含むことが好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006

 式(2)中、A及びAは、それぞれ独立に、酸素原子又は-NR-を表し、R111は、2価の有機基を表し、R115は、4価の有機基を表し、R113及びR114は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、Rは水素原子又は1価の有機基を表す。
[Polyimide precursor]
The polyimide precursor used in the present invention is not particularly limited in its type, but preferably contains a repeating unit represented by the following formula (2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006

In formula (2), A 1 and A 2 each independently represent an oxygen atom or -NR z -, R 111 represents a divalent organic group, and R 115 represents a tetravalent organic group. , R 113 and R 114 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, and R z represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.
 式(2)におけるA及びAは、それぞれ独立に、酸素原子又は-NR-を表し、酸素原子が好ましい。
 Rは水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、水素原子が好ましい。
 式(2)におけるR111は、2価の有機基を表す。2価の有機基としては、直鎖又は分岐の脂肪族基、環状の脂肪族基及び芳香族基を含む基が例示され、炭素数2~20の直鎖又は分岐の脂肪族基、炭素数3~20の環状の脂肪族基、炭素数3~20の芳香族基、又は、これらの組み合わせからなる基が好ましく、炭素数6~20の芳香族基を含む基がより好ましい。上記直鎖又は分岐の脂肪族基は鎖中の炭化水素基がヘテロ原子を含む基で置換されていてもよく、上記環状の脂肪族基および芳香族基は環員の炭化水素基がヘテロ原子を含む基で置換されていてもよい。式(2)におけるR111の例としては、-Ar-および-Ar-L-Ar-で表される基が挙げられ、-Ar-L-Ar-で表される基が好ましい。但し、Arは、それぞれ独立に、芳香族基であり、Lは、単結合、又は、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよい炭素数1~10の脂肪族炭化水素基、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-SO-若しくは-NHCO-、あるいは、上記の2つ以上の組み合わせからなる基である。これらの好ましい範囲は、上述のとおりである。
A 1 and A 2 in formula (2) each independently represent an oxygen atom or -NR z -, and preferably an oxygen atom.
Rz represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, preferably a hydrogen atom.
R 111 in formula (2) represents a divalent organic group. Examples of divalent organic groups include groups containing straight-chain or branched aliphatic groups, cyclic aliphatic groups, and aromatic groups, including straight-chain or branched aliphatic groups having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, A group consisting of a cyclic aliphatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, an aromatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, or a combination thereof is preferable, and a group containing an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is more preferable. In the above straight chain or branched aliphatic group, the hydrocarbon group in the chain may be substituted with a group containing a hetero atom, and in the above cyclic aliphatic group and aromatic group, the hydrocarbon group in the chain may be substituted with a hetero atom. may be substituted with a group containing. Examples of R 111 in formula (2) include groups represented by -Ar- and -Ar-L-Ar-, with a group represented by -Ar-L-Ar- being preferred. However, Ar is each independently an aromatic group, and L is a single bond or an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, -O-, -CO -, -S-, -SO 2 -, -NHCO-, or a combination of two or more of the above. These preferred ranges are as described above.
 R111は、ジアミンから誘導されることが好ましい。ポリイミド前駆体の製造に用いられるジアミンとしては、直鎖又は分岐の脂肪族、環状の脂肪族又は芳香族ジアミンなどが挙げられる。ジアミンは、1種のみ用いてもよいし、2種以上用いてもよい。
 具体的には、R111は、炭素数2~20の直鎖又は分岐の脂肪族基、炭素数3~20の環状の脂肪族基、炭素数3~20の芳香族基、又は、これらの組み合わせからなる基を含むジアミンであることが好ましく、炭素数6~20の芳香族基を含むジアミンであることがより好ましい。上記直鎖又は分岐の脂肪族基は鎖中の炭化水素基がヘテロ原子を含む基で置換されていてもよく上記環状の脂肪族基および芳香族基は環員の炭化水素基がヘテロ原子を含む基で置換されていてもよい。芳香族基を含む基の例としては、下記が挙げられる。
Preferably R 111 is derived from a diamine. Examples of diamines used in the production of polyimide precursors include linear or branched aliphatic, cyclic aliphatic, and aromatic diamines. One type of diamine may be used, or two or more types may be used.
Specifically, R 111 is a linear or branched aliphatic group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a cyclic aliphatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, an aromatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, or any of these. A diamine containing a combination of groups is preferable, and a diamine containing an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is more preferable. In the straight chain or branched aliphatic group mentioned above, the hydrocarbon group in the chain may be substituted with a group containing a hetero atom.In the above cyclic aliphatic group and aromatic group, the hydrocarbon group in the chain may be substituted with a group containing a hetero atom. may be substituted with a group containing. Examples of groups containing aromatic groups include the following.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007

 式中、Aは単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、単結合、又は、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよい炭素数1~10の脂肪族炭化水素基、-O-、-C(=O)-、-S-、-SO-、-NHCO-、又は、これらの組み合わせから選択される基であることが好ましく、単結合、又は、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよい炭素数1~3のアルキレン基、-O-、-C(=O)-、-S-、若しくは、-SO-から選択される基であることがより好ましく、-CH-、-O-、-S-、-SO-、-C(CF-、又は、-C(CH-であることが更に好ましい。
 式中、*は他の構造との結合部位を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007

In the formula, A represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and is a single bond or an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, -O-, -C (= A group selected from O)-, -S-, -SO 2 -, -NHCO-, or a combination thereof is preferable, and has a carbon number of 1 and may be substituted with a single bond or a fluorine atom. -3 alkylene groups, -O-, -C(=O)-, -S-, or -SO 2 - is more preferable, and -CH 2 -, -O-, - More preferably, it is S-, -SO 2 -, -C(CF 3 ) 2 -, or -C(CH 3 ) 2 -.
In the formula, * represents a bonding site with another structure.
 ジアミンとしては、具体的には、1,2-ジアミノエタン、1,2-ジアミノプロパン、1,3-ジアミノプロパン、1,4-ジアミノブタン又は1,6-ジアミノヘキサン;
1,2-又は1,3-ジアミノシクロペンタン、1,2-、1,3-又は1,4-ジアミノシクロヘキサン、1,2-、1,3-又は1,4-ビス(アミノメチル)シクロヘキサン、ビス-(4-アミノシクロヘキシル)メタン、ビス-(3-アミノシクロヘキシル)メタン、4,4’-ジアミノ-3,3’-ジメチルシクロヘキシルメタン及びイソホロンジアミン;
m-又はp-フェニレンジアミン、ジアミノトルエン、4,4’-又は3,3’-ジアミノビフェニル、4,4’-ジアミノジフェニルエーテル、3,3-ジアミノジフェニルエーテル、4,4’-又は3,3’-ジアミノジフェニルメタン、4,4’-又は3,3’-ジアミノジフェニルスルホン、4,4’-又は3,3’-ジアミノジフェニルスルフィド、4,4’-又は3,3’-ジアミノベンゾフェノン、3,3’-ジメチル-4,4’-ジアミノビフェニル、2,2’-ジメチル-4,4’-ジアミノビフェニル、3,3’-ジメトキシ-4,4’-ジアミノビフェニル、2,2-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)プロパン、2,2-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)ヘキサフルオロプロパン、2,2-ビス(3-ヒドロキシ-4-アミノフェニル)プロパン、2,2-ビス(3-ヒドロキシ-4-アミノフェニル)ヘキサフルオロプロパン、2,2-ビス(3-アミノ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロパン、2,2-ビス(3-アミノ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)ヘキサフルオロプロパン、ビス(3-アミノ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)スルホン、ビス(4-アミノ-3-ヒドロキシフェニル)スルホン、4,4’-ジアミノパラテルフェニル、4,4’-ビス(4-アミノフェノキシ)ビフェニル、ビス[4-(4-アミノフェノキシ)フェニル]スルホン、ビス[4-(3-アミノフェノキシ)フェニル]スルホン、ビス[4-(2-アミノフェノキシ)フェニル]スルホン、1,4-ビス(4-アミノフェノキシ)ベンゼン、9,10-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)アントラセン、3,3’-ジメチル-4,4’-ジアミノジフェニルスルホン、1,3-ビス(4-アミノフェノキシ)ベンゼン、1,3-ビス(3-アミノフェノキシ)ベンゼン、1,3-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)ベンゼン、3,3’-ジエチル-4,4’-ジアミノジフェニルメタン、3,3’-ジメチル-4,4’-ジアミノジフェニルメタン、4,4’-ジアミノオクタフルオロビフェニル、2,2-ビス[4-(4-アミノフェノキシ)フェニル]プロパン、2,2-ビス[4-(4-アミノフェノキシ)フェニル]ヘキサフルオロプロパン、9,9-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)-10-ヒドロアントラセン、3,3’,4,4’-テトラアミノビフェニル、3,3’,4,4’-テトラアミノジフェニルエーテル、1,4-ジアミノアントラキノン、1,5-ジアミノアントラキノン、3,3-ジヒドロキシ-4,4’-ジアミノビフェニル、9,9’-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)フルオレン、4,4’-ジメチル-3,3’-ジアミノジフェニルスルホン、3,3’,5,5’-テトラメチル-4,4’-ジアミノジフェニルメタン、2,4-及び2,5-ジアミノクメン、2,5-ジメチル-p-フェニレンジアミン、アセトグアナミン、2,3,5,6-テトラメチル-p-フェニレンジアミン、2,4,6-トリメチル-m-フェニレンジアミン、ビス(3-アミノプロピル)テトラメチルジシロキサン、ビス(p-アミノフェニル)オクタメチルペンタシロキサン、2,7-ジアミノフルオレン、2,5-ジアミノピリジン、1,2-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)エタン、ジアミノベンズアニリド、ジアミノ安息香酸のエステル、1,5-ジアミノナフタレン、ジアミノベンゾトリフルオライド、1,3-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)ヘキサフルオロプロパン、1,4-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)オクタフルオロブタン、1,5-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)デカフルオロペンタン、1,7-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)テトラデカフルオロヘプタン、2,2-ビス[4-(3-アミノフェノキシ)フェニル]ヘキサフルオロプロパン、2,2-ビス[4-(2-アミノフェノキシ)フェニル]ヘキサフルオロプロパン、2,2-ビス[4-(4-アミノフェノキシ)-3,5-ジメチルフェニル]ヘキサフルオロプロパン、2,2-ビス[4-(4-アミノフェノキシ)-3,5-ビス(トリフルオロメチル)フェニル]ヘキサフルオロプロパン、p-ビス(4-アミノ-2-トリフルオロメチルフェノキシ)ベンゼン、4,4’-ビス(4-アミノ-2-トリフルオロメチルフェノキシ)ビフェニル、4,4’-ビス(4-アミノ-3-トリフルオロメチルフェノキシ)ビフェニル、4,4’-ビス(4-アミノ-2-トリフルオロメチルフェノキシ)ジフェニルスルホン、4,4’-ビス(3-アミノ-5-トリフルオロメチルフェノキシ)ジフェニルスルホン、2,2-ビス[4-(4-アミノ-3-トリフルオロメチルフェノキシ)フェニル]ヘキサフルオロプロパン、3,3’,5,5’-テトラメチル-4,4’-ジアミノビフェニル、4,4’-ジアミノ-2,2’-ビス(トリフルオロメチル)ビフェニル、2,2’,5,5’,6,6’-ヘキサフルオロトリジン及び4,4’-ジアミノクアテルフェニルから選ばれる少なくとも1種のジアミンが挙げられる。
As the diamine, specifically, 1,2-diaminoethane, 1,2-diaminopropane, 1,3-diaminopropane, 1,4-diaminobutane or 1,6-diaminohexane;
1,2- or 1,3-diaminocyclopentane, 1,2-, 1,3- or 1,4-diaminocyclohexane, 1,2-, 1,3- or 1,4-bis(aminomethyl)cyclohexane , bis-(4-aminocyclohexyl)methane, bis-(3-aminocyclohexyl)methane, 4,4'-diamino-3,3'-dimethylcyclohexylmethane and isophoronediamine;
m- or p-phenylenediamine, diaminotoluene, 4,4'- or 3,3'-diaminobiphenyl, 4,4'-diaminodiphenyl ether, 3,3-diaminodiphenyl ether, 4,4'- or 3,3' -diaminodiphenylmethane, 4,4'- or 3,3'-diaminodiphenylsulfone, 4,4'- or 3,3'-diaminodiphenylsulfide, 4,4'- or 3,3'-diaminobenzophenone, 3, 3'-dimethyl-4,4'-diaminobiphenyl, 2,2'-dimethyl-4,4'-diaminobiphenyl, 3,3'-dimethoxy-4,4'-diaminobiphenyl, 2,2-bis(4 -aminophenyl)propane, 2,2-bis(4-aminophenyl)hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis(3-hydroxy-4-aminophenyl)propane, 2,2-bis(3-hydroxy-4- aminophenyl) hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)propane, 2,2-bis(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)hexafluoropropane, bis(3-amino-4 -hydroxyphenyl) sulfone, bis(4-amino-3-hydroxyphenyl) sulfone, 4,4'-diaminoparaterphenyl, 4,4'-bis(4-aminophenoxy)biphenyl, bis[4-(4- aminophenoxy)phenyl]sulfone, bis[4-(3-aminophenoxy)phenyl]sulfone, bis[4-(2-aminophenoxy)phenyl]sulfone, 1,4-bis(4-aminophenoxy)benzene, 9, 10-bis(4-aminophenyl)anthracene, 3,3'-dimethyl-4,4'-diaminodiphenylsulfone, 1,3-bis(4-aminophenoxy)benzene, 1,3-bis(3-aminophenoxy) ) Benzene, 1,3-bis(4-aminophenyl)benzene, 3,3'-diethyl-4,4'-diaminodiphenylmethane, 3,3'-dimethyl-4,4'-diaminodiphenylmethane, 4,4' -diaminooctafluorobiphenyl, 2,2-bis[4-(4-aminophenoxy)phenyl]propane, 2,2-bis[4-(4-aminophenoxy)phenyl]hexafluoropropane, 9,9-bis( 4-aminophenyl)-10-hydroanthracene, 3,3',4,4'-tetraaminobiphenyl, 3,3',4,4'-tetraamino diphenyl ether, 1,4-diaminoanthraquinone, 1,5- Diaminoanthraquinone, 3,3-dihydroxy-4,4'-diaminobiphenyl, 9,9'-bis(4-aminophenyl)fluorene, 4,4'-dimethyl-3,3'-diaminodiphenylsulfone, 3,3 ',5,5'-tetramethyl-4,4'-diaminodiphenylmethane, 2,4- and 2,5-diaminocumene, 2,5-dimethyl-p-phenylenediamine, acetoguanamine, 2,3,5, 6-tetramethyl-p-phenylenediamine, 2,4,6-trimethyl-m-phenylenediamine, bis(3-aminopropyl)tetramethyldisiloxane, bis(p-aminophenyl)octamethylpentasiloxane, 2,7 -Diaminofluorene, 2,5-diaminopyridine, 1,2-bis(4-aminophenyl)ethane, diaminobenzanilide, ester of diaminobenzoic acid, 1,5-diaminonaphthalene, diaminobenzotrifluoride, 1,3- Bis(4-aminophenyl)hexafluoropropane, 1,4-bis(4-aminophenyl)octafluorobutane, 1,5-bis(4-aminophenyl)decafluoropentane, 1,7-bis(4-amino phenyl)tetradecafluoroheptane, 2,2-bis[4-(3-aminophenoxy)phenyl]hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis[4-(2-aminophenoxy)phenyl]hexafluoropropane, 2,2 -bis[4-(4-aminophenoxy)-3,5-dimethylphenyl]hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis[4-(4-aminophenoxy)-3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl] Hexafluoropropane, p-bis(4-amino-2-trifluoromethylphenoxy)benzene, 4,4'-bis(4-amino-2-trifluoromethylphenoxy)biphenyl, 4,4'-bis(4- Amino-3-trifluoromethylphenoxy)biphenyl, 4,4'-bis(4-amino-2-trifluoromethylphenoxy)diphenylsulfone, 4,4'-bis(3-amino-5-trifluoromethylphenoxy) diphenylsulfone, 2,2-bis[4-(4-amino-3-trifluoromethylphenoxy)phenyl]hexafluoropropane, 3,3',5,5'-tetramethyl-4,4'-diaminobiphenyl, selected from 4,4'-diamino-2,2'-bis(trifluoromethyl)biphenyl, 2,2',5,5',6,6'-hexafluorotridine and 4,4'-diaminoquaterphenyl At least one type of diamine is mentioned.
 また、国際公開第2017/038598号の段落0030~0031に記載のジアミン(DA-1)~(DA-18)も好ましい。 Also preferred are the diamines (DA-1) to (DA-18) described in paragraphs 0030 to 0031 of International Publication No. 2017/038598.
 また、国際公開第2017/038598号の段落0032~0034に記載の2つ以上のアルキレングリコール単位を主鎖にもつジアミンも好ましく用いられる。 In addition, diamines having two or more alkylene glycol units in the main chain described in paragraphs 0032 to 0034 of International Publication No. 2017/038598 are also preferably used.
 R111は、得られる有機膜の柔軟性の観点から、-Ar-L-Ar-で表されることが好ましい。但し、Arは、それぞれ独立に、芳香族基であり、Lは、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよい炭素数1~10の脂肪族炭化水素基、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-SO-又は-NHCO-、あるいは、上記の2つ以上の組み合わせからなる基である。Arは、フェニレン基が好ましく、Lは、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよい炭素数1又は2の脂肪族炭化水素基、-O-、-CO-、-S-又は-SO-が好ましい。ここでの脂肪族炭化水素基は、アルキレン基が好ましい。 From the viewpoint of flexibility of the resulting organic film, R 111 is preferably represented by -Ar-L-Ar-. However, Ar is each independently an aromatic group, and L is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, -O-, -CO-, -S- , -SO 2 -, -NHCO-, or a combination of two or more of the above. Ar is preferably a phenylene group, and L is preferably an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a fluorine atom, -O-, -CO-, -S- or -SO 2 - . The aliphatic hydrocarbon group here is preferably an alkylene group.
 また、R111は、i線透過率の観点から、下記式(51)又は式(61)で表される2価の有機基であることが好ましい。特に、i線透過率、入手のし易さの観点から、式(61)で表される2価の有機基であることがより好ましい。
 式(51)

 式(51)中、R50~R57は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、フッ素原子又は1価の有機基であり、R50~R57の少なくとも1つは、フッ素原子、メチル基又はトリフルオロメチル基であり、*はそれぞれ独立に、式(2)中の窒素原子との結合部位を表す。
 R50~R57の1価の有機基としては、炭素数1~10(好ましくは炭素数1~6)の無置換のアルキル基、炭素数1~10(好ましくは炭素数1~6)のフッ化アルキル基等が挙げられる。

 式(61)中、R58及びR59は、それぞれ独立に、フッ素原子、メチル基、又はトリフルオロメチル基であり、*はそれぞれ独立に、式(2)中の窒素原子との結合部位を表す。
 式(51)又は式(61)の構造を与えるジアミンとしては、2,2’-ジメチルベンジジン、2,2’-ビス(トリフルオロメチル)-4,4’-ジアミノビフェニル、2,2’-ビス(フルオロ)-4,4’-ジアミノビフェニル、4,4’-ジアミノオクタフルオロビフェニル等が挙げられる。これらは1種又は2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。
Further, from the viewpoint of i-ray transmittance, R 111 is preferably a divalent organic group represented by the following formula (51) or formula (61). In particular, from the viewpoint of i-ray transmittance and availability, a divalent organic group represented by formula (61) is more preferable.
Formula (51)

In formula (51), R 50 to R 57 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or a monovalent organic group, and at least one of R 50 to R 57 is a fluorine atom, a methyl group, or a trifluoro It is a methyl group, and each * independently represents a bonding site with the nitrogen atom in formula (2).
The monovalent organic groups R 50 to R 57 include unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms), and unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms). Examples include fluorinated alkyl groups.

In formula (61), R 58 and R 59 each independently represent a fluorine atom, a methyl group, or a trifluoromethyl group, and * each independently represents a bonding site with the nitrogen atom in formula (2). represent.
Examples of the diamine giving the structure of formula (51) or formula (61) include 2,2'-dimethylbenzidine, 2,2'-bis(trifluoromethyl)-4,4'-diaminobiphenyl, 2,2'- Bis(fluoro)-4,4'-diaminobiphenyl, 4,4'-diaminoctafluorobiphenyl, and the like. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 式(2)におけるR115は、4価の有機基を表す。4価の有機基としては、芳香環を含む4価の有機基が好ましく、下記式(5)又は式(6)で表される基がより好ましい。
式(5)又は式(6)中、*はそれぞれ独立に、他の構造との結合部位を表す。

 式(5)中、R112は単結合又は2価の連結基であり、単結合、又は、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよい炭素数1~10の脂肪族炭化水素基、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-SO-、及び-NHCO-、ならびに、これらの組み合わせから選択される基であることが好ましく、単結合、または、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよい炭素数1~3のアルキレン基、-O-、-CO-、-S-及び-SO-から選択される基であることがより好ましく、-CH-、-C(CF-、-C(CH-、-O-、-CO-、-S-及び-SO-からなる群より選択される2価の基であることが更に好ましい。
R 115 in formula (2) represents a tetravalent organic group. As the tetravalent organic group, a tetravalent organic group containing an aromatic ring is preferable, and a group represented by the following formula (5) or formula (6) is more preferable.
In formula (5) or formula (6), * each independently represents a bonding site with another structure.

In formula (5), R 112 is a single bond or a divalent linking group, and is a single bond or an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, -O-, A group selected from -CO-, -S-, -SO 2 -, -NHCO-, and combinations thereof is preferable, and the number of carbon atoms optionally substituted with a single bond or a fluorine atom is preferable. More preferably, it is a group selected from 1 to 3 alkylene groups, -O-, -CO-, -S- and -SO 2 -, including -CH 2 -, -C(CF 3 ) 2 -, - More preferably, it is a divalent group selected from the group consisting of C(CH 3 ) 2 -, -O-, -CO-, -S- and -SO 2 -.
 R115は、具体的には、テトラカルボン酸二無水物から無水物基の除去後に残存するテトラカルボン酸残基などが挙げられる。ポリイミド前駆体は、R115に該当する構造として、テトラカルボン酸二無水物残基を、1種のみ含んでもよいし、2種以上含んでもよい。
 テトラカルボン酸二無水物は、下記式(O)で表されることが好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011

 式(O)中、R115は、4価の有機基を表す。R115の好ましい範囲は式(2)におけるR115の好ましい範囲と同様である。
Specific examples of R 115 include a tetracarboxylic acid residue remaining after removal of an anhydride group from a tetracarboxylic dianhydride. The polyimide precursor may contain only one type of tetracarboxylic dianhydride residue, or may contain two or more types of tetracarboxylic dianhydride residues as the structure corresponding to R115 .
It is preferable that the tetracarboxylic dianhydride is represented by the following formula (O).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011

In formula (O), R 115 represents a tetravalent organic group. The preferred range of R 115 is the same as the preferred range of R 115 in formula (2).
 テトラカルボン酸二無水物の具体例としては、ピロメリット酸二無水物(PMDA)、3,3’,4,4’-ビフェニルテトラカルボン酸二無水物、3,3’,4,4’-ジフェニルスルフィドテトラカルボン酸二無水物、3,3’,4,4’-ジフェニルスルホンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、3,3’,4,4’-ベンゾフェノンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、3,3’,4,4’-ジフェニルメタンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、2,2’,3,3’-ジフェニルメタンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、2,3,3’,4’-ビフェニルテトラカルボン酸二無水物、2,3,3’,4’-ベンゾフェノンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、4,4’-オキシジフタル酸二無水物、2,3,6,7-ナフタレンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,4,5,7-ナフタレンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、2,2-ビス(3,4-ジカルボキシフェニル)プロパン二無水物、2,2-ビス(2,3-ジカルボキシフェニル)プロパン二無水物、2,2-ビス(3,4-ジカルボキシフェニル)ヘキサフルオロプロパン二無水物、1,3-ジフェニルヘキサフルオロプロパン-3,3,4,4-テトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,4,5,6-ナフタレンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、2,2’,3,3’-ジフェニルテトラカルボン酸二無水物、3,4,9,10-ペリレンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,2,4,5-ナフタレンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,4,5,8-ナフタレンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,8,9,10-フェナントレンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,1-ビス(2,3-ジカルボキシフェニル)エタン二無水物、1,1-ビス(3,4-ジカルボキシフェニル)エタン二無水物、1,2,3,4-ベンゼンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、ならびに、これらの炭素数1~6のアルキル及び炭素数1~6のアルコキシ誘導体が挙げられる。 Specific examples of tetracarboxylic dianhydride include pyromellitic dianhydride (PMDA), 3,3',4,4'-biphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3',4,4'- Diphenylsulfidetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3',4,4'-diphenylsulfonetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3',4,4'-benzophenonetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3' , 4,4'-diphenylmethanetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,2',3,3'-diphenylmethanetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,3,3',4'-biphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,3,3',4'-benzophenonetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 4,4'-oxydiphthalic dianhydride, 2,3,6,7-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,4,5 , 7-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,2-bis(3,4-dicarboxyphenyl)propane dianhydride, 2,2-bis(2,3-dicarboxyphenyl)propane dianhydride, 2 , 2-bis(3,4-dicarboxyphenyl)hexafluoropropane dianhydride, 1,3-diphenylhexafluoropropane-3,3,4,4-tetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,4,5, 6-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,2',3,3'-diphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,4,9,10-perylenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,2,4, 5-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,4,5,8-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,8,9,10-phenanthrenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,1-bis(2, 3-dicarboxyphenyl)ethane dianhydride, 1,1-bis(3,4-dicarboxyphenyl)ethane dianhydride, 1,2,3,4-benzenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, and these Examples include alkyl derivatives having 1 to 6 carbon atoms and alkoxy derivatives having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
また、国際公開第2017/038598号の段落0038に記載のテトラカルボン酸二無水物(DAA-1)~(DAA-5)も好ましい例として挙げられる。 Further, preferred examples include tetracarboxylic dianhydrides (DAA-1) to (DAA-5) described in paragraph 0038 of International Publication No. 2017/038598.
 式(2)において、R111とR115の少なくとも一方がOH基を有することも可能である。より具体的には、R111として、ビスアミノフェノール誘導体の残基が挙げられる。 In formula (2), at least one of R 111 and R 115 may have an OH group. More specifically, R 111 includes a residue of a bisaminophenol derivative.
 式(2)におけるR113及びR114は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の有機基を表す。1価の有機基としては、直鎖又は分岐のアルキル基、環状アルキル基、芳香族基、又はポリアルキレンオキシ基を含むことが好ましい。また、R113及びR114の少なくとも一方が重合性基を含むことが好ましく、両方が重合性基を含むことがより好ましい。R113及びR114の少なくとも一方が2以上の重合性基を含むことも好ましい。重合性基としては、熱、ラジカル等の作用により、架橋反応することが可能な基であって、ラジカル重合性基が好ましい。重合性基の具体例としては、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基、アルコキシメチル基、ヒドロキシメチル基、アシルオキシメチル基、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基、ベンゾオキサゾリル基、ブロックイソシアネート基、アミノ基が挙げられる。ポリイミド前駆体が有するラジカル重合性基としては、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基が好ましい。
 エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基としては、ビニル基、アリル基、イソアリル基、2-メチルアリル基、ビニル基と直接結合した芳香環を有する基(例えば、ビニルフェニル基など)、(メタ)アクリルアミド基、(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基、下記式(III)で表される基などが挙げられ、下記式(III)で表される基が好ましい。
R 113 and R 114 in formula (2) each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group. The monovalent organic group preferably includes a linear or branched alkyl group, a cyclic alkyl group, an aromatic group, or a polyalkyleneoxy group. Moreover, it is preferable that at least one of R 113 and R 114 contains a polymerizable group, and it is more preferable that both of them contain a polymerizable group. It is also preferable that at least one of R 113 and R 114 contains two or more polymerizable groups. The polymerizable group is a group that can undergo a crosslinking reaction by the action of heat, radicals, etc., and a radically polymerizable group is preferable. Specific examples of the polymerizable group include a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, an alkoxymethyl group, a hydroxymethyl group, an acyloxymethyl group, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, a benzoxazolyl group, a blocked isocyanate group, and an amino group. It will be done. The radically polymerizable group contained in the polyimide precursor is preferably a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
Examples of the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, an allyl group, an isoallyl group, a 2-methylallyl group, a group having an aromatic ring directly bonded to a vinyl group (for example, a vinyl phenyl group, etc.), and a (meth)acrylamide group. , (meth)acryloyloxy group, a group represented by the following formula (III), and the like, with the group represented by the following formula (III) being preferred.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
 式(III)において、R200は、水素原子、メチル基、エチル基又はメチロール基を表し、水素原子又はメチル基が好ましい。
 式(III)において、*は他の構造との結合部位を表す。
 式(III)において、R201は、炭素数2~12のアルキレン基、-CHCH(OH)CH-、シクロアルキレン基又はポリアルキレンオキシ基を表す。
 好適なR201の例は、エチレン基、プロピレン基、トリメチレン基、テトラメチレン基、ペンタメチレン基、ヘキサメチレン基、オクタメチレン基、ドデカメチレン基等のアルキレン基、1,2-ブタンジイル基、1,3-ブタンジイル基、-CHCH(OH)CH-、ポリアルキレンオキシ基が挙げられ、エチレン基、プロピレン基等のアルキレン基、-CHCH(OH)CH-、シクロヘキシル基、ポリアルキレンオキシ基がより好ましく、エチレン基、プロピレン基等のアルキレン基、又はポリアルキレンオキシ基が更に好ましい。
 本発明において、ポリアルキレンオキシ基とは、アルキレンオキシ基が2以上直接結合した基をいう。ポリアルキレンオキシ基に含まれる複数のアルキレンオキシ基におけるアルキレン基は、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 ポリアルキレンオキシ基が、アルキレン基が異なる複数種のアルキレンオキシ基を含む場合、ポリアルキレンオキシ基におけるアルキレンオキシ基の配列は、ランダムな配列であってもよいし、ブロックを有する配列であってもよいし、交互等のパターンを有する配列であってもよい。
 上記アルキレン基の炭素数(アルキレン基が置換基を有する場合、置換基の炭素数を含む)は、2以上であることが好ましく、2~10であることがより好ましく、2~6であることがより好ましく、2~5であることが更に好ましく、2~4であることが一層好ましく、2又は3であることがより更に好ましく、2であることが特に好ましい。
 また、上記アルキレン基は、置換基を有していてもよい。好ましい置換基としては、アルキル基、アリール基、ハロゲン原子等が挙げられる。
 また、ポリアルキレンオキシ基に含まれるアルキレンオキシ基の数(ポリアルキレンオキシ基の繰返し数)は、2~20が好ましく、2~10がより好ましく、2~6が更に好ましい。
 ポリアルキレンオキシ基としては、溶剤溶解性及び耐溶剤性の観点からは、ポリエチレンオキシ基、ポリプロピレンオキシ基、ポリトリメチレンオキシ基、ポリテトラメチレンオキシ基、又は、複数のエチレンオキシ基と複数のプロピレンオキシ基とが結合した基が好ましく、ポリエチレンオキシ基又はポリプロピレンオキシ基がより好ましく、ポリエチレンオキシ基が更に好ましい。上記複数のエチレンオキシ基と複数のプロピレンオキシ基とが結合した基において、エチレンオキシ基とプロピレンオキシ基とはランダムに配列していてもよいし、ブロックを形成して配列していてもよいし、交互等のパターン状に配列していてもよい。これらの基におけるエチレンオキシ基等の繰返し数の好ましい態様は上述の通りである。
In formula (III), R 200 represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group, or a methylol group, and preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
In formula (III), * represents a bonding site with another structure.
In formula (III), R 201 represents an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, -CH 2 CH(OH)CH 2 -, a cycloalkylene group or a polyalkyleneoxy group.
Suitable examples of R 201 include alkylene groups such as ethylene group, propylene group, trimethylene group, tetramethylene group, pentamethylene group, hexamethylene group, octamethylene group, and dodecamethylene group, 1,2-butanediyl group, 1, Examples include 3-butanediyl group, -CH 2 CH (OH) CH 2 -, polyalkyleneoxy group, alkylene groups such as ethylene group and propylene group, -CH 2 CH (OH) CH 2 -, cyclohexyl group, polyalkylene group. An oxy group is more preferred, and an alkylene group such as an ethylene group or a propylene group, or a polyalkyleneoxy group is even more preferred.
In the present invention, a polyalkyleneoxy group refers to a group in which two or more alkyleneoxy groups are directly bonded. The alkylene groups in the plurality of alkyleneoxy groups contained in the polyalkyleneoxy group may be the same or different.
When the polyalkyleneoxy group contains multiple types of alkyleneoxy groups with different alkylene groups, the arrangement of the alkyleneoxy groups in the polyalkyleneoxy group may be a random arrangement or an arrangement having blocks. Alternatively, an arrangement having an alternating pattern or the like may be used.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group (including the number of carbon atoms in the substituent when the alkylene group has a substituent) is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 2 to 10, and 2 to 6. is more preferable, 2 to 5 is even more preferable, 2 to 4 is even more preferable, 2 or 3 is even more preferable, and 2 is particularly preferable.
Further, the alkylene group may have a substituent. Preferred substituents include alkyl groups, aryl groups, halogen atoms, and the like.
Further, the number of alkyleneoxy groups contained in the polyalkyleneoxy group (the number of repeating polyalkyleneoxy groups) is preferably 2 to 20, more preferably 2 to 10, and even more preferably 2 to 6.
From the viewpoint of solvent solubility and solvent resistance, polyalkyleneoxy groups include polyethyleneoxy groups, polypropyleneoxy groups, polytrimethyleneoxy groups, polytetramethyleneoxy groups, or multiple ethyleneoxy groups and multiple propyleneoxy groups. A group bonded to an oxy group is preferable, a polyethyleneoxy group or a polypropyleneoxy group is more preferable, and a polyethyleneoxy group is even more preferable. In the above-mentioned group in which a plurality of ethyleneoxy groups and a plurality of propyleneoxy groups are bonded, the ethyleneoxy groups and propyleneoxy groups may be arranged randomly, or may be arranged to form blocks. , may be arranged in an alternating pattern. Preferred embodiments of the repeating number of ethyleneoxy groups, etc. in these groups are as described above.
 式(2)において、R113が水素原子である場合、又は、R114が水素原子である場合、ポリイミド前駆体はエチレン性不飽和結合を有する3級アミン化合物と対塩を形成していてもよい。このようなエチレン性不飽和結合を有する3級アミン化合物の例としては、N,N-ジメチルアミノプロピルメタクリレートが挙げられる。 In formula (2), when R 113 is a hydrogen atom or when R 114 is a hydrogen atom, even if the polyimide precursor forms a counter salt with a tertiary amine compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond. good. An example of a tertiary amine compound having such an ethylenically unsaturated bond is N,N-dimethylaminopropyl methacrylate.
 式(2)において、R113及びR114の少なくとも一方が、酸分解性基等の極性変換基であってもよい。酸分解性基としては、酸の作用で分解して、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基等のアルカリ可溶性基を生じるものであれば特に限定されないが、アセタール基、ケタール基、シリル基、シリルエーテル基、第三級アルキルエステル基等が好ましく、露光感度の観点からは、アセタール基又はケタール基がより好ましい。
 酸分解性基の具体例としては、tert-ブトキシカルボニル基、イソプロポキシカルボニル基、テトラヒドロピラニル基、テトラヒドロフラニル基、エトキシエチル基、メトキシエチル基、エトキシメチル基、トリメチルシリル基、tert-ブトキシカルボニルメチル基、トリメチルシリルエーテル基などが挙げられる。露光感度の観点からは、エトキシエチル基、又は、テトラヒドロフラニル基が好ましい。
In formula (2), at least one of R 113 and R 114 may be a polarity converting group such as an acid-decomposable group. The acid-decomposable group is not particularly limited as long as it decomposes under the action of an acid to produce an alkali-soluble group such as a phenolic hydroxy group or a carboxy group, but examples include an acetal group, a ketal group, a silyl group, and a silyl ether group. , a tertiary alkyl ester group, etc. are preferable, and from the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity, an acetal group or a ketal group is more preferable.
Specific examples of acid-decomposable groups include tert-butoxycarbonyl group, isopropoxycarbonyl group, tetrahydropyranyl group, tetrahydrofuranyl group, ethoxyethyl group, methoxyethyl group, ethoxymethyl group, trimethylsilyl group, tert-butoxycarbonylmethyl group. group, trimethylsilyl ether group, etc. From the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity, ethoxyethyl group or tetrahydrofuranyl group is preferred.
 ポリイミド前駆体は、構造中にフッ素原子を有することも好ましい。ポリイミド前駆体中のフッ素原子含有量は、10質量%以上が好ましく、また、20質量%以下が好ましい。 It is also preferable that the polyimide precursor has a fluorine atom in its structure. The fluorine atom content in the polyimide precursor is preferably 10% by mass or more, and preferably 20% by mass or less.
 また、基板との密着性を向上させる目的で、ポリイミド前駆体は、シロキサン構造を有する脂肪族基と共重合していてもよい。具体的には、ジアミンとして、ビス(3-アミノプロピル)テトラメチルジシロキサン、ビス(p-アミノフェニル)オクタメチルペンタシロキサンなどを用いる態様が挙げられる。 Furthermore, for the purpose of improving adhesion to the substrate, the polyimide precursor may be copolymerized with an aliphatic group having a siloxane structure. Specifically, examples include embodiments in which bis(3-aminopropyl)tetramethyldisiloxane, bis(p-aminophenyl)octamethylpentasiloxane, etc. are used as the diamine.
 ポリイミド前駆体におけるカルボキシ基の量は、0.05~0.30mmol/gであることが好ましく0.10~0.25mmol/gであることがより好ましい。
 また、ポリイミド前駆体におけるエステル化率(カルボキシ基とカルボキシエステルの合計モル量に対するカルボキシエステルのモル量)は、90%以上であることが好ましく、95%以上であることがより好ましく、98%以上であることが更に好ましい、上記エステル化率の上限は特に限定されず、100%以下であればよい。
The amount of carboxyl groups in the polyimide precursor is preferably 0.05 to 0.30 mmol/g, more preferably 0.10 to 0.25 mmol/g.
Further, the esterification rate (the molar amount of carboxy ester relative to the total molar amount of carboxy groups and carboxy ester) in the polyimide precursor is preferably 90% or more, more preferably 95% or more, and 98% or more. The upper limit of the esterification rate is not particularly limited, and may be 100% or less.
 式(2)で表される繰返し単位は、式(2-A)で表される繰返し単位であることが好ましい。すなわち、本発明で用いるポリイミド前駆体の少なくとも1種が、式(2-A)で表される繰返し単位を有する前駆体であることが好ましい。ポリイミド前駆体が式(2-A)で表される繰返し単位を含むことにより、露光ラチチュードの幅をより広げることが可能になる。
式(2-A)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013

 式(2-A)中、A及びAは、酸素原子を表し、R111及びR112は、それぞれ独立に、2価の有機基を表し、R113及びR114は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、R113及びR114の少なくとも一方は、重合性基を含む基であり、両方が重合性基を含む基であることが好ましい。
The repeating unit represented by formula (2) is preferably a repeating unit represented by formula (2-A). That is, it is preferable that at least one type of polyimide precursor used in the present invention is a precursor having a repeating unit represented by formula (2-A). When the polyimide precursor contains a repeating unit represented by formula (2-A), it becomes possible to further widen the exposure latitude.
Formula (2-A)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013

In formula (2-A), A 1 and A 2 represent an oxygen atom, R 111 and R 112 each independently represent a divalent organic group, and R 113 and R 114 each independently, It represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, and at least one of R 113 and R 114 is a group containing a polymerizable group, and preferably both are groups containing a polymerizable group.
 A、A、R111、R113及びR114は、それぞれ独立に、式(2)におけるA、A、R111、R113及びR114と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。R112は、式(5)におけるR112と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 A 1 , A 2 , R 111 , R 113 and R 114 each independently have the same meaning as A 1 , A 2 , R 111 , R 113 and R 114 in formula (2), and their preferred ranges are also the same. . R 112 has the same meaning as R 112 in formula (5), and the preferred ranges are also the same.
 ポリイミド前駆体は、式(2)で表される繰返し単位を1種含んでいてもよいが、2種以上で含んでいてもよい。また、式(2)で表される繰返し単位の構造異性体を含んでいてもよい。ポリイミド前駆体は、上記式(2)の繰返し単位のほかに、他の種類の繰返し単位をも含んでいてもよい。 The polyimide precursor may contain one type of repeating unit represented by formula (2), or may contain two or more types. Furthermore, it may contain structural isomers of the repeating unit represented by formula (2). In addition to the repeating unit of formula (2) above, the polyimide precursor may also contain other types of repeating units.
 本発明におけるポリイミド前駆体の一実施形態として、式(2)で表される繰返し単位の含有量が、全繰返し単位の50モル%以上である態様が挙げられる。上記合計含有量は、70モル%以上であることがより好ましく、90モル%以上であることが更に好ましく、90モル%超であることが特に好ましい。上記合計含有量の上限は、特に限定されず、末端を除くポリイミド前駆体における全ての繰返し単位が、式(2)で表される繰返し単位であってもよい。 An embodiment of the polyimide precursor in the present invention includes an embodiment in which the content of the repeating unit represented by formula (2) is 50 mol% or more of the total repeating units. The total content is more preferably 70 mol% or more, still more preferably 90 mol% or more, and particularly preferably more than 90 mol%. The upper limit of the total content is not particularly limited, and all repeating units in the polyimide precursor excluding the terminal may be repeating units represented by formula (2).
 ポリイミド前駆体の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、5,000~100,000が好ましく、10,000~50,000がより好ましく、15,000~40,000が更に好ましい。ポリイミド前駆体の数平均分子量(Mn)は、2,000~40,000が好ましく、3,000~30,000がより好ましく、4,000~20,000が更に好ましい。
 上記ポリイミド前駆体の分子量の分散度は、1.5以上が好ましく、1.8以上がより好ましく、2.0以上であることが更に好ましい。ポリイミド前駆体の分子量の分散度の上限値は特に定めるものではないが、例えば、7.0以下が好ましく、6.5以下がより好ましく、6.0以下が更に好ましい。
 本明細書において、分子量の分散度とは、重量平均分子量/数平均分子量により算出される値である。
 樹脂組成物が特定樹脂として複数種のポリイミド前駆体を含む場合、少なくとも1種のポリイミド前駆体の重量平均分子量、数平均分子量、及び、分散度が上記範囲であることが好ましい。また、上記複数種のポリイミド前駆体を1つの樹脂として算出した重量平均分子量、数平均分子量、及び、分散度が、それぞれ、上記範囲内であることも好ましい。
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polyimide precursor is preferably 5,000 to 100,000, more preferably 10,000 to 50,000, and even more preferably 15,000 to 40,000. The number average molecular weight (Mn) of the polyimide precursor is preferably 2,000 to 40,000, more preferably 3,000 to 30,000, and even more preferably 4,000 to 20,000.
The molecular weight dispersity of the polyimide precursor is preferably 1.5 or more, more preferably 1.8 or more, and even more preferably 2.0 or more. Although the upper limit of the degree of molecular weight dispersion of the polyimide precursor is not particularly determined, for example, it is preferably 7.0 or less, more preferably 6.5 or less, and even more preferably 6.0 or less.
In this specification, the molecular weight dispersity is a value calculated from weight average molecular weight/number average molecular weight.
When the resin composition contains multiple types of polyimide precursors as the specific resin, it is preferable that the weight average molecular weight, number average molecular weight, and degree of dispersion of at least one type of polyimide precursor are within the above ranges. Moreover, it is also preferable that the weight average molecular weight, number average molecular weight, and degree of dispersion calculated from the plurality of types of polyimide precursors as one resin are each within the above ranges.
〔ポリイミド〕
 本発明に用いられるポリイミドは、アルカリ可溶性ポリイミドであってもよく、有機溶剤を主成分とする現像液に対して可溶なポリイミドであってもよい。
 本明細書において、アルカリ可溶性ポリイミドとは、100gの2.38質量%テトラメチルアンモニウム水溶液に対し、23℃で0.1g以上溶解するポリイミドをいい、パターン形成性の観点からは、0.5g以上溶解するポリイミドであることが好ましく、1.0g以上溶解するポリイミドであることが更に好ましい。上記溶解量の上限は特に限定されないが、100g以下であることが好ましい。
 ポリイミドは、得られる有機膜の膜強度及び絶縁性の観点からは、複数個のイミド構造を主鎖に有するポリイミドであることが好ましい。
[Polyimide]
The polyimide used in the present invention may be an alkali-soluble polyimide, or may be a polyimide soluble in a developer containing an organic solvent as a main component.
In this specification, the alkali-soluble polyimide refers to a polyimide that dissolves 0.1 g or more at 23°C in 100 g of a 2.38% by mass tetramethylammonium aqueous solution, and from the perspective of pattern formation, 0.5 g or more. The polyimide is preferably a polyimide that dissolves, and more preferably a polyimide that dissolves 1.0 g or more. The upper limit of the amount dissolved is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100 g or less.
The polyimide is preferably a polyimide having a plurality of imide structures in its main chain from the viewpoint of film strength and insulation properties of the organic film obtained.
-フッ素原子-
 得られる有機膜の膜強度の観点からは、ポリイミドは、フッ素原子を有することも好ましい。
 フッ素原子は、例えば、後述する式(4)で表される繰返し単位におけるR132、又は、後述する式(4)で表される繰返し単位におけるR131に含まれることが好ましく、後述する式(4)で表される繰返し単位におけるR132、又は、後述する式(4)で表される繰返し単位におけるR131にフッ化アルキル基として含まれることがより好ましい。
 ポリイミドの全質量に対するフッ素原子の量は、5質量%以上が好ましく、また、20質量%以下が好ましい。
-Fluorine atom-
From the viewpoint of the film strength of the organic film obtained, it is also preferable that the polyimide has a fluorine atom.
The fluorine atom is preferably included in, for example, R 132 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later or R 131 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later, and is preferably included in R 131 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later. It is more preferable that R 132 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) or R 131 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described below be included as a fluorinated alkyl group.
The amount of fluorine atoms based on the total mass of the polyimide is preferably 5% by mass or more, and preferably 20% by mass or less.
-ケイ素原子-
 得られる有機膜の膜強度の観点からは、ポリイミドは、ケイ素原子を有することも好ましい。
 ケイ素原子は、例えば、後述する式(4)で表される繰返し単位におけるR131に含まれることが好ましく、後述する式(4)で表される繰返し単位におけるR131に後述する有機変性(ポリ)シロキサン構造として含まれることがより好ましい。
 上記ケイ素原子又は上記有機変性(ポリ)シロキサン構造はポリイミドの側鎖に含まれていてもよいが、ポリイミドの主鎖に含まれることが好ましい。
 ポリイミドの全質量に対するケイ素原子の量は、1質量%以上が好ましく、20質量%以下がより好ましい。
-Silicon atom-
From the viewpoint of the film strength of the resulting organic film, it is also preferable that the polyimide contains silicon atoms.
The silicon atom is preferably included in R 131 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later, and is preferably included in R 131 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later. ) More preferably, it is included as a siloxane structure.
The silicon atom or the organically modified (poly)siloxane structure may be included in the side chain of the polyimide, but is preferably included in the main chain of the polyimide.
The amount of silicon atoms based on the total mass of the polyimide is preferably 1% by mass or more, and more preferably 20% by mass or less.
-エチレン性不飽和結合-
 得られる有機膜の膜強度の観点からは、ポリイミドは、エチレン性不飽和結合を有することが好ましい。
 ポリイミドは、エチレン性不飽和結合を主鎖末端に有していてもよいし、側鎖に有していてもよいが、側鎖に有することが好ましい。
 上記エチレン性不飽和結合は、ラジカル重合性を有することが好ましい。
 エチレン性不飽和結合は、後述する式(4)で表される繰返し単位におけるR132又はR131に含まれることが好ましく、R132又はR131にエチレン性不飽和結合を有する基として含まれることがより好ましい。
 これらの中でも、エチレン性不飽和結合は、後述する式(4)で表される繰返し単位におけるR131に含まれることが好ましく、R131にエチレン性不飽和結合を有する基として含まれることがより好ましい。
 エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基としては、ビニル基、アリル基、ビニルフェニル基等の芳香環に直接結合した、置換されていてもよいビニル基を有する基、(メタ)アクリルアミド基、(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基、下記式(IV)で表される基などが挙げられる。
-Ethylenically unsaturated bond-
From the viewpoint of the film strength of the resulting organic film, the polyimide preferably has ethylenically unsaturated bonds.
Polyimide may have an ethylenically unsaturated bond at the end of the main chain or in a side chain, but it is preferable to have it in a side chain.
The ethylenically unsaturated bond preferably has radical polymerizability.
The ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferably included in R 132 or R 131 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described below, and is preferably included in R 132 or R 131 as a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond. is more preferable.
Among these, the ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferably included in R 131 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described below, and more preferably included in R 131 as a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond. preferable.
Examples of groups having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include groups having an optionally substituted vinyl group directly bonded to an aromatic ring such as a vinyl group, an allyl group, or a vinyl phenyl group, a (meth)acrylamide group, and a (meth)acrylamide group. Examples include an acryloyloxy group and a group represented by the following formula (IV).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
 式(IV)中、R20は、水素原子、メチル基、エチル基又はメチロール基を表し、水素原子又はメチル基が好ましい。 In formula (IV), R 20 represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group, or a methylol group, and preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
 式(IV)中、R21は、炭素数2~12のアルキレン基、-O-CHCH(OH)CH-、-C(=O)O-、-O(C=O)NH-、炭素数2~30の(ポリ)アルキレンオキシ基(アルキレン基の炭素数は2~12が好ましく、2~6がより好ましく、2又は3が特に好ましい、アルキレンオキシ基の繰返し数は1~12が好ましく、1~6がより好ましく、1~3が特に好ましい)、又はこれらを2以上組み合わせた基を表す。
 上記炭素数2~12のアルキレン基としては、直鎖状、分岐鎖状、環状又はこれらの組み合わせにより表されるアルキレン基のいずれであってもよい。
 上記炭素数2~12のアルキレン基としては、炭素数2~8のアルキレン基が好ましく、炭素数2~4のアルキレン基がより好ましい。
In formula (IV), R 21 is an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, -O-CH 2 CH(OH)CH 2 -, -C(=O)O-, -O(C=O)NH- , a (poly)alkyleneoxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms (the number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group is preferably 2 to 12, more preferably 2 to 6, particularly preferably 2 or 3, the number of repeating alkyleneoxy groups is 1 to 12) is preferred, 1 to 6 are more preferred, and 1 to 3 are particularly preferred), or a combination of two or more of these.
The alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms may be linear, branched, cyclic, or a combination thereof.
The alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms is preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms.
 これらの中でも、R21は下記式(R1)~式(R3)のいずれかで表される基であることが好ましく、式(R1)で表される基であることがより好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
 式(R1)~(R3)中、Lは単結合、又は、炭素数2~12のアルキレン基、炭素数2~30の(ポリ)アルキレンオキシ基若しくはこれらを2以上結合した基を表し、Xは酸素原子又は硫黄原子を表し、*は他の構造との結合部位を表し、●は式(IV)中のR21が結合する酸素原子との結合部位を表す。
 式(R1)~(R3)中、Lとしての炭素数2~12のアルキレン基、又は、炭素数2~30の(ポリ)アルキレンオキシ基の好ましい態様は、式(IV)のR21としての炭素数2~12のアルキレン基、又は、炭素数2~30の(ポリ)アルキレンオキシ基の好ましい態様と同様である。
 式(R1)中、Xは酸素原子であることが好ましい。
 式(R1)~(R3)中、*は式(IV)中の*と同義であり、好ましい態様も同様である。
 式(R1)で表される構造は、例えば、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基等のヒドロキシ基を有するポリイミドと、イソシアナト基及びエチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物(例えば、2-イソシアナトエチルメタクリレート等)とを反応することにより得られる。
 式(R2)で表される構造は、例えば、カルボキシ基を有するポリイミドと、ヒドロキシ基及びエチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物(例えば、2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート等)とを反応することにより得られる。
 式(R3)で表される構造は、例えば、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基等のヒドロキシ基を有するポリイミドと、グリシジル基及びエチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物(例えば、グリシジルメタクリレート等)とを反応することにより得られる。
Among these, R 21 is preferably a group represented by any of the following formulas (R1) to (R3), and more preferably a group represented by formula (R1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
In formulas (R1) to (R3), L represents a single bond, an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, a (poly)alkyleneoxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, or a group combining two or more of these; represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, * represents a bonding site with another structure, and ● represents a bonding site with the oxygen atom to which R 21 in formula (IV) is bonded.
In formulas (R1) to (R3), a preferred embodiment of the alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms or the (poly)alkyleneoxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms as L is R 21 in formula (IV). The preferred embodiments are the same as the alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms or the (poly)alkyleneoxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms.
In formula (R1), X is preferably an oxygen atom.
In formulas (R1) to (R3), * has the same meaning as * in formula (IV), and preferred embodiments are also the same.
The structure represented by formula (R1) includes, for example, a polyimide having a hydroxy group such as a phenolic hydroxy group, and a compound having an isocyanato group and an ethylenically unsaturated bond (for example, 2-isocyanatoethyl methacrylate). Obtained by reaction.
The structure represented by formula (R2) can be obtained, for example, by reacting a polyimide having a carboxyl group with a compound having a hydroxyl group and an ethylenically unsaturated bond (for example, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, etc.).
The structure represented by formula (R3) can be obtained by, for example, reacting a polyimide having a hydroxy group such as a phenolic hydroxy group with a compound having a glycidyl group and an ethylenically unsaturated bond (for example, glycidyl methacrylate). can get.
 式(IV)中、*は他の構造との結合部位を表し、ポリイミドの主鎖との結合部位であることが好ましい。 In formula (IV), * represents a bonding site with another structure, and is preferably a bonding site with the main chain of polyimide.
 ポリイミドの全質量に対するエチレン性不飽和結合の量は、0.0001~0.1mol/gであることが好ましく、0.0005~0.05mol/gであることがより好ましい。 The amount of ethylenically unsaturated bonds relative to the total mass of the polyimide is preferably 0.0001 to 0.1 mol/g, more preferably 0.0005 to 0.05 mol/g.
-エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基以外の重合性基-
 ポリイミドは、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基以外の重合性基を有していてもよい。
 エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基以外の重合性基としては、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基等の環状エーテル基、メトキシメチル基等のアルコキシメチル基、メチロール基等が挙げられる。
 エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基以外の重合性基は、例えば、後述する式(4)で表される繰返し単位におけるR131に含まれることが好ましい。
 ポリイミドの全質量に対するエチレン性不飽和結合を有する基以外の重合性基の量は、0.0001~0.1mol/gであることが好ましく、0.001~0.05mol/gであることがより好ましい。
- Polymerizable groups other than groups having ethylenically unsaturated bonds -
The polyimide may have a polymerizable group other than the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
Examples of polymerizable groups other than groups having ethylenically unsaturated bonds include cyclic ether groups such as epoxy groups and oxetanyl groups, alkoxymethyl groups such as methoxymethyl groups, and methylol groups.
A polymerizable group other than the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferably included in R 131 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described below, for example.
The amount of polymerizable groups other than the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond relative to the total mass of the polyimide is preferably 0.0001 to 0.1 mol/g, and preferably 0.001 to 0.05 mol/g. More preferred.
-極性変換基-
 ポリイミドは、酸分解性基等の極性変換基を有していてもよい。ポリイミドにおける酸分解性基は、上述の式(2)におけるR113及びR114において説明した酸分解性基と同様であり、好ましい態様も同様である。
 極性変換基は、例えば、後述する式(4)で表される繰返し単位におけるR131、R132、ポリイミドの末端などに含まれる。
-Polar conversion group-
The polyimide may have a polarity converting group such as an acid-decomposable group. The acid-decomposable group in the polyimide is the same as the acid-decomposable group explained for R 113 and R 114 in the above formula (2), and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
The polarity converting group is contained, for example, in R 131 and R 132 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described below, the terminal of polyimide, and the like.
-酸価-
 ポリイミドがアルカリ現像に供される場合、現像性を向上する観点からは、ポリイミドの酸価は、30mgKOH/g以上であることが好ましく、50mgKOH/g以上であることがより好ましく、70mgKOH/g以上であることが更に好ましい。
 上記酸価は500mgKOH/g以下であることが好ましく、400mgKOH/g以下であることがより好ましく、200mgKOH/g以下であることが更に好ましい。
 ポリイミドが有機溶剤を主成分とする現像液を用いた現像(例えば、「溶剤現像」)に供される場合、ポリイミドの酸価は、1~35mgKOH/gが好ましく、2~30mgKOH/gがより好ましく、5~20mgKOH/gが更に好ましい。
 上記酸価は、公知の方法により測定され、例えば、JIS K 0070:1992に記載の方法により測定される。
 ポリイミドに含まれる酸基としては、保存安定性及び現像性の両立の観点から、pKaが0~10である酸基が好ましく、3~8である酸基がより好ましい。
 pKaとは、酸から水素イオンが放出される解離反応を考え、その平衡定数Kaをその負の常用対数pKaによって表したものである。本明細書において、pKaは、特に断らない限り、ACD/ChemSketch(登録商標)による計算値とする。pKaは、日本化学会編「改定5版 化学便覧 基礎編」に掲載の値を参照してもよい。
 酸基が例えばリン酸等の多価の酸である場合、上記pKaは第一解離定数である。
 このような酸基として、ポリイミドは、カルボキシ基、及び、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基からなる群より選ばれた少なくとも1種を含むことが好ましく、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基を含むことがより好ましい。
-Acid value-
When polyimide is subjected to alkaline development, from the viewpoint of improving developability, the acid value of the polyimide is preferably 30 mgKOH/g or more, more preferably 50 mgKOH/g or more, and 70 mgKOH/g or more. It is more preferable that
The acid value is preferably 500 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 400 mgKOH/g or less, and even more preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less.
When polyimide is subjected to development using a developer containing an organic solvent as a main component (for example, "solvent development"), the acid value of the polyimide is preferably 1 to 35 mgKOH/g, more preferably 2 to 30 mgKOH/g. Preferably, 5 to 20 mgKOH/g is more preferable.
The acid value is measured by a known method, for example, by the method described in JIS K 0070:1992.
The acid group contained in the polyimide is preferably an acid group having a pKa of 0 to 10, more preferably an acid group having a pKa of 3 to 8, from the viewpoint of achieving both storage stability and developability.
pKa is a dissociation reaction in which hydrogen ions are released from an acid, and its equilibrium constant Ka is expressed by its negative common logarithm pKa. In this specification, pKa is a value calculated by ACD/ChemSketch (registered trademark) unless otherwise specified. For pKa, the value published in "Revised 5th Edition Chemistry Handbook Basic Edition" edited by the Chemical Society of Japan may be referred to.
When the acid group is a polyhydric acid such as phosphoric acid, the above pKa is the first dissociation constant.
As such an acid group, the polyimide preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of a carboxy group and a phenolic hydroxy group, and more preferably a phenolic hydroxy group.
-フェノール性ヒドロキシ基-
 アルカリ現像液による現像速度を適切なものとする観点からは、ポリイミドは、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基を有することが好ましい。
 ポリイミドは、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基を主鎖末端に有してもよいし、側鎖に有してもよい。
 フェノール性ヒドロキシ基は、例えば、後述する式(4)で表される繰返し単位におけるR132又はR131に含まれることが好ましい。
 ポリイミドの全質量に対するフェノール性ヒドロキシ基の量は、0.1~30mol/gであることが好ましく、1~20mol/gであることがより好ましい。
-Phenolic hydroxy group-
From the viewpoint of appropriate development speed with an alkaline developer, it is preferable that the polyimide has a phenolic hydroxy group.
The polyimide may have a phenolic hydroxy group at the end of the main chain or at the side chain.
The phenolic hydroxy group is preferably included, for example, in R 132 or R 131 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described below.
The amount of phenolic hydroxy groups based on the total mass of the polyimide is preferably 0.1 to 30 mol/g, more preferably 1 to 20 mol/g.
 本発明で用いるポリイミドとしては、イミド構造を有する高分子化合物であれば、特に限定はないが、下記式(4)で表される繰返し単位を含むことが好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016

 式(4)中、R131は、2価の有機基を表し、R132は、4価の有機基を表す。
 重合性基を有する場合、重合性基は、R131及びR132の少なくとも一方に位置していてもよいし、下記式(4-1)又は式(4-2)に示すようにポリイミドの末端に位置していてもよい。
式(4-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017

式(4-1)中、R133は重合性基であり、他の基は式(4)と同義である。
式(4-2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018

 R134及びR135の少なくとも一方は重合性基であり、重合性基でない場合は有機基であり、他の基は式(4)と同義である。
The polyimide used in the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is a polymer compound having an imide structure, but it preferably contains a repeating unit represented by the following formula (4).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016

In formula (4), R 131 represents a divalent organic group, and R 132 represents a tetravalent organic group.
When having a polymerizable group, the polymerizable group may be located at at least one of R 131 and R 132 , or may be located at the terminal end of the polyimide as shown in the following formula (4-1) or formula (4-2). It may be located in
Formula (4-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017

In formula (4-1), R 133 is a polymerizable group, and the other groups have the same meanings as in formula (4).
Formula (4-2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018

At least one of R 134 and R 135 is a polymerizable group, and if it is not a polymerizable group, it is an organic group, and the other groups have the same meanings as in formula (4).
 重合性基としては、上述のエチレン性不飽和結合を含む基、又は、上述のエチレン性不飽和結合を有する基以外の架橋性基が挙げられる。
 R131は、2価の有機基を表す。2価の有機基としては、式(2)におけるR111と同様のものが例示され、好ましい範囲も同様である。
 R131としては、ジアミンのアミノ基の除去後に残存するジアミン残基が挙げられる。ジアミンとしては、脂肪族、環式脂肪族又は芳香族ジアミンなどが挙げられる。具体的な例としては、ポリイミド前駆体の式(2)中のR111の例が挙げられる。
Examples of the polymerizable group include the above-mentioned group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond, or a crosslinkable group other than the above-mentioned group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
R 131 represents a divalent organic group. Examples of the divalent organic group include those similar to R 111 in formula (2), and the preferred ranges are also the same.
Examples of R 131 include diamine residues remaining after removal of the amino group of diamine. Examples of diamines include aliphatic, cycloaliphatic, and aromatic diamines. A specific example is R 111 in formula (2) of the polyimide precursor.
 R131は、少なくとも2つのアルキレングリコール単位を主鎖にもつジアミン残基であることが、焼成時における反りの発生をより効果的に抑制する点で好ましい。より好ましくは、エチレングリコール鎖、プロピレングリコール鎖のいずれか又は両方を一分子中にあわせて2つ以上含むジアミン残基であり、更に好ましくは上記ジアミンであって、芳香環を含まないジアミン残基である。 R 131 is preferably a diamine residue having at least two alkylene glycol units in its main chain in order to more effectively suppress the occurrence of warpage during firing. More preferred are diamine residues containing two or more ethylene glycol chains, propylene glycol chains, or both in one molecule, and even more preferred are diamine residues containing no aromatic ring among the above diamines. It is.
 エチレングリコール鎖、プロピレングリコール鎖のいずれか又は両方を一分子中にあわせて2つ以上含むジアミンとしては、ジェファーミン(登録商標)KH-511、ED-600、ED-900、ED-2003、EDR-148、EDR-176、D-200、D-400、D-2000、D-4000(以上商品名、HUNTSMAN(株)製)、1-(2-(2-(2-アミノプロポキシ)エトキシ)プロポキシ)プロパン-2-アミン、1-(1-(1-(2-アミノプロポキシ)プロパン-2-イル)オキシ)プロパン-2-アミンなどが挙げられるが、これらに限定されない。 Examples of diamines containing two or more ethylene glycol chains, propylene glycol chains, or both in one molecule include Jeffamine (registered trademark) KH-511, ED-600, ED-900, ED-2003, and EDR. 1-(2-(2-(2-aminopropoxy)ethoxy) Examples include, but are not limited to, propoxy)propan-2-amine, 1-(1-(1-(2-aminopropoxy)propan-2-yl)oxy)propan-2-amine, and the like.
 R132は、4価の有機基を表す。4価の有機基としては、式(2)におけるR115と同様のものが例示され、好ましい範囲も同様である。
 例えば、R115として例示される4価の有機基の4つの結合子が、式(4)中の4つの-C(=O)-の部分と結合して縮合環を形成する。
R 132 represents a tetravalent organic group. Examples of the tetravalent organic group include those similar to R 115 in formula (2), and the preferred ranges are also the same.
For example, four bonds of a tetravalent organic group exemplified as R 115 combine with four -C(=O)- moieties in formula (4) to form a condensed ring.
 R132は、テトラカルボン酸二無水物から無水物基の除去後に残存するテトラカルボン酸残基などが挙げられる。具体的な例としては、ポリイミド前駆体の式(2)中のR115の例が挙げられる。有機膜の強度の観点から、R132は1~4つの芳香環を有する芳香族ジアミン残基であることが好ましい。 Examples of R 132 include a tetracarboxylic acid residue remaining after the anhydride group is removed from the tetracarboxylic dianhydride. A specific example is R 115 in formula (2) of the polyimide precursor. From the viewpoint of the strength of the organic film, R 132 is preferably an aromatic diamine residue having 1 to 4 aromatic rings.
 R131とR132の少なくとも一方にOH基を有することも好ましい。より具体的には、R131として、2,2-ビス(3-ヒドロキシ-4-アミノフェニル)プロパン、2,2-ビス(3-ヒドロキシ-4-アミノフェニル)ヘキサフルオロプロパン、2,2-ビス(3-アミノ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロパン、2,2-ビス(3-アミノ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)ヘキサフルオロプロパン、上記の(DA-1)~(DA-18)が好ましい例として挙げられ、R132として、上記の(DAA-1)~(DAA-5)がより好ましい例として挙げられる。 It is also preferable that at least one of R 131 and R 132 has an OH group. More specifically, as R 131 , 2,2-bis(3-hydroxy-4-aminophenyl)propane, 2,2-bis(3-hydroxy-4-aminophenyl)hexafluoropropane, 2,2- Bis(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)propane, 2,2-bis(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)hexafluoropropane, and the above (DA-1) to (DA-18) are listed as preferred examples. As R 132 , the above (DAA-1) to (DAA-5) are mentioned as more preferable examples.
 ポリイミドは、構造中にフッ素原子を有することも好ましい。ポリイミド中のフッ素原子の含有量は10質量%以上が好ましく、20質量%以下がより好ましい。 It is also preferable that the polyimide has a fluorine atom in its structure. The content of fluorine atoms in the polyimide is preferably 10% by mass or more, and more preferably 20% by mass or less.
 基板との密着性を向上させる目的で、ポリイミドは、シロキサン構造を有する脂肪族の基を共重合してもよい。具体的には、ジアミン成分として、ビス(3-アミノプロピル)テトラメチルジシロキサン、ビス(p-アミノフェニル)オクタメチルペンタシロキサンなどが挙げられる。 For the purpose of improving adhesion to the substrate, the polyimide may be copolymerized with an aliphatic group having a siloxane structure. Specifically, examples of the diamine component include bis(3-aminopropyl)tetramethyldisiloxane and bis(p-aminophenyl)octamethylpentasiloxane.
 樹脂組成物の保存安定性を向上させるため、ポリイミドの主鎖末端はモノアミン、酸無水物、モノカルボン酸、モノ酸クロリド化合物、モノ活性エステル化合物などの末端封止剤により封止されていることが好ましい。これらのうち、モノアミンを用いることがより好ましく、モノアミンの好ましい化合物としては、アニリン、2-エチニルアニリン、3-エチニルアニリン、4-エチニルアニリン、5-アミノ-8-ヒドロキシキノリン、1-ヒドロキシ-7-アミノナフタレン、1-ヒドロキシ-6-アミノナフタレン、1-ヒドロキシ-5-アミノナフタレン、1-ヒドロキシ-4-アミノナフタレン、2-ヒドロキシ-7-アミノナフタレン、2-ヒドロキシ-6-アミノナフタレン、2-ヒドロキシ-5-アミノナフタレン、1-カルボキシ-7-アミノナフタレン、1-カルボキシ-6-アミノナフタレン、1-カルボキシ-5-アミノナフタレン、2-カルボキシ-7-アミノナフタレン、2-カルボキシ-6-アミノナフタレン、2-カルボキシ-5-アミノナフタレン、2-アミノ安息香酸、3-アミノ安息香酸、4-アミノ安息香酸、4-アミノサリチル酸、5-アミノサリチル酸、6-アミノサリチル酸、2-アミノベンゼンスルホン酸、3-アミノベンゼンスルホン酸、4-アミノベンゼンスルホン酸、3-アミノ-4,6-ジヒドロキシピリミジン、2-アミノフェノール、3-アミノフェノール、4-アミノフェノール、2-アミノチオフェノール、3-アミノチオフェノール、4-アミノチオフェノールなどが挙げられる。これらを2種以上用いてもよく、複数の末端封止剤を反応させることにより、複数の異なる末端基を導入してもよい。 In order to improve the storage stability of the resin composition, the main chain end of the polyimide must be capped with a terminal capping agent such as a monoamine, acid anhydride, monocarboxylic acid, monoacid chloride compound, or monoactive ester compound. is preferred. Among these, it is more preferable to use monoamines, and preferable monoamine compounds include aniline, 2-ethynylaniline, 3-ethynylaniline, 4-ethynylaniline, 5-amino-8-hydroxyquinoline, 1-hydroxy-7 -aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-4-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 2 -Hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-6- Aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 2-aminobenzoic acid, 3-aminobenzoic acid, 4-aminobenzoic acid, 4-aminosalicylic acid, 5-aminosalicylic acid, 6-aminosalicylic acid, 2-aminobenzenesulfone acid, 3-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 4-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 3-amino-4,6-dihydroxypyrimidine, 2-aminophenol, 3-aminophenol, 4-aminophenol, 2-aminothiophenol, 3- Examples include aminothiophenol and 4-aminothiophenol. Two or more types of these may be used, and a plurality of different terminal groups may be introduced by reacting a plurality of terminal capping agents.
-イミド化率(閉環率)-
 ポリイミドのイミド化率(「閉環率」ともいう)は、得られる有機膜の膜強度、絶縁性等の観点からは、70%以上であることが好ましく、80%以上であることがより好ましく、90%以上であることがより好ましい。
 上記イミド化率の上限は特に限定されず、100%以下であればよい。
 上記イミド化率は、例えば下記方法により測定される。
 ポリイミドの赤外吸収スペクトルを測定し、イミド構造由来の吸収ピークである1377cm-1付近のピーク強度P1を求める。次に、そのポリイミドを350℃で1時間熱処理した後、再度、赤外吸収スペクトルを測定し、1377cm-1付近のピーク強度P2を求める。得られたピーク強度P1、P2を用い、下記式に基づいて、ポリイミドのイミド化率を求めることができる。
 イミド化率(%)=(ピーク強度P1/ピーク強度P2)×100
-Imidization rate (ring closure rate)-
The imidization rate (also referred to as "ring closure rate") of polyimide is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, from the viewpoint of film strength, insulation properties, etc. of the organic film obtained. More preferably, it is 90% or more.
The upper limit of the imidization rate is not particularly limited, and may be 100% or less.
The above imidization rate is measured, for example, by the following method.
The infrared absorption spectrum of polyimide is measured, and the peak intensity P1 near 1377 cm −1 , which is an absorption peak derived from the imide structure, is determined. Next, the polyimide is heat-treated at 350° C. for 1 hour, and then the infrared absorption spectrum is measured again to determine the peak intensity P2 around 1377 cm −1 . Using the obtained peak intensities P1 and P2, the imidization rate of polyimide can be determined based on the following formula.
Imidization rate (%) = (peak intensity P1/peak intensity P2) x 100
 ポリイミドは、繰り返し単位のすべてがR131及びR132の組み合わせが同じである上記式(4)で表される繰返し単位を含んでいてもよく、R131及びR132の組み合わせが異なる2種以上を含む上記式(4)で表される繰返し単位を含んでいてもよい。ポリイミドは、上記式(4)で表される繰返し単位のほかに、他の種類の繰返し単位を含んでいてもよい。他の種類の繰返し単位としては、例えば、上述の式(2)で表される繰返し単位等が挙げられる。 The polyimide may include repeating units represented by the above formula (4) in which all of the repeating units have the same combination of R 131 and R 132 , or two or more repeating units with different combinations of R 131 and R 132 . The repeating unit represented by the above formula (4) may be included. In addition to the repeating unit represented by the above formula (4), the polyimide may contain other types of repeating units. Other types of repeating units include, for example, the repeating unit represented by the above formula (2).
 ポリイミドは、例えば、低温中でテトラカルボン酸二無水物とジアミン(一部をモノアミンである末端封止剤に置換)を反応させる方法、低温中でテトラカルボン酸二無水物(一部を酸無水物又はモノ酸クロリド化合物又はモノ活性エステル化合物である末端封止剤に置換)とジアミンを反応させる方法、テトラカルボン酸二無水物とアルコールとによりジエステルを得、その後ジアミン(一部をモノアミンである末端封止剤に置換)と縮合剤の存在下で反応させる方法、テトラカルボン酸二無水物とアルコールとによりジエステルを得、その後残りのジカルボン酸を酸クロリド化し、ジアミン(一部をモノアミンである末端封止剤に置換)と反応させる方法などの方法を利用して、ポリイミド前駆体を得、これを、既知のイミド化反応法を用いて完全イミド化させる方法、又は、途中でイミド化反応を停止し、一部イミド構造を導入する方法、更には、完全イミド化したポリマーと、そのポリイミド前駆体をブレンドする事によって、一部イミド構造を導入する方法を利用して合成することができる。また、その他公知のポリイミドの合成方法を適用することもできる。 Polyimide can be produced, for example, by reacting tetracarboxylic dianhydride and diamine (partly replaced with an acid anhydride) at low temperature; A method of reacting a diester with a diamine (substituted with an end-capping agent that is a compound or a monoacid chloride compound or a monoactive ester compound) with a diamine, and a diester is obtained with a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and an alcohol, and then a diamine (partly of which is a monoamine) is reacted with a diamine. A diester is obtained by reacting tetracarboxylic dianhydride and alcohol in the presence of a condensing agent, and then the remaining dicarboxylic acid is converted into an acid chloride, and a diamine (some of which is substituted with a monoamine) is reacted with a condensing agent. A polyimide precursor is obtained using a method such as reacting with a terminal capping agent), and this is completely imidized using a known imidization reaction method, or an imidization reaction is performed during the process. It can be synthesized by stopping the polymer and introducing a partial imide structure, or by blending a fully imidized polymer with its polyimide precursor to introduce a partial imide structure. . Further, other known polyimide synthesis methods can also be applied.
 ポリイミドの重量平均分子量(Mw)は、5,000~100,000が好ましく、10,000~50,000がより好ましく、15,000~40,000が更に好ましい。重量平均分子量を5,000以上とすることにより、硬化後の膜の耐折れ性を向上させることができる。機械特性(例えば、破断伸び)に優れた有機膜を得るため、重量平均分子量は、15,000以上が特に好ましい。
 ポリイミドの数平均分子量(Mn)は、2,000~40,000が好ましく、3,000~30,000がより好ましく、4,000~20,000が更に好ましい。
 上記ポリイミドの分子量の分散度は、1.5以上が好ましく、1.8以上がより好ましく、2.0以上が更に好ましい。ポリイミドの分子量の分散度の上限値は特に定めるものではないが、例えば、7.0以下が好ましく、6.5以下がより好ましく、6.0以下が更に好ましい。
 樹脂組成物が特定樹脂として複数種のポリイミドを含む場合、少なくとも1種のポリイミドの重量平均分子量、数平均分子量、及び、分散度が上記範囲であることが好ましい。上記複数種のポリイミドを1つの樹脂として算出した重量平均分子量、数平均分子量、及び、分散度が、それぞれ、上記範囲内であることも好ましい。
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polyimide is preferably 5,000 to 100,000, more preferably 10,000 to 50,000, even more preferably 15,000 to 40,000. By setting the weight average molecular weight to 5,000 or more, the bending resistance of the cured film can be improved. In order to obtain an organic film with excellent mechanical properties (for example, elongation at break), the weight average molecular weight is particularly preferably 15,000 or more.
The number average molecular weight (Mn) of the polyimide is preferably 2,000 to 40,000, more preferably 3,000 to 30,000, and even more preferably 4,000 to 20,000.
The molecular weight dispersity of the polyimide is preferably 1.5 or more, more preferably 1.8 or more, and even more preferably 2.0 or more. Although the upper limit of the degree of dispersion of the molecular weight of polyimide is not particularly determined, for example, it is preferably 7.0 or less, more preferably 6.5 or less, and even more preferably 6.0 or less.
When the resin composition contains multiple types of polyimides as the specific resin, it is preferable that the weight average molecular weight, number average molecular weight, and degree of dispersion of at least one type of polyimide are within the above ranges. It is also preferable that the weight average molecular weight, number average molecular weight, and degree of dispersion calculated by considering the plurality of types of polyimides as one resin are each within the above ranges.
〔ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体〕
 ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体としては、国際公開第2022/145355号の段落0073~0095に記載の化合物が挙げられる。上記記載は本明細書に組み込まれる。
[Polybenzoxazole precursor]
Examples of the polybenzoxazole precursor include compounds described in paragraphs 0073 to 0095 of International Publication No. 2022/145355. The above description is incorporated herein.
〔ポリベンゾオキサゾール〕
 ポリベンゾオキサゾールとしては、国際公開第2022/145355号の段落0096~0103に記載の化合物が挙げられる。上記記載は本明細書に組み込まれる。
[Polybenzoxazole]
Examples of the polybenzoxazole include compounds described in paragraphs 0096 to 0103 of International Publication No. 2022/145355. The above description is incorporated herein.
〔ポリアミドイミド前駆体〕
 ポリアミドイミド前駆体としては、国際公開第2022/145355号の段落0104~0119に記載の化合物が挙げられる。上記記載は本明細書に組み込まれる。
[Polyamideimide precursor]
Examples of the polyamide-imide precursor include compounds described in paragraphs 0104 to 0119 of International Publication No. 2022/145355. The above description is incorporated herein.
〔ポリアミドイミド〕
 ポリアミドイミドとしては、国際公開第2022/145355号の段落0120~0133に記載の化合物が挙げられる。上記記載は本明細書に組み込まれる。
[Polyamideimide]
Examples of the polyamideimide include compounds described in paragraphs 0120 to 0133 of International Publication No. 2022/145355. The above description is incorporated herein.
〔ポリイミド前駆体等の製造方法〕
 ポリイミド前駆体等は、例えば、低温中でテトラカルボン酸二無水物とジアミンを反応させる方法、低温中でテトラカルボン酸二無水物とジアミンを反応させてポリアミック酸を得、縮合剤又はアルキル化剤を用いてエステル化する方法、テトラカルボン酸二無水物とアルコールとによりジエステルを得て、その後ジアミンと縮合剤の存在下で反応させる方法、テトラカルボン酸二無水物とアルコールとによりジエステルを得、その後残りのジカルボン酸をハロゲン化剤を用いて酸ハロゲン化し、ジアミンと反応させる方法、などの方法を利用して得ることができる。上記製造方法のうち、テトラカルボン酸二無水物とアルコールとによりジエステルを得、その後残りのジカルボン酸をハロゲン化剤を用いて酸ハロゲン化し、ジアミンと反応させる方法がより好ましい。
 上記縮合剤としては、例えばジシクロヘキシルカルボジイミド、ジイソプロピルカルボジイミド、1-エトキシカルボニル-2-エトキシ-1,2-ジヒドロキノリン、1,1-カルボニルジオキシ-ジ-1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール、N,N’-ジスクシンイミジルカーボネート、無水トリフルオロ酢酸等が挙げられる。
 上記アルキル化剤としては、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミドジメチルアセタール、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミドジエチルアセタール、N,N-ジアルキルホルムアミドジアルキルアセタール、オルトギ酸トリメチル、オルトギ酸トリエチル等が挙げられる。
 上記ハロゲン化剤としては、塩化チオニル、塩化オキサリル、オキシ塩化リン等が挙げられる。
 ポリイミド前駆体等の製造方法では、反応に際し、有機溶剤を用いることが好ましい。有機溶剤は1種でもよいし、2種以上でもよい。
 有機溶剤としては、原料に応じて適宜定めることができるが、ピリジン、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル(ジグリム)、N-メチルピロリドン、N-エチルピロリドン、プロピオン酸エチル、ジメチルアセトアミド、ジメチルホルムアミド、テトラヒドロフラン、γ-ブチロラクトン等が例示される。
 ポリイミド前駆体等の製造方法では、反応に際し、塩基性化合物を添加することが好ましい。塩基性化合物は1種でもよいし、2種以上でもよい。
 塩基性化合物は、原料に応じて適宜定めることができるが、トリエチルアミン、ジイソプロピルエチルアミン、ピリジン、1,8-ジアザビシクロ[5.4.0]ウンデカ-7-エン、N,N-ジメチル-4-アミノピリジン等が例示される。
[Method for producing polyimide precursor, etc.]
For example, polyimide precursors can be obtained by reacting tetracarboxylic dianhydride and diamine at low temperature, by reacting tetracarboxylic dianhydride and diamine at low temperature to obtain polyamic acid, and by using a condensing agent or an alkylating agent. A method of esterifying using a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and an alcohol, a method of obtaining a diester with a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and an alcohol, and then reacting it with a diamine in the presence of a condensing agent, a method of obtaining a diester with a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and an alcohol, The remaining dicarboxylic acid can then be acid-halogenated using a halogenating agent and reacted with a diamine. Among the above production methods, a method in which a diester is obtained from a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and an alcohol, and then the remaining dicarboxylic acid is acid-halogenated using a halogenating agent and reacted with a diamine is more preferable.
Examples of the condensing agent include dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, diisopropylcarbodiimide, 1-ethoxycarbonyl-2-ethoxy-1,2-dihydroquinoline, 1,1-carbonyldioxy-di-1,2,3-benzotriazole, N, Examples include N'-disuccinimidyl carbonate and trifluoroacetic anhydride.
Examples of the alkylating agent include N,N-dimethylformamide dimethyl acetal, N,N-dimethylformamide diethyl acetal, N,N-dialkylformamide dialkyl acetal, trimethyl orthoformate, and triethyl orthoformate.
Examples of the halogenating agent include thionyl chloride, oxalyl chloride, phosphorus oxychloride, and the like.
In the method for producing polyimide precursors, etc., it is preferable to use an organic solvent during the reaction. The number of organic solvents may be one or two or more.
The organic solvent can be determined as appropriate depending on the raw material, and examples include pyridine, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether (diglyme), N-methylpyrrolidone, N-ethylpyrrolidone, ethyl propionate, dimethylacetamide, dimethylformamide, tetrahydrofuran, γ-butyrolactone, etc. is exemplified.
In the method for producing polyimide precursors, etc., it is preferable to add a basic compound during the reaction. The number of basic compounds may be one or two or more.
The basic compound can be determined as appropriate depending on the raw material, but triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, pyridine, 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene, N,N-dimethyl-4-amino Examples include pyridine.
-末端封止剤-
 ポリイミド前駆体等の製造方法に際し、保存安定性をより向上させるため、ポリイミド前駆体等の樹脂末端に残存するカルボン酸無水物、酸無水物誘導体、或いは、アミノ基を封止することが好ましい。樹脂末端に残存するカルボン酸無水物、及び酸無水物誘導体を封止する際、末端封止剤としては、モノアルコール、フェノール、チオール、チオフェノール、モノアミン等が挙げられ、反応性、膜の安定性から、モノアルコール、フェノール類やモノアミンを用いることがより好ましい。モノアルコールの好ましい化合物としては、メタノール、エタノール、プロパノール、ブタノール、ヘキサノール、オクタノール、ドデシノール、ベンジルアルコール、2-フェニルエタノール、2-メトキシエタノール、2-クロロメタノール、フルフリルアルコール等の1級アルコール、イソプロパノール、2-ブタノール、シクロヘキシルアルコール、シクロペンタノール、1-メトキシ-2-プロパノール等の2級アルコール、t-ブチルアルコール、アダマンタンアルコール等の3級アルコールが挙げられる。フェノール類の好ましい化合物としては、フェノール、メトキシフェノール、メチルフェノール、ナフタレン-1-オール、ナフタレン-2-オール、ヒドロキシスチレン等のフェノール類などが挙げられる。また、モノアミンの好ましい化合物としては、アニリン、2-エチニルアニリン、3-エチニルアニリン、4-エチニルアニリン、5-アミノ-8-ヒドロキシキノリン、1-ヒドロキシ-7-アミノナフタレン、1-ヒドロキシ-6-アミノナフタレン、1-ヒドロキシ-5-アミノナフタレン、1-ヒドロキシ-4-アミノナフタレン、2-ヒドロキシ-7-アミノナフタレン、2-ヒドロキシ-6-アミノナフタレン、2-ヒドロキシ-5-アミノナフタレン、1-カルボキシ-7-アミノナフタレン、1-カルボキシ-6-アミノナフタレン、1-カルボキシ-5-アミノナフタレン、2-カルボキシ-7-アミノナフタレン、2-カルボキシ-6-アミノナフタレン、2-カルボキシ-5-アミノナフタレン、2-アミノ安息香酸、3-アミノ安息香酸、4-アミノ安息香酸、4-アミノサリチル酸、5-アミノサリチル酸、6-アミノサリチル酸、2-アミノベンゼンスルホン酸、3-アミノベンゼンスルホン酸、4-アミノベンゼンスルホン酸、3-アミノ-4,6-ジヒドロキシピリミジン、2-アミノフェノール、3-アミノフェノール、4-アミノフェノール、2-アミノチオフェノール、3-アミノチオフェノール、4-アミノチオフェノールなどが挙げられる。これらを2種以上用いてもよく、複数の末端封止剤を反応させることにより、複数の異なる末端基を導入してもよい。
 また、樹脂末端のアミノ基を封止する際、アミノ基と反応可能な官能基を有する化合物で封止することが可能である。アミノ基に対する好ましい封止剤は、カルボン酸無水物、カルボン酸クロリド、カルボン酸ブロミド、スルホン酸クロリド、無水スルホン酸、スルホン酸カルボン酸無水物などが好ましく、カルボン酸無水物、カルボン酸クロリドがより好ましい。カルボン酸無水物の好ましい化合物としては、無水酢酸、無水プロピオン酸、無水シュウ酸、無水コハク酸、無水マレイン酸、無水フタル酸、無水安息香酸、5-ノルボルネン-2,3-ジカルボン酸無水物などが挙げられる。また、カルボン酸クロリドの好ましい化合物としては、塩化アセチル、アクリル酸クロリド、プロピオニルクロリド、メタクリル酸クロリド、ピバロイルクロリド、シクロヘキサンカルボニルクロリド、2-エチルヘキサノイルクロリド、シンナモイルクロリド、1-アダマンタンカルボニルクロリド、ヘプタフルオロブチリルクロリド、ステアリン酸クロリド、ベンゾイルクロリド、などが挙げられる。
-Terminal sealing agent-
In the production method of polyimide precursors, etc., in order to further improve storage stability, it is preferable to seal the carboxylic acid anhydride, acid anhydride derivative, or amino group remaining at the end of the resin such as the polyimide precursor. When sealing carboxylic acid anhydride and acid anhydride derivatives remaining at the end of the resin, examples of the terminal capping agent include monoalcohol, phenol, thiol, thiophenol, monoamine, etc. From the viewpoint of properties, it is more preferable to use monoalcohols, phenols, and monoamines. Preferred monoalcohol compounds include primary alcohols such as methanol, ethanol, propanol, butanol, hexanol, octanol, dodecinol, benzyl alcohol, 2-phenylethanol, 2-methoxyethanol, 2-chloromethanol, furfuryl alcohol, and isopropanol. , 2-butanol, cyclohexyl alcohol, cyclopentanol, secondary alcohols such as 1-methoxy-2-propanol, and tertiary alcohols such as t-butyl alcohol and adamantane alcohol. Preferred phenolic compounds include phenols such as phenol, methoxyphenol, methylphenol, naphthalen-1-ol, naphthalen-2-ol, and hydroxystyrene. Preferred monoamine compounds include aniline, 2-ethynylaniline, 3-ethynylaniline, 4-ethynylaniline, 5-amino-8-hydroxyquinoline, 1-hydroxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-6- Aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-4-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1- Carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-5-amino Naphthalene, 2-aminobenzoic acid, 3-aminobenzoic acid, 4-aminobenzoic acid, 4-aminosalicylic acid, 5-aminosalicylic acid, 6-aminosalicylic acid, 2-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 3-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 4 -Aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 3-amino-4,6-dihydroxypyrimidine, 2-aminophenol, 3-aminophenol, 4-aminophenol, 2-aminothiophenol, 3-aminothiophenol, 4-aminothiophenol, etc. can be mentioned. Two or more types of these may be used, and a plurality of different terminal groups may be introduced by reacting a plurality of terminal capping agents.
Furthermore, when sealing the amino group at the end of the resin, it is possible to seal with a compound having a functional group that can react with the amino group. Preferred sealing agents for amino groups include carboxylic acid anhydrides, carboxylic acid chlorides, carboxylic acid bromides, sulfonic acid chlorides, sulfonic anhydrides, and sulfonic acid carboxylic acid anhydrides, with carboxylic acid anhydrides and carboxylic acid chlorides being more preferred. preferable. Preferred carboxylic anhydride compounds include acetic anhydride, propionic anhydride, oxalic anhydride, succinic anhydride, maleic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, benzoic anhydride, 5-norbornene-2,3-dicarboxylic anhydride, and the like. can be mentioned. Preferred carboxylic acid chloride compounds include acetyl chloride, acrylic acid chloride, propionyl chloride, methacrylic acid chloride, pivaloyl chloride, cyclohexane carbonyl chloride, 2-ethylhexanoyl chloride, cinnamoyl chloride, and 1-adamantane carbonyl chloride. , heptafluorobutyryl chloride, stearic acid chloride, benzoyl chloride, and the like.
-固体析出-
 ポリイミド前駆体等の製造方法に際し、固体を析出する工程を含んでいてもよい。具体的には、反応液中に共存している脱水縮合剤の吸水副生物を必要に応じて濾別した後、水、脂肪族低級アルコール、又はその混合液等の貧溶媒に、得られた重合体成分を投入し、重合体成分を析出させることで、固体として析出させ、乾燥させることでポリイミド前駆体等を得ることができる。精製度を向上させるために、ポリイミド前駆体等を再溶解、再沈析出、乾燥等の操作を繰返してもよい。さらに、イオン交換樹脂を用いてイオン性不純物を除去する工程を含んでいてもよい。
-Solid precipitation-
The method for producing a polyimide precursor or the like may include a step of precipitating a solid. Specifically, after filtering off the water-absorbed by-products of the dehydration condensation agent coexisting in the reaction solution, the obtained product is added to a poor solvent such as water, aliphatic lower alcohol, or a mixture thereof. By introducing a polymer component and precipitating the polymer component, a polyimide precursor or the like can be obtained by depositing the polymer component as a solid and drying it. In order to improve the degree of purification, operations such as redissolving the polyimide precursor, reprecipitation, drying, etc. may be repeated. Furthermore, the method may include a step of removing ionic impurities using an ion exchange resin.
〔含有量〕
 本発明の樹脂組成物における特定樹脂の含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し20質量%以上であることが好ましく、30質量%以上であることがより好ましく、40質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、50質量%以上であることが一層好ましい。また、本発明の樹脂組成物における樹脂の含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し、99.5質量%以下であることが好ましく、99質量%以下であることがより好ましく、98質量%以下であることが更に好ましく、97質量%以下であることが一層好ましく、95質量%以下であることがより一層好ましい。
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、特定樹脂を1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。2種以上含む場合、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
〔Content〕
The content of the specific resin in the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 30% by mass or more, and 40% by mass or more based on the total solid content of the resin composition. It is even more preferable that the amount is 50% by mass or more. Further, the content of the resin in the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 99.5% by mass or less, more preferably 99% by mass or less, and 98% by mass or less based on the total solid content of the resin composition. % or less, even more preferably 97% by mass or less, even more preferably 95% by mass or less.
The resin composition of the present invention may contain only one type of specific resin, or may contain two or more types of specific resin. When two or more types are included, it is preferable that the total amount falls within the above range.
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、少なくとも2種の樹脂を含むことも好ましい。
 具体的には、本発明の樹脂組成物は、特定樹脂と、後述する他の樹脂とを合計で2種以上含んでもよいし、特定樹脂を2種以上含んでいてもよいが、特定樹脂を2種以上含むことが好ましい。
 本発明の樹脂組成物が特定樹脂を2種以上含む場合、例えば、ポリイミド前駆体であって、二無水物由来の構造(上述の式(2)でいうR115)が異なる2種以上のポリイミド前駆体を含むことが好ましい。
It is also preferable that the resin composition of the present invention contains at least two types of resin.
Specifically, the resin composition of the present invention may contain a total of two or more types of specific resin and other resins described below, or may contain two or more types of specific resin, but may contain a specific resin. It is preferable to include two or more types.
When the resin composition of the present invention contains two or more specific resins, for example, two or more polyimides that are polyimide precursors and have different dianhydride-derived structures (R 115 in the above formula (2)) Preferably, a precursor is included.
<他の樹脂>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、上述した特定樹脂と、特定樹脂とは異なる他の樹脂(以下、単に「他の樹脂」ともいう)とを含んでもよい。
 他の樹脂としては、フェノール樹脂、ポリアミド、エポキシ樹脂、ポリシロキサン、シロキサン構造を含む樹脂、(メタ)アクリル樹脂、(メタ)アクリルアミド樹脂、ウレタン樹脂、ブチラール樹脂、スチリル樹脂、ポリエーテル樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂等が挙げられる。
 例えば、(メタ)アクリル樹脂を更に加えることにより、塗布性に優れた樹脂組成物が得られ、また、耐溶剤性に優れたパターン(硬化物)が得られる。
 例えば、後述する重合性化合物に代えて、又は、後述する重合性化合物に加えて、重量平均分子量が20,000以下の重合性基価の高い(例えば、樹脂1gにおける重合性基の含有モル量が1×10-3モル/g以上である)(メタ)アクリル樹脂を樹脂組成物に添加することにより、樹脂組成物の塗布性、パターン(硬化物)の耐溶剤性等を向上させることができる。
<Other resins>
The resin composition of the present invention may contain the above-mentioned specific resin and another resin different from the specific resin (hereinafter also simply referred to as "other resin").
Other resins include phenolic resin, polyamide, epoxy resin, polysiloxane, resin containing siloxane structure, (meth)acrylic resin, (meth)acrylamide resin, urethane resin, butyral resin, styryl resin, polyether resin, polyester resin. etc.
For example, by further adding a (meth)acrylic resin, a resin composition with excellent coating properties can be obtained, and a pattern (cured product) with excellent solvent resistance can be obtained.
For example, instead of or in addition to the polymerizable compound described below, a polymerizable group having a high polymerizable group value with a weight average molecular weight of 20,000 or less (for example, the molar amount of polymerizable groups contained in 1 g of resin) may be used. By adding a (meth)acrylic resin (having a concentration of 1×10 −3 mol/g or more) to a resin composition, it is possible to improve the coating properties of the resin composition, the solvent resistance of the pattern (cured product), etc. can.
 本発明の樹脂組成物が他の樹脂を含む場合、他の樹脂の含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し、0.01質量%以上であることが好ましく、0.05質量%以上であることがより好ましく、1質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、2質量%以上であることが一層好ましく、5質量%以上であることがより一層好ましく、10質量%以上であることが更に一層好ましい。
 本発明の樹脂組成物における、他の樹脂の含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し、80質量%以下であることが好ましく、75質量%以下であることがより好ましく、70質量%以下であることが更に好ましく、60質量%以下であることが一層好ましく、50質量%以下であることがより一層好ましい。
 本発明の樹脂組成物の好ましい一態様として、他の樹脂の含有量が低含有量である態様とすることもできる。上記態様において、他の樹脂の含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し、20質量%以下であることが好ましく、15質量%以下であることがより好ましく、10質量%以下であることが更に好ましく、5質量%以下であることが一層好ましく、1質量%以下であることがより一層好ましい。上記含有量の下限は特に限定されず、0質量%以上であればよい。
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、他の樹脂を1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。2種以上含む場合、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
When the resin composition of the present invention contains other resins, the content of the other resins is preferably 0.01% by mass or more, and 0.05% by mass or more based on the total solid content of the resin composition. It is more preferably 1% by mass or more, even more preferably 2% by mass or more, even more preferably 5% by mass or more, and even more preferably 10% by mass or more. More preferred.
The content of other resins in the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 80% by mass or less, more preferably 75% by mass or less, and 70% by mass based on the total solid content of the resin composition. It is more preferably at most 60% by mass, even more preferably at most 50% by mass.
As a preferable embodiment of the resin composition of the present invention, the content of other resins may be low. In the above embodiment, the content of the other resin is preferably 20% by mass or less, more preferably 15% by mass or less, and 10% by mass or less based on the total solid content of the resin composition. is more preferable, even more preferably 5% by mass or less, even more preferably 1% by mass or less. The lower limit of the content is not particularly limited, and may be 0% by mass or more.
The resin composition of the present invention may contain only one type of other resin, or may contain two or more types of other resins. When two or more types are included, it is preferable that the total amount falls within the above range.
<化合物A>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、化合物Aを含む。
 化合物Aは、下記化合物a1及び化合物a2の少なくとも一方に該当する化合物である。
化合物a1:保護された第1級アミン構造、並びに、オキサゾール環、チアゾール環、ピリミジン環、シッフ塩基基、フェノール性水酸基、式(1-1)で表される基、式(1-2)で表される基、及び、式(1-4)で表される基よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の構造(以下、「特定構造a1」ともいう)を有する
化合物a2:保護された第1級アルキルアミン構造、及び、式(1-1)~式(1-4)のいずれかで表される基を有する。
<Compound A>
The resin composition of the present invention contains Compound A.
Compound A is a compound corresponding to at least one of compound a1 and compound a2 below.
Compound a1: Protected primary amine structure, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyrimidine ring, Schiff base group, phenolic hydroxyl group, group represented by formula (1-1), formula (1-2) Compound a2 having at least one type of structure (hereinafter also referred to as "specific structure a1") selected from the group consisting of the group represented by the formula (1-4) and the group represented by the formula (1-4): It has a primary alkylamine structure and a group represented by any one of formulas (1-1) to (1-4).
〔化合物a1〕
 本発明において、第1級アミン構造とは、アンモニアの3つの水素原子のうち1つの水素原子が有機基により置換された構造をいう。
 本発明において、保護された第1級アミン構造とは、第1級アミン構造の水素原子のうち1つが保護基と結合した構造をいう。
 化合物a1は、保護された第1級アミン構造を1つのみ有してもよいし、2以上有してもよい。化合物a1における保護された第1級アミン構造の数は、1~4が好ましく、1又は2がより好ましい。また、保護された第1級アミン構造が1つのみである態様も、本発明の好ましい態様の1つである。
 上記保護基としては、特に限定されず公知のアミノ基の保護基が挙げられるが、第三級アルキルオキシカルボニル基、9-フルオレニルメチルオキシカルボニル(Fmoc)基、又は、下記式(P-1)で表される基が好ましく、化合物自体の溶解性の観点からは第三級アルキルオキシカルボニル基、又は、Fmoc基がより好ましく、得られる硬化物の耐薬品性等の観点からは第三級アルキルオキシカルボニル基が更に好ましい。
 本発明において、第三級アルキルオキシカルボニル基における第三級アルキル基とは、結合点の炭素原子に3つの炭素原子が結合した構造を有する基をいう。第三級アルキル基の結合点とは、第三級アルキル基が他の構造と結合する位置の原子をいい、第三級アルキルオキシカルボニル基における第三級アルキル基の結合点は、酸素原子と連結基を介さずに直接結合する炭素原子である。

 式(P-1)中、Lは炭化水素基を表し、*は保護される第1級アミン構造における保護対象である窒素原子との結合部位を表す。
 Lは芳香族炭化水素基を少なくとも含む基であることが好ましく、芳香族炭化水素基と飽和脂肪族炭化水素基との組み合わせにより形成される基がより好ましく、下記構造の基であることが更に好ましい。下記構造中、*は保護される第1級アミン構造における窒素原子との結合部位を表し、#は式(P-1)中のヒドロキシ基との結合部位を表す。
[Compound a1]
In the present invention, the primary amine structure refers to a structure in which one hydrogen atom out of three hydrogen atoms of ammonia is substituted with an organic group.
In the present invention, a protected primary amine structure refers to a structure in which one of the hydrogen atoms of the primary amine structure is bonded to a protecting group.
Compound a1 may have only one protected primary amine structure, or may have two or more protected primary amine structures. The number of protected primary amine structures in compound a1 is preferably 1 to 4, more preferably 1 or 2. Furthermore, an embodiment in which there is only one protected primary amine structure is also one of the preferred embodiments of the present invention.
The above-mentioned protecting group is not particularly limited and includes known protecting groups for amino groups, such as tertiary alkyloxycarbonyl group, 9-fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl (Fmoc) group, or the following formula (P- A group represented by 1) is preferable, a tertiary alkyloxycarbonyl group or an Fmoc group is more preferable from the viewpoint of solubility of the compound itself, and a tertiary alkyloxycarbonyl group or an Fmoc group is more preferable from the viewpoint of chemical resistance of the obtained cured product. More preferred is a class alkyloxycarbonyl group.
In the present invention, the tertiary alkyl group in the tertiary alkyloxycarbonyl group refers to a group having a structure in which three carbon atoms are bonded to the carbon atom at the bonding point. The bonding point of a tertiary alkyl group refers to the atom at the position where the tertiary alkyl group is bonded to another structure. A carbon atom that is directly bonded without a linking group.

In formula (P-1), L 1 represents a hydrocarbon group, and * represents a bonding site with the nitrogen atom to be protected in the primary amine structure to be protected.
L1 is preferably a group containing at least an aromatic hydrocarbon group, more preferably a group formed by a combination of an aromatic hydrocarbon group and a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and preferably a group having the following structure. More preferred. In the structure below, * represents a bonding site with a nitrogen atom in the primary amine structure to be protected, and # represents a bonding site with a hydroxy group in formula (P-1).
 オキサゾール環、チアゾール環、ピリミジン環は、更に縮合環を有してもよい。縮合環としては、芳香族6員環構造が好ましく、ベンゼン環、ピリミジン環、ピラジン環、又は、ピリミジン環がより好ましい。 The oxazole ring, thiazole ring, and pyrimidine ring may further have a fused ring. The condensed ring is preferably an aromatic 6-membered ring structure, and more preferably a benzene ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, or pyrimidine ring.
 シッフ塩基基とは、下記式(S-1)で表される基をいう。

 式(S-1)中、*は炭素原子との結合部位を表し、炭化水素基との結合部位であることが好ましい。
The Schiff base group refers to a group represented by the following formula (S-1).

In formula (S-1), * represents a bonding site with a carbon atom, preferably a bonding site with a hydrocarbon group.
 式(1-1)で表される基、及び、式(1-2)で表される基の好ましい態様は後述する。 Preferred embodiments of the group represented by formula (1-1) and the group represented by formula (1-2) will be described later.
 化合物a1は、保護された第1級アミン構造における窒素原子に特定構造a1が直接結合するか、又は、保護された第1級アミン構造における窒素原子に結合する炭化水素基における水素原子の置換基として、特定構造a1が結合した構造であることが好ましい。
 上記炭化水素基としては、特定構造a1とは異なる置換基により水素原子が更に置換されていてもよいアルキル基が好ましい。
 保護基の好ましい態様は、化合物a1における保護基の好ましい態様と同様である。
Compound a1 is a substituent for a hydrogen atom in a hydrocarbon group that has specific structure a1 directly bonded to the nitrogen atom in the protected primary amine structure, or is bonded to the nitrogen atom in the protected primary amine structure. It is preferable that the specific structure a1 be a bonded structure.
The hydrocarbon group is preferably an alkyl group whose hydrogen atom may be further substituted with a substituent different from the specific structure a1.
Preferred embodiments of the protecting group are the same as those for compound a1.
 炭化水素基における水素原子の置換基として、特定構造a1が結合した構造である場合、炭化水素基と特定構造a1とは連結基を介して結合してもよい。連結基としては特に限定されないが、-O-、-NR-等が挙げられる。Rの好ましい態様は上述の通りである。 When the specific structure a1 is bonded as a substituent for a hydrogen atom in a hydrocarbon group, the hydrocarbon group and the specific structure a1 may be bonded via a linking group. The linking group is not particularly limited, but examples include -O-, -NR N -, and the like. Preferred embodiments of R N are as described above.
 化合物a1は、高温条件に晒された後の密着性の観点からは、特定構造a1の中でも、式(1-1)で表される基、及び、式(1-2)で表される基よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の構造を含むことが好ましい。 From the viewpoint of adhesion after being exposed to high temperature conditions, compound a1 has a group represented by formula (1-1) and a group represented by formula (1-2) among specific structures a1. It is preferable that at least one structure selected from the group consisting of:
〔化合物a2〕
 化合物a2は、保護された第1級アルキルアミン構造、及び、下記式(1-1)~式(1-4)のいずれかで表される基を有する化合物である。
 本発明において、第1級アルキルアミン構造とは、アンモニアの3つの水素原子のうち1つの水素原子がアルキル基により置換された構造をいう。上記アルキル基における水素原子は、式(1-1)~式(1-4)のいずれかで表される基、又は、式(1-1)~式(1-4)のいずれかで表される基を含む基により置換されていることが好ましく、式(1-1)~式(1-4)のいずれかで表される基により置換されていることがより好ましい。また、上記アルキル基における水素原子は、本発明の効果が得られる限りにおいて、他の置換基により更に置換されていてもよい。
 化合物a2は、保護された第1級アルキルアミン構造を1つのみ有してもよいし、2以上有してもよい。化合物a2における保護された第1級アルキルアミン構造の数は、1~4が好ましく、1又は2がより好ましい。また、保護された第1級アルキルアミン構造が1つのみである態様も、本発明の好ましい態様の1つである。

式(1-1)中、Xは-C(R-、-NR-、-S-又は-O-を表し、X~Xはそれぞれ独立に、=CR-又は=N-を表し、Xが-C(R-又は-O-である場合、X~Xのうち少なくとも2つが=N-を表し、Xが-NR-又は-S-である場合、X~Xのうち少なくとも1つが=N-を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、*で表される他の構造との結合部位、水素原子又は1価の置換基を表し、X~Xの1つが、*で表される他の構造との結合部位であるRを含み、式(1-1)で表される基において*で表される他の構造との結合部位であるRは1つのみである。
 式(1-2)中、X14は-C(R-、-NR-、-S-又は-O-を表し、X~X13はそれぞれ独立に、=CR-又は=N-を表し、X14が-C(R-又は-O-である場合、X~X13のうち少なくとも2つが=N-を表し、X14が-NR-又は-S-である場合、X~X13のうち少なくとも1つが=N-を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、*で表される他の構造との結合部位、水素原子又は1価の置換基を表し、X、X13及びX14の1つが、*で表される他の構造との結合部位であるRxを含み、式(1-2)で表される基において*で表される他の構造との結合部位であるRxは1つのみである。
 式(1-3)中、X15は-C(R-、-NR-、-S-又は-O-を表し、X16~X18はそれぞれ独立に、=CR-又は=N-を表し、X15が-C(R-又は-O-である場合、X16~X18のうち少なくとも2つが=N-を表し、X13が-NR-又は-S-である場合、X16~X18のうち少なくとも1つが=N-を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の置換基を表す。
 式(1-4)中、X19~X26はそれぞれ独立に、=CR-又は=N-を表し、X19~X26のうち少なくとも2つが=N-を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、*で表される他の構造との結合部位、水素原子又は1価の置換基を表し、X19~X26の1つが、*で表される他の構造との結合部位であるRを含み、式(1-4)で表される基において*で表される他の構造との結合部位であるRは1つのみである。
[Compound a2]
Compound a2 is a compound having a protected primary alkylamine structure and a group represented by any of the following formulas (1-1) to (1-4).
In the present invention, the primary alkylamine structure refers to a structure in which one hydrogen atom out of three hydrogen atoms of ammonia is substituted with an alkyl group. The hydrogen atom in the above alkyl group is a group represented by any one of formulas (1-1) to (1-4), or a group represented by any one of formulas (1-1) to (1-4). is preferably substituted with a group containing a group represented by formula (1-1) to formula (1-4). Furthermore, the hydrogen atom in the alkyl group may be further substituted with another substituent as long as the effects of the present invention can be obtained.
Compound a2 may have only one protected primary alkylamine structure, or may have two or more protected primary alkylamine structures. The number of protected primary alkylamine structures in compound a2 is preferably 1 to 4, more preferably 1 or 2. Furthermore, an embodiment in which there is only one protected primary alkylamine structure is also one of the preferred embodiments of the present invention.

In formula (1-1), X 1 represents -C(R x ) 2 -, -NR x -, -S-, or -O- , and X 2 to =N-, and when X 1 is -C(R x ) 2 - or -O-, at least two of X 2 to X 7 represent =N-, and X 1 is -NR When S-, at least one of X 2 to X 7 represents =N-, and each R X independently represents a bonding site with another structure represented by *, a hydrogen atom, or a monovalent substituent and one of X 4 to X 7 contains R x which is a bonding site with another structure represented by *, and in the group represented by formula (1-1), There is only one R x which is a binding site with the structure.
In formula (1-2), X 14 represents -C(R x ) 2 -, -NR x -, -S-, or -O- , and X 8 to =N-, and when X 14 is -C(R x ) 2 - or -O-, at least two of X 8 to X 13 represent =N-, and X 14 is -NR When S-, at least one of X 8 to X 13 represents =N-, and each R X independently represents a bonding site with another structure represented by *, a hydrogen atom, or a monovalent substituent , one of X 8 , X 13 and X 14 contains Rx which is a binding site with another structure represented by *, and in the group represented by formula (1-2), There is only one Rx, which is a binding site with another structure.
In formula (1-3), X 15 represents -C(R x ) 2 -, -NR x -, -S-, or -O- , and X 16 to =N-, and when X 15 is -C(R x ) 2 - or -O-, at least two of X 16 to X 18 represent =N-, and X 13 is -NR When S-, at least one of X 16 to X 18 represents =N-, and R X each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent.
In formula (1-4), X 19 to X 26 each independently represents =CR X - or =N-, at least two of X 19 to X 26 represent =N-, and R R represents a bonding site with another structure represented by *, a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, and one of X 19 to X 26 is a bonding site with another structure represented by * In the group represented by formula (1-4), there is only one R x which is a bonding site with another structure represented by *.
 式(1-1)中、Xは-NR-が好ましく、-NH-がより好ましい。
 式(1-1)中、Xは=N-が好ましい。。
 式(1-1)中、Xは=N-が好ましい。
 式(1-1)中、Xは=N-が好ましい。
 式(1-1)中、Xは=CR-が好ましく、=CH-がより好ましい。
 式(1-1)中、Xは=N-が好ましい。
 式(1-1)中、Xは=CR-が好ましい。
 *で表される他の構造との結合部位であるRは、Xに存在することが好ましい。
 式(1-1)中、Xが-NR-又は-S-である場合、X~Xのうち少なくとも2つが=N-を表すことが好ましく、X~Xのうち少なくとも3つが=N-を表すことがより好ましい。
 式(1-1)中、Rは水素原子又は炭化水素基が好ましく、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基がより好ましく、水素原子が更に好ましい。
In formula (1-1), X 1 is preferably -NR x -, more preferably -NH-.
In formula (1-1), X 2 is preferably =N-. .
In formula (1-1), X 3 is preferably =N-.
In formula (1-1), X 4 is preferably =N-.
In formula (1-1), X 5 is preferably =CR x -, more preferably =CH-.
In formula (1-1), X 6 is preferably =N-.
In formula (1-1), X 7 is preferably =CR X -.
Rx , which is a binding site with another structure represented by *, is preferably present at X7 .
In formula (1-1), when X 1 is -NR X - or -S- , it is preferable that at least two of X 2 to X 7 represent = N- ; More preferably, three represent =N-.
In formula (1-1), R X is preferably a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and even more preferably a hydrogen atom.
 式(1-2)中、X14は-O-又は-S-が好ましく、-S-がより好ましい。
 式(1-2)中、Xは=N-が好ましい。
 式(1-2)中、Xは=CH-又は=N-が好ましく、=N-がより好ましい。
 式(1-2)中、X10は=CR-が好ましく、=CH-がより好ましい。
 式(1-2)中、X11は=CR-が好ましく、=CH-がより好ましい。
 式(1-2)中、X12は=CH-又は=N-が好ましく、=N-がより好ましい。
 式(1-2)中、X13は=CR-が好ましい。
 *で表される他の構造との結合部位であるRは、X13に存在することが好ましい。
 式(1-2)中、Rは水素原子又は炭化水素基が好ましく、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基がより好ましく、水素原子が更に好ましい。
In formula (1-2), X 14 is preferably -O- or -S-, more preferably -S-.
In formula (1-2), X 8 is preferably =N-.
In formula (1-2), X 9 is preferably =CH- or =N-, more preferably =N-.
In formula (1-2), X 10 is preferably =CR x -, more preferably =CH-.
In formula (1-2), X 11 is preferably =CR x -, more preferably =CH-.
In formula (1-2), X 12 is preferably =CH- or =N-, more preferably =N-.
In formula (1-2), X 13 is preferably =CR X -.
R x , which is a binding site with another structure represented by *, is preferably present at X 13 .
In formula (1-2), R X is preferably a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and even more preferably a hydrogen atom.
 式(1-3)中、X15が-NR-であり、かつ、X15~X18がいずれも=N-であるか、又は、X15が-S-であり、X16が=N-であり、かつ、X17及びX18が=CR-であることが好ましい。
 式(1-3)中、Rは水素原子又は炭化水素基が好ましく、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基がより好ましく、水素原子が更に好ましい。
In formula (1-3), X 15 is -NR X - and all of X 15 to X 18 are =N-, or X 15 is -S- and X 16 is = It is preferable that it is N-, and X 17 and X 18 are =CR X -.
In formula (1-3), R X is preferably a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and even more preferably a hydrogen atom.
 式(1-4)中、X19~X26の2~5個が=N-を表すことが好ましく、X19~X26の2~4個が=N-を表すことがより好ましく、X19~X26の2個又は3個が=N-を表すことが更に好ましい。
 式(1-4)中、X19は=CR-が好ましい。
 *で表される他の構造との結合部位であるRは、X19に存在することが好ましい。
 式(1-4)中、X20~X26のうち2~5個が=N-を表すことが好ましく、X19~X26の2~4個が=N-を表すことがより好ましく、X19~X26の2個又は3個が=N-を表すことが更に好ましい。
In formula (1-4), preferably 2 to 5 of X 19 to X 26 represent =N-, more preferably 2 to 4 of X 19 to X 26 represent =N-, It is further preferred that two or three of 19 to X 26 represent =N-.
In formula (1-4), X 19 is preferably =CR X -.
R x , which is a binding site with another structure represented by *, is preferably present at X 19 .
In formula (1-4), preferably 2 to 5 of X 20 to X 26 represent =N-, and more preferably 2 to 4 of X 19 to X 26 represent =N-, It is further preferred that two or three of X 19 to X 26 represent =N-.
〔第1級アミン〕
 化合物Aは、光、熱又は塩基の作用により分解し第1級アミンを発生させる化合物であることが好ましく、樹脂との相互作用性、ひいては密着性向上の観点からは、光、熱又は塩基の作用により分解し脂肪族第1級アミンを発生させる化合物であることがより好ましい。
 上記分解は、保護基の脱離(脱保護)であることが好ましい。
 本発明において、第1級アミンとは、アンモニアの3つの水素原子のうち1つの水素原子が有機基により置換された化合物をいう。
 また、脂肪族第1級アミンとは、アンモニアの3つの水素原子のうち1つの水素原子が脂肪族基により置換された化合物をいう。上記脂肪族基における水素原子は他の構造により置換されていてもよい。
 化合物Aが脂肪族第1級アミンを発生させる化合物である場合、上記脂肪族基における水素原子が、上述の特定構造a1又は式(1-3)で表される基を含む基により置換されていることが好ましく、上述の特定構造a1又は式(1-3)で表される基により置換されていることがより好ましい。
[Primary amine]
Compound A is preferably a compound that decomposes under the action of light, heat, or a base to generate a primary amine. More preferably, it is a compound that decomposes upon action to generate an aliphatic primary amine.
The decomposition described above is preferably removal of a protecting group (deprotection).
In the present invention, the primary amine refers to a compound in which one hydrogen atom out of three hydrogen atoms of ammonia is substituted with an organic group.
Moreover, an aliphatic primary amine refers to a compound in which one hydrogen atom out of three hydrogen atoms of ammonia is substituted with an aliphatic group. The hydrogen atom in the above aliphatic group may be substituted with another structure.
When compound A is a compound that generates an aliphatic primary amine, the hydrogen atom in the aliphatic group is substituted with a group containing the above-mentioned specific structure a1 or a group represented by formula (1-3). It is preferable that the substituent is substituted with a group represented by the above-mentioned specific structure a1 or formula (1-3).
 化合物Aが光の作用により分解し第1級アミン(好ましくは、脂肪族第1級アミン)を発生させるか否かは、以下の方法により確認することができる。
 化合物Aを溶剤に溶解した組成物Aを調製し、1気圧下、25℃の条件下で、波長190~800nmの光を露光照度25W/cmの条件下で30秒間照射した後に、HPLC(高速液体クロマトグラフィ)などの方法で分解量を定量し、化合物Aの全モル量に対して0.01モル%以上の第1級アミンが発生する場合、化合物Aは光の作用により第1級アミンを発生すると判定する。上記第1級アミンの発生量は0.1モル%以上であることが好ましく、0.5モル%以上であることがより好ましい。上記第1級アミンの発生量の上限は特に限定されないが、例えば1000モル%以下とすることができる。
 樹脂組成物が溶剤を含む場合、上記組成物A中の化合物Aの濃度は樹脂組成物中の濃度と同様とし、また、上記組成物中の溶剤種は樹脂組成物中に含まれる溶剤と同様とすることができる。また、樹脂組成物が溶剤を含まない場合、組成物A中の化合物Aの濃度は組成物Aの全質量に対して1.0質量%程度とすることができ、溶剤種はN-メチル-2-ピロリドンなどを用いることができる。
Whether Compound A decomposes under the action of light and generates a primary amine (preferably an aliphatic primary amine) can be confirmed by the following method.
Composition A was prepared by dissolving compound A in a solvent, and after irradiating it with light with a wavelength of 190 to 800 nm for 30 seconds at an exposure intensity of 25 W/cm 2 under 1 atm and 25°C, HPLC ( If the amount of decomposition is determined by a method such as high-performance liquid chromatography and 0.01 mol% or more of primary amine is generated based on the total molar amount of Compound A, Compound A is converted into a primary amine by the action of light. is determined to occur. The amount of the primary amine generated is preferably 0.1 mol% or more, more preferably 0.5 mol% or more. The upper limit of the amount of the primary amine generated is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 1000 mol% or less.
When the resin composition contains a solvent, the concentration of compound A in the composition A is the same as the concentration in the resin composition, and the type of solvent in the composition is the same as the solvent contained in the resin composition. It can be done. Further, when the resin composition does not contain a solvent, the concentration of compound A in composition A can be about 1.0% by mass with respect to the total mass of composition A, and the solvent type is N-methyl- 2-pyrrolidone and the like can be used.
 化合物Aが熱の作用により分解し第1級アミン(好ましくは、脂肪族第1級アミン)を発生させる場合、250℃の加熱によって第1級アミンを発生することが好ましく、220℃の加熱によって第1級アミンを発生することがより好ましく、200℃の加熱によって第1級アミンを発生することが更に好ましく、190℃の加熱によって第1級アミンを発生することが特に好ましく、180℃の加熱によって第1級アミンを発生することが最も好ましい。第1級アミンを発生する温度の下限は特に限定されないが、組成物の保存安定性等の観点からは、例えば、100℃以上であることが好ましい。
 ある化合物Aがある温度X℃で第1級アミンを発生させるか否かは、下記方法により判断される。
 1モルの化合物Aを密閉容器中1気圧下、上記X℃、3時間の加熱後に、HPLC(高速液体クロマトグラフィ)などの方法で分解量を定量し、0.01モル以上の第1級アミンが発生する場合、化合物AはX℃の加熱により第1級アミンを発生すると判定する。発生した化合物が第1級アミンであるか否かは、例えば、H-NMRを用いることにより確認される。
 上記第1級アミンの発生量は0.1モル以上であることが好ましく、0.5モル以上であることがより好ましい。上記第1級アミンの発生量の上限は特に限定されないが、例えば1000モル以下とすることができる。
When compound A is decomposed by the action of heat to generate a primary amine (preferably an aliphatic primary amine), it is preferable to generate the primary amine by heating at 250°C, and by heating at 220°C. It is more preferable to generate a primary amine, it is even more preferable to generate a primary amine by heating at 200°C, it is particularly preferable to generate a primary amine by heating at 190°C, and it is particularly preferable to generate a primary amine by heating at 180°C. Most preferably, the primary amine is generated by. The lower limit of the temperature at which the primary amine is generated is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of storage stability of the composition, it is preferably, for example, 100° C. or higher.
Whether or not a certain compound A generates a primary amine at a certain temperature of X° C. is determined by the following method.
After heating 1 mole of Compound A in a closed container under 1 atmosphere at the above-mentioned temperature of If the primary amine is generated, it is determined that Compound A generates a primary amine upon heating at X°C. Whether or not the generated compound is a primary amine is confirmed, for example, by using 1 H-NMR.
The amount of the primary amine generated is preferably 0.1 mol or more, more preferably 0.5 mol or more. The upper limit of the amount of the primary amine generated is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 1000 mol or less.
 化合物Aが、塩基の作用により第1級アミン(好ましくは、脂肪族第1級アミン)を発生させる場合、化合物Aは、第1級アミン構造が塩基分解性保護基により保護された構造を有することが好ましい。
 塩基分解性保護基としては、例えば塩基で脱保護される公知のアミノ基の保護基を使用することができる。このような保護基により第1級アミンが保護された基としては、カルバメート構造を有する基が好ましく、9-フルオレニルメチルカルバメート基、1,1-ジメチル-2-シアノメチルカルバメート基、パラニトロベンジルカルバメート基、又は、2,4-ジクロロベンジルカルバメート基がより好ましい。
 また化合物Aが、塩基の作用により第1級アミンを発生する構造を有する場合、化合物Aは熱の作用により第1級アミンを生じる化合物でもある場合が有る。
 化合物Aが、塩基の作用により第1級アミンを発生するか否かは、以下の方法により判定することができる。
 化合物Aの溶液に塩基性化合物を添加した後に、滴定してアミン価を測定することで判定する。
 具体的には、化合物Aを溶剤に溶解した組成物Aを調製し、1気圧下、25℃の条件下で組成物Aにピペリジン又はトリエチルアミンを1mol/Lとなるように添加し、化合物Aの全モル量に対して0.01モル%以上の第1級アミンが発生する場合、化合物Aは塩基の作用により第1級アミンを発生すると判定する。上記第1級アミンの発生量は0.1モル%以上であることが好ましく、0.5モル%以上であることがより好ましい。上記第1級アミンの発生量の上限は特に限定されないが、例えば1000モル%以下とすることができる。上記第1級アミンの発生量は、公知の方法により滴定してアミン価を決定することにより測定できる。
 樹脂組成物が溶剤を含む場合、上記組成物A中の化合物Aの濃度は樹脂組成物中の濃度と同様とし、また、上記組成物中の溶剤種は樹脂組成物中に含まれる溶剤と同様とすることができる。また、樹脂組成物が溶剤を含まない場合、組成物A中の化合物Aの濃度は組成物Aの全質量に対して1.0質量%程度とすることができ、溶剤種はN-メチル-2-ピロリドンなどを用いることができる。
When compound A generates a primary amine (preferably an aliphatic primary amine) by the action of a base, compound A has a structure in which the primary amine structure is protected by a base-decomposable protecting group. It is preferable.
As the base-decomposable protecting group, for example, known protecting groups for amino groups that can be deprotected with a base can be used. As a group in which a primary amine is protected by such a protecting group, a group having a carbamate structure is preferable, and examples include a 9-fluorenylmethyl carbamate group, a 1,1-dimethyl-2-cyanomethyl carbamate group, and a para-nitromethyl carbamate group. A benzyl carbamate group or a 2,4-dichlorobenzyl carbamate group is more preferred.
Further, when Compound A has a structure that generates a primary amine under the action of a base, Compound A may also be a compound that generates a primary amine under the action of heat.
Whether Compound A generates a primary amine by the action of a base can be determined by the following method.
The determination is made by adding a basic compound to a solution of compound A and then titrating to measure the amine value.
Specifically, composition A is prepared by dissolving compound A in a solvent, and piperidine or triethylamine is added to composition A at 1 mol/L under 1 atm and 25°C to dissolve compound A. If 0.01 mol % or more of primary amine is generated based on the total molar amount, it is determined that Compound A generates a primary amine due to the action of a base. The amount of the primary amine generated is preferably 0.1 mol% or more, more preferably 0.5 mol% or more. The upper limit of the amount of the primary amine generated is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 1000 mol% or less. The amount of the primary amine generated can be measured by titration using a known method to determine the amine value.
When the resin composition contains a solvent, the concentration of compound A in the composition A is the same as the concentration in the resin composition, and the type of solvent in the composition is the same as the solvent contained in the resin composition. It can be done. Further, when the resin composition does not contain a solvent, the concentration of compound A in composition A can be about 1.0% by mass with respect to the total mass of composition A, and the solvent type is N-methyl- 2-pyrrolidone and the like can be used.
 化合物Aから発生する第1級アミンは、上述の特定構造a1又は式(1-3)で表される基を含むことが好ましい。
 以下に、化合物Aから発生する第1級アミンの具体例を示すが、本発明はこれに限定されるものではない。
The primary amine generated from compound A preferably contains the above-mentioned specific structure a1 or a group represented by formula (1-3).
Specific examples of primary amines generated from compound A are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
〔式(A-1)で表される化合物〕
 化合物Aは下記式(A-1)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。

 式(A-1)中、Rは式(1-1)~式(1-4)のいずれかで表される基、オキサゾール環、チアゾール環、ピリミジン環、シッフ塩基基、及び、フェノール性水酸基、よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の構造を有する有機基を表し、Lは単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、Rはアミノ基の保護基を表す。
[Compound represented by formula (A-1)]
Compound A is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (A-1).

In formula (A-1), R A is a group represented by any one of formulas (1-1) to (1-4), an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, a pyrimidine ring, a Schiff base group, and a phenolic group. represents an organic group having at least one type of structure selected from the group consisting of a hydroxyl group, LA represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and R P represents a protecting group for an amino group.
 式(A-1)中、Rは上述の特定構造a1又は式(1-3)で表される基を有する基であることが好ましく、上述の特定構造a1又は式(1-3)で表される基であることも好ましい。
 これらの中でも、Rは、式(1-1)で表される基、式(1-2)で表される基若しくは式(1-3)で表される基、又は、これらの基を有する基であることが好ましく、式(1-1)で表される基、式(1-2)で表される基又は式(1-3)で表される基であることが好ましい。
In formula (A-1), R A is preferably a group having the above specific structure a1 or a group represented by formula (1-3); It is also preferable that it is a group represented by:
Among these, R A is a group represented by formula (1-1), a group represented by formula (1-2), a group represented by formula (1-3), or a group representing these groups. It is preferably a group having the formula (1-1), a group represented by the formula (1-2), or a group represented by the formula (1-3).
 式(A-1)中、Lは単結合、アルキレンオキシ基、又は、アルキレンイミノ基が好ましく、単結合、炭素数2~10のアルキレンオキシ基、又は、炭素数2~10のアルキレンイミノ基がより好ましく、単結合、炭素数2~4のアルキレンオキシ基、又は、炭素数2~4のアルキレンイミノ基が更に好ましく、単結合、エチレンオキシ基又はエチレンイミノ基が特に好ましい。本発明において、アルキレンオキシ基とは-R-O-で表される基であり、アルキレンイミノ基とは-R-N(R)-で表される基であり、Rはアルキレン基を表し、Rの好ましい態様は上述の通りである。
 また、Lがアルキレンオキシ基である場合、アルキレンオキシ基に含まれる酸素原子と式(A-1)中のRとが連結基を介さずに直接結合することが好ましい。Lがアルキレンイミノ基である場合、アルキレンイミノ基に含まれる窒素原子と式(A-1)中のRとが連結基を介さずに直接結合することが好ましい。
In formula (A-1), L A is preferably a single bond, an alkyleneoxy group, or an alkyleneimino group, and a single bond, an alkyleneoxy group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, or an alkyleneimino group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms. is more preferred, a single bond, an alkyleneoxy group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms, or an alkyleneimino group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms is even more preferred, and a single bond, an ethyleneoxy group, or an ethyleneimino group is particularly preferred. In the present invention, an alkyleneoxy group is a group represented by -RO-, an alkyleneimino group is a group represented by -RN(R N )-, and R represents an alkylene group. , R N are as described above.
Further, when L A is an alkyleneoxy group, it is preferable that the oxygen atom contained in the alkyleneoxy group and R A in formula (A-1) bond directly without using a linking group. When L A is an alkylene imino group, it is preferable that the nitrogen atom contained in the alkylene imino group and R A in formula (A-1) bond directly without using a linking group.
 Rは式(A-1)中に記載されたアミノ基の保護基を表す。保護基としては特に限定されず公知のアミノ基の保護基が挙げられるが、第三級アルキルオキシカルボニル基、Fmoc基、又は、上述の式(P-1)で表される基が好ましく、第三級アルキルオキシカルボニル基、又は、Fmoc基がより好ましく、第三級アルキルオキシカルボニル基が更に好ましい。 R P represents a protecting group for an amino group described in formula (A-1). The protecting group is not particularly limited and includes known protecting groups for amino groups, but a tertiary alkyloxycarbonyl group, an Fmoc group, or a group represented by the above formula (P-1) is preferred; A tertiary alkyloxycarbonyl group or an Fmoc group is more preferred, and a tertiary alkyloxycarbonyl group is even more preferred.
〔式(A-2)又は式(A-3)で表される化合物〕
 化合物Aは下記式(A-2)又は式(A-3)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。

 式(A-2)中、Rはそれぞれ独立に、置換基を有してもよいアルキル基を表し、複数のRが結合して環構造を形成してもよく、Rは式(1-1)~式(1-4)のいずれかで表される基、オキサゾール環、チアゾール環、ピリミジン環、シッフ塩基機、及び、フェノール性水酸基、よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の構造を有する有機基を表し、Lは単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 式(A-3)中、Rは式(1-1)~式(1-4)のいずれかで表される基、オキサゾール環、チアゾール環、ピリミジン環、シッフ塩基基、及び、フェノール性水酸基よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の構造を有する有機基を表し、Lは単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
[Compound represented by formula (A-2) or formula (A-3)]
Compound A is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (A-2) or formula (A-3).

In formula (A-2), R 7 each independently represents an alkyl group that may have a substituent, a plurality of R 7 may be combined to form a ring structure, and R 8 is represented by formula ( At least one type selected from the group consisting of a group represented by any one of 1-1) to formula (1-4), an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, a pyrimidine ring, a Schiff base, and a phenolic hydroxyl group. represents an organic group having a structure, and L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
In formula (A-3), R 9 is a group represented by any one of formulas (1-1) to (1-4), an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, a pyrimidine ring, a Schiff base group, and a phenolic group. It represents an organic group having at least one type of structure selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl groups, and L 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
 式(A-2)中、Rはそれぞれ独立に、炭素数1~10のアルキル基であることが好ましく、炭素数1~4のアルキル基であることがより好ましく、メチル基であることが更に好ましい。
 式(A-2)中、複数のRが結合して形成される環構造としては、脂肪族環構造が好ましく、飽和脂肪族環構造がより好ましく、シクロペンタン環が更に好ましい。
 式(A-2)中のL及びRの好ましい態様は、それぞれ、式(A-1)中のL及びRの好ましい態様と同様である。
 式(A-3)中のL及びRの好ましい態様は、それぞれ、式(A-1)中のL及びRの好ましい態様と同様である。
In formula (A-2), R 7 is each independently preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and preferably a methyl group. More preferred.
In formula (A-2), the ring structure formed by combining a plurality of R 7s is preferably an aliphatic ring structure, more preferably a saturated aliphatic ring structure, and even more preferably a cyclopentane ring.
Preferred embodiments of L 1 and R 8 in formula (A-2) are the same as those of L A and R A in formula (A-1), respectively.
Preferred embodiments of L 2 and R 9 in formula (A-3) are the same as those of L A and R A in formula (A-1), respectively.
〔分子量〕
 化合物Aの分子量は、180~2,000であることが好ましく、200~1,000であることがより好ましく、220~800であることが更に好ましい。
[Molecular weight]
The molecular weight of compound A is preferably 180 to 2,000, more preferably 200 to 1,000, and even more preferably 220 to 800.
〔合成方法〕
 化合物Aは、例えば、後述する実施例に記載の方法により合成できる。また、その他公知の合成方法を用いて合成してもよく、合成方法は特に限定されるものではない。
[Synthesis method]
Compound A can be synthesized, for example, by the method described in Examples below. Further, it may be synthesized using other known synthesis methods, and the synthesis method is not particularly limited.
〔具体例〕
 化合物Aの具体例としては、特に限定されないが、実施例で使用されたF-1~F-20が挙げられる。
〔Concrete example〕
Specific examples of compound A include, but are not limited to, F-1 to F-20 used in Examples.
〔含有量〕
 本発明の樹脂組成物の全固形分に対する、化合物Aの含有量は、0.01~10質量%であることが好ましい。下限は0.02質量%以上がより好ましく、0.05質量%以上が更に好ましく、0.10質量%以上が特に好ましい。上限は、8質量%以下であることがより好ましく、6質量%以下であることが更に好ましく、4質量%以下であることが特に好ましい。
 化合物Aは1種を単独で用いてもよいが、2種以上を併用してもよい。2種以上を併用する場合にはその合計量が上記の範囲となることが好ましい。
 また、本発明の樹脂組成物における、特定樹脂100質量部に対する化合物Aの含有量は、0.05~8質量部が好ましく、0.10~5質量部がより好ましい。
〔Content〕
The content of compound A based on the total solid content of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass. The lower limit is more preferably 0.02% by mass or more, even more preferably 0.05% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 0.10% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 8% by mass or less, even more preferably 6% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 4% by mass or less.
One type of compound A may be used alone, but two or more types may be used in combination. When two or more types are used together, it is preferable that the total amount falls within the above range.
Further, in the resin composition of the present invention, the content of compound A relative to 100 parts by mass of the specific resin is preferably 0.05 to 8 parts by mass, more preferably 0.10 to 5 parts by mass.
<有機金属錯体>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、耐薬品性の観点から、有機金属錯体を含んでいてもよい。
 有機金属錯体は、金属原子を含む有機錯体化合物である限り特に限定されないが、金属原子及び有機基を含む錯体化合物であることが好ましく、金属原子に対して有機基が配位した化合物であることがより好ましく、メタロセン化合物であることが更に好ましい。
 メタロセン化合物とは、置換基を有してもよいシクロペンタジエニルアニオン誘導体2個をη5-配位子として有する有機金属錯体をいう。
 上記有機基としては、特に限定されないが、炭化水素基、又は、炭化水素基とヘテロ原子との組み合わせからなる基が好ましい。ヘテロ原子としては、酸素原子、硫黄原子、窒素原子が好ましい。
 上記有機基の少なくとも1つは環状基であることが好ましく、少なくとも2つは環状基であることがより好ましい。
 上記環状基は、5員環の環状基及び6員環の環状基から選択されることが好ましく、5員環の環状基であることがより好ましい。
 上記環状基は、炭化水素環でも複素環でもよいが、炭化水素環が好ましい。
 5員環の環状基としては、シクロペンタジエニル基が好ましい。
 有機金属錯体は、1分子中に2~4個の環状基を含むことが好ましい。
<Organometallic complex>
The resin composition of the present invention may contain an organometallic complex from the viewpoint of chemical resistance.
The organometallic complex is not particularly limited as long as it is an organic complex compound containing a metal atom, but it is preferably a complex compound containing a metal atom and an organic group, and a compound in which an organic group is coordinated to a metal atom. are more preferred, and metallocene compounds are even more preferred.
The metallocene compound refers to an organometallic complex having two cyclopentadienyl anion derivatives which may have substituents as η5-ligands.
The organic group is not particularly limited, but preferably a hydrocarbon group or a group consisting of a combination of a hydrocarbon group and a heteroatom. As the heteroatom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, and a nitrogen atom are preferable.
At least one of the above organic groups is preferably a cyclic group, and more preferably at least two are cyclic groups.
The cyclic group is preferably selected from a 5-membered cyclic group and a 6-membered cyclic group, and more preferably a 5-membered cyclic group.
The above-mentioned cyclic group may be a hydrocarbon ring or a heterocycle, but a hydrocarbon ring is preferable.
As the 5-membered cyclic group, a cyclopentadienyl group is preferred.
The organometallic complex preferably contains 2 to 4 cyclic groups in one molecule.
 有機金属錯体に含まれる金属としては、特に限定されないが、第4族元素に該当する金属であることが好ましく、チタン、ジルコニウム及びハフニウムからなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種の金属であることがより好ましく、チタン及びジルコニウムからなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種の金属であることが更に好ましく、チタンであることが特に好ましい。 The metal contained in the organometallic complex is not particularly limited, but it is preferably a metal that falls under Group 4 elements, and more preferably at least one metal selected from the group consisting of titanium, zirconium, and hafnium. Preferably, at least one metal selected from the group consisting of titanium and zirconium is more preferable, and titanium is particularly preferable.
 有機金属錯体は、金属原子を2つ以上含んでもよいし、金属原子を1つのみ含んでもよいが、金属原子を1つのみ含むことが好ましい。有機金属錯体が金属原子を2つ以上含む場合、1種のみの金属原子を含んでもよいし、2種以上の金属原子を含んでもよい。 The organometallic complex may contain two or more metal atoms or only one metal atom, but preferably contains only one metal atom. When the organometallic complex contains two or more metal atoms, it may contain only one kind of metal atom, or it may contain two or more kinds of metal atoms.
 有機金属錯体は、フェロセン化合物、チタノセン化合物、ジルコノセン化合物又はハフノセン化合物であることが好ましく、チタノセン化合物、ジルコノセン化合物又はハフノセン化合物であることがより好ましく、チタノセン化合物、又は、ジルコノセン化合物であることが更に好ましく、チタノセン化合物であることが特に好ましい。 The organometallic complex is preferably a ferrocene compound, a titanocene compound, a zirconocene compound, or a hafnocene compound, more preferably a titanocene compound, a zirconocene compound, or a hafnocene compound, and even more preferably a titanocene compound or a zirconocene compound. , titanocene compounds are particularly preferred.
 有機金属錯体が光ラジカル重合開始能を有する態様も好ましい。
 本発明において、光ラジカル重合開始能を有するとは、光の照射によりラジカル重合を開始させることのできるフリーラジカルを発生させることができることを意味する。例えば、ラジカル架橋剤と有機金属錯体とを含む組成物に対して、有機金属錯体が光を吸収する波長域であって、ラジカル架橋剤が光を吸収しない波長域の光を照射した時に、ラジカル架橋剤の消失の有無を確認することにより光ラジカル重合開始能の有無を確認することができる。消失の有無を確認するためには、ラジカル架橋剤の種類に応じて適宜方法を選択できるが、例えばIR測定(赤外分光測定)又はHPLC測定(高速液体クロマトグラフィ)により確認することができる。
 有機金属錯体が光ラジカル重合開始能を有する場合、有機金属錯体はメタロセン化合物であることが好ましく、チタノセン化合物、ジルコノセン化合物又はハフノセン化合物であることがより好ましく、チタノセン化合物、又は、ジルコノセン化合物であることが更に好ましく、チタノセン化合物であることが特に好ましい。
 有機金属錯体が光ラジカル重合開始能を有しない場合、有機金属錯体は、チタノセン化合物、テトラアルコキシチタン化合物、チタンアシレート化合物、チタンキレート化合物、ジルコノセン化合物及びハフノセン化合物からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種の化合物であることが好ましく、チタノセン化合物、ジルコノセン化合物及びハフノセン化合物からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種の化合物であることがより好ましく、チタノセン化合物及びジルコノセン化合物からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種の化合物であることが更に好ましく、チタノセン化合物であることが特に好ましい。
It is also preferable that the organometallic complex has the ability to initiate photoradical polymerization.
In the present invention, having the ability to initiate photoradical polymerization means being able to generate free radicals that can initiate radical polymerization by irradiation with light. For example, when a composition containing a radical cross-linking agent and an organometallic complex is irradiated with light in a wavelength range in which the organometallic complex absorbs light and in which the radical cross-linker does not absorb light, radicals By checking whether the crosslinking agent disappears, it is possible to check whether the photoradical polymerization initiation ability exists. In order to confirm the presence or absence of disappearance, an appropriate method can be selected depending on the type of radical crosslinking agent, and for example, it can be confirmed by IR measurement (infrared spectroscopy) or HPLC measurement (high performance liquid chromatography).
When the organometallic complex has the ability to initiate photoradical polymerization, the organometallic complex is preferably a metallocene compound, more preferably a titanocene compound, a zirconocene compound, or a hafnocene compound, and preferably a titanocene compound or a zirconocene compound. are more preferred, and titanocene compounds are particularly preferred.
When the organometallic complex does not have the ability to initiate photoradical polymerization, the organometallic complex contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of titanocene compounds, tetraalkoxytitanium compounds, titanium acylate compounds, titanium chelate compounds, zirconocene compounds, and hafnocene compounds. It is preferable that the compound is a type of compound, more preferably at least one compound selected from the group consisting of titanocene compounds, zirconocene compounds and hafnocene compounds, and at least one compound selected from the group consisting of titanocene compounds and zirconocene compounds. More preferably, it is a species compound, and particularly preferably a titanocene compound.
 有機金属錯体の分子量は、50~2,000が好ましく、100~1,000がより好ましい。 The molecular weight of the organometallic complex is preferably 50 to 2,000, more preferably 100 to 1,000.
 有機金属錯体としては、下記式(P)で表される化合物が好ましく挙げられる。

 式(P)中、Mは、金属原子であり、Rはそれぞれ独立に、置換基である。
 Rは、それぞれ独立に、芳香族基、アルキル基、ハロゲン原子及びアルキルスルホニルオキシ基から選択されることが好ましい。
As the organometallic complex, a compound represented by the following formula (P) is preferably mentioned.

In formula (P), M is a metal atom, and each R is independently a substituent.
Preferably, each R is independently selected from an aromatic group, an alkyl group, a halogen atom, and an alkylsulfonyloxy group.
 式(P)中のMが表す金属原子としては、鉄原子、チタン原子、ジルコニウム原子又はハフニウム原子が好ましく、チタン原子、ジルコニウム原子又はハフニウム原子がより好ましく、チタン原子又はジルコニウム原子が更に好ましく、チタン原子が特に好ましい。
 式(P)中のRにおける芳香族基としては、炭素数6~20の芳香族基が挙げられ、炭素数6~20の芳香族炭化水素基が好ましく、フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、又は、2-ナフチル基等が挙げられる。
 式(P)中のRにおけるアルキル基としては、炭素数1~20のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~10のアルキル基がより好ましく、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、オクチル基、イソプロピル基、t-ブチル基、イソペンチル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、2-メチルヘキシル基、シクロペンチル基等が挙げられる。
 上記Rにおけるハロゲン原子としては、F、Cl、Br、Iが挙げられる。
 上記Rにおけるアルキルスルホニルオキシ基を構成するアルキル基としては、炭素数1~20のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~10のアルキル基がより好ましく、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、オクチル基、イソプロピル基、t-ブチル基、イソペンチル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、2-メチルヘキシル基、シクロペンチル基等が挙げられる。
 上記Rは、更に置換基を有していてもよい。置換基の例としては、ハロゲン原子(F、Cl、Br、I)、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、アミノ基、シアノ基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、アシルオキシ基、モノアルキルアミノ基、ジアルキルアミノ基、モノアリールアミノ基及びジアリールアミノ基等が挙げられる。
The metal atom represented by M in formula (P) is preferably an iron atom, a titanium atom, a zirconium atom, or a hafnium atom, more preferably a titanium atom, a zirconium atom, or a hafnium atom, and even more preferably a titanium atom or a zirconium atom. Atoms are particularly preferred.
The aromatic group for R in formula (P) includes an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, such as a phenyl group, a 1-naphthyl group, or , 2-naphthyl group, etc.
The alkyl group for R in formula (P) is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, such as a methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, octyl group, isopropyl group. , t-butyl group, isopentyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, 2-methylhexyl group, cyclopentyl group, and the like.
Examples of the halogen atom in R include F, Cl, Br, and I.
The alkyl group constituting the alkylsulfonyloxy group in R above is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an octyl group, Examples include isopropyl group, t-butyl group, isopentyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, 2-methylhexyl group, and cyclopentyl group.
The above R may further have a substituent. Examples of substituents include halogen atoms (F, Cl, Br, I), hydroxy groups, carboxy groups, amino groups, cyano groups, aryl groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups, acyl groups, alkoxycarbonyl groups, aryloxy Examples include carbonyl group, acyloxy group, monoalkylamino group, dialkylamino group, monoarylamino group, and diarylamino group.
 有機金属錯体の具体例としては、特に限定されないが、テトライソプロポキシチタン、テトラキス(2-エチルヘキシルオキシ)チタン、ジイソプロポキシビス(エチルアセトアセテート)チタン、ジイソプロポキシビス(アセチルアセトナト)チタン、ビス(η5-2,4-シクロペンタジエン-1-イル)ビス(2,6-ジフルオロ-3-(1H-ピロール-1-イル)フェニル)チタニウム、ペンタメチルシクロペンタジエニルチタニウムトリメトキサイド、ビス(η5-2,4-シクロペンタジエン-1-イル)ビス(2,6-ジフルオロフェニル)チタニウム及び、下記化合物が挙げられる。
Specific examples of organometallic complexes include, but are not limited to, tetraisopropoxytitanium, tetrakis(2-ethylhexyloxy)titanium, diisopropoxybis(ethylacetoacetate)titanium, diisopropoxybis(acetylacetonato)titanium, Bis(η5-2,4-cyclopentadien-1-yl)bis(2,6-difluoro-3-(1H-pyrrol-1-yl)phenyl)titanium, pentamethylcyclopentadienyltitanium trimethoxide, bis (η5-2,4-cyclopentadien-1-yl)bis(2,6-difluorophenyl)titanium and the following compounds may be mentioned.
 また、国際公開第2018/025738号の段落0078~0088に記載の化合物も挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Also included are the compounds described in paragraphs 0078 to 0088 of International Publication No. 2018/025738, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 有機金属錯体の含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し、0.1~30質量%が好ましい。下限は、1.0質量%以上がより好ましく、1.5質量%以上が更に好ましく、3.0質量%以上が特に好ましい。上限は、25質量%以下がより好ましい。
 有機金属錯体は、1種又は2種以上を用いることができる。2種以上を用いる場合は、合計量が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
The content of the organometallic complex is preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass based on the total solid content of the resin composition. The lower limit is more preferably 1.0% by mass or more, even more preferably 1.5% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 3.0% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 25% by mass or less.
One type or two or more types of organometallic complexes can be used. When two or more types are used, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
<重合性化合物>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、重合性化合物を含むことが好ましい。
 ここで、本発明の樹脂組成物は、後述する光重合開始剤及び重合性化合物を含むことも好ましい。
 重合性化合物としては、ラジカル架橋剤、又は、他の架橋剤が挙げられる。
<Polymerizable compound>
It is preferable that the resin composition of the present invention contains a polymerizable compound.
Here, it is also preferable that the resin composition of the present invention contains a photopolymerization initiator and a polymerizable compound, which will be described later.
Examples of the polymerizable compound include radical crosslinking agents and other crosslinking agents.
〔ラジカル架橋剤〕
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、ラジカル架橋剤を含むことが好ましい。
 ラジカル架橋剤は、ラジカル重合性基を有する化合物である。ラジカル重合性基としては、エチレン性不飽和結合を含む基が好ましい。上記エチレン性不飽和結合を含む基としては、ビニル基、アリル基、ビニルフェニル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基、マレイミド基、(メタ)アクリルアミド基などが挙げられる。
 これらの中でも、(メタ)アクリロイル基、(メタ)アクリルアミド基、ビニルフェニル基が好ましく、反応性の観点からは、(メタ)アクリロイル基がより好ましい。
[Radical crosslinking agent]
It is preferable that the resin composition of the present invention contains a radical crosslinking agent.
A radical crosslinking agent is a compound having a radically polymerizable group. As the radically polymerizable group, a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferable. Examples of the group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, an allyl group, a vinyl phenyl group, a (meth)acryloyl group, a maleimide group, and a (meth)acrylamide group.
Among these, (meth)acryloyl group, (meth)acrylamide group, and vinylphenyl group are preferable, and from the viewpoint of reactivity, (meth)acryloyl group is more preferable.
 ラジカル架橋剤は、エチレン性不飽和結合を1個以上有する化合物であることが好ましいが、2個以上有する化合物であることがより好ましい。ラジカル架橋剤は、エチレン性不飽和結合を3個以上有していてもよい。
 上記エチレン性不飽和結合を2個以上有する化合物としては、エチレン性不飽和結合を2~15個有する化合物が好ましく、エチレン性不飽和結合を2~10個有する化合物がより好ましく、2~6個有する化合物が更に好ましい。
 得られるパターン(硬化物)の膜強度の観点からは、本発明の樹脂組成物は、エチレン性不飽和結合を2個有する化合物と、上記エチレン性不飽和結合を3個以上有する化合物とを含むことも好ましい。
The radical crosslinking agent is preferably a compound having one or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds, more preferably a compound having two or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds. The radical crosslinking agent may have three or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds.
The compound having two or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds is preferably a compound having 2 to 15 ethylenically unsaturated bonds, more preferably a compound having 2 to 10 ethylenically unsaturated bonds, and more preferably a compound having 2 to 6 ethylenically unsaturated bonds. More preferred are compounds having the following.
From the viewpoint of the film strength of the obtained pattern (cured product), the resin composition of the present invention contains a compound having two ethylenically unsaturated bonds and a compound having three or more of the above ethylenically unsaturated bonds. It is also preferable.
 ラジカル架橋剤の分子量は、2,000以下が好ましく、1,500以下がより好ましく、900以下が更に好ましい。ラジカル架橋剤の分子量の下限は、100以上が好ましい。 The molecular weight of the radical crosslinking agent is preferably 2,000 or less, more preferably 1,500 or less, and even more preferably 900 or less. The lower limit of the molecular weight of the radical crosslinking agent is preferably 100 or more.
 ラジカル架橋剤の具体例としては、不飽和カルボン酸(例えば、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸、イタコン酸、クロトン酸、イソクロトン酸、マレイン酸など)やそのエステル類、アミド類が挙げられ、好ましくは、不飽和カルボン酸と多価アルコール化合物とのエステル、及び不飽和カルボン酸と多価アミン化合物とのアミド類である。また、ヒドロキシ基やアミノ基、スルファニル基等の求核性置換基を有する不飽和カルボン酸エステル又はアミド類と、単官能若しくは多官能イソシアネート類又はエポキシ類との付加反応物や、単官能若しくは多官能のカルボン酸との脱水縮合反応物等も好適に使用される。また、イソシアネート基やエポキシ基等の親電子性置換基を有する不飽和カルボン酸エステル又はアミド類と、単官能若しくは多官能のアルコール類、アミン類、チオール類との付加反応物、更に、ハロゲノ基やトシルオキシ基等の脱離性置換基を有する不飽和カルボン酸エステル又はアミド類と、単官能若しくは多官能のアルコール類、アミン類、チオール類との置換反応物も好適である。また、別の例として、上記の不飽和カルボン酸の代わりに、不飽和ホスホン酸、スチレン等のビニルベンゼン誘導体、ビニルエーテル、アリルエーテル等に置き換えた化合物群を使用することも可能である。具体例としては、特開2016-027357号公報の段落0113~0122の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Specific examples of radical crosslinking agents include unsaturated carboxylic acids (for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.), their esters, and amides. These are esters of saturated carboxylic acids and polyhydric alcohol compounds, and amides of unsaturated carboxylic acids and polyhydric amine compounds. In addition, addition reaction products of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides having nucleophilic substituents such as hydroxy groups, amino groups, and sulfanyl groups with monofunctional or polyfunctional isocyanates or epoxies, and monofunctional or polyfunctional A dehydration condensation reaction product with a functional carboxylic acid is also preferably used. In addition, addition reaction products of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides having electrophilic substituents such as isocyanate groups and epoxy groups with monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohols, amines, and thiols, and furthermore, halogen groups Substitution reaction products of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides having a leaving substituent such as or tosyloxy group and monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohols, amines, and thiols are also suitable. Further, as another example, it is also possible to use a group of compounds in which the unsaturated carboxylic acid mentioned above is replaced with an unsaturated phosphonic acid, a vinylbenzene derivative such as styrene, vinyl ether, allyl ether, or the like. As a specific example, the descriptions in paragraphs 0113 to 0122 of JP-A No. 2016-027357 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated into the present specification.
 ラジカル架橋剤は、常圧下で100℃以上の沸点を持つ化合物も好ましい。常圧下で100℃以上の沸点を持つ化合物としては、国際公開第2021/112189号公報の段落0203に記載の化合物等が挙げられる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 The radical crosslinking agent is also preferably a compound having a boiling point of 100°C or higher under normal pressure. Examples of the compound having a boiling point of 100° C. or higher under normal pressure include the compounds described in paragraph 0203 of International Publication No. 2021/112189. This content is incorporated herein.
 上述以外の好ましいラジカル架橋剤としては、国際公開第2021/112189号公報の段落0204~0208に記載のラジカル重合性化合物等が挙げられる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Preferred radical crosslinking agents other than those mentioned above include radically polymerizable compounds described in paragraphs 0204 to 0208 of International Publication No. 2021/112189. This content is incorporated herein.
 ラジカル架橋剤としては、ジペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート(市販品としては KAYARAD D-330(日本化薬(株)製))、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート(市販品としては KAYARAD D-320(日本化薬(株)製)、A-TMMT(新中村化学工業(株)製))、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としては KAYARAD D-310(日本化薬(株)製))、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としては KAYARAD DPHA(日本化薬(株)製)、A-DPH(新中村化学工業社製))、及びこれらの(メタ)アクリロイル基がエチレングリコール残基又はプロピレングリコール残基を介して結合している構造が好ましい。これらのオリゴマータイプも使用できる。 Examples of radical crosslinking agents include dipentaerythritol triacrylate (commercially available product: KAYARAD D-330 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.)), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (commercially available product: KAYARAD D-320 (made by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) Co., Ltd.), A-TMMT (Shin Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.)), dipentaerythritol penta(meth)acrylate (commercially available products include KAYARAD D-310 (Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.)), dipenta Erythritol hexa(meth)acrylate (commercially available products are KAYARAD DPHA (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and A-DPH (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)), and these (meth)acryloyl groups are ethylene glycol residues or A structure in which they are linked via a propylene glycol residue is preferred. These oligomeric types can also be used.
 ラジカル架橋剤の市販品としては、例えばエチレンオキシ鎖を4個有する4官能アクリレートであるSR-494、エチレンオキシ鎖を4個有する2官能メタクリレートであるSR-209、231、239(以上、サートマー社製)、ペンチレンオキシ鎖を6個有する6官能アクリレートであるDPCA-60、イソブチレンオキシ鎖を3個有する3官能アクリレートであるTPA-330(以上、日本化薬(株)製)、ウレタンオリゴマーであるUAS-10、UAB-140(以上、日本製紙社製)、NKエステルM-40G、NKエステル4G、NKエステルM-9300、NKエステルA-9300、UA-7200(以上、新中村化学工業社製)、DPHA-40H(日本化薬(株)製)、UA-306H、UA-306T、UA-306I、AH-600、T-600、AI-600(以上、共栄社化学社製)、ブレンマーPME400(日油(株)製)などが挙げられる。 Commercially available radical crosslinking agents include, for example, SR-494, which is a tetrafunctional acrylate with four ethyleneoxy chains, and SR-209, 231, and 239, which are difunctional methacrylates with four ethyleneoxy chains (all of which are sold by Sartomer Co., Ltd.). (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), DPCA-60, a hexafunctional acrylate with six pentyleneoxy chains, TPA-330, a trifunctional acrylate with three isobutyleneoxy chains (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), and urethane oligomers. Certain UAS-10, UAB-140 (all manufactured by Nippon Paper Industries), NK Ester M-40G, NK Ester 4G, NK Ester M-9300, NK Ester A-9300, UA-7200 (all manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industries) ), DPHA-40H (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, AH-600, T-600, AI-600 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), Blenmar PME400 (manufactured by NOF Corporation).
 ラジカル架橋剤としては、特公昭48-041708号公報、特開昭51-037193号公報、特公平02-032293号公報、特公平02-016765号公報に記載されているようなウレタンアクリレート類や、特公昭58-049860号公報、特公昭56-017654号公報、特公昭62-039417号公報、特公昭62-039418号公報に記載のエチレンオキサイド系骨格を有するウレタン化合物類も好適である。ラジカル架橋剤として、特開昭63-277653号公報、特開昭63-260909号公報、特開平01-105238号公報に記載される、分子内にアミノ構造やスルフィド構造を有する化合物を用いることもできる。 As the radical crosslinking agent, urethane acrylates as described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 48-041708, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 51-037193, Japanese Patent Publication No. 02-032293, and Japanese Patent Publication No. 02-016765, Urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide skeleton described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 58-049860, Japanese Patent Publication No. 56-017654, Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-039417, and Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-039418 are also suitable. As a radical crosslinking agent, compounds having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in the molecule, which are described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A-01-105238, can also be used. can.
 ラジカル架橋剤は、カルボキシ基、リン酸基等の酸基を有するラジカル架橋剤であってもよい。酸基を有するラジカル架橋剤は、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物と不飽和カルボン酸とのエステルが好ましく、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物の未反応のヒドロキシ基に非芳香族カルボン酸無水物を反応させて酸基を持たせたラジカル架橋剤がより好ましい。特に好ましくは、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物の未反応のヒドロキシ基に非芳香族カルボン酸無水物を反応させて酸基を持たせたラジカル架橋剤において、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物がペンタエリスリトール又はジペンタエリスリトールである化合物である。市販品としては、例えば、東亞合成(株)製の多塩基酸変性アクリルオリゴマーとして、M-510、M-520などが挙げられる。 The radical crosslinking agent may be a radical crosslinking agent having an acid group such as a carboxy group or a phosphoric acid group. The radical crosslinking agent having an acid group is preferably an ester of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid, and the unreacted hydroxy group of the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is reacted with a non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride to form an acid group. A radical crosslinking agent having the following is more preferable. Particularly preferably, in the radical crosslinking agent in which an unreacted hydroxy group of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is reacted with a non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride to have an acid group, the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is pentaerythritol or dipentaerythritol. It is a compound that is Commercially available products include, for example, polybasic acid-modified acrylic oligomers manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd., such as M-510 and M-520.
 酸基を有するラジカル架橋剤の酸価は、0.1~300mgKOH/gが好ましく、1~100mgKOH/gがより好ましい。ラジカル架橋剤の酸価が上記範囲であれば、製造上の取扱性に優れ、現像性に優れる。また、重合性が良好である。上記酸価は、JIS K 0070:1992の記載に準拠して測定される。 The acid value of the radical crosslinking agent having an acid group is preferably 0.1 to 300 mgKOH/g, more preferably 1 to 100 mgKOH/g. If the acid value of the radical crosslinking agent is within the above range, it will have excellent handling properties during production and excellent developability. Moreover, it has good polymerizability. The above acid value is measured in accordance with the description of JIS K 0070:1992.
 樹脂組成物は、パターンの解像性と膜の伸縮性の観点から、2官能のメタアクリレート又はアクリレートを用いることが好ましい。
 具体的な化合物としては、トリエチレングリコールジアクリレート、トリエチレングリコールジメタクリレート、テトラエチレングリコールジメタクリレート、テトラエチレングリコールジアクリレート、PEG(ポリエチレングリコール)200ジアクリレート、PEG200ジメタクリレート、PEG600ジアクリレート、PEG600ジメタクリレート、ポリテトラエチレングリコールジアクリレート、ポリテトラエチレングリコールジメタクリレート、ジプロピレングリコールジアクリレート、トリプロピレングリコールジアクリレート、ネオペンチルグリコールジアクリレート、ネオペンチルグリコールジメタクリレート、3-メチル-1,5-ペンタンジオールジアクリレート、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジアクリレート、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジメタクリレート、ジメチロール-トリシクロデカンジアクリレート、ジメチロール-トリシクロデカンジメタクリレート、ビスフェノールAのEO(エチレンオキシド)付加物ジアクリレート、ビスフェノールAのEO付加物ジメタクリレート、ビスフェノールAのPO(プロピレンオキシド)付加物ジアクリレート、ビスフェノールAのPO付加物ジメタクリレート、2-ヒドロキシー3-アクリロイロキシプロピルメタクリレート、イソシアヌル酸EO変性ジアクリレート、イソシアヌル酸EO変性ジメタクリレート、その他ウレタン結合を有する2官能アクリレート、ウレタン結合を有する2官能メタクリレートを使用することができる。これらは必要に応じ、2種以上を混合し使用することができる。
 なお、例えばPEG200ジアクリレートとは、ポリエチレングリコールジアクリレートであって、ポリエチレングリコール鎖の式量が200程度のものをいう。
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、パターン(硬化物)の反り抑制の観点から、ラジカル架橋剤として、単官能ラジカル架橋剤を好ましく用いることができる。単官能ラジカル架橋剤としては、n-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-エチルヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、ブトキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、カルビトール(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート、フェノキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、N-メチロール(メタ)アクリルアミド、グリシジル(メタ)アクリレート、ポリエチレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリプロピレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート等の(メタ)アクリル酸誘導体、N-ビニルピロリドン、N-ビニルカプロラクタム等のN-ビニル化合物類、アリルグリシジルエーテル等が好ましく用いられる。単官能ラジカル架橋剤としては、露光前の揮発を抑制するため、常圧下で100℃以上の沸点を持つ化合物も好ましい。
 その他、2官能以上のラジカル架橋剤としては、ジアリルフタレート、トリアリルトリメリテート等のアリル化合物類が挙げられる。
It is preferable to use bifunctional methacrylate or acrylate as the resin composition from the viewpoint of pattern resolution and film stretchability.
Specific compounds include triethylene glycol diacrylate, triethylene glycol dimethacrylate, tetraethylene glycol dimethacrylate, tetraethylene glycol diacrylate, PEG (polyethylene glycol) 200 diacrylate, PEG 200 dimethacrylate, PEG 600 diacrylate, and PEG 600 diacrylate. Methacrylate, polytetraethylene glycol diacrylate, polytetraethylene glycol dimethacrylate, dipropylene glycol diacrylate, tripropylene glycol diacrylate, neopentyl glycol diacrylate, neopentyl glycol dimethacrylate, 3-methyl-1,5-pentanediol Diacrylate, 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate, 1,6-hexanediol dimethacrylate, dimethylol-tricyclodecane diacrylate, dimethylol-tricyclodecane dimethacrylate, EO (ethylene oxide) adduct diacrylate of bisphenol A, bisphenol EO adduct dimethacrylate of A, PO (propylene oxide) adduct diacrylate of bisphenol A, PO adduct dimethacrylate of bisphenol A, 2-hydroxy-3-acryloyloxypropyl methacrylate, isocyanuric acid EO-modified diacrylate, isocyanuric acid EO-modified dimethacrylate, other bifunctional acrylates having urethane bonds, and bifunctional methacrylates having urethane bonds can be used. These can be used as a mixture of two or more types, if necessary.
Note that, for example, PEG200 diacrylate refers to polyethylene glycol diacrylate in which the formula weight of polyethylene glycol chains is about 200.
In the resin composition of the present invention, a monofunctional radical crosslinking agent can be preferably used as the radical crosslinking agent from the viewpoint of suppressing warpage of the pattern (cured product). Examples of monofunctional radical crosslinking agents include n-butyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, butoxyethyl (meth)acrylate, carbitol (meth)acrylate, and cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate. (meth)acrylate, benzyl (meth)acrylate, phenoxyethyl (meth)acrylate, N-methylol (meth)acrylamide, glycidyl (meth)acrylate, polyethylene glycol mono(meth)acrylate, polypropylene glycol mono(meth)acrylate, etc. Acrylic acid derivatives, N-vinyl compounds such as N-vinylpyrrolidone and N-vinylcaprolactam, allyl glycidyl ether, and the like are preferably used. As the monofunctional radical crosslinking agent, a compound having a boiling point of 100° C. or higher at normal pressure is also preferred in order to suppress volatilization before exposure.
In addition, examples of the radical crosslinking agent having two or more functional groups include allyl compounds such as diallyl phthalate and triallyl trimellitate.
 ラジカル架橋剤を含有する場合、ラジカル架橋剤の含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対して、0質量%超60質量%以下であることが好ましい。下限は5質量%以上がより好ましい。上限は、50質量%以下であることがより好ましく、30質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。 When containing a radical crosslinking agent, the content of the radical crosslinking agent is preferably more than 0% by mass and 60% by mass or less based on the total solid content of the resin composition. The lower limit is more preferably 5% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 50% by mass or less, and even more preferably 30% by mass or less.
 ラジカル架橋剤は1種を単独で用いてもよいが、2種以上を混合して用いてもよい。2種以上を併用する場合にはその合計量が上記の範囲となることが好ましい。 One type of radical crosslinking agent may be used alone, or a mixture of two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used together, it is preferable that the total amount falls within the above range.
〔他の架橋剤〕
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、上述したラジカル架橋剤とは異なる、他の架橋剤を含むことも好ましい。
 他の架橋剤とは、上述したラジカル架橋剤以外の架橋剤をいい、上述の光酸発生剤、又は、光塩基発生剤の感光により、組成物中の他の化合物又はその反応生成物との間で共有結合を形成する反応が促進される基を分子内に複数個有する化合物であることが好ましく、組成物中の他の化合物又はその反応生成物との間で共有結合を形成する反応が酸又は塩基の作用によって促進される基を分子内に複数個有する化合物が好ましい。
 上記酸又は塩基は、露光工程において、光酸発生剤又は光塩基発生剤から発生する酸又は塩基であることが好ましい。
 他の架橋剤としては、国際公開第2022/145355号の段落0179~0207に記載の化合物が挙げられる。上記記載は本明細書に組み込まれる。
[Other crosslinking agents]
It is also preferable that the resin composition of the present invention contains another crosslinking agent different from the above-mentioned radical crosslinking agent.
Other crosslinking agents refer to crosslinking agents other than the above-mentioned radical crosslinking agents, and the above-mentioned photoacid generators or photobase generators are photosensitive to other compounds in the composition or their reaction products. It is preferable that the compound has a plurality of groups in its molecule that promote the reaction of forming a covalent bond between the compounds, and the reaction of forming a covalent bond with other compounds in the composition or the reaction products thereof is preferably Compounds having multiple groups in the molecule that are promoted by the action of acids or bases are preferred.
The acid or base is preferably an acid or base generated from a photoacid generator or a photobase generator in the exposure step.
Other crosslinking agents include compounds described in paragraphs 0179 to 0207 of International Publication No. 2022/145355. The above description is incorporated herein.
〔重合開始剤〕
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、重合開始剤を含むことが好ましい。重合開始剤は熱重合開始剤であっても光重合開始剤であってもよいが、特に光重合開始剤を含むことが好ましい。
 光重合開始剤は、光ラジカル重合開始剤であることが好ましい。光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、特に制限はなく、公知の光ラジカル重合開始剤の中から適宜選択することができる。例えば、紫外線領域から可視領域の光線に対して感光性を有する光ラジカル重合開始剤が好ましい。また、光励起された増感剤と作用し、活性ラジカルを生成する活性剤であってもよい。
[Polymerization initiator]
The resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a polymerization initiator. The polymerization initiator may be a thermal polymerization initiator or a photopolymerization initiator, but it is particularly preferable to include a photopolymerization initiator.
The photopolymerization initiator is preferably a radical photopolymerization initiator. The photoradical polymerization initiator is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from known photoradical polymerization initiators. For example, a photoradical polymerization initiator that is sensitive to light in the ultraviolet to visible range is preferable. Alternatively, it may be an activator that acts with a photoexcited sensitizer to generate active radicals.
 光ラジカル重合開始剤は、波長約240~800nm(好ましくは330~500nm)の範囲内で少なくとも約50L・mol-1・cm-1のモル吸光係数を有する化合物を、少なくとも1種含有していることが好ましい。化合物のモル吸光係数は、公知の方法を用いて測定することができる。例えば、紫外可視分光光度計(Varian社製Cary-5 spectrophotometer)にて、酢酸エチル溶剤を用い、0.01g/Lの濃度で測定することが好ましい。 The photoradical polymerization initiator contains at least one compound having a molar absorption coefficient of at least about 50 L·mol −1 ·cm −1 within the wavelength range of about 240 to 800 nm (preferably 330 to 500 nm). It is preferable. The molar extinction coefficient of a compound can be measured using a known method. For example, it is preferable to measure at a concentration of 0.01 g/L using an ethyl acetate solvent with an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer (Cary-5 spectrophotometer manufactured by Varian).
 光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、公知の化合物を任意に使用できる。例えば、ハロゲン化炭化水素誘導体(例えば、トリアジン骨格を有する化合物、オキサジアゾール骨格を有する化合物、トリハロメチル基を有する化合物など)、アシルホスフィンオキサイド等のアシルホスフィン化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール、オキシム誘導体等のオキシム化合物、有機過酸化物、チオ化合物、ケトン化合物、芳香族オニウム塩、ケトオキシムエーテル、アミノアセトフェノンなどのα-アミノケトン化合物、ヒドロキシアセトフェノンなどのα-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、アゾ系化合物、アジド化合物、メタロセン化合物、有機ホウ素化合物、鉄アレーン錯体などが挙げられる。これらの詳細については、特開2016-027357号公報の段落0165~0182、国際公開第2015/199219号の段落0138~0151の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、特開2014-130173号公報の段落0065~0111、特許第6301489号公報に記載された化合物、MATERIAL STAGE 37~60p,vol.19,No.3,2019に記載されたパーオキサイド系光重合開始剤、国際公開第2018/221177号に記載の光重合開始剤、国際公開第2018/110179号に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-043864号公報に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-044030号公報に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-167313号公報に記載の過酸化物系開始剤が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 As the photoradical polymerization initiator, any known compound can be used. For example, halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (e.g., compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, compounds having a trihalomethyl group, etc.), acylphosphine compounds such as acylphosphine oxide, hexaarylbiimidazole, oxime derivatives, etc. oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ketooxime ethers, α-aminoketone compounds such as aminoacetophenone, α-hydroxyketone compounds such as hydroxyacetophenone, azo compounds, azide compounds, Examples include metallocene compounds, organic boron compounds, iron arene complexes, and the like. For these details, the descriptions in paragraphs 0165 to 0182 of JP2016-027357A and paragraphs 0138 to 0151 of International Publication No. 2015/199219 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein. In addition, compounds described in paragraphs 0065 to 0111 of JP 2014-130173, Japanese Patent No. 6301489, MATERIAL STAGE 37 to 60p, vol. 19, No. 3,2019, the photopolymerization initiator described in International Publication No. 2018/221177, the photopolymerization initiator described in International Publication No. 2018/110179, JP 2019-043864 The photopolymerization initiators described in JP-A No. 2019-044030, the peroxide-based initiators described in JP-A No. 2019-167313, and the contents of these are Incorporated into the specification.
 ケトン化合物としては、例えば、特開2015-087611号公報の段落0087に記載の化合物が例示され、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。市販品では、カヤキュア-DETX-S(日本化薬(株)製)も好適に用いられる。 Examples of the ketone compound include compounds described in paragraph 0087 of JP-A-2015-087611, the contents of which are incorporated herein. As a commercially available product, Kayacure-DETX-S (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) is also suitably used.
 本発明の一実施態様において、光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、ヒドロキシアセトフェノン化合物、アミノアセトフェノン化合物、及び、アシルホスフィン化合物を好適に用いることができる。より具体的には、例えば、特開平10-291969号公報に記載のアミノアセトフェノン系開始剤、特許第4225898号に記載のアシルホスフィンオキシド系開始剤を用いることができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 In one embodiment of the present invention, a hydroxyacetophenone compound, an aminoacetophenone compound, and an acylphosphine compound can be suitably used as the photoradical polymerization initiator. More specifically, for example, the aminoacetophenone-based initiator described in JP-A-10-291969 and the acylphosphine oxide-based initiator described in Japanese Patent No. 4225898 can be used, the content of which is herein incorporated by reference. Incorporated.
 α-ヒドロキシケトン系開始剤としては、Omnirad 184、Omnirad 1173、Omnirad 2959、Omnirad 127(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、IRGACURE 184(IRGACUREは登録商標)、DAROCUR 1173、IRGACURE 500、IRGACURE-2959、IRGACURE 127(以上、BASF社製)を用いることができる。 Examples of α-hydroxyketone initiators include Omnirad 184, Omnirad 1173, Omnirad 2959, Omnirad 127 (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), IRGACURE 184 (IRGACURE is a registered trademark), DA ROCUR 1173, IRGACURE 500, IRGACURE -2959 and IRGACURE 127 (manufactured by BASF) can be used.
 α-アミノケトン系開始剤としては、Omnirad 907、Omnirad 369、Omnirad 369E、Omnirad 379EG(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、IRGACURE 907、IRGACURE 369、及び、IRGACURE 379(以上、BASF社製)を用いることができる。 Examples of α-aminoketone initiators include Omnirad 907, Omnirad 369, Omnirad 369E, Omnirad 379EG (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), IRGACURE 907, IRGACURE 369. , and IRGACURE 379 (manufactured by BASF) can be used.
 アミノアセトフェノン系開始剤、アシルホスフィンオキシド系開始剤、メタロセン化合物としては、例えば、国際公開第2021/112189号の段落0161~0163に記載の化合物も好適に使用することができる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 As the aminoacetophenone initiator, the acylphosphine oxide initiator, and the metallocene compound, for example, the compounds described in paragraphs 0161 to 0163 of International Publication No. 2021/112189 can also be suitably used. This content is incorporated herein.
 光ラジカル重合開始剤として、より好ましくはオキシム化合物が挙げられる。オキシム化合物を用いることにより、露光ラチチュードをより効果的に向上させることが可能になる。オキシム化合物は、露光ラチチュード(露光マージン)が広く、かつ、光硬化促進剤としても働くため、特に好ましい。 More preferred examples of the photoradical polymerization initiator include oxime compounds. By using an oxime compound, it becomes possible to improve exposure latitude more effectively. Oxime compounds are particularly preferred because they have a wide exposure latitude (exposure margin) and also act as photocuring accelerators.
 オキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2001-233842号公報に記載の化合物、特開2000-080068号公報に記載の化合物、特開2006-342166号公報に記載の化合物、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年、pp.1653-1660)に記載の化合物、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年、pp.156-162)に記載の化合物、Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology(1995年、pp.202-232)に記載の化合物、特開2000-066385号公報に記載の化合物、特表2004-534797号公報に記載の化合物、特開2017-019766号公報に記載の化合物、特許第6065596号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2015/152153号に記載の化合物、国際公開第2017/051680号に記載の化合物、特開2017-198865号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2017/164127号の段落番号0025~0038に記載の化合物、国際公開第2013/167515号に記載の化合物などが挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Specific examples of oxime compounds include compounds described in JP-A-2001-233842, compounds described in JP-A 2000-080068, compounds described in JP-A 2006-342166, J. C. S. Perkin II (1979, pp. 1653-1660); C. S. Compounds described in Perkin II (1979, pp. 156-162), compounds described in Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995, pp. 202-232), JP-A-2000-0 Compounds described in Publication No. 66385, Compounds described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2004-534797, compounds described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-019766, compounds described in Patent No. 6065596, compounds described in International Publication No. 2015/152153, International Publication No. 2017 /051680, compounds described in JP 2017-198865, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0025 to 0038 of International Publication No. 2017/164127, compounds described in International Publication No. 2013/167515, etc. , the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 好ましいオキシム化合物としては、例えば、下記の構造の化合物や、3-(ベンゾイルオキシ(イミノ))ブタン-2-オン、3-(アセトキシ(イミノ))ブタン-2-オン、3-(プロピオニルオキシ(イミノ))ブタン-2-オン、2-(アセトキシ(イミノ))ペンタン-3-オン、2-(アセトキシ(イミノ))-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、2-(ベンゾイルオキシ(イミノ))-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、3-((4-トルエンスルホニルオキシ)イミノ)ブタン-2-オン、及び2-(エトキシカルボニルオキシ(イミノ))-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オンなどが挙げられる。樹脂組成物においては、特に光ラジカル重合開始剤としてオキシム化合物を用いることが好ましい。光ラジカル重合開始剤としてのオキシム化合物は、分子内に>C=N-O-C(=O)-の連結基を有する。 Preferred oxime compounds include, for example, compounds with the following structures, 3-(benzoyloxy(imino))butan-2-one, 3-(acetoxy(imino))butan-2-one, 3-(propionyloxy( imino))butan-2-one, 2-(acetoxy(imino))pentan-3-one, 2-(acetoxy(imino))-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-(benzoyloxy(imino)) -1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3-((4-toluenesulfonyloxy)imino)butan-2-one, and 2-(ethoxycarbonyloxy(imino))-1-phenylpropan-1-one, etc. Can be mentioned. In the resin composition, it is particularly preferable to use an oxime compound as a photoradical polymerization initiator. The oxime compound used as a photoradical polymerization initiator has a >C=N-O-C(=O)- linking group in the molecule.
 オキシム化合物の市販品としては、IRGACURE OXE 01、IRGACURE OXE 02、IRGACURE OXE 03、IRGACURE OXE 04(以上、BASF社製)、アデカオプトマーN-1919((株)ADEKA製、特開2012-014052号公報に記載の光ラジカル重合開始剤2)、TR-PBG-304、TR-PBG-305(常州強力電子新材料有限公司製)、アデカアークルズNCI-730、NCI-831及びアデカアークルズNCI-930((株)ADEKA製)、DFI-091(ダイトーケミックス(株)製)、SpeedCure PDO(SARTOMER ARKEMA製)が挙げられる。また、下記の構造のオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。
Commercially available oxime compounds include IRGACURE OXE 01, IRGACURE OXE 02, IRGACURE OXE 03, IRGACURE OXE 04 (manufactured by BASF), and ADEKA Optomer N-1919 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation, JP-A-2012-014052). Radical photopolymerization initiator 2) described in the publication, TR-PBG-304, TR-PBG-305 (manufactured by Changzhou Strong Electronics New Materials Co., Ltd.), Adeka Arcles NCI-730, NCI-831, and Adeka Arcles NCI- 930 (manufactured by ADEKA Co., Ltd.), DFI-091 (manufactured by Daito Chemix Co., Ltd.), and SpeedCure PDO (manufactured by SARTOMER ARKEMA). Moreover, oxime compounds having the following structures can also be used.
 光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、例えば、国際公開第2021/112189号の段落0169~0171に記載のフルオレン環を有するオキシム化合物、カルバゾール環の少なくとも1つのベンゼン環がナフタレン環となった骨格を有するオキシム化合物、フッ素原子を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。
 また、国際公開第2021/020359号に記載の段落0208~0210に記載のニトロ基を有するオキシム化合物、ベンゾフラン骨格を有するオキシム化合物、カルバゾール骨格にヒドロキシ基を有する置換基が結合したオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
Examples of the photoradical polymerization initiator include oxime compounds having a fluorene ring described in paragraphs 0169 to 0171 of International Publication No. 2021/112189, and oximes having a skeleton in which at least one benzene ring of a carbazole ring is a naphthalene ring. Compounds, oxime compounds having a fluorine atom can also be used.
Furthermore, an oxime compound having a nitro group, an oxime compound having a benzofuran skeleton, and an oxime compound having a substituent having a hydroxy group bonded to a carbazole skeleton described in paragraphs 0208 to 0210 of International Publication No. 2021/020359 may be used. You can also do it. Their contents are incorporated herein.
 光重合開始剤としては、芳香族環に電子求引性基が導入された芳香族環基ArOX1を有するオキシム化合物(以下、オキシム化合物OXともいう)を用いることもできる。上記芳香族環基ArOX1が有する電子求引性基としては、アシル基、ニトロ基、トリフルオロメチル基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、シアノ基が挙げられ、アシル基およびニトロ基が好ましく、耐光性に優れた膜を形成しやすいという理由からアシル基であることがより好ましく、ベンゾイル基であることが更に好ましい。ベンゾイル基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、複素環基、複素環オキシ基、アルケニル基、アルキルスルファニル基、アリールスルファニル基、アシル基またはアミノ基であることが好ましく、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、複素環オキシ基、アルキルスルファニル基、アリールスルファニル基またはアミノ基であることがより好ましく、アルコキシ基、アルキルスルファニル基またはアミノ基であることが更に好ましい。 As the photopolymerization initiator, it is also possible to use an oxime compound having an aromatic ring group Ar OX1 (hereinafter also referred to as oxime compound OX) in which an electron-withdrawing group is introduced into the aromatic ring. Examples of the electron-withdrawing group possessed by the aromatic ring group Ar OX1 include an acyl group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, an alkylsulfinyl group, an arylsulfinyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, and a cyano group, An acyl group and a nitro group are preferred, an acyl group is more preferred because a film with excellent light resistance can be easily formed, and a benzoyl group is even more preferred. The benzoyl group may have a substituent. Examples of substituents include halogen atoms, cyano groups, nitro groups, hydroxy groups, alkyl groups, alkoxy groups, aryl groups, aryloxy groups, heterocyclic groups, heterocyclic oxy groups, alkenyl groups, alkylsulfanyl groups, arylsulfanyl groups, It is preferably an acyl group or an amino group, and more preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclicoxy group, an alkylsulfanyl group, an arylsulfanyl group, or an amino group. More preferably, it is a sulfanyl group or an amino group.
 オキシム化合物OXは、式(OX1)で表される化合物および式(OX2)で表される化合物から選ばれる少なくとも1種であることが好ましく、式(OX2)で表される化合物であることがより好ましい。

 式中、RX1は、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、複素環基、複素環オキシ基、アルキルスルファニル基、アリールスルファニル基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、アシル基、アシルオキシ基、アミノ基、ホスフィノイル基、カルバモイル基またはスルファモイル基を表し、
 RX2は、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、複素環基、複素環オキシ基、アルキルスルファニル基、アリールスルファニル基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、アシルオキシ基またはアミノ基を表し、
 RX3~RX14は、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表す。
 ただし、RX10~RX14のうち少なくとも1つは、電子求引性基である。
The oxime compound OX is preferably at least one selected from a compound represented by formula (OX1) and a compound represented by formula (OX2), and more preferably a compound represented by formula (OX2). preferable.

In the formula, R group, arylsulfonyl group, acyl group, acyloxy group, amino group, phosphinoyl group, carbamoyl group or sulfamoyl group,
R Represents a sulfonyl group, acyloxy group or amino group,
R X3 to R X14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
However, at least one of R X10 to R X14 is an electron-withdrawing group.
 上記式において、RX12が電子求引性基であり、RX10、RX11、RX13、RX14は水素原子であることが好ましい。 In the above formula, R X12 is preferably an electron-withdrawing group, and R X10 , R X11 , R X13 , and R X14 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
 オキシム化合物OXの具体例としては、特許第4600600号公報の段落番号0083~0105に記載の化合物が挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Specific examples of the oxime compound OX include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0083 to 0105 of Japanese Patent No. 4,600,600, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 特に好ましいオキシム化合物としては、特開2007-269779号公報に示される特定置換基を有するオキシム化合物や、特開2009-191061号公報に示されるチオアリール基を有するオキシム化合物などが挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Particularly preferable oxime compounds include oxime compounds having a specific substituent group as shown in JP-A No. 2007-269779, and oxime compounds having a thioaryl group as shown in JP-A No. 2009-191061. Incorporated herein.
 光ラジカル重合開始剤は、露光感度の観点から、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、ベンジルジメチルケタール化合物、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物、ホスフィンオキサイド化合物、メタロセン化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリールイミダゾールダイマー、オニウム塩化合物、ベンゾチアゾール化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、アセトフェノン化合物及びその誘導体、シクロペンタジエン-ベンゼン-鉄錯体及びその塩、ハロメチルオキサジアゾール化合物、3-アリール置換クマリン化合物からなる群より選択される化合物が好ましい。 From the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity, photoradical polymerization initiators include trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyl dimethyl ketal compounds, α-hydroxyketone compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, and triaryl compounds. selected from the group consisting of imidazole dimers, onium salt compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds and derivatives thereof, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes and salts thereof, halomethyloxadiazole compounds, and 3-aryl substituted coumarin compounds. Compounds such as
 また、光ラジカル重合開始剤は、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物、ホスフィンオキサイド化合物、メタロセン化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリールイミダゾールダイマー、オニウム塩化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、アセトフェノン化合物であり、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、メタロセン化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリールイミダゾールダイマー、ベンゾフェノン化合物からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種の化合物がより好ましく、メタロセン化合物又はオキシム化合物が更に好ましい。 Further, the photoradical polymerization initiator is a trihalomethyltriazine compound, an α-aminoketone compound, an acylphosphine compound, a phosphine oxide compound, a metallocene compound, an oxime compound, a triarylimidazole dimer, an onium salt compound, a benzophenone compound, an acetophenone compound, At least one compound selected from the group consisting of trihalomethyltriazine compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triarylimidazole dimers, and benzophenone compounds is more preferred, and metallocene compounds or oxime compounds are even more preferred.
 光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、国際公開第2021/020359号に記載の段落0175~0179に記載の化合物、国際公開第2015/125469号の段落0048~0055に記載の化合物を用いることもでき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 As the photoradical polymerization initiator, compounds described in paragraphs 0175 to 0179 of WO 2021/020359 and compounds described in paragraphs 0048 to 0055 of WO 2015/125469 can also be used; The contents are incorporated herein.
 光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、2官能あるいは3官能以上の光ラジカル重合開始剤を用いてもよい。そのような光ラジカル重合開始剤を用いることにより、光ラジカル重合開始剤の1分子から2つ以上のラジカルが発生するため、良好な感度が得られる。また、非対称構造の化合物を用いた場合においては、結晶性が低下して溶剤などへの溶解性が向上して、経時で析出しにくくなり、樹脂組成物の経時安定性を向上させることができる。2官能あるいは3官能以上の光ラジカル重合開始剤の具体例としては、特表2010-527339号公報、特表2011-524436号公報、国際公開第2015/004565号、特表2016-532675号公報の段落番号0407~0412、国際公開第2017/033680号の段落番号0039~0055に記載されているオキシム化合物の2量体、特表2013-522445号公報に記載されている化合物(E)および化合物(G)、国際公開第2016/034963号に記載されているCmpd1~7、特表2017-523465号公報の段落番号0007に記載されているオキシムエステル類光開始剤、特開2017-167399号公報の段落番号0020~0033に記載されている光開始剤、特開2017-151342号公報の段落番号0017~0026に記載されている光重合開始剤(A)、特許第6469669号公報に記載されているオキシムエステル光開始剤などが挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 As the photoradical polymerization initiator, a difunctional, trifunctional or more functional photoradical polymerization initiator may be used. By using such a radical photopolymerization initiator, two or more radicals are generated from one molecule of the radical photopolymerization initiator, so that good sensitivity can be obtained. In addition, when a compound with an asymmetric structure is used, the crystallinity decreases and the solubility in solvents improves, making it difficult to precipitate over time, thereby improving the stability of the resin composition over time. . Specific examples of bifunctional or trifunctional or more functional photoradical polymerization initiators include those listed in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2010-527339, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2011-524436, International Publication No. 2015/004565, and Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-532675. Dimers of oxime compounds described in paragraph numbers 0407 to 0412, paragraph numbers 0039 to 0055 of International Publication No. 2017/033680, compound (E) and compound ( G), Cmpd1 to 7 described in International Publication No. 2016/034963, oxime ester photoinitiators described in paragraph number 0007 of Japanese Patent Publication No. 2017-523465, Photoinitiators described in paragraph numbers 0020 to 0033, photoinitiators (A) described in paragraph numbers 0017 to 0026 of JP2017-151342A, and photoinitiators (A) described in Japanese Patent No. 6469669. Oxime ester photoinitiators and the like, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 樹脂組成物が光重合開始剤を含む場合、その含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し0.1~30質量%が好ましく、0.1~20質量%がより好ましく、0.5~15質量%が更に好ましく、1.0~10質量%が更により好ましい。光重合開始剤は1種のみ含有していてもよいし、2種以上含有していてもよい。光重合開始剤を2種以上含有する場合は、合計量が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
 なお、光重合開始剤は熱重合開始剤としても機能する場合があるため、オーブンやホットプレート等の加熱によって光重合開始剤による架橋を更に進行させられる場合がある。
When the resin composition contains a photopolymerization initiator, its content is preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass, and 0.5% by mass based on the total solid content of the resin composition. It is more preferably from 1.0 to 10% by weight, and even more preferably from 1.0 to 10% by weight. The photopolymerization initiator may contain only one type, or may contain two or more types. When containing two or more types of photopolymerization initiators, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range.
Note that since the photopolymerization initiator may also function as a thermal polymerization initiator, crosslinking by the photopolymerization initiator may be further promoted by heating with an oven, a hot plate, or the like.
〔増感剤〕
 樹脂組成物は、増感剤を含んでいてもよい。増感剤は、特定の活性放射線を吸収して電子励起状態となる。電子励起状態となった増感剤は、熱ラジカル重合開始剤、光ラジカル重合開始剤などと接触して、電子移動、エネルギー移動、発熱などの作用が生じる。これにより、熱ラジカル重合開始剤、光ラジカル重合開始剤は化学変化を起こして分解し、ラジカル、酸又は塩基を生成する。
 使用可能な増感剤として、ベンゾフェノン系、ミヒラーズケトン系、クマリン系、ピラゾールアゾ系、アニリノアゾ系、トリフェニルメタン系、アントラキノン系、アントラセン系、アントラピリドン系、ベンジリデン系、オキソノール系、ピラゾロトリアゾールアゾ系、ピリドンアゾ系、シアニン系、フェノチアジン系、ピロロピラゾールアゾメチン系、キサンテン系、フタロシアニン系、ペンゾピラン系、インジゴ系等の化合物を使用することができる。
 増感剤としては、例えば、ミヒラーズケトン、4,4’-ビス(ジエチルアミノ)ベンゾフェノン、2,5-ビス(4’-ジエチルアミノベンザル)シクロペンタン、2,6-ビス(4’-ジエチルアミノベンザル)シクロヘキサノン、2,6-ビス(4’-ジエチルアミノベンザル)-4-メチルシクロヘキサノン、4,4’-ビス(ジメチルアミノ)カルコン、4,4’-ビス(ジエチルアミノ)カルコン、p-ジメチルアミノシンナミリデンインダノン、p-ジメチルアミノベンジリデンインダノン、2-(p-ジメチルアミノフェニルビフェニレン)-ベンゾチアゾール、2-(p-ジメチルアミノフェニルビニレン)ベンゾチアゾール、2-(p-ジメチルアミノフェニルビニレン)イソナフトチアゾール、1,3-ビス(4’-ジメチルアミノベンザル)アセトン、1,3-ビス(4’-ジエチルアミノベンザル)アセトン、3,3’-カルボニル-ビス(7-ジエチルアミノクマリン)、3-アセチル-7-ジメチルアミノクマリン、3-エトキシカルボニル-7-ジメチルアミノクマリン、3-ベンジロキシカルボニル-7-ジメチルアミノクマリン、3-メトキシカルボニル-7-ジエチルアミノクマリン、3-エトキシカルボニル-7-ジエチルアミノクマリン(7-(ジエチルアミノ)クマリン-3-カルボン酸エチル)、N-フェニル-N’-エチルエタノールアミン、N-フェニルジエタノールアミン、N-p-トリルジエタノールアミン、N-フェニルエタノールアミン、4-モルホリノベンゾフェノン、ジメチルアミノ安息香酸イソアミル、ジエチルアミノ安息香酸イソアミル、2-メルカプトベンズイミダゾール、1-フェニル-5-メルカプトテトラゾール、2-メルカプトベンゾチアゾール、2-(p-ジメチルアミノスチリル)ベンズオキサゾール、2-(p-ジメチルアミノスチリル)ベンゾチアゾール、2-(p-ジメチルアミノスチリル)ナフト(1,2-d)チアゾール、2-(p-ジメチルアミノベンゾイル)スチレン、ジフェニルアセトアミド、ベンズアニリド、N-メチルアセトアニリド、3‘,4’-ジメチルアセトアニリド等が挙げられる。
 また、他の増感色素を用いてもよい。
 増感色素の詳細については、特開2016-027357号公報の段落0161~0163の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
[Sensitizer]
The resin composition may contain a sensitizer. A sensitizer absorbs specific actinic radiation and becomes electronically excited. The sensitizer in an electronically excited state comes into contact with a thermal radical polymerization initiator, a photoradical polymerization initiator, etc., and effects such as electron transfer, energy transfer, and heat generation occur. As a result, the thermal radical polymerization initiator and the photo radical polymerization initiator undergo a chemical change and are decomposed to generate radicals, acids, or bases.
Usable sensitizers include benzophenone series, Michler's ketone series, coumarin series, pyrazole azo series, anilinoazo series, triphenylmethane series, anthraquinone series, anthracene series, anthrapyridone series, benzylidene series, oxonol series, and pyrazolotriazole azo series. , pyridone azo type, cyanine type, phenothiazine type, pyrrolopyrazole azomethine type, xanthene type, phthalocyanine type, penzopyran type, indigo type and the like can be used.
Examples of the sensitizer include Michler's ketone, 4,4'-bis(diethylamino)benzophenone, 2,5-bis(4'-diethylaminobenzal)cyclopentane, 2,6-bis(4'-diethylaminobenzal) Cyclohexanone, 2,6-bis(4'-diethylaminobenzal)-4-methylcyclohexanone, 4,4'-bis(dimethylamino)chalcone, 4,4'-bis(diethylamino)chalcone, p-dimethylaminocinnamyl Denindanone, p-dimethylaminobenzylideneindanone, 2-(p-dimethylaminophenylbiphenylene)-benzothiazole, 2-(p-dimethylaminophenylvinylene)benzothiazole, 2-(p-dimethylaminophenylvinylene)iso Naphthothiazole, 1,3-bis(4'-dimethylaminobenzal)acetone, 1,3-bis(4'-diethylaminobenzal)acetone, 3,3'-carbonyl-bis(7-diethylaminocoumarin), 3 -Acetyl-7-dimethylaminocoumarin, 3-ethoxycarbonyl-7-dimethylaminocoumarin, 3-benzyloxycarbonyl-7-dimethylaminocoumarin, 3-methoxycarbonyl-7-diethylaminocoumarin, 3-ethoxycarbonyl-7-diethylaminocoumarin Coumarin (ethyl 7-(diethylamino)coumarin-3-carboxylate), N-phenyl-N'-ethylethanolamine, N-phenyldiethanolamine, N-p-tolyldiethanolamine, N-phenylethanolamine, 4-morpholinobenzophenone, Isoamyl dimethylaminobenzoate, isoamyl diethylaminobenzoate, 2-mercaptobenzimidazole, 1-phenyl-5-mercaptotetrazole, 2-mercaptobenzothiazole, 2-(p-dimethylaminostyryl)benzoxazole, 2-(p-dimethyl) aminostyryl)benzothiazole, 2-(p-dimethylaminostyryl)naphtho(1,2-d)thiazole, 2-(p-dimethylaminobenzoyl)styrene, diphenylacetamide, benzanilide, N-methylacetanilide, 3',4 '-dimethylacetanilide and the like.
Also, other sensitizing dyes may be used.
For details of the sensitizing dye, the descriptions in paragraphs 0161 to 0163 of JP-A-2016-027357 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
 樹脂組成物が増感剤を含む場合、増感剤の含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し、0.01~20質量%が好ましく、0.1~15質量%がより好ましく、0.5~10質量%が更に好ましい。増感剤は、1種単独で用いてもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。 When the resin composition contains a sensitizer, the content of the sensitizer is preferably 0.01 to 20% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 15% by mass, based on the total solid content of the resin composition. More preferably 0.5 to 10% by mass. The sensitizers may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
〔連鎖移動剤〕
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、連鎖移動剤を含有してもよい。連鎖移動剤は、例えば高分子辞典第三版(高分子学会編、2005年)683-684頁に定義されている。連鎖移動剤としては、例えば、分子内に-S-S-、-SO-S-、-N-O-、SH、PH、SiH、及びGeHを有する化合物群、RAFT(Reversible Addition Fragmentation chain Transfer)重合に用いられるチオカルボニルチオ基を有するジチオベンゾアート、トリチオカルボナート、ジチオカルバマート、キサンタート化合物等が用いられる。これらは、低活性のラジカルに水素を供与して、ラジカルを生成するか、若しくは、酸化された後、脱プロトンすることによりラジカルを生成しうる。特に、チオール化合物を好ましく用いることができる。
[Chain transfer agent]
The resin composition of the present invention may contain a chain transfer agent. Chain transfer agents are defined, for example, in the Polymer Dictionary, 3rd edition (edited by the Society of Polymer Science and Technology, 2005), pages 683-684. Examples of chain transfer agents include compounds having -S-S-, -SO 2 -S-, -N-O-, SH, PH, SiH, and GeH in the molecule, and RAFT (Reversible Addition Fragmentation chain Transfer). ) Dithiobenzoate, trithiocarbonate, dithiocarbamate, xanthate compounds and the like having a thiocarbonylthio group used in polymerization are used. These can generate radicals by donating hydrogen to low-activity radicals, or can generate radicals by being oxidized and then deprotonated. In particular, thiol compounds can be preferably used.
 また、連鎖移動剤は、国際公開第2015/199219号の段落0152~0153に記載の化合物を用いることもでき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Further, as the chain transfer agent, compounds described in paragraphs 0152 to 0153 of International Publication No. 2015/199219 can also be used, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 樹脂組成物が連鎖移動剤を有する場合、連鎖移動剤の含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分100質量部に対し、0.01~20質量部が好ましく、0.1~10質量部がより好ましく、0.5~5質量部が更に好ましい。連鎖移動剤は1種のみでもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。連鎖移動剤が2種以上の場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 When the resin composition has a chain transfer agent, the content of the chain transfer agent is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass, and 0.1 to 10 parts by mass based on 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the resin composition. More preferably, 0.5 to 5 parts by mass is even more preferred. The number of chain transfer agents may be one, or two or more. When there are two or more types of chain transfer agents, it is preferable that the total is within the above range.
<塩基発生剤>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、塩基発生剤を含んでもよい。ここで、塩基発生剤とは、物理的または化学的な作用によって塩基を発生することができる化合物である。好ましい塩基発生剤としては、熱塩基発生剤および光塩基発生剤が挙げられる。
 特に、樹脂組成物が環化樹脂の前駆体を含む場合、樹脂組成物は塩基発生剤を含むことが好ましい。樹脂組成物が熱塩基発生剤を含有することによって、例えば加熱により前駆体の環化反応を促進でき、硬化物の機械特性や耐薬品性が良好なものとなり、例えば半導体パッケージ中に含まれる再配線層用層間絶縁膜としての性能が良好となる。
 塩基発生剤としては、イオン型塩基発生剤でもよく、非イオン型塩基発生剤でもよい。塩基発生剤から発生する塩基としては、例えば、2級アミン、3級アミンが挙げられる。
 塩基発生剤は特に限定されず、公知の塩基発生剤を用いることができる。公知の塩基発生剤としては、例えば、カルバモイルオキシム化合物、カルバモイルヒドロキシルアミン化合物、カルバミン酸化合物、ホルムアミド化合物、アセトアミド化合物、カルバメート化合物、ベンジルカルバメート化合物、ニトロベンジルカルバメート化合物、スルホンアミド化合物、イミダゾール誘導体化合物、アミンイミド化合物、ピリジン誘導体化合物、α-アミノアセトフェノン誘導体化合物、4級アンモニウム塩誘導体化合物、イミニウム塩、ピリジニウム塩、α-ラクトン環誘導体化合物、アミンイミド化合物、フタルイミド誘導体化合物、アシルオキシイミノ化合物等が挙げられる。
 非イオン型塩基発生剤の具体例としては、国際公開第2022/145355号の段落0249~0275に記載の化合物が挙げられる。上記記載は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<Base generator>
The resin composition of the present invention may also contain a base generator. Here, the base generator is a compound that can generate a base by physical or chemical action. Preferred base generators include thermal base generators and photobase generators.
In particular, when the resin composition contains a precursor of a cyclized resin, it is preferable that the resin composition contains a base generator. When the resin composition contains a thermal base generator, the cyclization reaction of the precursor can be promoted by heating, for example, and the cured product has good mechanical properties and chemical resistance. The performance as an interlayer insulating film for wiring layers is improved.
The base generator may be an ionic base generator or a nonionic base generator. Examples of the base generated from the base generator include secondary amines and tertiary amines.
The base generator is not particularly limited, and any known base generator can be used. Known base generators include, for example, carbamoyloxime compounds, carbamoylhydroxylamine compounds, carbamic acid compounds, formamide compounds, acetamide compounds, carbamate compounds, benzyl carbamate compounds, nitrobenzyl carbamate compounds, sulfonamide compounds, imidazole derivative compounds, and amine imides. compounds, pyridine derivative compounds, α-aminoacetophenone derivative compounds, quaternary ammonium salt derivative compounds, iminium salts, pyridinium salts, α-lactone ring derivative compounds, amine imide compounds, phthalimide derivative compounds, acyloxyimino compounds, and the like.
Specific examples of nonionic base generators include compounds described in paragraphs 0249 to 0275 of International Publication No. 2022/145355. The above description is incorporated herein.
 塩基発生剤としては、下記の化合物が挙げられるが、これらに限定されない。 Examples of the base generator include, but are not limited to, the following compounds.
 非イオン型塩基発生剤の分子量は、800以下が好ましく、600以下がより好ましく、500以下が更に好ましい。下限は、100以上が好ましく、200以上がより好ましく、300以上が更に好ましい。 The molecular weight of the nonionic base generator is preferably 800 or less, more preferably 600 or less, and even more preferably 500 or less. The lower limit is preferably 100 or more, more preferably 200 or more, and even more preferably 300 or more.
 イオン型塩基発生剤の具体的な好ましい化合物としては、例えば、国際公開第2018/038002号の段落番号0148~0163に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 Specific preferred compounds of the ionic base generator include, for example, the compounds described in paragraph numbers 0148 to 0163 of International Publication No. 2018/038002.
 アンモニウム塩の具体例としては、下記の化合物が挙げられるが、これらに限定されない。
Specific examples of ammonium salts include, but are not limited to, the following compounds.
 イミニウム塩の具体例としては、下記の化合物が挙げられるが、これらに限定されない。
Specific examples of iminium salts include, but are not limited to, the following compounds.
 樹脂組成物が塩基発生剤を含む場合、塩基発生剤の含有量は、樹脂組成物中の樹脂100質量部に対し、0.1~50質量部が好ましい。下限は、0.3質量部以上がより好ましく、0.5質量部以上が更に好ましい。上限は、30質量部以下がより好ましく、20質量部以下が更に好ましく、10質量部以下が一層好ましく、5質量部以下がより一層好ましく、4質量部以下が特に好ましい。
 塩基発生剤は、1種又は2種以上を用いることができる。2種以上を用いる場合は、合計量が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
When the resin composition contains a base generator, the content of the base generator is preferably 0.1 to 50 parts by weight based on 100 parts by weight of the resin in the resin composition. The lower limit is more preferably 0.3 parts by mass or more, and even more preferably 0.5 parts by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 30 parts by mass or less, even more preferably 20 parts by mass or less, even more preferably 10 parts by mass or less, even more preferably 5 parts by mass or less, and particularly preferably 4 parts by mass or less.
One type or two or more types of base generators can be used. When two or more types are used, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
<溶剤>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、溶剤を含むことが好ましい。
 溶剤は、公知の溶剤を任意に使用できる。溶剤は有機溶剤が好ましい。有機溶剤としては、エステル類、エーテル類、ケトン類、環状炭化水素類、スルホキシド類、アミド類、ウレア類、アルコール類などの化合物が挙げられる。
<Solvent>
The resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a solvent.
Any known solvent can be used as the solvent. The solvent is preferably an organic solvent. Examples of the organic solvent include compounds such as esters, ethers, ketones, cyclic hydrocarbons, sulfoxides, amides, ureas, and alcohols.
 エステル類として、例えば、酢酸エチル、酢酸-n-ブチル、酢酸イソブチル、酢酸へキシル、ギ酸アミル、酢酸イソアミル、プロピオン酸ブチル、酪酸イソプロピル、酪酸エチル、酪酸ブチル、乳酸メチル、乳酸エチル、γ-ブチロラクトン、ε-カプロラクトン、δ-バレロラクトン、γ-バレロラクトン、アルキルオキシ酢酸アルキル(例えば、アルキルオキシ酢酸メチル、アルキルオキシ酢酸エチル、アルキルオキシ酢酸ブチル(例えば、メトキシ酢酸メチル、メトキシ酢酸エチル、メトキシ酢酸ブチル、エトキシ酢酸メチル、エトキシ酢酸エチル等))、3-アルキルオキシプロピオン酸アルキルエステル類(例えば、3-アルキルオキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-アルキルオキシプロピオン酸エチル等(例えば、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル等))、2-アルキルオキシプロピオン酸アルキルエステル類(例えば、2-アルキルオキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-アルキルオキシプロピオン酸エチル、2-アルキルオキシプロピオン酸プロピル等(例えば、2-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、2-メトキシプロピオン酸プロピル、2-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル))、2-アルキルオキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸メチル及び2-アルキルオキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸エチル(例えば、2-メトキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸メチル、2-エトキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸エチル等)、ピルビン酸メチル、ピルビン酸エチル、ピルビン酸プロピル、アセト酢酸メチル、アセト酢酸エチル、2-オキソブタン酸メチル、2-オキソブタン酸エチル、ヘキサン酸エチル、ヘプタン酸エチル、マロン酸ジメチル、マロン酸ジエチル等が好適なものとして挙げられる。 Examples of esters include ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, hexyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, γ-butyrolactone. , ε-caprolactone, δ-valerolactone, γ-valerolactone, alkyloxyacetates (e.g., methyl alkyloxyacetate, ethyl alkyloxyacetate, butyl alkyloxyacetate (e.g., methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate) , methyl ethoxy acetate, ethyl ethoxy acetate, etc.), 3-alkyloxypropionate alkyl esters (e.g., methyl 3-alkyloxypropionate, ethyl 3-alkyloxypropionate, etc. (e.g., methyl 3-methoxypropionate, ethyl 3-methoxypropionate, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, etc.), alkyl 2-alkyloxypropionate esters (e.g., methyl 2-alkyloxypropionate, 2-alkyloxypropionate) ethyl, propyl 2-alkyloxypropionate, etc. (e.g., methyl 2-methoxypropionate, ethyl 2-methoxypropionate, propyl 2-methoxypropionate, methyl 2-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxypropionate), Methyl 2-alkyloxy-2-methylpropionate and ethyl 2-alkyloxy-2-methylpropionate (for example, methyl 2-methoxy-2-methylpropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxy-2-methylpropionate, etc.), Methyl pyruvate, ethyl pyruvate, propyl pyruvate, methyl acetoacetate, ethyl acetoacetate, methyl 2-oxobutanoate, ethyl 2-oxobutanoate, ethyl hexanoate, ethyl heptanoate, dimethyl malonate, diethyl malonate, etc. are preferred. It is mentioned as something.
 エーテル類として、例えば、エチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールエチルメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールブチルメチルエーテル、トリエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、テトラエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、テトラヒドロフラン、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、メチルセロソルブアセテート、エチルセロソルブアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールジメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート、エチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノブチルエーテルアセテート、ジエチレングリコールエチルメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノプロピルエーテルアセテート、ジプロピレングリコールジメチルエーテル等が好適なものとして挙げられる。 Examples of ethers include ethylene glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, diethylene glycol ethyl methyl ether, diethylene glycol butyl methyl ether, triethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetraethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, Methyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol dimethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, ethylene glycol Suitable examples include monobutyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol ethyl methyl ether, propylene glycol monopropyl ether acetate, and dipropylene glycol dimethyl ether.
 ケトン類として、例えば、メチルエチルケトン、シクロヘキサノン、シクロペンタノン、2-ヘプタノン、3-ヘプタノン、3-メチルシクロヘキサノン、レボグルコセノン、ジヒドロレボグルコセノン等が好適なものとして挙げられる。 Suitable ketones include, for example, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, 2-heptanone, 3-heptanone, 3-methylcyclohexanone, levoglucosenone, dihydrolevoglucosenone, and the like.
 環状炭化水素類として、例えば、トルエン、キシレン、アニソール等の芳香族炭化水素類、リモネン等の環式テルペン類が好適なものとして挙げられる。 Suitable examples of cyclic hydrocarbons include aromatic hydrocarbons such as toluene, xylene, and anisole, and cyclic terpenes such as limonene.
 スルホキシド類として、例えば、ジメチルスルホキシドが好適なものとして挙げられる。 Suitable examples of sulfoxides include dimethyl sulfoxide.
 アミド類として、N-メチル-2-ピロリドン、N-エチル-2-ピロリドン、N-シクロヘキシル-2-ピロリドン、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド、N,N-ジメチルイソブチルアミド、3-メトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロピオンアミド、3-ブトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロピオンアミド、N-ホルミルモルホリン、N-アセチルモルホリン等が好適なものとして挙げられる。 Amides include N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-ethyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-cyclohexyl-2-pyrrolidone, N,N-dimethylacetamide, N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylisobutyramide, Preferred examples include 3-methoxy-N,N-dimethylpropionamide, 3-butoxy-N,N-dimethylpropionamide, N-formylmorpholine, and N-acetylmorpholine.
 ウレア類として、N,N,N’,N’-テトラメチルウレア、1,3-ジメチル-2-イミダゾリジノン等が好適なものとして挙げられる。 Suitable ureas include N,N,N',N'-tetramethylurea, 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinone, and the like.
アルコール類として、メタノール、エタノール、1-プロパノール、2-プロパノール、1-ブタノール、1-ペンタノール、1-ヘキサノール、ベンジルアルコール、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、1-メトキシ-2-プロパノール、2-エトキシエタノール、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノヘキシルエーテル、トリエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ポリエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ポリプロピレングリコール、テトラエチレングリコール、エチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノベンジルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノフェニルエーテル、メチルフェニルカルビノール、n-アミルアルコール、メチルアミルアルコール、および、ダイアセトンアルコール等が挙げられる。 Alcohols include methanol, ethanol, 1-propanol, 2-propanol, 1-butanol, 1-pentanol, 1-hexanol, benzyl alcohol, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, 1-methoxy-2-propanol, 2-ethoxyethanol, Diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monohexyl ether, triethylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monoethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether, polypropylene glycol, tetraethylene glycol, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, ethylene glycol monobenzyl ether, Examples include ethylene glycol monophenyl ether, methylphenyl carbinol, n-amyl alcohol, methyl amyl alcohol, and diacetone alcohol.
 溶剤は、塗布面性状の改良などの観点から、2種以上を混合する形態も好ましい。 From the viewpoint of improving the properties of the coated surface, it is also preferable to use a mixture of two or more solvents.
 本発明では、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、エチルセロソルブアセテート、乳酸エチル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、酢酸ブチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-ヘプタノン、シクロヘキサノン、シクロペンタノン、γ-ブチロラクトン、γ-バレロラクトン、3-メトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロピオンアミド、トルエン、ジメチルスルホキシド、エチルカルビトールアセテート、ブチルカルビトールアセテート、N-メチル-2-ピロリドン、プロピレングリコールメチルエーテル、及びプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテート、レボグルコセノン、ジヒドロレボグルコセノンから選択される1種の溶剤、又は、2種以上で構成される混合溶剤が好ましい。ジメチルスルホキシドとγ-ブチロラクトンとの併用、ジメチルスルホキシドとγ-バレロラクトンとの併用、3-メトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロピオンアミドとγ-ブチロラクトンとの併用、3-メトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロピオンアミドとγ-ブチロラクトンとジメチルスルホキシドとの併用又は、N-メチル-2-ピロリドンと乳酸エチルとの併用が特に好ましい。また、これらの併用された溶剤に、更にトルエンを溶剤の全質量に対して1~10質量%程度添加する態様も、本発明の好ましい態様の1つである。
 特に、樹脂組成物の保存安定性等の観点からは、溶剤としてγ-バレロラクトンを含む態様も、本発明の好ましい態様の1つである。このような態様において、溶剤の全質量に対するγ-バレロラクトンの含有量は、50質量%以上であることが好ましく、60質量%以上であることがより好ましく、70質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。また、上記含有量の上限は、特に限定されず100質量%であってもよい。上記含有量は、樹脂組成物に含まれる特定樹脂などの成分の溶解度等を考慮して決定すればよい。
 また、ジメチルスルホキシドとγ-バレロラクトンとを併用する場合、溶剤の全質量に対して、60~90質量%のγ-バレロラクトンと、10~40質量%のジメチルスルホキシドを含むことが好ましく、70~90質量%のγ-バレロラクトンと、10~30質量%のジメチルスルホキシドを含むことがより好ましく、75~85質量%のγ-バレロラクトンと、15~25質量%のジメチルスルホキシドを含むことが更に好ましい。
In the present invention, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2-heptanone, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, γ- Butyrolactone, γ-valerolactone, 3-methoxy-N,N-dimethylpropionamide, toluene, dimethyl sulfoxide, ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, propylene glycol methyl ether, and propylene glycol One type of solvent selected from methyl ether acetate, levoglucosenone, and dihydrolevoglucosenone, or a mixed solvent composed of two or more types is preferable. Combination of dimethyl sulfoxide and γ-butyrolactone, combination of dimethyl sulfoxide and γ-valerolactone, combination of 3-methoxy-N,N-dimethylpropionamide and γ-butyrolactone, 3-methoxy-N,N-dimethylpropion Particularly preferred is the combination of amide, γ-butyrolactone and dimethyl sulfoxide, or the combination of N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and ethyl lactate. Further, it is also a preferred embodiment of the present invention that toluene is further added to the solvent used in combination in an amount of about 1 to 10% by mass based on the total mass of the solvent.
In particular, from the viewpoint of storage stability of the resin composition, an embodiment containing γ-valerolactone as a solvent is also one of the preferred embodiments of the present invention. In such an embodiment, the content of γ-valerolactone based on the total mass of the solvent is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 60% by mass or more, and still more preferably 70% by mass or more. preferable. Further, the upper limit of the content is not particularly limited and may be 100% by mass. The above content may be determined in consideration of the solubility of components such as the specific resin contained in the resin composition.
Further, when dimethyl sulfoxide and γ-valerolactone are used together, it is preferable to contain 60 to 90% by mass of γ-valerolactone and 10 to 40% by mass of dimethyl sulfoxide, based on the total mass of the solvent. It is more preferable to contain ~90% by mass of γ-valerolactone and 10 to 30% by mass of dimethyl sulfoxide, and more preferably to contain 75 to 85% by mass of γ-valerolactone and 15 to 25% by mass of dimethyl sulfoxide. More preferred.
 溶剤の含有量は、塗布性の観点から、本発明の樹脂組成物の全固形分濃度が5~80質量%になる量とすることが好ましく、5~75質量%となる量にすることがより好ましく、10~70質量%となる量にすることが更に好ましく、20~70質量%となるようにすることが一層好ましい。溶剤含有量は、塗膜の所望の厚さと塗布方法に応じて調節すればよい。溶剤を2種以上含有する場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 From the viewpoint of coating properties, the content of the solvent is preferably such that the total solids concentration of the resin composition of the present invention is 5 to 80% by mass, and preferably 5 to 75% by mass. More preferably, the amount is 10 to 70% by mass, and even more preferably 20 to 70% by mass. The solvent content may be adjusted depending on the desired thickness of the coating and the application method. When two or more types of solvents are contained, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range.
<金属接着性改良剤>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、電極や配線などに用いられる金属材料との接着性を向上させる観点から、金属接着性改良剤を含むことが好ましい。金属接着性改良剤としては、アルコキシシリル基を有するシランカップリング剤、アルミニウム系接着助剤、チタン系接着助剤、スルホンアミド構造を有する化合物及びチオウレア構造を有する化合物、リン酸誘導体化合物、βケトエステル化合物、アミノ化合物等が挙げられる。
<Metal adhesion improver>
The resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a metal adhesion improver from the viewpoint of improving adhesion to metal materials used for electrodes, wiring, etc. Examples of metal adhesion improvers include silane coupling agents having alkoxysilyl groups, aluminum adhesion aids, titanium adhesion aids, compounds having a sulfonamide structure and thiourea structure, phosphoric acid derivative compounds, and β-keto esters. compounds, amino compounds, etc.
〔シランカップリング剤〕
 シランカップリング剤としては、例えば、国際公開第2021/112189号の段落0316に記載の化合物、特開2018-173573の段落0067~0078に記載の化合物が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、特開2011-128358号公報の段落0050~0058に記載のように異なる2種以上のシランカップリング剤を用いることも好ましい。シランカップリング剤は、下記化合物を用いることも好ましい。以下の式中、Meはメチル基を、Etはエチル基を表す。また、下記Rはブロックイソシアネート基におけるブロック化剤由来の構造が挙げられる。ブロック化剤としては、脱離温度に応じて選択すればよいが、アルコール化合物、フェノール化合物、ピラゾール化合物、トリアゾール化合物、ラクタム化合物、活性メチレン化合物等が挙げられる。例えば、脱離温度を160~180℃としたい観点からは、カプロラクタムなどが好ましい。このような化合物の市販品としては、X-12-1293(信越化学工業株式会社製)などが挙げられる。
〔Silane coupling agent〕
Examples of the silane coupling agent include the compounds described in paragraph 0316 of International Publication No. 2021/112189 and the compounds described in paragraphs 0067 to 0078 of JP 2018-173573, the contents of which are not included herein. Incorporated. It is also preferable to use two or more different silane coupling agents as described in paragraphs 0050 to 0058 of JP-A-2011-128358. It is also preferable to use the following compounds as the silane coupling agent. In the following formula, Me represents a methyl group and Et represents an ethyl group. Further, the following R includes a structure derived from a blocking agent in a blocked isocyanate group. The blocking agent may be selected depending on the desorption temperature, and includes alcohol compounds, phenol compounds, pyrazole compounds, triazole compounds, lactam compounds, active methylene compounds, and the like. For example, from the viewpoint of desiring a desorption temperature of 160 to 180°C, caprolactam and the like are preferred. Commercially available products of such compounds include X-12-1293 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.).
 他のシランカップリング剤としては、例えば、ビニルトリメトキシシラン、ビニルトリエトキシシラン、2-(3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシル)エチルトリメトキシシラン、3-グリシドキシプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン、3-グリシドキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン、3-グリシドキシプロピルメチルジエトキシシラン、3-グリシドキシプロピルトリエトキシシラン、p-スチリルトリメトキシシラン、3-メタクリロキシプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン、3-メタクリロキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン、3-メタクリロキシプロピルメチルジエトキシシラン、3-メタクリロキシプロピルトリエトキシシラン、3-アクリロキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン、N-2-(アミノエチル)-3-アミノプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン、N-2-(アミノエチル)-3-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、3-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、3-アミノプロピルトリエトキシシラン、3-トリエトキシシリル-N-(1,3-ジメチル-ブチリデン)プロピルアミン、N-フェニル-3-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、トリス-(トリメトキシシリルプロピル)イソシアヌレート、3-ウレイドプロピルトリアルコキシシラン、3-メルカプトプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン、3-メルカプトプロピルトリメトキシシラン、3-イソシアネートプロピルトリエトキシシラン、3-トリメトキシシリルプロピルコハク酸無水物が挙げられる。これらは1種単独または2種以上を組み合わせて使用することができる。
 また、シランカップリング剤として、アルコキシシリル基を複数個有するオリゴマータイプの化合物を用いることもできる。
 このようなオリゴマータイプの化合物としては、下記式(S-1)で表される繰返し単位を含む化合物などが挙げられる。

 式(S-1)中、RS1は1価の有機基を表し、RS2は水素原子、ヒドロキシ基又はアルコキシ基を表し、nは0~2の整数を表す。
 RS1は重合性基を含む構造であることが好ましい。重合性基としては、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基、ベンゾオキサゾリル基、ブロックイソシアネート基、アミノ基等が挙げられる。エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基としては、ビニル基、アリル基、イソアリル基、2-メチルアリル基、ビニル基と直接結合した芳香環を有する基(例えば、ビニルフェニル基など)、(メタ)アクリルアミド基、(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基などが挙げられ、ビニルフェニル基、(メタ)アクリルアミド基又は(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基が好ましく、ビニルフェニル基又は(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基がより好ましく、(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基が更に好ましい。
 RS2はアルコキシ基であることが好ましく、メトキシ基又はエトキシ基であることがより好ましい。
 nは0~2の整数を表し、1であることが好ましい。
 ここで、オリゴマータイプの化合物に含まれる複数の式(S-1)で表される繰返し単位の構造は、それぞれ同一であってもよい。
 ここで、オリゴマータイプの化合物に含まれる複数の式(S-1)で表される繰返し単位のうち、少なくとも1つにおいてnが1又は2であることが好ましく、少なくとも2つにおいてnが1又は2であることがより好ましく、少なくとも2つにおいてnが1であることが更に好ましい。
 このようなオリゴマータイプの化合物としては市販品を用いることができ、市販品としては例えば、KR-513(信越化学工業株式会社製)が挙げられる。
Examples of other silane coupling agents include vinyltrimethoxysilane, vinyltriethoxysilane, 2-(3,4-epoxycyclohexyl)ethyltrimethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropylmethyldimethoxysilane, and 3-glycidoxypropylmethyldimethoxysilane. Xypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropylmethyldiethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropyltriethoxysilane, p-styryltrimethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxypropylmethyldimethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane Silane, 3-methacryloxypropylmethyldiethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxypropyltriethoxysilane, 3-acryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, N-2-(aminoethyl)-3-aminopropylmethyldimethoxysilane, N-2 -(aminoethyl)-3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-aminopropyltriethoxysilane, 3-triethoxysilyl-N-(1,3-dimethyl-butylidene)propylamine, N-phenyl-3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, tris-(trimethoxysilylpropyl)isocyanurate, 3-ureidopropyltrialkoxysilane, 3-mercaptopropylmethyldimethoxysilane, 3-mercaptopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-isocyanate Examples include propyltriethoxysilane and 3-trimethoxysilylpropylsuccinic anhydride. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
Moreover, an oligomer type compound having a plurality of alkoxysilyl groups can also be used as the silane coupling agent.
Examples of such oligomer type compounds include compounds containing a repeating unit represented by the following formula (S-1).

In formula (S-1), R S1 represents a monovalent organic group, R S2 represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, or an alkoxy group, and n represents an integer of 0 to 2.
R S1 preferably has a structure containing a polymerizable group. Examples of the polymerizable group include a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, a benzoxazolyl group, a blocked isocyanate group, and an amino group. Examples of the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, an allyl group, an isoallyl group, a 2-methylallyl group, a group having an aromatic ring directly bonded to a vinyl group (for example, a vinyl phenyl group, etc.), and a (meth)acrylamide group. , (meth)acryloyloxy group, etc., preferably vinylphenyl group, (meth)acrylamide group or (meth)acryloyloxy group, more preferably vinylphenyl group or (meth)acryloyloxy group, (meth)acryloyloxy group, etc. More preferred are groups.
R S2 is preferably an alkoxy group, more preferably a methoxy group or an ethoxy group.
n represents an integer from 0 to 2, preferably 1.
Here, the structures of the plurality of repeating units represented by formula (S-1) contained in the oligomer type compound may be the same.
Here, it is preferable that n is 1 or 2 in at least one of the plurality of repeating units represented by formula (S-1) contained in the oligomer type compound, and n is 1 or 2 in at least two. More preferably, n is 2, and even more preferably n is 1 in at least two cases.
Commercially available products can be used as such oligomer type compounds, and examples of commercially available products include KR-513 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.).
〔アルミニウム系接着助剤〕
 アルミニウム系接着助剤としては、例えば、アルミニウムトリス(エチルアセトアセテート)、アルミニウムトリス(アセチルアセトネート)、エチルアセトアセテートアルミニウムジイソプロピレート等を挙げることができる。
[Aluminum-based adhesion aid]
Examples of the aluminum adhesive aid include aluminum tris (ethyl acetoacetate), aluminum tris (acetylacetonate), ethylacetoacetate aluminum diisopropylate, and the like.
 その他の金属接着性改良剤としては、特開2014-186186号公報の段落0046~0049に記載の化合物、特開2013-072935号公報の段落0032~0043に記載のスルフィド系化合物を用いることもでき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 As other metal adhesion improvers, compounds described in paragraphs 0046 to 0049 of JP2014-186186A and sulfide compounds described in paragraphs 0032 to 0043 of JP2013-072935A can also be used. , the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 金属接着性改良剤の含有量は特定樹脂100質量部に対して、0.01~30質量部が好ましく、0.1~10質量部がより好ましく、0.5~5質量部が更に好ましい。上記下限値以上とすることでパターンと金属層との接着性が良好となり、上記上限値以下とすることでパターンの耐熱性、機械特性が良好となる。金属接着性改良剤は1種のみでもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。2種以上用いる場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 The content of the metal adhesion improver is preferably 0.01 to 30 parts by weight, more preferably 0.1 to 10 parts by weight, and even more preferably 0.5 to 5 parts by weight, based on 100 parts by weight of the specific resin. By setting it above the above-mentioned lower limit, the adhesion between the pattern and the metal layer becomes good, and by setting it below the above-mentioned upper limit, the heat resistance and mechanical properties of the pattern become good. There may be only one type of metal adhesion improver, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total is within the above range.
<マイグレーション抑制剤>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、上記化合物Aとは異なる芳香族複素環化合物を更に含むことが好ましい。このような化合物としては、マイグレーション抑制剤が挙げられる。
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、マイグレーション抑制剤を更に含むことが好ましい。マイグレーション抑制剤を含むことにより、例えば、樹脂組成物を金属層(又は金属配線)に適用して膜を形成した際に、金属層(又は金属配線)由来の金属イオンが膜内へ移動することを効果的に抑制することができる。
 ただし、上述の化合物Aに該当する化合物は、マイグレーション抑制剤には該当しないものとする。
<Migration inhibitor>
It is preferable that the resin composition of the present invention further contains an aromatic heterocyclic compound different from the compound A described above. Such compounds include migration inhibitors.
It is preferable that the resin composition of the present invention further contains a migration inhibitor. By including a migration inhibitor, for example, when a resin composition is applied to a metal layer (or metal wiring) to form a film, metal ions derived from the metal layer (or metal wiring) may migrate into the film. can be effectively suppressed.
However, the compound corresponding to the above-mentioned compound A does not correspond to a migration inhibitor.
 マイグレーション抑制剤としては、特に制限はないが、複素環(ピロール環、フラン環、チオフェン環、イミダゾール環、オキサゾール環、チアゾール環、ピラゾール環、イソオキサゾール環、イソチアゾー000000ル環、テトラゾール環、ピリジン環、ピリダジン環、ピリミジン環、ピラジン環、ピペリジン環、ピペラジン環、モルホリン環、2H-ピラン環及び6H-ピラン環、トリアジン環)を有する化合物、チオ尿素類及びスルファニル基を有する化合物、ヒンダードフェノール系化合物、サリチル酸誘導体系化合物、ヒドラジド誘導体系化合物が挙げられる。特に、1,2,4-トリアゾール、ベンゾトリアゾール、3-アミノ-1,2,4-トリアゾール、3,5-ジアミノ-1,2,4-トリアゾール等のトリアゾール系化合物、1H-テトラゾール、5-フェニルテトラゾール、5-アミノ―1H-テトラゾール等のテトラゾール系化合物が好ましく使用できる。 Migration inhibitors are not particularly limited, but include heterocycles (pyrrole ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, imidazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyrazole ring, isoxazole ring, isothiazole ring, tetrazole ring, pyridine ring) , pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, piperidine ring, piperazine ring, morpholine ring, 2H-pyran ring and 6H-pyran ring, triazine ring), compounds having thioureas and sulfanyl groups, hindered phenol type compounds, salicylic acid derivative compounds, and hydrazide derivative compounds. In particular, triazole compounds such as 1,2,4-triazole, benzotriazole, 3-amino-1,2,4-triazole, 3,5-diamino-1,2,4-triazole, 1H-tetrazole, 5- Tetrazole compounds such as phenyltetrazole and 5-amino-1H-tetrazole can be preferably used.
 マイグレーション抑制剤としては、ハロゲンイオンなどの陰イオンを捕捉するイオントラップ剤を使用することもできる。 As the migration inhibitor, an ion trapping agent that traps anions such as halogen ions can also be used.
 その他のマイグレーション抑制剤としては、特開2013-015701号公報の段落0094に記載の防錆剤、特開2009-283711号公報の段落0073~0076に記載の化合物、特開2011-059656号公報の段落0052に記載の化合物、特開2012-194520号公報の段落0114、0116及び0118に記載の化合物、国際公開第2015/199219号の段落0166に記載の化合物などを使用することができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Other migration inhibitors include the rust inhibitors described in paragraph 0094 of JP-A-2013-015701, the compounds described in paragraphs 0073 to 0076 of JP-A-2009-283711, and the compounds described in JP-A-2011-059656. Compounds described in paragraph 0052, compounds described in paragraphs 0114, 0116, and 0118 of JP 2012-194520, compounds described in paragraph 0166 of WO 2015/199219, etc. can be used, and the contents thereof is incorporated herein.
 マイグレーション抑制剤の具体例としては、下記化合物を挙げることができる。 Specific examples of migration inhibitors include the following compounds.
 本発明の樹脂組成物がマイグレーション抑制剤を有する場合、マイグレーション抑制剤の含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01~5.0質量%であることが好ましく、0.05~2.0質量%であることがより好ましく、0.1~1.0質量%であることが更に好ましい。 When the resin composition of the present invention has a migration inhibitor, the content of the migration inhibitor is preferably 0.01 to 5.0% by mass, and 0.01 to 5.0% by mass based on the total solid content of the resin composition. The amount is more preferably 0.05 to 2.0% by weight, and even more preferably 0.1 to 1.0% by weight.
 マイグレーション抑制剤は1種のみでもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。マイグレーション抑制剤が2種以上の場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 Only one type of migration inhibitor may be used, or two or more types may be used. When there are two or more types of migration inhibitors, it is preferable that the total is within the above range.
<重合禁止剤>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、重合禁止剤を含むことが好ましい。重合禁止剤としてはフェノール系化合物、キノン系化合物、アミノ系化合物、N-オキシルフリーラジカル化合物系化合物、ニトロ系化合物、ニトロソ系化合物、ヘテロ芳香環系化合物、金属化合物などが挙げられる。
<Polymerization inhibitor>
It is preferable that the resin composition of the present invention contains a polymerization inhibitor. Examples of the polymerization inhibitor include phenolic compounds, quinone compounds, amino compounds, N-oxyl free radical compounds, nitro compounds, nitroso compounds, heteroaromatic compounds, and metal compounds.
 重合禁止剤の具体的な化合物としては、国際公開第2021/112189の段落0310に記載の化合物、p-ヒドロキノン、o-ヒドロキノン、4-ヒドロキシ-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル、フェノキサジン、1,4,4-トリメチル-2,3-ジアザビシクロ[3.2.2]ノナ-2-エン-N,N-ジオキシド等が挙げられる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Specific compounds of the polymerization inhibitor include the compound described in paragraph 0310 of International Publication No. 2021/112189, p-hydroquinone, o-hydroquinone, 4-hydroxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1- Examples include oxyl free radical, phenoxazine, 1,4,4-trimethyl-2,3-diazabicyclo[3.2.2]non-2-ene-N,N-dioxide, and the like. This content is incorporated herein.
 本発明の樹脂組成物が重合禁止剤を有する場合、重合禁止剤の含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01~20質量%であることが好ましく、0.02~15質量%であることがより好ましく、0.05~10質量%であることが更に好ましい。 When the resin composition of the present invention has a polymerization inhibitor, the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01 to 20% by mass, and 0.02 to 20% by mass based on the total solid content of the resin composition. It is more preferably 15% by mass, and even more preferably 0.05 to 10% by mass.
 重合禁止剤は1種のみでもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。重合禁止剤が2種以上の場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 Only one type of polymerization inhibitor may be used, or two or more types may be used. When there are two or more types of polymerization inhibitors, it is preferable that the total is within the above range.
<光吸収剤>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、露光によりその露光波長の吸光度が小さくなる化合物(光吸収剤)を含むことも好ましい。
<Light absorber>
It is also preferable that the resin composition of the present invention contains a compound (light absorber) whose absorbance at the exposure wavelength decreases upon exposure.
 樹脂組成物に含まれるある化合物aが光吸収剤に該当するか否か(すなわち、露光によりその露光波長の吸光度が小さくなるか否か)は、下記の方法により判定することができる。
 まず、樹脂組成物に含まれる濃度と同濃度の化合物aの溶液を調製し、露光光の波長における化合物aのモル吸光係数(mol-1・L・cm-1、「モル吸光係数1」ともいう。)を測定する。上記測定は、化合物aのモル吸光係数の低下などの変化の影響が小さくなるよう手早く行う。上記溶液における溶剤は、樹脂組成物が溶剤を含む場合はその溶剤を、樹脂組成物が溶剤を含まない場合はN-メチル-2-ピロリドンを用いる。
 次に、上記化合物aの溶液に対して露光光の照射を行う。露光量は1モルの化合物aに対して積算量として500mJとする。
 その後、露光後の上記化合物aの溶液を用い、露光光の波長における化合物aのモル吸光係数(mol-1・L・cm-1、「モル吸光係数2」ともいう。)を測定する。
 上記モル吸光係数1及びモル吸光係数2から、下記式に基づいて減衰率(%)を算出し、減衰率(%)が5%以上である場合に、化合物aは露光によりその露光波長の吸光度が小さくなる化合物(すなわち、光吸収剤)であると判断する。
 減衰率(%)=1-モル吸光係数2/モル吸光係数1×100
 上記減衰率は、10%以上であることが好ましく、20%以上であることがより好ましい。また、上記減衰率の下限は特に限定されず、0%以上であればよい。
 上記露光光の波長としては、樹脂組成物を感光膜の形成に用いる場合にはその感光膜が露光される波長であればよい。
 また、上記露光光の波長としては、樹脂組成物に含まれる光重合開始剤が感度を有する波長であることが好ましい。光重合開始剤がある波長に対して感度を有するとは、光重合開始剤をある波長において露光した際に重合開始種を生じることをいう。
 上記露光光の波長としては、光源との関係でいうと、(1)半導体レーザー(波長 830nm、532nm、488nm、405nm、375nm、355nm etc.)、(2)メタルハライドランプ、(3)高圧水銀灯、g線(波長 436nm)、h線(波長 405nm)、i線(波長 365nm)、ブロード(g,h,i線の3波長)、(4)エキシマレーザー、KrFエキシマレーザー(波長 248nm)、ArFエキシマレーザー(波長 193nm)、F2エキシマレーザー(波長 157nm)、(5)極端紫外線;EUV(波長 13.6nm)、(6)電子線、(7)YAGレーザーの第二高調波532nm、第三高調波355nm等が挙げられる。
 露光光の波長は、例えば光重合開始剤が感度を有する波長を選択すればよいが、h線(波長 405nm)又はi線(波長 365nm)が好ましく、i線(波長 365nm)がより好ましい。
Whether or not a certain compound a contained in the resin composition corresponds to a light absorber (that is, whether the absorbance of the compound a at the exposure wavelength decreases upon exposure) can be determined by the following method.
First, a solution of compound a with the same concentration as that contained in the resin composition is prepared, and the molar extinction coefficient (mol −1 ·L·cm −1 , also referred to as “molar extinction coefficient 1”) of compound a at the wavelength of exposure light is determined. ). The above measurement is performed quickly so as to minimize the influence of changes such as a decrease in the molar extinction coefficient of compound a. As the solvent in the above solution, when the resin composition contains a solvent, that solvent is used, and when the resin composition does not contain a solvent, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone is used.
Next, the solution of compound a is irradiated with exposure light. The exposure amount is 500 mJ as an integrated amount for 1 mol of compound a.
Thereafter, using the solution of compound a after exposure, the molar extinction coefficient (mol −1 ·L·cm −1 , also referred to as “molar extinction coefficient 2”) of compound a at the wavelength of the exposure light is measured.
Calculate the attenuation rate (%) from the above molar extinction coefficient 1 and molar extinction coefficient 2 based on the following formula, and if the attenuation rate (%) is 5% or more, compound a has an absorbance at the exposure wavelength due to exposure. is determined to be a compound (that is, a light absorber) that reduces the
Attenuation rate (%) = 1 - molar extinction coefficient 2 / molar extinction coefficient 1 x 100
The attenuation rate is preferably 10% or more, more preferably 20% or more. Moreover, the lower limit of the above-mentioned attenuation rate is not particularly limited, and may be 0% or more.
When the resin composition is used to form a photosensitive film, the wavelength of the exposure light may be any wavelength at which the photosensitive film is exposed.
Further, the wavelength of the exposure light is preferably a wavelength to which the photopolymerization initiator contained in the resin composition is sensitive. A photopolymerization initiator having sensitivity to a certain wavelength means that a polymerization initiation species is generated when the photopolymerization initiator is exposed to light at a certain wavelength.
In relation to the light source, the wavelength of the exposure light is (1) semiconductor laser (wavelength: 830 nm, 532 nm, 488 nm, 405 nm, 375 nm, 355 nm, etc.), (2) metal halide lamp, (3) high pressure mercury lamp, G-line (wavelength 436nm), H-line (wavelength 405nm), I-line (wavelength 365nm), Broad (3 wavelengths of g, h, i-line), (4) Excimer laser, KrF excimer laser (wavelength 248nm), ArF excimer Laser (wavelength 193 nm), F2 excimer laser (wavelength 157 nm), (5) Extreme ultraviolet light; EUV (wavelength 13.6 nm), (6) Electron beam, (7) YAG laser second harmonic 532 nm, third harmonic Examples include 355 nm.
The wavelength of the exposure light may be selected, for example, from a wavelength to which the photopolymerization initiator is sensitive, preferably the h-line (wavelength: 405 nm) or the i-line (wavelength: 365 nm), and more preferably the i-line (wavelength: 365 nm).
 光吸収剤は、露光によりラジカル重合開始種を発生する化合物であってもよいが、解像性及び耐薬品性の観点からは、露光によりラジカル重合開始種を発生しない化合物であることが好ましい。
 光吸収剤が露光によりラジカル重合開始種を発生する化合物であるか否かは、下記の方法により判定される。
 樹脂組成物に含まれる濃度と同濃度の光吸収剤、及び、ラジカル架橋剤を含む溶液を調製する。樹脂組成物がラジカル架橋剤を含む場合、上記溶液中のラジカル架橋剤としては、樹脂組成物に含まれるラジカル架橋剤と同一の化合物を同濃度で使用する。樹脂組成物がラジカル架橋剤を含まない場合、メタクリル酸メチルを光吸収剤の5倍の濃度で使用する。
 その後、露光光の照射を行う。露光量は積算量として500mJとする。
 露光後に、例えば高速液体クロマトグラフィにより重合性化合物の重合を判断し、重合性化合物の全モル量に対して重合した重合性化合物のモル量の割合が10%以下である場合に、光吸収剤が露光によりラジカル重合開始種を発生しない化合物であると判定する。
 上記モル量の割合は5%以下であることが好ましく、3%以下であることがより好ましい。また、上記モル量の割合の下限は特に限定されず、0%であってもよい。
 上記露光光の波長としては、樹脂組成物を感光膜の形成に用いる場合にはその感光膜が露光される波長であればよい。
 また、上記露光光の波長としては、樹脂組成物に含まれる光重合開始剤が感度を有する波長であることが好ましい。
The light absorber may be a compound that generates radical polymerization initiation species upon exposure to light, but from the viewpoint of resolution and chemical resistance, it is preferably a compound that does not generate radical polymerization initiation species upon exposure.
Whether the light absorber is a compound that generates radical polymerization initiating species upon exposure to light is determined by the following method.
A solution containing a light absorber and a radical crosslinking agent at the same concentration as that contained in the resin composition is prepared. When the resin composition contains a radical crosslinking agent, the same compound as the radical crosslinking agent contained in the resin composition is used at the same concentration as the radical crosslinking agent in the solution. If the resin composition does not contain a radical crosslinker, methyl methacrylate is used at a concentration five times that of the light absorber.
After that, exposure light is irradiated. The exposure amount is 500 mJ as an integrated amount.
After exposure, the polymerization of the polymerizable compound is determined by, for example, high performance liquid chromatography, and if the ratio of the molar amount of the polymerizable compound to the total molar amount of the polymerizable compound is 10% or less, it is determined that the light absorber is It is determined that the compound does not generate radical polymerization initiation species upon exposure to light.
The molar amount ratio is preferably 5% or less, more preferably 3% or less. Further, the lower limit of the above molar amount ratio is not particularly limited, and may be 0%.
When the resin composition is used to form a photosensitive film, the wavelength of the exposure light may be any wavelength at which the photosensitive film is exposed.
Further, the wavelength of the exposure light is preferably a wavelength to which the photopolymerization initiator contained in the resin composition is sensitive.
 露光によりラジカル重合開始種を発生する化合物としては、上述の光ラジカル重合開始剤と同様の化合物が挙げられる。組成物が光吸収剤として光ラジカル重合開始剤を含む場合、発生するラジカル種の重合開始能が最も低いものを光吸収剤、それ以外を光重合開始剤とする。
 露光によりラジカル重合開始種を発生しない化合物としては、光酸発生剤、光塩基発生剤、その他、露光により吸収波長が変化する色素等が挙げられる。
 これらの中でも、光吸収剤としては、ナフトキノンジアジド化合物、又は、露光により吸光度が変化する色素であることが好ましく、ナフトキノンジアジド化合物であることがより好ましい。
 また、光吸収剤として、例えば、光酸発生剤又は光塩基発生剤と、pHにより露光波長の吸光度が小さくなる化合物とを組み合わせて用いることも考えられる。
Examples of the compound that generates a radical polymerization initiator upon exposure to light include the same compounds as the above-mentioned photoradical polymerization initiators. When the composition contains a photoradical polymerization initiator as a light absorber, the one having the lowest ability to initiate polymerization of the generated radical species is the light absorber, and the others are the photopolymerization initiators.
Examples of compounds that do not generate radical polymerization initiation species upon exposure include photoacid generators, photobase generators, and dyes whose absorption wavelength changes upon exposure.
Among these, the light absorber is preferably a naphthoquinone diazide compound or a dye whose absorbance changes upon exposure, and more preferably a naphthoquinone diazide compound.
It is also conceivable to use a combination of a photoacid generator or a photobase generator and a compound whose absorbance at the exposure wavelength decreases depending on the pH, as the light absorber.
〔ナフトキノンジアジド化合物〕
 ナフトキノンジアジド化合物としては、露光によりインデンカルボン酸を生じてその露光波長の吸光度が小さくなる化合物が挙げられ、1,2-ナフトキノンジアジド構造を有する化合物が好ましい。
 ナフトキノンジアジド化合物としては、ヒドロキシ化合物のナフトキノンジアジドスルホン酸エステルであることが好ましい。
 上記ヒドロキシ化合物としては、下記式(H1)~(H6)のいずれかで表される化合物が好ましい。

 式(H1)中、R及びRはそれぞれ独立に、1価の有機基を表し、R及びRはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、n1、n2、m1及びm2はそれぞれ独立に、0~5の整数であり、m1及びm2の少なくとも1つは1~5の整数である。
 式(H2)中、Zは4価の有機基を表し、L、L、L及びLはそれぞれ独立に、単結合又は2価の有機基を表し、R、R、R及びRはそれぞれ独立に、1価の有機基を表し、n3、n4、n5及びn6はそれぞれ独立に、0~3の整数であり、m3、m4、m5及びm6はそれぞれ独立に、0~2の整数であり、m3、m4、m5及びm6のうち少なくとも1つは1又は2である。
 式(H3)中、R及びR10はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、Lはそれぞれ独立に、2価の有機基を表し、n7は3~8の整数を表す。
 式(H4)中、Lは2価の有機基を表し、L及びLはそれぞれ独立に、脂肪族の3級又は4級炭素を含む2価の有機基を表す。
 式(H5)中、R11、R12、R13、R14、R15、R16、R17、R18、R19及びR20はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子又は1価の有機基を表し、L、L10およびL11はそれぞれ独立に、単結合又は2価の有機基を表し、m7、m8、m9、m10はそれぞれ独立に、0~2の整数を表し、m7、m8、m9、m10のうち少なくとも1つは1又は2である。
 式(H6)中、R42、R43、R44、及びR45はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、R46、及びR47はそれぞれ独立に、1価の有機基を表し、n16及びn17はそれぞれ独立に、0~4の整数を表し、m11及びm12はそれぞれ独立に、0~4の整数を表し、m11及びm12のうち少なくとも1つは1~4の整数である。
[Naphthoquinonediazide compound]
Examples of the naphthoquinonediazide compound include compounds that produce indenecarboxylic acid upon exposure and have a low absorbance at the exposure wavelength, and compounds having a 1,2-naphthoquinonediazide structure are preferred.
The naphthoquinone diazide compound is preferably a naphthoquinone diazide sulfonic acid ester of a hydroxy compound.
As the above-mentioned hydroxy compound, compounds represented by any of the following formulas (H1) to (H6) are preferred.

In formula (H1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a monovalent organic group, R 3 and R 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, and n1, n2, m1 and m2 are each independently an integer of 0 to 5, and at least one of m1 and m2 is an integer of 1 to 5.
In formula (H2), Z represents a tetravalent organic group, L 1 , L 2 , L 3 and L 4 each independently represent a single bond or a divalent organic group, and R 5 , R 6 , R 7 and R8 each independently represent a monovalent organic group, n3, n4, n5 and n6 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 3, m3, m4, m5 and m6 each independently represent 0 ˜2, and at least one of m3, m4, m5, and m6 is 1 or 2.
In formula (H3), R 9 and R 10 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, L 5 each independently represents a divalent organic group, and n7 represents an integer from 3 to 8. represent.
In formula (H4), L 6 represents a divalent organic group, and L 7 and L 8 each independently represent a divalent organic group containing an aliphatic tertiary or quaternary carbon.
In formula (H5), R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , R 14 , R 15 , R 16 , R 17 , R 18 , R 19 and R 20 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or a monovalent organic represents a group, L 9 , L 10 and L 11 each independently represent a single bond or a divalent organic group, m7, m8, m9, m10 each independently represent an integer from 0 to 2, m7, At least one of m8, m9, and m10 is 1 or 2.
In formula (H6), R 42 , R 43 , R 44 , and R 45 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, and R 46 and R 47 each independently represent a monovalent organic group. , n16 and n17 each independently represent an integer from 0 to 4, m11 and m12 each independently represent an integer from 0 to 4, and at least one of m11 and m12 is an integer from 1 to 4. be.
 式(H1)中、R及びRはそれぞれ独立に、炭素数1~60の1価の有機基であることが好ましく、炭素数1~30の1価の有機基であることがより好ましい。R及びRにおける1価の有機基としては、置換基を有してもよい炭化水素基が挙げられ、例えば、ヒドロキシ基等の置換基を有してもよい芳香族炭化水素基等が挙げられる。
 式(H1)中、R及びRはそれぞれ独立に、炭素数1~60の1価の有機基であることが好ましく、炭素数1~30の1価の有機基であることがより好ましい。R及びRにおける1価の有機基としては、置換基を有してもよい炭化水素基が挙げられ、例えば、ヒドロキシ基等の置換基を有してもよい炭化水素基等が挙げられる。
 式(H1)中、n1及びn2はそれぞれ独立に、0又は1であることが好ましく、0であることがより好ましい。
 式(H1)中、m1及びm2はいずれも1であることが好ましい。
In formula (H1), R 1 and R 2 are each independently preferably a monovalent organic group having 1 to 60 carbon atoms, more preferably a monovalent organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. . Examples of the monovalent organic group in R 1 and R 2 include a hydrocarbon group that may have a substituent, such as an aromatic hydrocarbon group that may have a substituent such as a hydroxy group. Can be mentioned.
In formula (H1), R 3 and R 4 are each independently preferably a monovalent organic group having 1 to 60 carbon atoms, more preferably a monovalent organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. . Examples of the monovalent organic group in R 3 and R 4 include a hydrocarbon group that may have a substituent, such as a hydrocarbon group that may have a substituent such as a hydroxy group. .
In formula (H1), n1 and n2 are each independently preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
In formula (H1), m1 and m2 are preferably both 1.
式(H1)で表される化合物は、式(H1-1)~式(H1-5)のいずれかで表される化合物であることが好ましい。

 式(H1-1)中、R21、R22及びR23はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、水素原子又は炭素数1~20の1価の有機基が好ましく、水素原子又は下記式(R-1)で表される基がより好ましい。

 式(R-1)中、R29は水素原子、アルキル基又はアルコキシ基を表し、n13は0~2の整数を表し、*は他の構造との結合部位を表す。
 (H1-1)中、n8、n9及びn10はそれぞれ独立に、0~2の整数を表し、0又は1が好ましい。
The compound represented by formula (H1) is preferably a compound represented by any one of formulas (H1-1) to (H1-5).

In formula (H1-1), R 21 , R 22 and R 23 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, preferably a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and hydrogen An atom or a group represented by the following formula (R-1) is more preferable.

In formula (R-1), R 29 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an alkoxy group, n13 represents an integer of 0 to 2, and * represents a bonding site with another structure.
In (H1-1), n8, n9 and n10 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 2, preferably 0 or 1.
 式(H1-2)中、R24は水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、水素原子、炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は炭素数1~20のアルコキシ基が好ましい。n14、n15及びn16はそれぞれ独立に、0~2の整数を表す。R30は水素原子又はアルキル基を表す。 In formula (H1-2), R 24 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. n14, n15 and n16 each independently represent an integer from 0 to 2. R 30 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
 式(H1-3)中、R25、R26、R27及びR28はそれぞれ独立に、1価の有機基を表し、水素原子、アルキル基又は上述の式(R-1)で表される基であることが好ましい。
 式(H1-3)中、n11、n12及びn13はそれぞれ独立に、0~2の整数を表し、0又は1が好ましい。
In formula (H1-3), R 25 , R 26 , R 27 and R 28 each independently represent a monovalent organic group, and are represented by a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or the above formula (R-1). It is preferable that it is a group.
In formula (H1-3), n11, n12 and n13 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 2, preferably 0 or 1.
 式(H1-1)で表される化合物としては、下記式(H1-1-1)~式(H1-1-4)のいずれかで表される化合物が好ましい。
 式(H1-2)で表される化合物としては下記式(H1-2-1)または(H1-2-2)で表される化合物が好ましい。
 式(H1-3)で表される化合物としては下記式(H1-3-1)~式(H1-3-3)で表される化合物が好ましい。
The compound represented by formula (H1-1) is preferably a compound represented by any one of the following formulas (H1-1-1) to (H1-1-4).
The compound represented by the formula (H1-2) is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (H1-2-1) or (H1-2-2).
As the compound represented by formula (H1-3), compounds represented by the following formulas (H1-3-1) to (H1-3-3) are preferable.
 式(H2)中、Zは炭素数1~20の4価の基であることが好ましく、下記式(Z-1)~(Z-4)のいずれかで表される基がより好ましい。下記式(Z-1)~(Z-4)中、*は他の構造との結合部位を表す。

 式(H2)中、L、L、L及びLはそれぞれ独立に、単結合又はメチレン基であることが好ましい。
 式(H2)中、R、R、R及びRはそれぞれ独立に、炭素数1~30の有機基が好ましい。
 式(H2)中、n3、n4、n5及びn6はそれぞれ独立に、0~2の整数であることが好ましく、0又は1であることがより好ましい。
 式(H2)中、m3、m4、m5及びm6はそれぞれ独立に、1又は2であることが好ましく、1であることがより好ましい。
 式(H2)で表される化合物としては、下記構造の化合物が例示される。
In formula (H2), Z is preferably a tetravalent group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably a group represented by any of the following formulas (Z-1) to (Z-4). In the following formulas (Z-1) to (Z-4), * represents a bonding site with another structure.

In formula (H2), L 1 , L 2 , L 3 and L 4 are preferably each independently a single bond or a methylene group.
In formula (H2), R 5 , R 6 , R 7 and R 8 are each independently preferably an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
In formula (H2), n3, n4, n5 and n6 are each independently preferably an integer of 0 to 2, more preferably 0 or 1.
In formula (H2), m3, m4, m5 and m6 are each independently preferably 1 or 2, more preferably 1.
Examples of the compound represented by formula (H2) include compounds having the following structure.
 式(H3)中、R及びR10はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は炭素数1~20の1価の有機基を表すことが好ましい。
 式(H3)中、Lはそれぞれ独立に、下記式(L-1)で表される基であることが好ましい。

 式(L-1)中、R30は炭素数1~20の1価の有機基を表し、n14は1~5の整数を表し、*は他の構造との結合部位を表す。
 式(H3)中、n7は4~6の整数であることが好ましい。
 式(H3)で表される化合物としては、下記化合物が挙げられる。下記式中、nはそれぞれ独立に、0~9の整数を表す。
In formula (H3), R 9 and R 10 each independently preferably represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
In formula (H3), each L 5 is preferably independently a group represented by the following formula (L-1).

In formula (L-1), R 30 represents a monovalent organic group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, n14 represents an integer of 1 to 5, and * represents a bonding site with another structure.
In formula (H3), n7 is preferably an integer of 4 to 6.
Examples of the compound represented by formula (H3) include the following compounds. In the following formula, each n independently represents an integer of 0 to 9.
 式(H4)中、Lは-C(CF-、-S(=O)-又は-C(=O)-であることが好ましい。
 式(H4)中、L及びLはそれぞれ独立に、炭素数2~20の2価の有機基であることが好ましい。
 式(H4)で表される化合物としては、下記化合物が挙げられる。
In formula (H4), L 6 is preferably -C(CF 3 ) 2 -, -S(=O) 2 - or -C(=O)-.
In formula (H4), L 7 and L 8 are each independently preferably a divalent organic group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms.
Examples of the compound represented by formula (H4) include the following compounds.
 式(H5)中、R11、R12、R13、R14、R15、R16、R17、R18、R19及びR20はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルコキシ基、アリル基又はアシル基が好ましい。
 式(H5)中、L、L10およびL11はそれぞれ独立に、単結合、-O-、-S-、-S(=O)-、-C(=O)-、-C(=O)O-、シクロペンチリデン、シクロヘキシリデン、フェニレンまたは炭素数1~20の2価の有機基が好ましく、下記式(L-2)~式(L-4)のいずれかで表される基であることがより好ましい。

 式(L-2)~式(L-4)中、R31及びR32はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基又はアリール基を表し、R34、R35、R36及びR37はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はアルキル基を表し、n15は、1~5の整数であり、R38、R39、R40及びR41はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はアルキル基を表し、*は他の構造との結合部位を表す。
 式(H5)で表される化合物としては、下記化合物が挙げられる。
In formula (H5), R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , R 14 , R 15 , R 16 , R 17 , R 18 , R 19 and R 20 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl , an alkoxy group, an allyl group or an acyl group.
In formula (H5), L 9 , L 10 and L 11 each independently represent a single bond, -O-, -S-, -S(=O) 2 -, -C(=O)-, -C( =O)O-, cyclopentylidene, cyclohexylidene, phenylene or a divalent organic group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is preferred, and is represented by any of the following formulas (L-2) to (L-4). It is more preferable that it is a group.

In formulas (L-2) to (L-4), R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, or an aryl group, and R 34 , R 35 , R 36 and R 37 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, n15 is an integer of 1 to 5, R 38 , R 39 , R 40 and R 41 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, * Represents a binding site with other structures.
Examples of the compound represented by formula (H5) include the following compounds.
 式(H6)中、R42、R43、R44、及びR45はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、水素原子又は炭素数1~20の1価の有機基が好ましく、水素原子又は炭素数1~20のアルキル基がより好ましく、炭素数1~4のアルキル基がより好ましい。
 式(H6)中、R46、及びR47はそれぞれ独立に、アルキル基、アルコキシ基又はアリール基が好ましく、アルキル基がより好ましい。
 式(H6)中、n16及びn17はそれぞれ独立に、0~2の整数が好ましく、0又は1がより好ましい。
 式(H6)中、n16及びn17はそれぞれ独立に、1~3の整数が好ましく、2又は3がより好ましい。
 式(H6)で表される化合物としては、下記化合物が挙げられる。
In formula (H6), R 42 , R 43 , R 44 , and R 45 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, preferably a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. , a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
In formula (H6), R 46 and R 47 are each independently preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or an aryl group, and more preferably an alkyl group.
In formula (H6), n16 and n17 are each independently preferably an integer of 0 to 2, more preferably 0 or 1.
In formula (H6), n16 and n17 are each independently preferably an integer of 1 to 3, more preferably 2 or 3.
Examples of the compound represented by formula (H6) include the following compounds.
 その他、ヒドロキシ化合物としては、2,3,4-トリヒドロキシベンゾフェノン、2,4,4′-トリヒドロキシベンゾフェノン、2,4,6-トリヒドロキシベンゾフェノン、2,3,4-トリヒドロキシ-2′-メチルベンゾフェノン、2,3,4,4′-テトラヒドロキシベンゾフェノン、2,2′,4,4′-テトラヒドロキシベンゾフェノン、2,4,6,3′,4′-ペンタヒドロキシベンゾフェノン、2,3,4,2′,4′-ペンタヒドロキシベンゾフェノン、2,3,4,2′,5′-ペンタヒドロキシベンゾフェノン、2,4,6,3′,4′,5′-ヘキサヒドロキシベンゾフェノン、2,3,4,3′,4′,5′-ヘキサヒドロキシベンゾフェノン等のポリヒドロキシベンゾフェノン類、
2,3,4-トリヒドロキシアセトフェノン、2,3,4-トリヒドロキシフェニルペンチルケトン、2,3,4-トリヒドロキシフェニルヘキシルケトン等のポリヒドロキシフェニルアルキルケトン類、
ビス(2,4-ジヒドロキシフェニル)メタン、ビス(2,3,4-トリヒドロキシフェニル)メタン、ビス(2,4-ジヒドロキシフェニル)プロパン-1、ビス(2,3,4-トリヒドロキシフェニル)プロパン-1、ノルジヒドログアイアレチン酸、1,1-ビス(4-ヒドロキシフェニル)シクロヘキサン等のビス((ポリ)ヒドロキシフェニル)アルカン類、
3,4,5-トリヒドロキシ安息香酸プロピル、2,3,4-トリヒドロキシ安息香酸フェニル、3,4,5-トリヒドロキシ安息香酸フェニル等のポリヒドロキシ安息香酸エステル類、
ビス(2,3,4-トリヒドロキシベンゾイル)メタン、ビス(3-アセチル-4,5,6-トリヒドロキシフェニル)-メタン、ビス(2,3,4-トリヒドロキシベンゾイル)ベンゼン、ビス(2,4,6-トリヒドロキシベンゾイル)ベンゼン等のビス(ポリヒドロキシベンゾイル)アルカン又はビス(ポリヒドロキシベンゾイル)アリール類、
エチレングリコール-ジ(3,5-ジヒドロキシベンゾエート)、エチレングリコール-ジ(3,4,5-トリヒドロキシベンゾエート)等のアルキレン-ジ(ポリヒドロキシベンゾエート)類、
2,3,4-ビフェニルトリオール、3,4,5-ビフェニルトリオール、3,5,3′,5′-ビフェニルテトロール、2,4,2′,4′-ビフェニルテトロール、2,4,6,3′,5′-ビフェニルペントール、2,4,6,2′,4′,6′-ビフェニルヘキソール、2,3,4,2′,3′,4′-ビフェニルヘキソール等のポリヒドロキシビフェニル類、
4,4′-チオビス(1,3-ジヒドロキシ)ベンゼン等のビス(ポリヒドロキシ)スルフィド類、
2,2′,4,4′-テトラヒドロキシジフェニルエーテル等のビス(ポリヒドロキシフェニル)エーテル類、
2,2′,4,4′-テトラヒドロキシジフェニルスルフォキシド等のビス(ポリヒドロキシフェニル)スルフォキシド類、
2,2′,4,4′-ジフェニルスルフォン等のビス(ポリヒドロキシフェニル)スルフォン類、
トリス(4-ヒドロキシフェニル)メタン、4,4′,4″-トリヒドロキシ-3,5,3′,5′-テトラメチルトリフェニルメタン、4,4′,3″,4″-テトラヒドロキシ-3,5,3′,5′-テトラメチルトリフェニルメタン、4-[ビス(3,5-ジメチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)メチル]-2-メトキシ-フェノール、4,4′-(3,4-ジオール-ベンジリデン)ビス[2,6-ジメチルフェノール]、4,4′-[(2-ヒドロキシ-フェニル)メチレン]ビス[2-シクロヘキシル-5-メチルフェノール、4,4′,2″,3″,4″-ペンタヒドロキシ-3,5,3′,5′-テトラメチルトリフェニルメタン、2,3,4,2′,3′,4′-ヘキサヒドロキシ-5,5′-ジアセチルトリフェニルメタン、2,3,4,2′,3′,4′,3″,4″-オクタヒドロキシ-5,5′-ジアセチルトリフェニルメタン、2,4,6,2′,4′,6′-ヘキサヒドロキシ-5,5′-ジプロピオニルトリフェニルメタン等のポリヒドロキシトリフェニルメタン類、4,4′-(フェニルメチレン)ビスフェノール、4,4′-(1-フェニル-エチリデン)ビス[2-メチルフェノール]、4,4′,4″-エチリデン-トリスフェノール等のポリヒドロキシトリフェニルエタン類、
3,3,3′,3′-テトラメチル-1,1′-スピロビ-インダン-5,6,5′,6′-テトロール、3,3,3′,3′-テトラメチル-1,1′-スピロビ-インダン-5,6,7,5′,6′,7′-ヘキソオール、3,3,3′,3′-テトラメチル-1,1′-スピロビ-インダン-4,5,6,4′,5′,6′-ヘキソオール、3,3,3′,3′-テトラメチル-1,1′-スピロビ-インダン-4,5,6,5′,6′,7′-ヘキソオール等のポリヒドロキシスピロビーインダン類、2,4,4-トリメチル-2′,4′,7′-トリヒドロキシフラバン、等のポリヒドロキシフラバン類、
3,3-ビス(3,4-ジヒドロキシフェニル)フタリド、3,3-ビス(2,3,4-トリヒドロキシフェニル)フタリド、3′,4′,5′,6′-テトラヒドロキシスピロ[フタリド-3,9′-キサンテン]等のポリヒドロキシフタリド類、モリン、ケルセチン、ルチン等のフラボノ色素類、
α,α′,α″-トリス(4-ヒドロキシフェニル)1,3,5-トリイソプロピルベンゼン、α,α′,α″-トリス(3,5-ジメチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)1,3,5-トリイソプロピルベンゼン、α,α′,α″-トリス(3,5-ジエチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)1,3,5-トリイソプロピルベンゼン、α,α′,α″-トリス(3,5-ジn-プロピル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)1,3,5-トリイソプロピルベンゼン、α,α′,α″-トリス(3,5-ジイソプロピル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)1,3,5-トリイソプロピルベンゼン、α,α′,α″-トリス(3,5-ジn-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)1,3,5-トリイソプロピルベンゼン、α,α′,α″-トリス(3-メチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)1,3,5-トリイソプロピルベンゼン、α,α′,α″-トリス(3-メトキシ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)1,3,5-トリイソプロピルベンゼン、α,α′,α″-トリス(2,4-ジヒドロキシフェニル)1,3,5-トリイソプロピルベンゼン、1,3,5-トリス(3,5-ジメチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)ベンゼン、1,3,5-トリス(5-メチル-2-ヒドロキシフェニル)ベンゼン、2,4,6-トリス(3,5-ジメチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニルチオメチル)メシチレン、1-[α-メチル-α-(4′-ヒドロキシフェニル)エチル]-4-[α,α’-ビス(4″-ヒドロキシフェニル)エチル]ベンゼン、1-[α-メチル(4′-ヒドロキシフェニル)エチル]-3-[α,α’-ビス(4″-ヒドロキシフェニル)エチル]ベンゼン、1-[α-メチル-α-(3′,5′-ジメチル-4′-ヒドロキシフェニル)エチル]-4-[α,α′-ビス(3″,5″-ジメチル-4″-ヒドロキシフェニル)エチル]ベンゼン、1-[α-メチル(3′-メチル-4′-ヒドロキシフェニル)エチル]-4-[α′,α′-ビス(3″-メチル-4″-ヒドロキシフェニル)エチル]ベンゼン、1-[α-メチル-α-(3′-メトキシ-4′-ヒドロキシフェニル)エチル]-4-[α′,α′-ビス(3″-メトキシ-4″-ヒドロキシフェニル)エチル]ベンゼン、1-[α-メチル-α-(2′,4′-ジヒドロキシフェニル)エチル]-4-[α′,α′-ビス(4″-ヒドロキシフェニル)エチル]ベンゼン、1-[α-メチル(2′,4′-ジヒドロキシフェニル)エチル]-3-[α′,α′-ビス(4″-ヒドロキシフェニル)エチル]ベンゼン等の特開平4-253058に記載のポリヒドロキシ化合物、α,α,α′,α′,α″,α″-ヘキサキス-(4-ヒドロキシフェニル)-1,3,5-トリエチルベンゼン等の特開平5-224410号に記載のポリヒドロキシ化合物、1,2,2,3-テトラ(p-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロパン、1,3,3,5-テトラ(p-ヒドロキシフェニル)ペンタン等の特開平5-303200号、EP-530148に記載のポリ(ヒドロキシフェニル)アルカン類、
p-ビス(2,3,4-トリヒドロキシベンゾイル)ベンゼン、p-ビス(2,4,6-トリヒドロキシベンゾイル)ベンゼン、m-ビス(2,3,4-トリヒドロキシベンゾイル)ベンゼン、m-ビス(2,4,6-トリヒドロキシベンゾイル)ベンゼン、p-ビス(2,5-ジヒドロキシ-3-ブロムベンゾイル)ベンゼン、p-ビス(2,3,4-トリヒドロキシ-5-メチルベンゾイル)ベンゼン、p-ビス(2,3,4-トリヒドロキシ-5-メトキシベンゾイル)ベンゼン、p-ビス(2,3,4-トリヒドロキシ-5-ニトロベンゾイル)ベンゼン、p-ビス(2,3,4-トリヒドロキシ-5-シアノベンゾイル)ベンゼン、1,3,5-トリス(2,5-ジヒドロキシベンゾイル)ベンゼン、1,3,5-トリス(2,3,4-トリヒドロキシベンゾイル)ベンゼン、1,2,3-トリス(2,3,4-トリヒドロキシベンゾイル)ベンゼン、1,2,4-トリス(2,3,4-トリヒドロキシベンゾイル)ベンゼン、1,2,4,5-テトラキス(2,3,4-トリヒドロキシベンゾイル)ベンゼン、α,α′-ビス(2,3,4-トリヒドロキシベンゾイル)p-キシレン、α,α′,α′-トリス(2,3,4-トリヒドロキシベンゾイル)メシレン、
 2,6-ビス-(2-ヒドロキシ-3,5-ジメチルベンジル)-p-クレゾール、2,6-ビス-(2-ヒドロキシ-5′-メチルベンジル)-p-クレゾール、2,6-ビス-(2,4,6-トリヒドロキシベンジル)-p-クレゾール、2,6-ビス-(2,3,4-トリヒドロキシベンジル)-p-クレゾール、2,6-ビス(2,3,4-トリヒドロキシベンジル)-3,5-ジメチル-フェノール、4,6-ビス-(4-ヒドロキシ-3,5-ジメチルベンジル)-ピロガロール、2,6-ビス-(4-ヒドロキシ-3,5-ジメチルベンジル)-1,3,4-トリヒドロキシ-フェノール、4,6-ビス-(2,4,6-トリヒドロキシベンジル)-2,4-ジメチル-フェノール、4,6-ビス-(2,3,4-トリヒドロキシベンジル)-2,5-ジメチル-フェノール、2,6-ビス-(4-ヒドロキシベンジル)-p-クレゾール、2,6-ビス(4-ヒドロキシベンジル)-4-シクロヘキシルフェノール、2,6-ビス(4-ヒドロキシ-3-メチルベンジル)-p-クレゾール、2,6-ビス(4-ヒドロキシ-3,5-ジメチルベンジル)-p-クレゾール、2,6-ビス(4-ヒドロキシ-2,5-ジメチルベンジル)-p-クレゾール、2,6-ビス(4-ヒドロキシ-3-メチルベンジル)-4-フェニル-フェノール、2,2′,6,6′-テトラキス[(4-ヒドロキシフェニル)メチル]-4,4′-メチレンジフェノール、2,2′,6,6′-テトラキス[(4-ヒドロキシ-3,5-ジメチルフェニル)メチル]-4,4′-メチレンジフェノール、2,2′,6,6′-テトラキス[(4-ヒドロキシ-3-メチルフェニル)メチル]-4,4′-メチレンジフェノール、2,2′-ビス[(4-ヒドロキシ-3,5-ジメチルフェニル)メチル]6,6′-ジメチル-4,4′-メチレンジフェノール、2,2’,3,3’-テトラヒドロ-3,3,3’,3’-テトラメチル-1,1’-スピロビ(1H-インデン)-5,5’,6,6’,7,7’ヘキサノール、ビス(4-ヒドロキシ-3,5-ジメチルフェニル)-(4-ヒドロキシ-3-メトキシフェニル)メタン等を挙げることができる。
 また、ノボラック樹脂等フェノール樹脂の低核体を用いる事もできる。
Other hydroxy compounds include 2,3,4-trihydroxybenzophenone, 2,4,4'-trihydroxybenzophenone, 2,4,6-trihydroxybenzophenone, 2,3,4-trihydroxy-2'- Methylbenzophenone, 2,3,4,4'-tetrahydroxybenzophenone, 2,2',4,4'-tetrahydroxybenzophenone, 2,4,6,3',4'-pentahydroxybenzophenone, 2,3, 4,2',4'-pentahydroxybenzophenone, 2,3,4,2',5'-pentahydroxybenzophenone, 2,4,6,3',4',5'-hexahydroxybenzophenone, 2,3 , 4,3',4',5'-hexahydroxybenzophenone and other polyhydroxybenzophenones;
Polyhydroxyphenylalkyl ketones such as 2,3,4-trihydroxyacetophenone, 2,3,4-trihydroxyphenylpentyl ketone, 2,3,4-trihydroxyphenylhexyl ketone,
Bis(2,4-dihydroxyphenyl)methane, bis(2,3,4-trihydroxyphenyl)methane, bis(2,4-dihydroxyphenyl)propane-1, bis(2,3,4-trihydroxyphenyl) Bis((poly)hydroxyphenyl) alkanes such as propane-1, nordihydroguaiaretic acid, 1,1-bis(4-hydroxyphenyl)cyclohexane,
Polyhydroxybenzoic acid esters such as propyl 3,4,5-trihydroxybenzoate, phenyl 2,3,4-trihydroxybenzoate, phenyl 3,4,5-trihydroxybenzoate,
Bis(2,3,4-trihydroxybenzoyl)methane, bis(3-acetyl-4,5,6-trihydroxyphenyl)-methane, bis(2,3,4-trihydroxybenzoyl)benzene, bis(2 , 4,6-trihydroxybenzoyl)benzene or other bis(polyhydroxybenzoyl)alkanes or bis(polyhydroxybenzoyl)aryls,
Alkylene di(polyhydroxybenzoates) such as ethylene glycol di(3,5-dihydroxybenzoate) and ethylene glycol di(3,4,5-trihydroxybenzoate);
2,3,4-biphenyltriol, 3,4,5-biphenyltriol, 3,5,3',5'-biphenyltetrol, 2,4,2',4'-biphenyltetrol, 2,4, 6,3',5'-biphenylpentol, 2,4,6,2',4',6'-biphenylhexol, 2,3,4,2',3',4'-biphenylhexol, etc. polyhydroxybiphenyls,
Bis(polyhydroxy) sulfides such as 4,4'-thiobis(1,3-dihydroxy)benzene,
Bis(polyhydroxyphenyl) ethers such as 2,2',4,4'-tetrahydroxydiphenyl ether,
Bis(polyhydroxyphenyl) sulfoxides such as 2,2',4,4'-tetrahydroxydiphenyl sulfoxide,
Bis(polyhydroxyphenyl)sulfones such as 2,2',4,4'-diphenylsulfone,
Tris(4-hydroxyphenyl)methane, 4,4',4''-trihydroxy-3,5,3',5'-tetramethyltriphenylmethane, 4,4',3'',4''-tetrahydroxy- 3,5,3',5'-tetramethyltriphenylmethane, 4-[bis(3,5-dimethyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)methyl]-2-methoxy-phenol, 4,4'-(3,4 -diol-benzylidene)bis[2,6-dimethylphenol], 4,4'-[(2-hydroxy-phenyl)methylene]bis[2-cyclohexyl-5-methylphenol, 4,4',2'',3 ″,4″-pentahydroxy-3,5,3′,5′-tetramethyltriphenylmethane, 2,3,4,2′,3′,4′-hexahydroxy-5,5′-diacetyltriphenyl Methane, 2,3,4,2',3',4',3'',4''-octahydroxy-5,5'-diacetyltriphenylmethane, 2,4,6,2',4',6' -Polyhydroxytriphenylmethanes such as hexahydroxy-5,5'-dipropionyltriphenylmethane, 4,4'-(phenylmethylene)bisphenol, 4,4'-(1-phenyl-ethylidene)bis[2- methylphenol], polyhydroxytriphenylethanes such as 4,4′,4″-ethylidene-trisphenol,
3,3,3',3'-tetramethyl-1,1'-spirobi-indan-5,6,5',6'-tetrol, 3,3,3',3'-tetramethyl-1,1 '-Spirobi-indane-5,6,7,5',6',7'-hexol, 3,3,3',3'-tetramethyl-1,1'-spirobi-indane-4,5,6 ,4',5',6'-hexol, 3,3,3',3'-tetramethyl-1,1'-spirobi-indane-4,5,6,5',6',7'-hexol polyhydroxy spirobiindans such as, polyhydroxyflavans such as 2,4,4-trimethyl-2',4',7'-trihydroxyflavan,
3,3-bis(3,4-dihydroxyphenyl)phthalide, 3,3-bis(2,3,4-trihydroxyphenyl)phthalide, 3',4',5',6'-tetrahydroxyspiro[phthalide -3,9'-xanthene], flavonoid pigments such as morin, quercetin, rutin,
α, α′, α″-tris(4-hydroxyphenyl) 1,3,5-triisopropylbenzene, α, α′, α″-tris(3,5-dimethyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) 1,3, 5-triisopropylbenzene, α,α′,α″-tris(3,5-diethyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) 1,3,5-triisopropylbenzene, α,α′,α″-tris(3,5 -di-n-propyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)1,3,5-triisopropylbenzene, α,α′,α″-tris(3,5-diisopropyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)1,3,5-triisopropyl Benzene, α,α′,α″-tris(3,5-di-n-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)1,3,5-triisopropylbenzene, α,α′,α″-tris(3-methyl- 4-hydroxyphenyl)1,3,5-triisopropylbenzene, α,α′,α″-tris(3-methoxy-4-hydroxyphenyl)1,3,5-triisopropylbenzene, α,α′,α ″-tris(2,4-dihydroxyphenyl)1,3,5-triisopropylbenzene, 1,3,5-tris(3,5-dimethyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)benzene, 1,3,5-tris( 5-methyl-2-hydroxyphenyl)benzene, 2,4,6-tris(3,5-dimethyl-4-hydroxyphenylthiomethyl)mesitylene, 1-[α-methyl-α-(4′-hydroxyphenyl) ethyl]-4-[α,α'-bis(4″-hydroxyphenyl)ethyl]benzene, 1-[α-methyl(4′-hydroxyphenyl)ethyl]-3-[α,α’-bis(4 ″-hydroxyphenyl)ethyl]benzene, 1-[α-methyl-α-(3′,5′-dimethyl-4′-hydroxyphenyl)ethyl]-4-[α,α′-bis(3″,5 ″-dimethyl-4″-hydroxyphenyl)ethyl]benzene, 1-[α-methyl(3′-methyl-4′-hydroxyphenyl)ethyl]-4-[α′,α′-bis(3″-methyl -4″-hydroxyphenyl)ethyl]benzene, 1-[α-methyl-α-(3′-methoxy-4′-hydroxyphenyl)ethyl]-4-[α′,α′-bis(3″-methoxy -4″-hydroxyphenyl)ethyl]benzene, 1-[α-methyl-α-(2′,4′-dihydroxyphenyl)ethyl]-4-[α′,α′-bis(4″-hydroxyphenyl) ethyl]benzene, 1-[α-methyl(2′,4′-dihydroxyphenyl)ethyl]-3-[α′,α′-bis(4″-hydroxyphenyl)ethyl]benzene, etc. JP-A-4-253058 Polyhydroxy compounds described in JP-A-5-224410, such as α, α, α′, α′, α″, α″-hexakis-(4-hydroxyphenyl)-1,3,5-triethylbenzene, etc. JP-A-5-303200, EP-530148 of polyhydroxy compounds, 1,2,2,3-tetra(p-hydroxyphenyl)propane, 1,3,3,5-tetra(p-hydroxyphenyl)pentane, etc. poly(hydroxyphenyl)alkanes described in
p-bis(2,3,4-trihydroxybenzoyl)benzene, p-bis(2,4,6-trihydroxybenzoyl)benzene, m-bis(2,3,4-trihydroxybenzoyl)benzene, m- Bis(2,4,6-trihydroxybenzoyl)benzene, p-bis(2,5-dihydroxy-3-brombenzoyl)benzene, p-bis(2,3,4-trihydroxy-5-methylbenzoyl)benzene , p-bis(2,3,4-trihydroxy-5-methoxybenzoyl)benzene, p-bis(2,3,4-trihydroxy-5-nitrobenzoyl)benzene, p-bis(2,3,4 -trihydroxy-5-cyanobenzoyl)benzene, 1,3,5-tris(2,5-dihydroxybenzoyl)benzene, 1,3,5-tris(2,3,4-trihydroxybenzoyl)benzene, 1, 2,3-tris(2,3,4-trihydroxybenzoyl)benzene, 1,2,4-tris(2,3,4-trihydroxybenzoyl)benzene, 1,2,4,5-tetrakis(2, 3,4-trihydroxybenzoyl)benzene, α,α'-bis(2,3,4-trihydroxybenzoyl)p-xylene, α,α',α'-tris(2,3,4-trihydroxybenzoyl) ) mesilene,
2,6-bis-(2-hydroxy-3,5-dimethylbenzyl)-p-cresol, 2,6-bis-(2-hydroxy-5'-methylbenzyl)-p-cresol, 2,6-bis -(2,4,6-trihydroxybenzyl)-p-cresol, 2,6-bis-(2,3,4-trihydroxybenzyl)-p-cresol, 2,6-bis(2,3,4 -trihydroxybenzyl)-3,5-dimethyl-phenol, 4,6-bis-(4-hydroxy-3,5-dimethylbenzyl)-pyrogallol, 2,6-bis-(4-hydroxy-3,5- dimethylbenzyl)-1,3,4-trihydroxy-phenol, 4,6-bis-(2,4,6-trihydroxybenzyl)-2,4-dimethyl-phenol, 4,6-bis-(2, 3,4-trihydroxybenzyl)-2,5-dimethyl-phenol, 2,6-bis-(4-hydroxybenzyl)-p-cresol, 2,6-bis(4-hydroxybenzyl)-4-cyclohexylphenol , 2,6-bis(4-hydroxy-3-methylbenzyl)-p-cresol, 2,6-bis(4-hydroxy-3,5-dimethylbenzyl)-p-cresol, 2,6-bis(4 -Hydroxy-2,5-dimethylbenzyl)-p-cresol, 2,6-bis(4-hydroxy-3-methylbenzyl)-4-phenyl-phenol, 2,2',6,6'-tetrakis [( 4-hydroxyphenyl)methyl]-4,4'-methylene diphenol, 2,2',6,6'-tetrakis[(4-hydroxy-3,5-dimethylphenyl)methyl]-4,4'-methylene Diphenol, 2,2',6,6'-tetrakis[(4-hydroxy-3-methylphenyl)methyl]-4,4'-methylenediphenol, 2,2'-bis[(4-hydroxy-3 ,5-dimethylphenyl)methyl]6,6'-dimethyl-4,4'-methylenediphenol,2,2',3,3'-tetrahydro-3,3,3',3'-tetramethyl-1 , 1'-spirobi(1H-indene)-5,5',6,6',7,7'hexanol, bis(4-hydroxy-3,5-dimethylphenyl)-(4-hydroxy-3-methoxyphenyl) ) Methane, etc.
Furthermore, low-nuclear substances of phenolic resins such as novolac resins can also be used.
 ナフトキノンジアジドスルホン酸としては、6-ジアゾ5,6-ジヒドロ-5-オキソ-1-ナフタレンスルホン酸、1,2-ナフトキノン-(2)-ジアゾ-5-スルホン酸等が挙げられ、これらは混合して用いてもよい。 Examples of the naphthoquinone diazide sulfonic acid include 6-diazo 5,6-dihydro-5-oxo-1-naphthalene sulfonic acid, 1,2-naphthoquinone-(2)-diazo-5-sulfonic acid, and mixtures thereof. It may also be used as
 ヒドロキシ化合物のナフトキノンジアジドスルホン酸エステルの製造方法は、特に限定されないが、例えば、ナフトキノンジアジドスルホン酸をクロルスルホン酸又は塩化チオニルでスルホニルクロリドとし、得られたナフトキノンジアジドスルホニルクロリドと、ヒドロキシ化合物とを縮合反応させることにより得られる。
 例えば、ヒドロキシ化合物とナフトキノンジアジドスルホニルクロリドの所定量をジオキサン、アセトン、又はテトラヒドロフラン等の溶媒中において、トリエチルアミン等の塩基性触媒の存在下で反応させてエステル化を行い、得られた生成物を水洗、乾燥することにより得ることができる。
The method for producing naphthoquinone diazide sulfonyl ester of a hydroxy compound is not particularly limited, but for example, naphthoquinone diazide sulfonic acid is converted into a sulfonyl chloride with chlorosulfonic acid or thionyl chloride, and the resulting naphthoquinone diazide sulfonyl chloride is condensed with a hydroxy compound. Obtained by reaction.
For example, esterification is performed by reacting a predetermined amount of a hydroxy compound and naphthoquinonediazide sulfonyl chloride in a solvent such as dioxane, acetone, or tetrahydrofuran in the presence of a basic catalyst such as triethylamine, and the resulting product is washed with water. , can be obtained by drying.
 ナフトキノンジアジドスルホン酸エステルにおけるエステル化率は、特に限定されないが、10%以上であることが好ましく、20%以上であることがより好ましい。また上記エステル化率の上限は特に限定されず、100%であってもよい。
 上記エステル化率は、ヒドロキシ化合物が有するヒドロキシ基のうち、エステル化された基の割合として、H-NMR等により確認することができる。
The esterification rate of the naphthoquinonediazide sulfonic acid ester is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10% or more, more preferably 20% or more. Further, the upper limit of the esterification rate is not particularly limited, and may be 100%.
The esterification rate can be confirmed by 1 H-NMR or the like as the proportion of esterified groups among the hydroxy groups of the hydroxy compound.
 その他、光吸収剤として、特開2019-206689号公報の段落0088~0108に記載の化合物を用いることもできる。 In addition, compounds described in paragraphs 0088 to 0108 of JP 2019-206689 A can also be used as light absorbers.
<その他の添加剤>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、本発明の効果が得られる範囲で、必要に応じて、各種の添加物、例えば、界面活性剤、高級脂肪酸誘導体、熱重合開始剤、無機粒子、紫外線吸収剤、有機チタン化合物、酸化防止剤、光酸発生剤、凝集防止剤、フェノール系化合物、他の高分子化合物、可塑剤及びその他の助剤類(例えば、消泡剤、難燃剤など)等を含んでいてもよい。その他、本発明の樹脂組成物は、ウレア化合物、カルボジイミド化合物又はイソウレア化合物を含んでもよい。これらの成分を適宜含有させることにより、膜物性などの性質を調整することができる。これらの成分は、例えば、特開2012-003225号公報の段落番号0183以降(対応する米国特許出願公開第2013/0034812号明細書の段落番号0237)の記載、特開2008-250074号公報の段落番号0101~0104、0107~0109等の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。これらの添加剤を配合する場合、その合計含有量は本発明の樹脂組成物の固形分の3質量%以下とすることが好ましい。
<Other additives>
The resin composition of the present invention may optionally contain various additives, such as surfactants, higher fatty acid derivatives, thermal polymerization initiators, inorganic particles, ultraviolet absorbers, etc., as long as the effects of the present invention can be obtained. Contains organic titanium compounds, antioxidants, photoacid generators, anti-aggregation agents, phenolic compounds, other polymer compounds, plasticizers, and other auxiliary agents (e.g. antifoaming agents, flame retardants, etc.). You can stay there. In addition, the resin composition of the present invention may also contain a urea compound, a carbodiimide compound, or an isourea compound. By appropriately containing these components, properties such as film physical properties can be adjusted. These components are described, for example, in paragraphs 0183 and after of JP-A-2012-003225 (corresponding paragraph 0237 of U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2013/0034812), and in paragraphs of JP-A-2008-250074. The descriptions of numbers 0101 to 0104, 0107 to 0109, etc. can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated into the present specification. When blending these additives, their total content is preferably 3% by mass or less based on the solid content of the resin composition of the present invention.
 これらの他の添加剤としては、、国際公開第2022/145355号の段落0316~00358に記載の化合物が挙げられる。上記記載は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Examples of these other additives include compounds described in paragraphs 0316 to 00358 of International Publication No. 2022/145355. The above description is incorporated herein.
<樹脂組成物の特性>
 本発明の樹脂組成物の粘度は、樹脂組成物の固形分濃度により調整できる。塗布膜厚の観点から、1,000mm/s~12,000mm/sが好ましく、2,000mm/s~10,000mm/sがより好ましく、2,500mm/s~8,000mm/sが更に好ましい。上記範囲であれば、均一性の高い塗布膜を得ることが容易になる。1,000mm/s以上であれば、例えば再配線用絶縁膜として必要とされる膜厚で塗布することが容易であり、12,000mm/s以下であれば、塗布面状に優れた塗膜が得られる。
<Characteristics of resin composition>
The viscosity of the resin composition of the present invention can be adjusted by adjusting the solid content concentration of the resin composition. From the viewpoint of coating film thickness, it is preferably 1,000 mm 2 /s to 12,000 mm 2 /s, more preferably 2,000 mm 2 /s to 10,000 mm 2 /s, and 2,500 mm 2 /s to 8,000 mm. 2 /s is more preferable. Within the above range, it becomes easy to obtain a coating film with high uniformity. If it is 1,000 mm 2 /s or more, it is easy to coat the film with the thickness required for, for example, an insulating film for rewiring, and if it is 12,000 mm 2 /s or less, the coating surface quality is excellent. A coating film is obtained.
<樹脂組成物の含有物質についての制限>
 本発明の樹脂組成物の含水率は、2.0質量%未満であることが好ましく、1.5質量%未満であることがより好ましく、1.0質量%未満であることが更に好ましい。2.0%未満であれば、樹脂組成物の保存安定性が向上する。
 水分の含有量を維持する方法としては、保管条件における湿度の調整、保管時の収容容器の空隙率低減などが挙げられる。 
<Restrictions on substances contained in the resin composition>
The water content of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably less than 2.0% by mass, more preferably less than 1.5% by mass, and even more preferably less than 1.0% by mass. If it is less than 2.0%, the storage stability of the resin composition will improve.
Methods for maintaining the moisture content include adjusting the humidity during storage conditions and reducing the porosity of the storage container during storage.
 本発明の樹脂組成物の金属含有量は、絶縁性の観点から、5質量ppm(parts per million)未満が好ましく、1質量ppm未満がより好ましく、0.5質量ppm未満が更に好ましい。金属としては、ナトリウム、カリウム、マグネシウム、カルシウム、鉄、銅、クロム、ニッケルなどが挙げられるが、有機化合物と金属との錯体として含まれる金属は除く。金属を複数含む場合は、これらの金属の合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 The metal content of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably less than 5 mass ppm (parts per million), more preferably less than 1 mass ppm, and even more preferably less than 0.5 mass ppm, from the viewpoint of insulation. Examples of metals include sodium, potassium, magnesium, calcium, iron, copper, chromium, and nickel, but metals included as complexes of organic compounds and metals are excluded. When a plurality of metals are included, the total of these metals is preferably within the above range.
 また、本発明の樹脂組成物に意図せずに含まれる金属不純物を低減する方法としては、本発明の樹脂組成物を構成する原料として金属含有量が少ない原料を選択する、本発明の樹脂組成物を構成する原料に対してフィルターろ過を行う、装置内をポリテトラフルオロエチレン等でライニングしてコンタミネーションを可能な限り抑制した条件下で蒸留を行う等の方法を挙げることができる。 Further, as a method for reducing metal impurities unintentionally contained in the resin composition of the present invention, a method for reducing metal impurities that is unintentionally included in the resin composition of the present invention is to select a raw material with a low metal content as a raw material constituting the resin composition of the present invention. Methods include filtering the raw materials constituting the product, lining the inside of the apparatus with polytetrafluoroethylene, etc., and performing distillation under conditions that suppress contamination as much as possible.
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、半導体材料としての用途を考慮すると、ハロゲン原子の含有量が、配線腐食性の観点から、500質量ppm未満が好ましく、300質量ppm未満がより好ましく、200質量ppm未満が更に好ましい。中でも、ハロゲンイオンの状態で存在するものは、5質量ppm未満が好ましく、1質量ppm未満がより好ましく、0.5質量ppm未満が更に好ましい。ハロゲン原子としては、塩素原子及び臭素原子が挙げられる。塩素原子及び臭素原子、又は塩素イオン及び臭素イオンの合計がそれぞれ上記範囲であることが好ましい。
 ハロゲン原子の含有量を調節する方法としては、イオン交換処理などが好ましく挙げられる。
Considering the use as a semiconductor material, the resin composition of the present invention has a halogen atom content of preferably less than 500 mass ppm, more preferably less than 300 mass ppm, and more preferably less than 200 mass ppm from the viewpoint of wiring corrosion. is even more preferable. Among these, those present in the form of halogen ions are preferably less than 5 ppm by mass, more preferably less than 1 ppm by mass, and even more preferably less than 0.5 ppm by mass. Examples of the halogen atom include a chlorine atom and a bromine atom. It is preferable that the total of chlorine atoms and bromine atoms, or the total of chlorine ions and bromine ions, is each within the above range.
Preferred methods for adjusting the content of halogen atoms include ion exchange treatment.
 本発明の樹脂組成物の収容容器としては従来公知の収容容器を用いることができる。収容容器としては、原材料や本発明の樹脂組成物中への不純物混入を抑制することを目的に、容器内壁を6種6層の樹脂で構成された多層ボトルや、6種の樹脂を7層構造にしたボトルを使用することも好ましい。このような容器としては例えば特開2015-123351号公報に記載の容器が挙げられる。 As a container for storing the resin composition of the present invention, a conventionally known container can be used. For the purpose of suppressing the contamination of impurities into raw materials and the resin composition of the present invention, the storage container may be a multilayer bottle whose inner wall is made of 6 types of 6 layers of resin, or a container with 7 layers of 6 types of resin. It is also preferred to use structured bottles. Examples of such a container include the container described in JP-A No. 2015-123351.
<樹脂組成物の硬化物>
 本発明の樹脂組成物を硬化することにより、樹脂組成物の硬化物を得ることができる。
 本発明の硬化物は、樹脂組成物を硬化してなる硬化物である。
 樹脂組成物の硬化は加熱によるものであることが好ましく、加熱温度が120℃~400℃がより好ましく、140℃~380℃が更に好ましく、170℃~350℃が特に好ましい。樹脂組成物の硬化物の形態は、特に限定されず、フィルム状、棒状、球状、ペレット状など、用途に合わせて選択することができる。本発明において、硬化物は、フィルム状であることが好ましい。樹脂組成物のパターン加工によって、壁面への保護膜の形成、導通のためのビアホール形成、インピーダンスや静電容量あるいは内部応力の調整、放熱機能付与など、用途にあわせて、硬化物の形状を選択することもできる。硬化物(硬化物からなる膜)の膜厚は、0.5μm以上150μm以下であることが好ましい。
 本発明の樹脂組成物を硬化した際の収縮率は、50%以下が好ましく、45%以下がより好ましく、40%以下が更に好ましい。ここで、収縮率は、樹脂組成物の硬化前後の体積変化の百分率を指し、下記の式より算出することができる。
 収縮率[%]=100-(硬化後の体積÷硬化前の体積)×100
<Cured product of resin composition>
By curing the resin composition of the present invention, a cured product of the resin composition can be obtained.
The cured product of the present invention is a cured product obtained by curing a resin composition.
The resin composition is preferably cured by heating, and the heating temperature is more preferably 120°C to 400°C, even more preferably 140°C to 380°C, and particularly preferably 170°C to 350°C. The form of the cured product of the resin composition is not particularly limited, and can be selected depending on the purpose, such as film, rod, sphere, or pellet form. In the present invention, the cured product is preferably in the form of a film. By patterning the resin composition, we can select the shape of the cured product depending on the application, such as forming a protective film on the wall surface, forming via holes for conduction, adjusting impedance, capacitance or internal stress, and imparting heat dissipation function. You can also. The thickness of the cured product (film made of the cured product) is preferably 0.5 μm or more and 150 μm or less.
The shrinkage rate when the resin composition of the present invention is cured is preferably 50% or less, more preferably 45% or less, and even more preferably 40% or less. Here, the shrinkage rate refers to the percentage change in volume of the resin composition before and after curing, and can be calculated from the following formula.
Shrinkage rate [%] = 100 - (volume after curing ÷ volume before curing) x 100
<樹脂組成物の硬化物の特性> 
 本発明の樹脂組成物の硬化物のイミド化反応率は、70%以上が好ましく、80%以上がより好ましく、90%以上が更に好ましい。70%以上であれば、機械特性に優れた硬化物となる場合がある。
 本発明の樹脂組成物の硬化物の破断伸びは、30%以上が好ましく、40%以上がより好ましく、50%以上が更に好ましい。
 本発明の樹脂組成物の硬化物のガラス転移温度(Tg)は、180℃以上であることが好ましく、210℃以上であることがより好ましく、230℃以上であることがさらに好ましい。
<Characteristics of cured product of resin composition>
The imidization reaction rate of the cured product of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, and even more preferably 90% or more. If it is 70% or more, the cured product may have excellent mechanical properties.
The elongation at break of the cured product of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 30% or more, more preferably 40% or more, and even more preferably 50% or more.
The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the cured product of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 180°C or higher, more preferably 210°C or higher, and even more preferably 230°C or higher.
<樹脂組成物の調製>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、上記各成分を混合して調製することができる。混合方法は特に限定はなく、従来公知の方法で行うことができる。
 混合方法としては、撹拌羽による混合、ボールミルによる混合、タンクを回転させる混合などが挙げられる。
 混合中の温度は10~30℃が好ましく、15~25℃がより好ましい。
<Preparation of resin composition>
The resin composition of the present invention can be prepared by mixing the above components. The mixing method is not particularly limited and can be performed by a conventionally known method.
Examples of the mixing method include mixing using a stirring blade, mixing using a ball mill, and mixing using a rotating tank.
The temperature during mixing is preferably 10 to 30°C, more preferably 15 to 25°C.
 本発明の樹脂組成物中のゴミや微粒子等の異物を除去する目的で、フィルターを用いたろ過を行うことが好ましい。フィルター孔径は、例えば5μm以下が好ましく、1μm以下がより好ましく、0.5μm以下が更に好ましく、0.1μm以下が更により好ましい。フィルターの材質は、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン、ポリエチレン又はナイロンが好ましい。フィルターの材質がポリエチレンである場合はHDPE(高密度ポリエチレン)であることがより好ましい。フィルターは、有機溶剤であらかじめ洗浄したものを用いてもよい。フィルターろ過工程では、複数種のフィルターを直列又は並列に接続して用いてもよい。複数種のフィルターを使用する場合は、孔径又は材質が異なるフィルターを組み合わせて使用してもよい。接続態様としては、例えば、1段目として孔径1μmのHDPEフィルターを、2段目として孔径0.2μmのHDPEフィルターを、直列に接続した態様が挙げられる。また、各種材料を複数回ろ過してもよい。複数回ろ過する場合は、循環ろ過であってもよい。また、加圧してろ過を行ってもよい。加圧してろ過を行う場合、加圧する圧力は例えば0.01MPa以上1.0MPa以下が好ましく、0.03MPa以上0.9MPa以下がより好ましく、0.05MPa以上0.7MPa以下が更に好ましく、0.05MPa以上0.5MPa以下が更により好ましい。
 フィルターを用いたろ過の他、吸着材を用いた不純物の除去処理を行ってもよい。フィルターろ過と吸着材を用いた不純物除去処理とを組み合わせてもよい。吸着材としては、公知の吸着材を用いることができる。例えば、シリカゲル、ゼオライトなどの無機系吸着材、活性炭などの有機系吸着材が挙げられる。
 フィルターを用いたろ過後、ボトルに充填した樹脂組成物を減圧下に置き、脱気する工程を施しても良い。
In order to remove foreign substances such as dust and fine particles from the resin composition of the present invention, it is preferable to perform filtration using a filter. The filter pore diameter is, for example, preferably 5 μm or less, more preferably 1 μm or less, even more preferably 0.5 μm or less, and even more preferably 0.1 μm or less. The material of the filter is preferably polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene or nylon. When the material of the filter is polyethylene, it is more preferably HDPE (high density polyethylene). The filter may be washed in advance with an organic solvent. In the filter filtration step, a plurality of types of filters may be connected in series or in parallel. When using multiple types of filters, filters with different pore sizes or materials may be used in combination. Examples of the connection mode include a mode in which an HDPE filter with a pore diameter of 1 μm is connected in series as the first stage and an HDPE filter with a pore diameter of 0.2 μm as the second stage. Additionally, various materials may be filtered multiple times. When filtration is performed multiple times, circulation filtration may be used. Alternatively, filtration may be performed under pressure. When performing filtration under pressure, the pressure to be applied is preferably, for example, 0.01 MPa or more and 1.0 MPa or less, more preferably 0.03 MPa or more and 0.9 MPa or less, still more preferably 0.05 MPa or more and 0.7 MPa or less, and 0.01 MPa or more and 0.9 MPa or less, still more preferably 0.05 MPa or more and 0.7 MPa or less, and 0.01 MPa or more and 0.9 MPa or less, for example. Even more preferably 0.05 MPa or more and 0.5 MPa or less.
In addition to filtration using a filter, impurity removal treatment using an adsorbent may be performed. Filter filtration and impurity removal treatment using an adsorbent may be combined. As the adsorbent, a known adsorbent can be used. Examples include inorganic adsorbents such as silica gel and zeolite, and organic adsorbents such as activated carbon.
After filtration using a filter, the resin composition filled in the bottle may be placed under reduced pressure and degassed.
(硬化物の製造方法)
 本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、樹脂組成物を基材上に適用して膜を形成する膜形成工程を含むことが好ましい。
 硬化物の製造方法は、上記膜形成工程、膜形成工程により形成された膜を選択的に露光する露光工程、及び、露光工程により露光された膜を現像液を用いて現像してパターンを形成する現像工程を含むことがより好ましい。
 硬化物の製造方法は、上記膜形成工程、上記露光工程、上記現像工程、並びに、現像工程により得られたパターンを加熱する加熱工程及び現像工程により得られたパターンを露光する現像後露光工程の少なくとも一方を含むことが特に好ましい。
 また、硬化物の製造方法は、上記膜形成工程、及び、上記膜を加熱する工程を含むことも好ましい。
 以下、各工程の詳細について説明する。
(Method for producing cured product)
The method for producing a cured product of the present invention preferably includes a film forming step of applying the resin composition onto a base material to form a film.
The method for producing a cured product includes the above film forming step, an exposure step of selectively exposing the film formed in the film forming step, and developing the film exposed in the exposure step using a developer to form a pattern. It is more preferable to include a developing step.
The method for producing a cured product includes the film formation step, the exposure step, the development step, a heating step of heating the pattern obtained in the development step, and a post-development exposure step of exposing the pattern obtained in the development step. It is particularly preferable to include at least one of them.
Moreover, it is also preferable that the method for producing a cured product includes the film forming step and the step of heating the film.
The details of each step will be explained below.
<膜形成工程>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、基材上に適用して膜を形成する膜形成工程に用いることができる。
 本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、樹脂組成物を基材上に適用して膜を形成する膜形成工程を含むことが好ましい。
<Film formation process>
The resin composition of the present invention can be used in a film forming step in which a film is formed by applying it on a substrate.
The method for producing a cured product of the present invention preferably includes a film forming step of applying the resin composition onto a base material to form a film.
〔基材〕
 基材の種類は、用途に応じて適宜定めることができ、特に限定されない。基材としては、例えば、シリコン、窒化シリコン、ポリシリコン、酸化シリコン、アモルファスシリコンなどの半導体作製基材、石英、ガラス、光学フィルム、セラミック材料、蒸着膜、磁性膜、反射膜、Ni、Cu、Cr、Feなどの金属基材(例えば、金属から形成された基材、及び、金属層が例えばめっきや蒸着等により形成された基材のいずれであってもよい)、紙、SOG(Spin On Glass)、TFT(薄膜トランジスタ)アレイ基材、モールド基材、プラズマディスプレイパネル(PDP)の電極板などが挙げられる。基材は、特に、半導体作製基材が好ましく、シリコン基材、Cu基材およびモールド基材がより好ましい。
 これらの基材にはヘキサメチルジシラザン(HMDS)等による密着層や酸化層などの層が表面に設けられていてもよい。
 基材の形状は特に限定されず、円形状であってもよく、矩形状であってもよい。
 基材のサイズは、円形状であれば、例えば直径が100~450mmが好ましく、200~450mmがより好ましい。矩形状であれば、例えば短辺の長さが100~1000mmが好ましく、200~700mmがより好ましい。
基材としては、例えば板状、好ましくはパネル状の基材(基板)が用いられる。
〔Base material〕
The type of base material can be appropriately determined depending on the purpose and is not particularly limited. Examples of the base material include semiconductor manufacturing base materials such as silicon, silicon nitride, polysilicon, silicon oxide, and amorphous silicon, quartz, glass, optical films, ceramic materials, vapor deposited films, magnetic films, reflective films, Ni, Cu, A metal base material such as Cr or Fe (for example, a base material formed from a metal, or a base material on which a metal layer is formed by, for example, plating or vapor deposition), paper, SOG (Spin On Examples include glass), TFT (thin film transistor) array substrates, mold substrates, and electrode plates for plasma display panels (PDP). The base material is particularly preferably a semiconductor production base material, and more preferably a silicon base material, a Cu base material, and a mold base material.
These base materials may be provided with a layer such as an adhesive layer or an oxidized layer made of hexamethyldisilazane (HMDS) or the like on the surface.
The shape of the base material is not particularly limited, and may be circular or rectangular.
As for the size of the base material, if it is circular, the diameter is preferably 100 to 450 mm, more preferably 200 to 450 mm. If it is rectangular, the length of the short side is preferably 100 to 1000 mm, more preferably 200 to 700 mm.
As the base material, for example, a plate-shaped, preferably panel-shaped base material (substrate) is used.
 樹脂層(例えば、硬化物からなる層)の表面や金属層の表面に樹脂組成物を適用して膜を形成する場合は、樹脂層や金属層が基材となる。 When forming a film by applying a resin composition to the surface of a resin layer (for example, a layer made of a cured product) or the surface of a metal layer, the resin layer or metal layer serves as the base material.
 樹脂組成物を基材上に適用する手段としては、塗布が好ましい。
 適用する手段としては、具体的には、ディップコート法、エアーナイフコート法、カーテンコート法、ワイヤーバーコート法、グラビアコート法、エクストルージョンコート法、スプレーコート法、スピンコート法、スリットコート法、インクジェット法などが挙げられる。膜の厚さの均一性の観点から、スピンコート法、スリットコート法、スプレーコート法、又は、インクジェット法が好ましく、膜の厚さの均一性の観点および生産性の観点からスピンコート法およびスリットコート法がより好ましい。適用する手段に応じて樹脂組成物の固形分濃度や塗布条件を調整することで、所望の厚さの膜を得ることができる。また、基材の形状によっても塗布方法を適宜選択でき、ウエハ等の円形基材であればスピンコート法、スプレーコート法、インクジェット法等が好ましく、矩形基材であればスリットコート法、スプレーコート法、インクジェット法等が好ましい。スピンコート法の場合は、例えば、500~3,500rpmの回転数で、10秒~3分程度適用することができる。
 また、あらかじめ仮支持体上に上記付与方法によって付与して形成した塗膜を、基材上に転写する方法を適用することもできる。
 転写方法に関しては特開2006-023696号公報の段落0023、0036~0051や、特開2006-047592号公報の段落0096~0108に記載の作製方法を好適に用いることができる。
 また、基材の端部において余分な膜の除去を行なう工程を行なってもよい。このような工程の例には、エッジビードリンス(EBR)、バックリンスなどが挙げられる。
 樹脂組成物を基材に塗布する前に基材に種々の溶剤を塗布し、基材の濡れ性を向上させた後に樹脂組成物を塗布するプリウェット工程を採用しても良い。
Coating is preferred as a means for applying the resin composition onto the substrate.
Specifically, the methods to be applied include dip coating method, air knife coating method, curtain coating method, wire bar coating method, gravure coating method, extrusion coating method, spray coating method, spin coating method, slit coating method, Examples include inkjet method. From the viewpoint of uniformity of film thickness, spin coating method, slit coating method, spray coating method, or inkjet method is preferable, and from the viewpoint of uniformity of film thickness and productivity, spin coating method and slit coating method are preferable. A coating method is more preferred. A film with a desired thickness can be obtained by adjusting the solid content concentration and application conditions of the resin composition depending on the means to be applied. In addition, the coating method can be appropriately selected depending on the shape of the substrate, and for circular substrates such as wafers, spin coating, spray coating, inkjet methods, etc. are preferable, and for rectangular substrates, slit coating, spray coating, etc. method, inkjet method, etc. are preferred. In the case of spin coating, it can be applied, for example, at a rotation speed of 500 to 3,500 rpm for about 10 seconds to 3 minutes.
It is also possible to apply a method in which a coating film that has been previously formed on a temporary support by the above-mentioned application method is transferred onto a base material.
Regarding the transfer method, the production method described in paragraphs 0023, 0036 to 0051 of JP-A No. 2006-023696 and paragraphs 0096 to 0108 of JP-A No. 2006-047592 can be suitably used.
Further, a step of removing excess film may be performed at the end of the base material. Examples of such processes include edge bead rinsing (EBR), back rinsing, and the like.
A pre-wet process may be employed in which various solvents are applied to the base material before the resin composition is applied to the base material to improve the wettability of the base material, and then the resin composition is applied.
<乾燥工程>
 上記膜は、膜形成工程(層形成工程)の後に、溶剤を除去するため、形成された膜(層)を乾燥する工程(乾燥工程)に供されてもよい。
 すなわち、本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、膜形成工程により形成された膜を乾燥する乾燥工程を含んでもよい。
 上記乾燥工程は膜形成工程の後、露光工程の前に行われることが好ましい。
 乾燥工程における膜の乾燥温度は50~150℃が好ましく、70℃~130℃がより好ましく、90℃~110℃が更に好ましい。また、減圧により乾燥を行っても良い。乾燥時間としては、30秒~20分が例示され、1分~10分が好ましく、2分~7分がより好ましい。
<Drying process>
After the film forming step (layer forming step), the film may be subjected to a step of drying the formed film (layer) (drying step) in order to remove the solvent.
That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a drying step of drying the film formed in the film forming step.
The drying step is preferably performed after the film forming step and before the exposure step.
The drying temperature of the membrane in the drying step is preferably 50 to 150°C, more preferably 70 to 130°C, even more preferably 90 to 110°C. Alternatively, drying may be performed under reduced pressure. The drying time is exemplified as 30 seconds to 20 minutes, preferably 1 minute to 10 minutes, and more preferably 2 minutes to 7 minutes.
<露光工程>
 上記膜は、膜を選択的に露光する露光工程に供されてもよい。
 硬化物の製造方法は、膜形成工程により形成された膜を選択的に露光する露光工程を含んでもよい。
 選択的に露光するとは、膜の一部を露光することを意味している。また、選択的に露光することにより、膜には露光された領域(露光部)と露光されていない領域(非露光部)が形成される。
 露光量は、本発明の樹脂組成物を硬化できる限り特に限定されないが、例えば、波長365nmでの露光エネルギー換算で50~10,000mJ/cmが好ましく、200~8,000mJ/cmがより好ましい。
<Exposure process>
The film may be subjected to an exposure process that selectively exposes the film.
The method for producing a cured product may include an exposure step of selectively exposing the film formed in the film forming step.
Selectively exposing means exposing a portion of the film. Furthermore, by selectively exposing the film, an exposed region (exposed portion) and an unexposed region (non-exposed portion) are formed in the film.
The exposure amount is not particularly limited as long as it can cure the resin composition of the present invention, but for example, it is preferably 50 to 10,000 mJ/cm 2 and more preferably 200 to 8,000 mJ/cm 2 in terms of exposure energy at a wavelength of 365 nm. preferable.
 露光波長は、190~1,000nmの範囲で適宜定めることができ、240~550nmが好ましい。 The exposure wavelength can be appropriately determined in the range of 190 to 1,000 nm, preferably 240 to 550 nm.
 露光波長は、光源との関係でいうと、(1)半導体レーザー(波長 830nm、532nm、488nm、405nm、375nm、355nm etc.)、(2)メタルハライドランプ、(3)高圧水銀灯、g線(波長 436nm)、h線(波長 405nm)、i線(波長 365nm)、ブロード(g,h,i線の3波長)、(4)エキシマレーザー、KrFエキシマレーザー(波長 248nm)、ArFエキシマレーザー(波長 193nm)、Fエキシマレーザー(波長 157nm)、(5)極紫外線;EUV(波長 13.6nm)、(6)電子線、(7)YAGレーザーの第二高調波532nm、第三高調波355nm等が挙げられる。本発明の樹脂組成物については、特に高圧水銀灯による露光が好ましく、露光感度の観点で、i線による露光がより好ましい。
 露光の方式は特に限定されず、本発明の樹脂組成物からなる膜の少なくとも一部が露光される方式であればよいが、フォトマスクを使用した露光、レーザーダイレクトイメージング法による露光等が挙げられる。
In relation to the light source, the exposure wavelength is: (1) semiconductor laser (wavelength: 830 nm, 532 nm, 488 nm, 405 nm, 375 nm, 355 nm, etc.), (2) metal halide lamp, (3) high pressure mercury lamp, G-line (wavelength: 436 nm), h line (wavelength 405 nm), i line (wavelength 365 nm), broad (three wavelengths of g, h, i line), (4) excimer laser, KrF excimer laser (wavelength 248 nm), ArF excimer laser (wavelength 193 nm) ), F2 excimer laser (wavelength 157 nm), (5) extreme ultraviolet light; EUV (wavelength 13.6 nm), (6) electron beam, (7) YAG laser second harmonic 532 nm, third harmonic 355 nm, etc. Can be mentioned. For the resin composition of the present invention, exposure using a high-pressure mercury lamp is particularly preferable, and exposure using i-line is more preferable from the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity.
The method of exposure is not particularly limited, and may be any method as long as at least a portion of the film made of the resin composition of the present invention is exposed to light, and examples thereof include exposure using a photomask, exposure using a laser direct imaging method, etc. .
<露光後加熱工程>
 上記膜は、露光後に加熱する工程(露光後加熱工程)に供されてもよい。
 すなわち、本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、露光工程により露光された膜を加熱する露光後加熱工程を含んでもよい。
 露光後加熱工程は、露光工程後、現像工程前に行うことができる。
 露光後加熱工程における加熱温度は、50℃~140℃が好ましく、60℃~120℃がより好ましい。
 露光後加熱工程における加熱時間は、30秒間~300分間が好ましく、1分間~10分間がより好ましい。
 露光後加熱工程における昇温速度は、加熱開始時の温度から最高加熱温度まで1~12℃/分が好ましく、2~10℃/分がより好ましく、3~10℃/分が更に好ましい。
 また、昇温速度は加熱途中で適宜変更してもよい。
 露光後加熱工程における加熱手段としては、特に限定されず、公知のホットプレート、オーブン、赤外線ヒーター等を用いることができる。
 また、加熱に際し、窒素、ヘリウム、アルゴンなどの不活性ガスを流す等により、低酸素濃度の雰囲気下で行うことも好ましい。
<Post-exposure heating process>
The film may be subjected to a heating step after exposure (post-exposure heating step).
That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a post-exposure heating step of heating the film exposed in the exposure step.
The post-exposure heating step can be performed after the exposure step and before the development step.
The heating temperature in the post-exposure heating step is preferably 50°C to 140°C, more preferably 60°C to 120°C.
The heating time in the post-exposure heating step is preferably 30 seconds to 300 minutes, more preferably 1 minute to 10 minutes.
The temperature increase rate in the post-exposure heating step is preferably 1 to 12°C/min, more preferably 2 to 10°C/min, and even more preferably 3 to 10°C/min, from the temperature at the start of heating to the maximum heating temperature.
Further, the temperature increase rate may be changed as appropriate during heating.
The heating means in the post-exposure heating step is not particularly limited, and a known hot plate, oven, infrared heater, etc. can be used.
It is also preferable that the heating be performed in an atmosphere with a low oxygen concentration, such as by flowing an inert gas such as nitrogen, helium, or argon.
<現像工程>
 露光後の上記膜は、現像液を用いて現像してパターンを形成する現像工程に供されてもよい。
 すなわち、本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、露光工程により露光された膜を現像液を用いて現像してパターンを形成する現像工程を含んでもよい。
 現像を行うことにより、膜の露光部及び非露光部のうち一方が除去され、パターンが形成される。
 ここで、膜の非露光部が現像工程により除去される現像をネガ型現像といい、膜の露光部が現像工程により除去される現像をポジ型現像という。
<Developing process>
The exposed film may be subjected to a development step of developing a pattern using a developer.
That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a development step of developing the film exposed in the exposure step using a developer to form a pattern.
By performing development, one of the exposed and non-exposed areas of the film is removed and a pattern is formed.
Here, development in which the non-exposed portions of the film are removed in the developing step is referred to as negative development, and development in which the exposed portions of the film are removed in the development step is referred to as positive development.
〔現像液〕
 現像工程において用いられる現像液としては、アルカリ水溶液、又は、有機溶剤を含む現像液が挙げられる。
[Developer]
Examples of the developer used in the development step include an alkaline aqueous solution or a developer containing an organic solvent.
 現像液がアルカリ水溶液である場合、アルカリ水溶液が含みうる塩基性化合物としては、無機アルカリ類、第一級アミン類、第二級アミン類、第三級アミン類、第四級アンモニウム塩が挙げられ、TMAH(テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド)、水酸化カリウム、炭酸ナトリウム、水酸化ナトリウム、ケイ酸ナトリウム、メタケイ酸ナトリウム、アンモニア、エチルアミン、n-プロピルアミン、ジエチルアミン、ジ-n-ブチルアミン、トリエチルアミン、メチルジエチルアミン、ジメチルエタノールアミン、トリエタノールアミン、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラプロピルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラペンチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラヘキシルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラオクチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、エチルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ブチルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、メチルトリアミルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ジブチルジペンチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ジメチルビス(2-ヒドロキシエチル)アンモニウムヒドロキシド、トリメチルフェニルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、トリメチルベンジルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、トリエチルベンジルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ピロール、ピペリジンが好ましく、より好ましくはTMAHである。現像液における塩基性化合物の含有量は、現像液全質量中0.01~10質量%が好ましく、0.1~5質量%がより好ましく、0.3~3質量%が更に好ましい。 When the developer is an alkaline aqueous solution, basic compounds that the alkaline aqueous solution may contain include inorganic alkalis, primary amines, secondary amines, tertiary amines, and quaternary ammonium salts. , TMAH (tetramethylammonium hydroxide), potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydroxide, sodium silicate, sodium metasilicate, ammonia, ethylamine, n-propylamine, diethylamine, di-n-butylamine, triethylamine, methyldiethylamine , dimethylethanolamine, triethanolamine, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, tetrapentylammonium hydroxide, tetrahexylammonium hydroxide, tetraoctylammonium hydroxide, ethyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, Butyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, methyltriamylammonium hydroxide, dibutyldipentylammonium hydroxide, dimethylbis(2-hydroxyethyl)ammonium hydroxide, trimethylphenylammonium hydroxide, trimethylbenzylammonium hydroxide, triethylbenzylammonium hydroxide, pyrrole , piperidine is preferred, and TMAH is more preferred. The content of the basic compound in the developer is preferably 0.01 to 10% by weight, more preferably 0.1 to 5% by weight, and even more preferably 0.3 to 3% by weight based on the total weight of the developer.
 現像液が有機溶剤を含む場合、有機溶剤としては、国際公開第2021/112189号の段落0387に記載の化合物を用いることができる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、アルコール類として、メタノール、エタノール、プロパノール、イソプロパノール、ブタノール、ペンタノール、オクタノール、ジエチレングリコール、プロピレングリコール、メチルイソブチルカルビノール、トリエチレングリコール等、アミド類として、N-メチルピロリドン、N-エチルピロリドン、ジメチルホルムアミド等も好適に挙げられる。 When the developer contains an organic solvent, the compound described in paragraph 0387 of International Publication No. 2021/112189 can be used as the organic solvent. This content is incorporated herein. In addition, alcohols include methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropanol, butanol, pentanol, octanol, diethylene glycol, propylene glycol, methylisobutylcarbinol, triethylene glycol, etc.Amides include N-methylpyrrolidone, N-ethylpyrrolidone, Dimethylformamide and the like are also suitable.
 現像液が有機溶剤を含む場合、有機溶剤は1種又は、2種以上を混合して使用することができる。本発明では特にシクロペンタノン、γ-ブチロラクトン、ジメチルスルホキシド、N-メチル-2-ピロリドン、及び、シクロヘキサノンよりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種を含む現像液が好ましく、シクロペンタノン、γ-ブチロラクトン及びジメチルスルホキシドよりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種を含む現像液がより好ましく、シクロペンタノンを含む現像液が特に好ましい。 When the developer contains an organic solvent, one type of organic solvent or a mixture of two or more types can be used. In the present invention, a developer containing at least one member selected from the group consisting of cyclopentanone, γ-butyrolactone, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, and cyclohexanone is particularly preferred. A developer containing at least one selected from the group consisting of and dimethyl sulfoxide is more preferred, and a developer containing cyclopentanone is particularly preferred.
 現像液が有機溶剤を含む場合、現像液の全質量に対する有機溶剤の含有量は、50質量%以上であることが好ましく、70質量%以上であることがより好ましく、80質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、90質量%以上であることが特に好ましい。また、上記含有量は、100質量%であってもよい。 When the developer contains an organic solvent, the content of the organic solvent relative to the total mass of the developer is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, and 80% by mass or more. is more preferable, and particularly preferably 90% by mass or more. Moreover, the said content may be 100 mass %.
 現像液が有機溶剤を含む場合、現像液は塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方を更に含んでもよい。現像液中の塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方がパターンに浸透することにより、パターンの破断伸び等の性能が向上する場合がある。 When the developer contains an organic solvent, the developer may further contain at least one of a basic compound and a base generator. When at least one of the basic compound and the base generator in the developer permeates into the pattern, performance such as elongation at break of the pattern may be improved.
 塩基性化合物としては、硬化後の膜に残存した場合の信頼性(硬化物を更に加熱した場合の基材との密着性)の観点からは、有機塩基が好ましい。
 塩基性化合物としては、アミノ基を有する塩基性化合物が好ましく、1級アミン、2級アミン、3級アミン、アンモニウム塩、3級アミドなどが好ましいが、イミド化反応を促進する為には、1級アミン、2級アミン、3級アミン又はアンモニウム塩が好ましく、2級アミン、3級アミン又はアンモニウム塩がより好ましく、2級アミン又は3級アミンが更に好ましく、3級アミンが特に好ましい。
 塩基性化合物としては、硬化物の機械特性(破断伸び)の観点からは、硬化膜(得られる硬化物)中に残存しにくいものが好ましく、環化の促進の観点からは、気化等により、加熱前に残存量が減少しにくいものであることが好ましい。
 したがって、塩基性化合物の沸点は、常圧(101,325Pa)で30℃~350℃が好ましく、80℃~270℃がより好ましく、100℃~230℃が更に好ましい。
 塩基性化合物の沸点は、現像液に含まれる有機溶剤の沸点から20℃を減算した温度よりも高いことが好ましく、現像液に含まれる有機溶剤の沸点よりも高いことがより好ましい。
 例えば、有機溶剤の沸点が100℃である場合、使用される塩基性化合物は、沸点が80℃以上が好ましく、沸点が100℃以上がより好ましい。
 現像液は塩基性化合物を1種のみ含有してもよいし、2種以上を含有してもよい。
As the basic compound, an organic base is preferable from the viewpoint of reliability when remaining in the cured film (adhesion to the substrate when the cured product is further heated).
As the basic compound, a basic compound having an amino group is preferable, and primary amines, secondary amines, tertiary amines, ammonium salts, tertiary amides, etc. are preferable, but in order to promote the imidization reaction, A primary amine, a secondary amine, a tertiary amine or an ammonium salt is preferred, a secondary amine, a tertiary amine or an ammonium salt is more preferred, a secondary amine or a tertiary amine is even more preferred, and a tertiary amine is particularly preferred.
From the viewpoint of the mechanical properties (elongation at break) of the cured product, the basic compound is preferably one that does not easily remain in the cured film (obtained cured product), and from the viewpoint of promoting cyclization, it It is preferable that the residual amount is not likely to decrease before heating.
Therefore, the boiling point of the basic compound is preferably 30°C to 350°C, more preferably 80°C to 270°C, and even more preferably 100°C to 230°C at normal pressure (101,325 Pa).
The boiling point of the basic compound is preferably higher than the boiling point of the organic solvent contained in the developer minus 20°C, and more preferably higher than the boiling point of the organic solvent contained in the developer.
For example, when the organic solvent has a boiling point of 100°C, the basic compound used preferably has a boiling point of 80°C or higher, more preferably 100°C or higher.
The developer may contain only one type of basic compound, or may contain two or more types of basic compounds.
 塩基性化合物の具体例としては、エタノールアミン、ジエタノールアミン、トリエタノールアミン、エチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、トリエチルアミン、ヘキシルアミン、ドデシルアミン、シクロヘキシルアミン、シクロヘキシルメチルアミン、シクロヘキシルジメチルアミン、アニリン、N-メチルアニリン、N,N-ジメチルアニリン、ジフェニルアミン、ピリジン、ブチルアミン、イソブチルアミン、ジブチルアミン、トリブチルアミン、ジシクロヘキシルアミン、DBU(ジアザビシクロウンデセン)、DABCO(1,4-ジアザビシクロ[2.2.2]オクタン)、N,N-ジイソプロピルエチルアミン、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、エチレンジアミン、ブタンジアミン、1,5-ジアミノペンタン、N-メチルヘキシルアミン、N-メチルジシクロヘキシルアミン、トリオクチルアミン、N-エチルエチレンジアミン、N,N―ジエチルエチレンジアミン、N,N,N’,N’-テトラブチルー1,6-ヘキサンジアミン、スペルミジン、ジアミノシクロヘキサン、ビス(2-メトキシエチル)アミン、ピペリジン、メチルピペリジン、ジメチルピペリジン、ピペラジン、トロパン、N-フェニルベンジルアミン、1,2-ジアニリノエタン、2-アミノエタノール、トルイジン、アミノフェノール、ヘキシルアニリン、フェニレンジアミン、フェニルエチルアミン、ジベンジルアミン、ピロール、N-メチルピロール、N,N,N,N-テトラメチルエチレンジアミン、N,N,N,N-テトラメチルー1,3-プロパンジアミン等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of basic compounds include ethanolamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, ethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, hexylamine, dodecylamine, cyclohexylamine, cyclohexylmethylamine, cyclohexyldimethylamine, aniline, N-methylaniline, N, N-dimethylaniline, diphenylamine, pyridine, butylamine, isobutylamine, dibutylamine, tributylamine, dicyclohexylamine, DBU (diazabicycloundecene), DABCO (1,4-diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane), N , N-diisopropylethylamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, ethylenediamine, butanediamine, 1,5-diaminopentane, N-methylhexylamine, N-methyldicyclohexylamine, trioctylamine, N-ethylethylenediamine , N,N-diethylethylenediamine, N,N,N',N'-tetrabutyl-1,6-hexanediamine, spermidine, diaminocyclohexane, bis(2-methoxyethyl)amine, piperidine, methylpiperidine, dimethylpiperidine, piperazine, Tropane, N-phenylbenzylamine, 1,2-dianilinoethane, 2-aminoethanol, toluidine, aminophenol, hexylaniline, phenylenediamine, phenylethylamine, dibenzylamine, pyrrole, N-methylpyrrole, N,N,N, Examples include N-tetramethylethylenediamine, N,N,N,N-tetramethyl-1,3-propanediamine, and the like.
 塩基発生剤の好ましい態様は、上述の組成物に含まれる塩基発生剤の好ましい態様と同様である。特に、塩基発生剤は熱塩基発生剤であることが好ましい。 The preferred embodiments of the base generator are the same as the preferred embodiments of the base generator contained in the above-mentioned composition. In particular, the base generator is preferably a thermal base generator.
 現像液が塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方を含む場合、塩基性化合物又は塩基発生剤の含有量は、現像液の全質量に対して、10質量%以下が好ましく、5質量%以下がより好ましい。上記含有量の下限は特に限定されないが、例えば0.1質量%以上が好ましい。
 塩基性化合物又は塩基発生剤が現像液が用いられる環境で固体である場合、塩基性化合物又は塩基発生剤の含有量は、現像液の全固形分に対して、70~100質量%であることも好ましい。
 現像液は塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方を1種のみ含有してもよいし、2種以上を含有してもよい。塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方が2種以上である場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
When the developer contains at least one of a basic compound and a base generator, the content of the basic compound or base generator is preferably 10% by mass or less, and 5% by mass or less based on the total mass of the developer. More preferred. The lower limit of the above content is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, for example.
If the basic compound or base generator is solid in the environment in which the developer is used, the content of the basic compound or base generator should be 70 to 100% by mass based on the total solid content of the developer. is also preferable.
The developer may contain only one type of at least one of a basic compound and a base generator, or may contain two or more types. When at least one of the basic compound and the base generator is two or more types, it is preferable that the total is within the above range.
 現像液は、他の成分を更に含んでもよい。
 他の成分としては、例えば、公知の界面活性剤や公知の消泡剤等が挙げられる。
The developer may further contain other components.
Examples of other components include known surfactants and known antifoaming agents.
〔現像液の供給方法〕
 現像液の供給方法は、所望のパターンを形成できれば特に制限は無く、膜が形成された基材を現像液に浸漬する方法、基材上に形成された膜にノズルを用いて現像液を供給するパドル現像、または、現像液を連続供給する方法がある。ノズルの種類は特に制限は無く、ストレートノズル、シャワーノズル、スプレーノズル等が挙げられる。
 現像液の浸透性、非画像部の除去性、製造上の効率の観点から、現像液をストレートノズルで供給する方法、又はスプレーノズルにて連続供給する方法が好ましく、画像部への現像液の浸透性の観点からは、スプレーノズルで供給する方法がより好ましい。
 また、現像液をストレートノズルにて連続供給後、基材をスピンし現像液を基材上から除去し、スピン乾燥後に再度ストレートノズルにて連続供給後、基材をスピンし現像液を基材上から除去する工程を採用してもよく、この工程を複数回繰り返しても良い。
 現像工程における現像液の供給方法としては、現像液が連続的に基材に供給され続ける工程、基材上で現像液が略静止状態で保たれる工程、基材上で現像液を超音波等で振動させる工程及びそれらを組み合わせた工程などが挙げられる。
[Developer supply method]
The method of supplying the developer is not particularly limited as long as the desired pattern can be formed, and methods include immersing the base material on which the film is formed in the developer, and supplying the developer to the film formed on the base material using a nozzle. There is a method of paddle development, or a method of continuously supplying a developer. There are no particular restrictions on the type of nozzle, and examples include straight nozzles, shower nozzles, spray nozzles, and the like.
From the viewpoint of permeability of the developer, removability of non-image areas, and production efficiency, it is preferable to supply the developer using a straight nozzle or continuously using a spray nozzle. From the viewpoint of permeability, a method of supplying with a spray nozzle is more preferable.
In addition, after continuously supplying the developer using a straight nozzle, the base material is spun to remove the developer from the base material, and after spin drying, the developer is continuously supplied again using the straight nozzle, the base material is spun, and the developer is applied to the base material. A process of removing from above may be adopted, or this process may be repeated multiple times.
Methods for supplying the developer in the development process include a process in which the developer is continuously supplied to the base material, a process in which the developer is kept in a substantially stationary state on the base material, and a process in which the developer is applied to the base material using ultrasonic waves. Examples include a step of vibrating with the like, and a step of combining these.
 現像時間としては、10秒~10分間が好ましく、20秒~5分間がより好ましい。現像時の現像液の温度は、特に定めるものではないが、10~45℃が好ましく、18℃~30℃がより好ましい。 The development time is preferably 10 seconds to 10 minutes, more preferably 20 seconds to 5 minutes. The temperature of the developer during development is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10 to 45°C, more preferably 18 to 30°C.
 現像工程において、現像液を用いた処理の後、更に、リンス液によるパターンの洗浄(リンス)を行ってもよい。また、パターン上に接する現像液が乾燥しきらないうちにリンス液を供給するなどの方法を採用しても良い。 In the development step, after the treatment using the developer, the pattern may be further cleaned (rinsed) with a rinse solution. Alternatively, a method such as supplying a rinsing liquid before the developer in contact with the pattern is completely dried may be adopted.
〔リンス液〕
 現像液がアルカリ水溶液である場合、リンス液としては、例えば水を用いることができる。現像液が有機溶剤を含む現像液である場合、リンス液としては、例えば、現像液に含まれる溶剤とは異なる溶剤(例えば、水、現像液に含まれる有機溶剤とは異なる有機溶剤)を用いることができる。
[Rinse liquid]
When the developing solution is an alkaline aqueous solution, water can be used as the rinsing solution, for example. When the developer is a developer containing an organic solvent, for example, a solvent different from the solvent contained in the developer (e.g., water, an organic solvent different from the organic solvent contained in the developer) is used as the rinsing solution. be able to.
 リンス液が有機溶剤を含む場合の有機溶剤としては、上述の現像液が有機溶剤を含む場合において例示した有機溶剤と同様の有機溶剤が挙げられる。
 リンス液に含まれる有機溶剤は、現像液に含まれる有機溶剤とは異なる有機溶剤であることが好ましく、現像液に含まれる有機溶剤よりも、パターンの溶解度が小さい有機溶剤がより好ましい。
Examples of the organic solvent when the rinsing liquid contains an organic solvent include the same organic solvents as those exemplified in the case where the above-mentioned developer contains an organic solvent.
The organic solvent contained in the rinsing liquid is preferably an organic solvent different from the organic solvent contained in the developer, and more preferably an organic solvent in which the pattern has a lower solubility than the organic solvent contained in the developer.
 リンス液が有機溶剤を含む場合、有機溶剤は1種又は、2種以上を混合して使用することができる。有機溶剤は、シクロペンタノン、γ-ブチロラクトン、ジメチルスルホキシド、N-メチルピロリドン、シクロヘキサノン、PGMEA、PGMEが好ましく、シクロペンタノン、γ-ブチロラクトン、ジメチルスルホキシド、PGMEA、PGMEがより好ましく、シクロヘキサノン、PGMEAがさらに好ましい。 When the rinsing liquid contains an organic solvent, one type of organic solvent or a mixture of two or more types can be used. The organic solvent is preferably cyclopentanone, γ-butyrolactone, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone, cyclohexanone, PGMEA, or PGME, more preferably cyclopentanone, γ-butyrolactone, dimethyl sulfoxide, PGMEA, or PGME, and cyclohexanone or PGMEA. More preferred.
 リンス液が有機溶剤を含む場合、リンス液の全質量に対し、有機溶剤は50質量%以上が好ましく、70質量%以上がより好ましく、90質量%以上が更に好ましい。また、リンス液の全質量に対し、有機溶剤は100質量%であってもよい。 When the rinsing liquid contains an organic solvent, the organic solvent is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, and even more preferably 90% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the rinsing liquid. Moreover, the organic solvent may be 100% by mass with respect to the total mass of the rinsing liquid.
 リンス液は塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方を含んでもよい。
 特に限定されないが、現像液が有機溶剤を含む場合、リンス液が有機溶剤と塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方とを含む態様も、本発明の好ましい態様の1つである。
 リンス液に含まれる塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤としては、上述の現像液が有機溶剤を含む場合に含まれてもよい塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤として例示された化合物が挙げられ、好ましい態様も同様である。
 リンス液に含まれる塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤は、リンス液における溶剤への溶解度等を考慮して選択すればよい。
The rinsing liquid may contain at least one of a basic compound and a base generator.
Although not particularly limited, when the developer contains an organic solvent, one preferred embodiment of the present invention is an embodiment in which the rinsing solution contains the organic solvent and at least one of a basic compound and a base generator.
Examples of the basic compound and base generator contained in the rinsing solution include the compounds exemplified as the basic compound and base generator that may be included when the above-mentioned developer contains an organic solvent, and preferred embodiments also include. The same is true.
The basic compound and base generator contained in the rinsing liquid may be selected in consideration of the solubility in the solvent in the rinsing liquid.
 リンス液が塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方を含む場合、塩基性化合物又は塩基発生剤の含有量はリンス液の全質量に対して、10質量%以下が好ましく、5質量%以下がより好ましい。上記含有量の下限は特に限定されないが、例えば0.1質量%以上が好ましい。
 塩基性化合物又は塩基発生剤がリンス液が用いられる環境で固体である場合、塩基性化合物又は塩基発生剤の含有量は、リンス液の全固形分に対して、70~100質量%であることも好ましい。
 リンス液が塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方を含む場合、リンス液は塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方を1種のみ含有してもよいし、2種以上を含有してもよい。塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方が2種以上である場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
When the rinsing liquid contains at least one of a basic compound and a base generator, the content of the basic compound or the base generator is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 5% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the rinsing liquid. preferable. The lower limit of the above content is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, for example.
If the basic compound or base generator is solid in the environment where the rinse solution is used, the content of the basic compound or base generator should be 70 to 100% by mass based on the total solid content of the rinse solution. is also preferable.
When the rinsing liquid contains at least one of a basic compound and a base generator, the rinsing liquid may contain only one type of at least one of the basic compound and the base generator, or may contain two or more types of the basic compound and the base generator. . When at least one of the basic compound and the base generator is two or more types, it is preferable that the total is within the above range.
 リンス液は、他の成分を更に含んでもよい。
 他の成分としては、例えば、公知の界面活性剤や公知の消泡剤等が挙げられる。
The rinse solution may further contain other components.
Examples of other components include known surfactants and known antifoaming agents.
〔リンス液の供給方法〕
 リンス液の供給方法は、所望のパターンを形成できれば特に制限は無く、基材をリンス液に浸漬する方法、基材に液盛りによりリンス液を供給する方法、基材にリンス液をシャワーで供給する方法、基材上にストレートノズル等の手段によりリンス液を連続供給する方法がある。
 リンス液の浸透性、非画像部の除去性、製造上の効率の観点から、リンス液をシャワーノズル、ストレートノズル、スプレーノズルなどで供給する方法があり、スプレーノズルにて連続供給する方法が好ましく、画像部へのリンス液の浸透性の観点からは、スプレーノズルで供給する方法がより好ましい。ノズルの種類は特に制限は無く、ストレートノズル、シャワーノズル、スプレーノズル等が挙げられる。
 すなわち、リンス工程は、リンス液を上記露光後の膜に対してストレートノズルにより供給、又は、連続供給する工程であることが好ましく、リンス液をスプレーノズルにより供給する工程であることがより好ましい。
 リンス工程におけるリンス液の供給方法としては、リンス液が連続的に基材に供給され続ける工程、基材上でリンス液が略静止状態で保たれる工程、基材上でリンス液を超音波等で振動させる工程及びそれらを組み合わせた工程などが採用可能である。
[How to supply rinsing liquid]
There are no particular restrictions on the method of supplying the rinsing liquid as long as the desired pattern can be formed, such as immersing the substrate in the rinsing liquid, supplying the rinsing liquid to the substrate by piling up the liquid, or supplying the rinsing liquid to the substrate by showering. There is a method of continuously supplying the rinsing liquid onto the substrate using a means such as a straight nozzle.
From the viewpoint of permeability of the rinsing liquid, removability of non-image areas, and production efficiency, there are methods of supplying the rinsing liquid using a shower nozzle, straight nozzle, spray nozzle, etc., and a continuous supply method using a spray nozzle is preferable. From the viewpoint of permeability of the rinsing liquid into the image area, a method of supplying the rinsing liquid using a spray nozzle is more preferable. There are no particular restrictions on the type of nozzle, and examples include straight nozzles, shower nozzles, spray nozzles, and the like.
That is, the rinsing step is preferably a step in which the rinsing liquid is supplied to the exposed film through a straight nozzle or continuously, and more preferably a step in which the rinsing liquid is supplied through a spray nozzle.
Methods for supplying the rinsing liquid in the rinsing process include a process in which the rinsing liquid is continuously supplied to the substrate, a process in which the rinsing liquid is kept in a substantially stationary state on the substrate, and a process in which the rinsing liquid is applied to the substrate using ultrasonic waves. It is possible to adopt a process of vibrating the wafer, etc., and a process of combining these.
 リンス時間としては、10秒~10分間が好ましく、20秒~5分間がより好ましい。リンス時のリンス液の温度は、特に定めるものではないが、10~45℃が好ましく、18℃~30℃がより好ましい。 The rinsing time is preferably 10 seconds to 10 minutes, more preferably 20 seconds to 5 minutes. The temperature of the rinsing liquid during rinsing is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10 to 45°C, more preferably 18 to 30°C.
 現像工程において、現像液を用いた処理の後、又は、リンス液によるパターンの洗浄の後に、処理液とパターンとを接触させる工程を含んでもよい。また、パターン上に接する現像液又はリンス液が乾燥しきらないうちに処理液を供給するなどの方法を採用しても良い。 The developing step may include a step of bringing the processing solution into contact with the pattern after processing using the developer or after cleaning the pattern with a rinse solution. Alternatively, a method may be adopted in which the processing liquid is supplied before the developing liquid or the rinsing liquid in contact with the pattern is completely dried.
 上記処理液としては、水及び有機溶剤の少なくとも一方と、塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方とを含む処理液が挙げられる。
 上記有機溶剤、及び、塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方の好ましい態様は、上述のリンス液において用いられる有機溶剤、及び、塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方の好ましい態様と同様である。
 処理液のパターンへの供給方法は、上述のリンス液の供給方法と同様の方法を用いることができ、好ましい態様も同様である。
Examples of the treatment liquid include a treatment liquid containing at least one of water and an organic solvent, and at least one of a basic compound and a base generator.
Preferred embodiments of the organic solvent and at least one of the basic compound and base generator are the same as the preferred embodiments of the organic solvent and at least one of the basic compound and base generator used in the above-mentioned rinsing liquid. .
The method for supplying the treatment liquid to the pattern can be the same as the method for supplying the rinsing liquid described above, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
 処理液における塩基性化合物又は塩基発生剤の含有量は、処理液の全質量に対して、10質量%以下が好ましく、5質量%以下がより好ましい。上記含有量の下限は特に限定されないが、例えば0.1質量%以上であることが好ましい。
 また、塩基性化合物又は塩基発生剤が処理液が用いられる環境で固体である場合、塩基性化合物又は塩基発生剤の含有量は、処理液の全固形分に対して、70~100質量%であることも好ましい。
 処理液が塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方を含む場合、処理液は塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方を1種のみ含有してもよいし、2種以上を含有してもよい。塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方が2種以上である場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
The content of the basic compound or base generator in the treatment liquid is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 5% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the treatment liquid. The lower limit of the content is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, for example.
In addition, if the basic compound or base generator is solid in the environment where the treatment liquid is used, the content of the basic compound or base generator is 70 to 100% by mass based on the total solid content of the treatment liquid. It's also good to have one.
When the processing liquid contains at least one of a basic compound and a base generator, the processing liquid may contain only one type of at least one of the basic compound and the base generator, or may contain two or more types of the basic compound and the base generator. . When at least one of the basic compound and the base generator is two or more types, it is preferable that the total is within the above range.
<加熱工程>
 現像工程により得られたパターン(リンス工程を行う場合は、リンス後のパターン)は、上記現像により得られたパターンを加熱する加熱工程に供されてもよい。
 すなわち、本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、現像工程により得られたパターンを加熱する加熱工程を含んでもよい。
 また、本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、現像工程を行わずに他の方法で得られたパターン、又は、膜形成工程により得られた膜を加熱する加熱工程を含んでもよい。
 加熱工程において、ポリイミド前駆体等の樹脂は環化してポリイミド等の樹脂となる。
 また、特定樹脂、又は特定樹脂以外の架橋剤における未反応の架橋性基の架橋なども進行する。
 加熱工程における加熱温度(最高加熱温度)としては、50~450℃が好ましく、150~350℃がより好ましく、150~250℃が更に好ましく、160~250℃が一層好ましく、160~230℃が特に好ましい。
<Heating process>
The pattern obtained by the development step (in the case of performing the rinsing step, the pattern after rinsing) may be subjected to a heating step of heating the pattern obtained by the development.
That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a heating step of heating the pattern obtained in the developing step.
Furthermore, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a heating step of heating a pattern obtained by another method without performing a developing step, or a film obtained by a film forming step.
In the heating step, a resin such as a polyimide precursor is cyclized to become a resin such as polyimide.
Further, crosslinking of unreacted crosslinkable groups in the specific resin or a crosslinking agent other than the specific resin also progresses.
The heating temperature (maximum heating temperature) in the heating step is preferably 50 to 450°C, more preferably 150 to 350°C, even more preferably 150 to 250°C, even more preferably 160 to 250°C, particularly 160 to 230°C. preferable.
 加熱工程は、加熱により、上記塩基発生剤から発生した塩基等の作用により、上記パターン内で上記ポリイミド前駆体の環化反応を促進する工程であることが好ましい。 The heating step is preferably a step of promoting the cyclization reaction of the polyimide precursor within the pattern by heating and the action of a base generated from the base generator.
 加熱工程における加熱は、加熱開始時の温度から最高加熱温度まで1~12℃/分の昇温速度で行うことが好ましい。上記昇温速度は2~10℃/分がより好ましく、3~10℃/分が更に好ましい。昇温速度を1℃/分以上とすることにより、生産性を確保しつつ、酸又は溶剤の過剰な揮発を防止することができ、昇温速度を12℃/分以下とすることにより、硬化物の残存応力を緩和することができる。
 加えて、急速加熱可能なオーブンの場合、加熱開始時の温度から最高加熱温度まで1~8℃/秒の昇温速度で行うことが好ましく、2~7℃/秒がより好ましく、3~6℃/秒が更に好ましい。
Heating in the heating step is preferably carried out at a temperature increase rate of 1 to 12° C./min from the temperature at the start of heating to the maximum heating temperature. The temperature increase rate is more preferably 2 to 10°C/min, and even more preferably 3 to 10°C/min. By setting the heating rate to 1°C/min or more, it is possible to prevent excessive volatilization of acid or solvent while ensuring productivity, and by setting the heating rate to 12°C/min or less, curing can be achieved. Residual stress in objects can be alleviated.
In addition, in the case of an oven capable of rapid heating, it is preferable to raise the temperature from the temperature at the start of heating to the maximum heating temperature at a heating rate of 1 to 8°C/second, more preferably 2 to 7°C/second, and 3 to 6°C. C/sec is more preferred.
 加熱開始時の温度は、20℃~150℃が好ましく、20℃~130℃がより好ましく、25℃~120℃が更に好ましい。加熱開始時の温度は、最高加熱温度まで加熱する工程を開始する際の温度のことをいう。例えば、本発明の樹脂組成物を基材の上に適用した後、乾燥させる場合、この乾燥後の膜(層)の温度であり、例えば、樹脂組成物に含まれる溶剤の沸点よりも、30~200℃低い温度から昇温させることが好ましい。 The temperature at the start of heating is preferably 20°C to 150°C, more preferably 20°C to 130°C, even more preferably 25°C to 120°C. The temperature at the start of heating refers to the temperature at which the process of heating to the maximum heating temperature is started. For example, when the resin composition of the present invention is applied onto a substrate and then dried, the temperature of the film (layer) after drying is, for example, 30°C higher than the boiling point of the solvent contained in the resin composition. It is preferable to raise the temperature from a lower temperature by ~200°C.
 加熱時間(最高加熱温度での加熱時間)は、5~360分が好ましく、10~300分がより好ましく、15~240分が更に好ましい。 The heating time (heating time at the highest heating temperature) is preferably 5 to 360 minutes, more preferably 10 to 300 minutes, and even more preferably 15 to 240 minutes.
 特に多層の積層体を形成する場合、層間の密着性の観点から、加熱温度は30℃以上であることが好ましく、80℃以上がより好ましく、100℃以上が更に好ましく、120℃以上が特に好ましい。
 上記加熱温度の上限は、350℃以下が好ましく、250℃以下がより好ましく、240℃以下が更に好ましい。
In particular, when forming a multilayer laminate, from the viewpoint of interlayer adhesion, the heating temperature is preferably 30°C or higher, more preferably 80°C or higher, even more preferably 100°C or higher, and particularly preferably 120°C or higher. .
The upper limit of the heating temperature is preferably 350°C or lower, more preferably 250°C or lower, and even more preferably 240°C or lower.
 加熱は段階的に行ってもよい。例として、25℃から120℃まで3℃/分で昇温し、120℃にて60分保持し、120℃から180℃まで2℃/分で昇温し、180℃にて120分保持する、といった工程を行ってもよい。また、米国特許第9159547号明細書に記載のように紫外線を照射しながら処理することも好ましい。このような前処理工程により膜の特性を向上させることが可能である。前処理工程は10秒間~2時間程度の短い時間で行うとよく、15秒~30分間がより好ましい。前処理工程は2段階以上のステップとしてもよく、例えば100~150℃の範囲で1段階目の前処理工程を行い、その後に150~200℃の範囲で2段階目の前処理工程を行ってもよい。
 更に、加熱後冷却してもよく、この場合の冷却速度としては、1~5℃/分であることが好ましい。
Heating may be performed in stages. As an example, the temperature is raised from 25°C to 120°C at a rate of 3°C/min, held at 120°C for 60 minutes, and the temperature is raised from 120°C to 180°C at a rate of 2°C/min, and held at 180°C for 120 minutes. , etc. may be performed. It is also preferable to perform the treatment while irradiating ultraviolet rays as described in US Pat. No. 9,159,547. Such pretreatment steps can improve the properties of the film. The pretreatment step is preferably carried out for a short time of about 10 seconds to 2 hours, more preferably 15 seconds to 30 minutes. The pretreatment step may be performed in two or more steps, for example, the first pretreatment step is performed at a temperature of 100 to 150°C, and then the second pretreatment step is performed at a temperature of 150 to 200°C. Good too.
Furthermore, cooling may be performed after heating, and the cooling rate in this case is preferably 1 to 5° C./min.
 加熱工程は、窒素、ヘリウム、アルゴンなどの不活性ガスを流す、減圧下で行う等により、低酸素濃度の雰囲気で行うことが特定樹脂の分解を防ぐ観点で好ましい。酸素濃度は、50ppm(体積比)以下が好ましく、20ppm(体積比)以下がより好ましい。
 加熱工程における加熱手段としては、特に限定されないが、例えばホットプレート、赤外炉、電熱式オーブン、熱風式オーブン、赤外線オーブンなどが挙げられる。
The heating step is preferably performed in an atmosphere with a low oxygen concentration, such as by flowing an inert gas such as nitrogen, helium, or argon, or under reduced pressure, from the viewpoint of preventing decomposition of the specific resin. The oxygen concentration is preferably 50 ppm (volume ratio) or less, more preferably 20 ppm (volume ratio) or less.
The heating means in the heating step is not particularly limited, and includes, for example, a hot plate, an infrared oven, an electric oven, a hot air oven, an infrared oven, and the like.
<現像後露光工程>
 現像工程により得られたパターン(リンス工程を行う場合は、リンス後のパターン)は、上記加熱工程に代えて、又は、上記加熱工程に加えて、現像工程後のパターンを露光する現像後露光工程に供されてもよい。
 すなわち、本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、現像工程により得られたパターンを露光する現像後露光工程を含んでもよい。本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、加熱工程及び現像後露光工程を含んでもよいし、加熱工程及び現像後露光工程の一方のみを含んでもよい。
 現像後露光工程においては、例えば、光塩基発生剤の感光によってポリイミド前駆体等の環化が進行する反応や、光酸発生剤の感光によって酸分解性基の脱離が進行する反応などを促進することができる。
 現像後露光工程においては、現像工程において得られたパターンの少なくとも一部が露光されればよいが、上記パターンの全部が露光されることが好ましい。
 現像後露光工程における露光量は、感光性化合物が感度を有する波長における露光エネルギー換算で、50~20,000mJ/cmが好ましく、100~15,000mJ/cmがより好ましい。
 現像後露光工程は、例えば、上述の露光工程における光源を用いて行うことができ、ブロードバンド光を用いることが好ましい。
<Post-development exposure process>
The pattern obtained in the development process (in the case of performing a rinsing process, the pattern after rinsing) is subjected to a post-development exposure process in which the pattern after the development process is exposed to light, instead of or in addition to the above heating process. may be served.
That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a post-development exposure step of exposing the pattern obtained in the development step. The method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a heating step and a post-development exposure step, or may include only one of the heating step and the post-development exposure step.
In the post-development exposure step, for example, a reaction in which cyclization of a polyimide precursor, etc. progresses due to the exposure of a photobase generator, a reaction in which the elimination of an acid-decomposable group progresses due to exposure to a photoacid generator, etc. are promoted. can do.
In the post-development exposure step, at least a portion of the pattern obtained in the development step may be exposed, but it is preferable that the entire pattern be exposed.
The exposure amount in the post-development exposure step is preferably 50 to 20,000 mJ/cm 2 , more preferably 100 to 15,000 mJ/cm 2 in terms of exposure energy at the wavelength to which the photosensitive compound is sensitive.
The post-development exposure step can be performed, for example, using the light source used in the above-mentioned exposure step, and it is preferable to use broadband light.
<金属層形成工程>
 現像工程により得られたパターン(加熱工程及び現像後露光工程の少なくとも一方に供されたものが好ましい)は、パターン上に金属層を形成する金属層形成工程に供されてもよい。
 すなわち、本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、現像工程により得られたパターン(加熱工程及び現像後露光工程の少なくとも一方に供されたものが好ましい)上に金属層を形成する金属層形成工程を含むことが好ましい。
<Metal layer formation process>
The pattern obtained by the development process (preferably one that has been subjected to at least one of a heating process and a post-development exposure process) may be subjected to a metal layer forming process of forming a metal layer on the pattern.
That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention includes a metal layer forming step of forming a metal layer on the pattern obtained in the development step (preferably one that has been subjected to at least one of the heating step and the post-development exposure step). It is preferable to include.
 金属層としては、特に限定なく、既存の金属種を使用することができ、銅、アルミニウム、ニッケル、バナジウム、チタン、クロム、コバルト、金、タングステン、錫、銀及びこれらの金属を含む合金が例示され、銅及びアルミニウムがより好ましく、銅が更に好ましい。 As the metal layer, existing metal species can be used without particular limitation, and examples include copper, aluminum, nickel, vanadium, titanium, chromium, cobalt, gold, tungsten, tin, silver, and alloys containing these metals. copper and aluminum are more preferred, and copper is even more preferred.
 金属層の形成方法は、特に限定なく、既存の方法を適用することができる。例えば、特開2007-157879号公報、特表2001-521288号公報、特開2004-214501号公報、特開2004-101850号公報、米国特許第7888181B2、米国特許第9177926B2に記載された方法を使用することができる。例えば、フォトリソグラフィ、PVD(物理蒸着法)、CVD(化学気相成長法)、リフトオフ、電解めっき、無電解めっき、エッチング、印刷、及びこれらを組み合わせた方法などが考えられる。より具体的には、スパッタリング、フォトリソグラフィ及びエッチングを組み合わせたパターニング方法、フォトリソグラフィと電解めっきを組み合わせたパターニング方法が挙げられる。めっきの好ましい態様としては、硫酸銅やシアン化銅めっき液を用いた電解めっきが挙げられる。 The method for forming the metal layer is not particularly limited, and existing methods can be applied. For example, the methods described in JP 2007-157879, JP 2001-521288, JP 2004-214501, JP 2004-101850, US Patent No. 7888181B2, and US Patent No. 9177926B2 are used. can do. For example, photolithography, PVD (physical vapor deposition), CVD (chemical vapor deposition), lift-off, electrolytic plating, electroless plating, etching, printing, and a combination thereof can be used. More specifically, a patterning method that combines sputtering, photolithography, and etching, and a patterning method that combines photolithography and electrolytic plating can be mentioned. A preferred embodiment of plating includes electrolytic plating using copper sulfate or copper cyanide plating solution.
 金属層の厚さとしては、最も厚肉の部分で、0.01~50μmが好ましく、1~10μmがより好ましい。 The thickness of the metal layer is preferably 0.01 to 50 μm, more preferably 1 to 10 μm at the thickest part.
<用途>
 本発明の硬化物の製造方法、又は、硬化物の適用可能な分野としては、電子デバイスの絶縁膜、再配線層用層間絶縁膜、ストレスバッファ膜などが挙げられる。そのほか、封止フィルム、基板材料(フレキシブルプリント基板のベースフィルムやカバーレイ、層間絶縁膜)、又は上記のような実装用途の絶縁膜をエッチングでパターン形成することなどが挙げられる。これらの用途については、例えば、サイエンス&テクノロジー(株)「ポリイミドの高機能化と応用技術」2008年4月、柿本雅明/監修、CMCテクニカルライブラリー「ポリイミド材料の基礎と開発」2011年11月発行、日本ポリイミド・芳香族系高分子研究会/編「最新ポリイミド 基礎と応用」エヌ・ティー・エス,2010年8月等を参照することができる。
<Application>
Fields to which the method for producing a cured product of the present invention or the cured product can be applied include insulating films for electronic devices, interlayer insulating films for rewiring layers, stress buffer films, and the like. Other methods include forming a pattern by etching a sealing film, a substrate material (a base film or coverlay of a flexible printed circuit board, an interlayer insulating film), or an insulating film for mounting purposes as described above. For information on these uses, see, for example, Science & Technology Co., Ltd., "Advanced Functionality and Applied Technology of Polyimide," April 2008, Masaaki Kakimoto/Supervised, CMC Technical Library, "Basics and Development of Polyimide Materials," November 2011. You can refer to "Latest Polyimide Fundamentals and Applications" published by Japan Polyimide and Aromatic Polymer Research Group/editor, NTS, August 2010, etc.
 本発明の硬化物の製造方法、又は、本発明の硬化物は、オフセット版面又はスクリーン版面などの版面の製造、成形部品のエッチングへの使用、エレクトロニクス、特に、マイクロエレクトロニクスにおける保護ラッカー及び誘電層の製造などにも用いることもできる。 The method for producing a cured product of the present invention or the cured product of the present invention can be used for producing plates such as offset plates or screen plates, for etching molded parts, and for use in protective lacquers and dielectric layers in electronics, particularly microelectronics. It can also be used for manufacturing.
(積層体、及び、積層体の製造方法)
 本発明の積層体とは、本発明の硬化物からなる層を複数層有する構造体をいう。
 積層体は、硬化物からなる層を2層以上含む積層体であり、3層以上積層した積層体としてもよい。
 上記積層体に含まれる2層以上の上記硬化物からなる層のうち、少なくとも1つが本発明の硬化物からなる層であり、硬化物の収縮、又は、上記収縮に伴う硬化物の変形等を抑制する観点からは、上記積層体に含まれる全ての硬化物からなる層が本発明の硬化物からなる層であることも好ましい。
(Laminated body and method for manufacturing the laminate)
The laminate of the present invention refers to a structure having a plurality of layers made of the cured product of the present invention.
The laminate is a laminate including two or more layers made of cured material, and may be a laminate in which three or more layers are laminated.
At least one of the two or more layers made of the cured product contained in the laminate is a layer made of the cured product of the present invention, and shrinkage of the cured product or deformation of the cured product due to the shrinkage, etc. From the viewpoint of suppression, it is also preferable that all the layers made of the cured product contained in the above-mentioned laminate are layers made of the cured product of the present invention.
 すなわち、本発明の積層体の製造方法は、本発明の硬化物の製造方法を含むことが好ましく、本発明の硬化物の製造方法を複数回繰り返すことを含むことがより好ましい。 That is, the method for producing a laminate of the present invention preferably includes the method for producing a cured product of the present invention, and more preferably includes repeating the method for producing a cured product of the present invention multiple times.
 本発明の積層体は、硬化物からなる層を2層以上含み、上記硬化物からなる層同士のいずれかの間に金属層を含む態様が好ましい。上記金属層は、上記金属層形成工程により形成されることが好ましい。
 すなわち、本発明の積層体の製造方法は、複数回行われる硬化物の製造方法の間に、硬化物からなる層上に金属層を形成する金属層形成工程を更に含むことが好ましい。金属層形成工程の好ましい態様は上述の通りである。
 上記積層体としては、例えば、第一の硬化物からなる層、金属層、第二の硬化物からなる層の3つの層がこの順に積層された層構造を少なくとも含む積層体が好ましいものとして挙げられる。
 上記第一の硬化物からなる層及び上記第二の硬化物からなる層は、いずれも本発明の硬化物からなる層であることが好ましい。上記第一の硬化物からなる層の形成に用いられる本発明の樹脂組成物と、上記第二の硬化物からなる層の形成に用いられる本発明の樹脂組成物とは、組成が同一の組成物であってもよいし、組成が異なる組成物であってもよい。本発明の積層体における金属層は、再配線層などの金属配線として好ましく用いられる。
The laminate of the present invention preferably includes two or more layers made of a cured product and includes a metal layer between any of the layers made of the cured product. The metal layer is preferably formed by the metal layer forming step.
That is, it is preferable that the method for producing a laminate of the present invention further includes a metal layer forming step of forming a metal layer on the layer made of the cured product during the method for producing the cured product which is performed multiple times. A preferred embodiment of the metal layer forming step is as described above.
As the above-mentioned laminate, for example, a laminate including at least a layered structure in which three layers, a layer made of a first cured product, a metal layer, and a layer made of a second cured product are laminated in this order, is preferred. It will be done.
It is preferable that the layer made of the first cured product and the layer made of the second cured product are both layers made of the cured product of the present invention. The resin composition of the present invention used for forming the layer consisting of the first cured product and the resin composition of the present invention used for forming the layer consisting of the second cured product have the same composition. It may be a product or a composition having a different composition. The metal layer in the laminate of the present invention is preferably used as metal wiring such as a rewiring layer.
<積層工程>
 本発明の積層体の製造方法は、積層工程を含むことが好ましい。
 積層工程とは、パターン(樹脂層)又は金属層の表面に、再度、(a)膜形成工程(層形成工程)、(b)露光工程、(c)現像工程、(d)加熱工程及び現像後露光工程の少なくとも一方を、この順に行うことを含む一連の工程である。ただし、(a)膜形成工程および(d)加熱工程及び現像後露光工程の少なくとも一方を繰り返す態様であってもよい。また、(d)加熱工程及び現像後露光工程の少なくとも一方の後には(e)金属層形成工程を含んでもよい。積層工程には、更に、上記乾燥工程等を適宜含んでいてもよいことは言うまでもない。
<Lamination process>
It is preferable that the method for manufacturing a laminate of the present invention includes a lamination step.
The lamination process refers to (a) film formation process (layer formation process), (b) exposure process, (c) development process, (d) heating process and development on the surface of the pattern (resin layer) or metal layer again. This is a series of steps including performing at least one of the post-exposure steps in this order. However, an embodiment may be adopted in which at least one of (a) the film forming step and (d) the heating step and the post-development exposure step are repeated. Furthermore, (e) a metal layer forming step may be included after at least one of the (d) heating step and the post-development exposure step. It goes without saying that the lamination step may further include the above-mentioned drying step and the like as appropriate.
 積層工程後、更に積層工程を行う場合には、上記露光工程後、上記加熱工程の後、又は、上記金属層形成工程後に、更に、表面活性化処理工程を行ってもよい。表面活性化処理としては、プラズマ処理が例示される。表面活性化処理の詳細については後述する。 If a lamination step is further performed after the lamination step, a surface activation treatment step may be performed after the exposure step, the heating step, or the metal layer forming step. Plasma treatment is exemplified as the surface activation treatment. Details of the surface activation treatment will be described later.
 上記積層工程は、2~20回行うことが好ましく、2~9回行うことがより好ましい。
 例えば、樹脂層/金属層/樹脂層/金属層/樹脂層/金属層のように、樹脂層を2層以上20層以下とする構成が好ましく、2層以上9層以下とする構成が更に好ましい。
 上記各層はそれぞれ、組成、形状、膜厚等が同一であってもよいし、異なっていてもよい。
The above lamination step is preferably performed 2 to 20 times, more preferably 2 to 9 times.
For example, a configuration in which the number of resin layers is 2 or more and 20 or less, such as resin layer/metal layer/resin layer/metal layer/resin layer/metal layer, is preferable, and a configuration in which the number of resin layers is 2 or more and 9 or less is more preferable. .
Each of the above layers may have the same composition, shape, thickness, etc., or may have different compositions, shapes, thicknesses, etc.
 本発明では特に、金属層を設けた後、更に、上記金属層を覆うように、上記本発明の樹脂組成物の硬化物(樹脂層)を形成する態様が好ましい。具体的には、(a)膜形成工程、(b)露光工程、(c)現像工程、(d)加熱工程及び現像後露光工程の少なくとも一方、(e)金属層形成工程、の順序で繰り返す態様、又は、(a)膜形成工程、(d)加熱工程及び現像後露光工程の少なくとも一方、(e)金属層形成工程の順序で繰り返す態様が挙げられる。本発明の樹脂組成物層(樹脂層)を積層する積層工程と、金属層形成工程を交互に行うことにより、本発明の樹脂組成物層(樹脂層)と金属層を交互に積層することができる。 In the present invention, it is particularly preferable that after providing the metal layer, a cured product (resin layer) of the resin composition of the present invention is further formed to cover the metal layer. Specifically, the following steps are repeated in the following order: (a) film formation step, (b) exposure step, (c) development step, (d) at least one of the heating step and post-development exposure step, and (e) metal layer formation step. Alternatively, an embodiment may be mentioned in which (a) a film forming step, (d) at least one of a heating step and a post-development exposure step, and (e) a metal layer forming step are repeated in this order. By alternately performing the lamination step of laminating the resin composition layer (resin layer) of the present invention and the metal layer forming step, the resin composition layer (resin layer) of the present invention and the metal layer can be alternately laminated. can.
(表面活性化処理工程)
 本発明の積層体の製造方法は、上記金属層および樹脂組成物層の少なくとも一部を表面活性化処理する、表面活性化処理工程を含むことが好ましい。
 表面活性化処理工程は、通常、金属層形成工程の後に行うが、上記現像工程の後(好ましくは、加熱工程及び現像後露光工程の少なくとも一方の後)、樹脂組成物層に表面活性化処理工程を行ってから、金属層形成工程を行ってもよい。
 表面活性化処理は、金属層の少なくとも一部のみに行ってもよいし、露光後の樹脂組成物層の少なくとも一部のみに行ってもよいし、金属層および露光後の樹脂組成物層の両方について、それぞれ、少なくとも一部に行ってもよい。表面活性化処理は、金属層の少なくとも一部について行うことが好ましく、金属層のうち、表面に樹脂組成物層を形成する領域の一部または全部に表面活性化処理を行うことが好ましい。このように、金属層の表面に表面活性化処理を行うことにより、その表面に設けられる樹脂組成物層(膜)との密着性を向上させることができる。
 表面活性化処理は、露光後の樹脂組成物層(樹脂層)の一部または全部についても行うことが好ましい。このように、樹脂組成物層の表面に表面活性化処理を行うことにより、表面活性化処理した表面に設けられる金属層や樹脂層との密着性を向上させることができる。特にネガ型現像を行う場合など、樹脂組成物層が硬化されている場合には、表面処理によるダメージを受けにくく、密着性が向上しやすい。
 表面活性化処理は、例えば、国際公開第2021/112189号の段落0415に記載の方法により実施することができる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
(Surface activation treatment process)
The method for producing a laminate of the present invention preferably includes a surface activation treatment step of surface activation treatment of at least a portion of the metal layer and the resin composition layer.
The surface activation treatment step is usually performed after the metal layer forming step, but after the development step (preferably after at least one of the heating step and the post-development exposure step), the resin composition layer is subjected to the surface activation treatment. After performing this step, the metal layer forming step may be performed.
The surface activation treatment may be performed on at least a portion of the metal layer, or may be performed on at least a portion of the resin composition layer after exposure, or the surface activation treatment may be performed on at least a portion of the metal layer and the resin composition layer after exposure. Both may be performed at least in part, respectively. The surface activation treatment is preferably performed on at least a part of the metal layer, and it is preferable that the surface activation treatment is performed on part or all of the region of the metal layer on which the resin composition layer is to be formed. By performing surface activation treatment on the surface of the metal layer in this way, it is possible to improve the adhesion with the resin composition layer (film) provided on the surface.
It is preferable that the surface activation treatment is also performed on part or all of the resin composition layer (resin layer) after exposure. By performing surface activation treatment on the surface of the resin composition layer in this way, it is possible to improve the adhesion with the metal layer or resin layer provided on the surface that has been surface activated. In particular, when the resin composition layer is hardened, such as when performing negative development, it is less likely to be damaged by surface treatment and adhesion is likely to be improved.
The surface activation treatment can be performed, for example, by the method described in paragraph 0415 of International Publication No. 2021/112189. This content is incorporated herein.
(半導体デバイス及びその製造方法)
 本発明は、本発明の硬化物、又は、積層体を含む半導体デバイスも開示する。
 また、本発明は、本発明の硬化物の製造方法、又は、積層体の製造方法を含む半導体デバイスの製造方法も開示する。
 本発明の樹脂組成物を再配線層用層間絶縁膜の形成に用いた半導体デバイスの具体例としては、特開2016-027357号公報の段落0213~0218の記載及び図1の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
(Semiconductor device and its manufacturing method)
The present invention also discloses a semiconductor device containing the cured product or laminate of the present invention.
The present invention also discloses a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device, including a method for manufacturing a cured product of the present invention or a method for manufacturing a laminate.
As a specific example of a semiconductor device using the resin composition of the present invention for forming an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer, the descriptions in paragraphs 0213 to 0218 of JP 2016-027357A and the description in FIG. 1 can be referred to, Their contents are incorporated herein.
 以下に実施例を挙げて本発明を更に具体的に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、適宜、変更することができる。従って、本発明の範囲は以下に示す具体例に限定されるものではない。「部」、「%」は特に述べない限り、質量基準である。 The present invention will be explained in more detail with reference to Examples below. The materials, usage amounts, ratios, processing details, processing procedures, etc. shown in the following examples can be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is not limited to the specific examples shown below. "Parts" and "%" are based on mass unless otherwise stated.
<環化樹脂の前駆体の製造方法>
〔合成例1:環化樹脂の前駆体(樹脂1)の合成〕
 4,4’-オキシジフタル酸二無水物(ODPA)23.48gとビスフタル酸二無水物(BPDA)22.27gをセパラブルフラスコに入れ、2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート(HEMA)39.69gとテトラヒドロフラン136.83gを入れて室温(25℃)下で撹拌し、撹拌しながらピリジン24.66gを加えて反応混合物を得た。反応による発熱の終了後に室温まで放冷し、16時間放置した。
 次に、氷冷下において、ジシクロヘキシルカルボジイミド(DCC)62.46gをテトラヒドロフラン61.57gに溶解した溶液を撹拌しながら40分かけて反応混合物に加え、続いて4,4’-ジアミノジフェニルエーテル(DADPE)27.42gをテトラヒドロフラン119.73gに懸濁したものを撹拌しながら60分かけて加えた。更に室温で2時間撹拌した後、エチルアルコール7.17gを加えて1時間撹拌し、次に、テトラヒドロフラン136.83gを加えた。反応混合物に生じた沈殿物をろ過により取り除き、反応液を得た。
 得られた反応液を716.21gのエチルアルコールに加えて粗ポリマーから成る沈殿物を生成した。生成した粗ポリマーを濾別し、テトラヒドロフラン403.49gに溶解して粗ポリマー溶液を得た。得られた粗ポリマー溶液を8470.26gの水に滴下してポリマーを沈殿させ、得られた沈殿物を濾別した後、真空乾燥して粉末状の樹脂1を80.3g得た。樹脂1の分子量をゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー(標準ポリスチレン換算)で測定したところ、重量平均分子量(Mw)は20,000であった。H-NMRにより、樹脂1の構造は、下記式(P-1)で表される構造であることを確認した。
 また、樹脂1に含まれる全てのカルボキシ基とカルボキシエステルの合計モル量に対する、アルコール由来の構造が2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート由来の構造であるカルボキシエステル(すなわち、メタクリロキシエチルオキシカルボニル基)のモル量は、95.6mol%、アルコール由来の構造がエチルアルコール由来の構造であるカルボキシエステル(すなわち、エトキシカルボニル基)のモル量は、4.2mol%であった。
<Method for producing cyclized resin precursor>
[Synthesis Example 1: Synthesis of cyclized resin precursor (resin 1)]
23.48 g of 4,4'-oxydiphthalic dianhydride (ODPA) and 22.27 g of bisphthalic dianhydride (BPDA) were placed in a separable flask, and 39.69 g of 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate (HEMA) and 136 g of tetrahydrofuran were added. 83 g of pyridine was added thereto and stirred at room temperature (25° C.), and 24.66 g of pyridine was added while stirring to obtain a reaction mixture. After the exotherm due to the reaction was completed, the mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature and left for 16 hours.
Next, under ice-cooling, a solution of 62.46 g of dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC) dissolved in 61.57 g of tetrahydrofuran was added to the reaction mixture over 40 minutes with stirring, followed by addition of 4,4'-diaminodiphenyl ether (DADPE). A suspension of 27.42 g in 119.73 g of tetrahydrofuran was added over 60 minutes with stirring. After further stirring at room temperature for 2 hours, 7.17 g of ethyl alcohol was added and stirred for 1 hour, and then 136.83 g of tetrahydrofuran was added. A precipitate formed in the reaction mixture was removed by filtration to obtain a reaction solution.
The resulting reaction solution was added to 716.21 g of ethyl alcohol to produce a precipitate consisting of a crude polymer. The produced crude polymer was filtered and dissolved in 403.49 g of tetrahydrofuran to obtain a crude polymer solution. The resulting crude polymer solution was dropped into 8470.26 g of water to precipitate the polymer, and the resulting precipitate was filtered off and vacuum dried to obtain 80.3 g of powdered Resin 1. When the molecular weight of Resin 1 was measured by gel permeation chromatography (standard polystyrene standard), the weight average molecular weight (Mw) was 20,000. It was confirmed by 1 H-NMR that the structure of Resin 1 was represented by the following formula (P-1).
In addition, the molar amount of carboxyester whose alcohol-derived structure is a 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate-derived structure (i.e., methacryloxyethyloxycarbonyl group) relative to the total molar amount of all carboxy groups and carboxyesters contained in resin 1. was 95.6 mol%, and the molar amount of carboxyester whose alcohol-derived structure is an ethyl alcohol-derived structure (that is, ethoxycarbonyl group) was 4.2 mol%.
〔合成例2:環化樹脂の前駆体(樹脂2)の合成〕
 21.2gの4,4’-オキシジフタル酸無水物と、18.0gの2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレートと、23.9gのピリジンと、250mLのジグリム(ダイグライム、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル)とを混合し、60℃の温度で4時間撹拌して、4,4’-オキシジフタル酸と2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレートとのジエステルを合成した。次いで、反応混合物を-10℃に冷却し、温度を-10±5℃に保ちながら、17.0gの塩化チオニルを60分かけて加えた。50mLのN-メチルピロリドンで希釈した後、100mLのN-メチルピロリドンに12.6gの4,4’-ジアミノジフェニルエーテルを溶解させた溶液を、-10±5℃で60分かけて反応混合物に滴下して、混合物を室温で2時間撹拌した。その後、エタノール10.0gを添加して室温で1時間撹拌した。
 次いで、6000gの水を加えてポリイミド前駆体を沈殿させ、沈殿物(水-ポリイミド前駆体混合物)を15分間撹拌した。撹拌後の沈殿物(ポリイミド前駆体の固体)をろ取し、テトラヒドロフラン500gに溶解させた。得られた溶液に6000gの水(貧溶媒)を加えてポリイミド前駆体を沈殿させ、沈殿物(水-ポリイミド前駆体混合物)を15分間撹拌した。撹拌後の沈殿物(ポリイミド前駆体の固体)を再びろ過して減圧下で、45℃で3日間乾燥した。
 乾燥後の粉体46.6gをテトラヒドロフラン419.6gに溶解させた後に、2.3gのトリエチルアミンを添加して室温で35分間撹拌した。その後、エタノール3000gを添加して、沈殿物をろ取した。得られた沈殿物をテトラヒドロフラン281.8gに溶解した。そこに水17.1gとイオン交換樹脂UP6040(AmberTec社製)46.6gを添加して、4時間撹拌した。その後、イオン交換樹脂をろ過で取り除き、得られたポリマー溶液を5,600gの水に加えて沈殿物を得た。沈殿物をろ取し、減圧下45℃で24時間乾燥させることで、樹脂2を45.1g得た。
 H-NMRにより、樹脂2の構造は、下記式(P-2)で表される構造であることを確認した。樹脂2の分子量をゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー(標準ポリスチレン換算)で測定したところ、重量平均分子量(Mw)は20,000であった。また、4,4’-ジアミノジフェニルエーテルの当量を適宜調整することにより、Mwが5,000である樹脂2、Mwが10,000である樹脂2、Mwが30,000である樹脂2についてもそれぞれ合成した。
 また、樹脂2に含まれる全てのカルボキシ基とカルボキシエステルの合計モル量に対する、アルコール由来の構造が2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート由来の構造であるカルボキシエステル(すなわち、メタクリロキシエチルオキシカルボニル基)のモル量は、94.5mol%、アルコール由来の構造がエチルアルコール由来の構造であるカルボキシエステル(すなわち、エトキシカルボニル基)のモル量は、4.0mol%であった。
[Synthesis Example 2: Synthesis of cyclized resin precursor (resin 2)]
21.2 g of 4,4'-oxydiphthalic anhydride, 18.0 g of 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 23.9 g of pyridine, and 250 mL of diglyme (diethylene glycol dimethyl ether) were mixed and heated at 60°C. The mixture was stirred at the same temperature for 4 hours to synthesize a diester of 4,4'-oxydiphthalic acid and 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate. The reaction mixture was then cooled to -10°C and 17.0g of thionyl chloride was added over 60 minutes while maintaining the temperature at -10±5°C. After diluting with 50 mL of N-methylpyrrolidone, a solution of 12.6 g of 4,4'-diaminodiphenyl ether dissolved in 100 mL of N-methylpyrrolidone was added dropwise to the reaction mixture over 60 minutes at -10 ± 5 °C. and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. Then, 10.0 g of ethanol was added and stirred at room temperature for 1 hour.
Then, 6000 g of water was added to precipitate the polyimide precursor, and the precipitate (water-polyimide precursor mixture) was stirred for 15 minutes. The precipitate (solid polyimide precursor) after stirring was collected by filtration and dissolved in 500 g of tetrahydrofuran. 6000 g of water (poor solvent) was added to the resulting solution to precipitate the polyimide precursor, and the precipitate (water-polyimide precursor mixture) was stirred for 15 minutes. The precipitate (solid polyimide precursor) after stirring was filtered again and dried at 45° C. for 3 days under reduced pressure.
After dissolving 46.6 g of the dried powder in 419.6 g of tetrahydrofuran, 2.3 g of triethylamine was added and stirred at room temperature for 35 minutes. Thereafter, 3000 g of ethanol was added and the precipitate was collected by filtration. The obtained precipitate was dissolved in 281.8 g of tetrahydrofuran. 17.1 g of water and 46.6 g of ion exchange resin UP6040 (manufactured by AmberTec) were added thereto, and the mixture was stirred for 4 hours. Thereafter, the ion exchange resin was removed by filtration, and the resulting polymer solution was added to 5,600 g of water to obtain a precipitate. The precipitate was collected by filtration and dried under reduced pressure at 45° C. for 24 hours to obtain 45.1 g of Resin 2.
It was confirmed by 1 H-NMR that the structure of Resin 2 was a structure represented by the following formula (P-2). When the molecular weight of Resin 2 was measured by gel permeation chromatography (standard polystyrene conversion), the weight average molecular weight (Mw) was 20,000. Furthermore, by appropriately adjusting the equivalent weight of 4,4'-diaminodiphenyl ether, resin 2 with an Mw of 5,000, resin 2 with an Mw of 10,000, and resin 2 with an Mw of 30,000 can also be used. Synthesized.
Also, the molar amount of carboxyester whose alcohol-derived structure is a 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate-derived structure (i.e., methacryloxyethyloxycarbonyl group) relative to the total molar amount of all the carboxy groups and carboxyesters contained in the resin 2. was 94.5 mol%, and the molar amount of carboxyester whose alcohol-derived structure is an ethyl alcohol-derived structure (that is, ethoxycarbonyl group) was 4.0 mol%.
〔合成例3~9:環化樹脂の前駆体(樹脂3~樹脂9)の合成〕
 使用する化合物を適宜変更した以外は、合成例2と同様の方法により下記式(P-3)~式(P-9)のいずれかで表される構造の樹脂3~樹脂9を合成した。
 樹脂3のMwは20,000、樹脂4のMwは20,000、樹脂5のMwは20,000、樹脂6のMwは20,000、樹脂7のMwは20,000、樹脂8のMwは20,000、樹脂9のMwは20,000であった。
[Synthesis Examples 3 to 9: Synthesis of cyclized resin precursors (Resin 3 to Resin 9)]
Resins 3 to 9 having structures represented by any of the following formulas (P-3) to (P-9) were synthesized in the same manner as in Synthesis Example 2, except that the compounds used were changed as appropriate.
Mw of Resin 3 is 20,000, Mw of Resin 4 is 20,000, Mw of Resin 5 is 20,000, Mw of Resin 6 is 20,000, Mw of Resin 7 is 20,000, Mw of Resin 8 is 20,000, and the Mw of Resin 9 was 20,000.
〔合成例10:環化樹脂の前駆体(樹脂10)の合成〕
 コンデンサー及び撹拌機を取り付けたフラスコ中で、水分を除去しながら、4,4’-(ヘキサフルオロイソプロピリデン)ジフタル酸無水物(東京化成工業(株)製)18.0g(40.5ミリモル)をN-メチルピロリドン(NMP)80.0gに溶解した。次いで、4,4’-ジアミノジフェニルエーテル(東京化成工業(株)製)7.95g(39.7ミリモル)を添加し、25℃で3時間撹拌し、45℃で更に3時間撹拌した。次いで、ピリジン12.8g(160ミリモル)、無水酢酸10.3g(101ミリモル)、N-メチルピロリドン(NMP)40.0gを添加し、80℃で、3時間撹拌し、N-メチルピロリドン(NMP)50gを加え、希釈した。
 この反応液を、1リットルのメタノールの中で沈殿させ、3000rpmの速度で15分間撹拌した。樹脂を濾過して取得し、1リットルのメタノールの中で再度30分間撹拌し再び濾過した。得られた樹脂を減圧下で、40℃で1日乾燥し、樹脂10を得た。樹脂10の分子量をゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー(標準ポリスチレン換算)で測定したところ、重量平均分子量(Mw)は20,000であった。H-NMRにより、樹脂10の構造は、下記式(P-10)で表される構造であることを確認した。
[Synthesis Example 10: Synthesis of cyclized resin precursor (resin 10)]
In a flask equipped with a condenser and a stirrer, 18.0 g (40.5 mmol) of 4,4'-(hexafluoroisopropylidene) diphthalic anhydride (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) was added while removing water. was dissolved in 80.0 g of N-methylpyrrolidone (NMP). Next, 7.95 g (39.7 mmol) of 4,4'-diaminodiphenyl ether (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) was added, and the mixture was stirred at 25°C for 3 hours and further stirred at 45°C for 3 hours. Next, 12.8 g (160 mmol) of pyridine, 10.3 g (101 mmol) of acetic anhydride, and 40.0 g of N-methylpyrrolidone (NMP) were added, and the mixture was stirred at 80°C for 3 hours. ) was added and diluted.
The reaction solution was precipitated in 1 liter of methanol and stirred for 15 minutes at a speed of 3000 rpm. The resin was obtained by filtration, stirred again in 1 liter of methanol for 30 minutes and filtered again. The obtained resin was dried at 40° C. for one day under reduced pressure to obtain Resin 10. When the molecular weight of Resin 10 was measured by gel permeation chromatography (standard polystyrene conversion), the weight average molecular weight (Mw) was 20,000. 1 H-NMR confirmed that the structure of resin 10 was a structure represented by the following formula (P-10).
〔合成例11:環化樹脂の前駆体(樹脂11)の合成〕
 使用する化合物を適宜変更した以外は、合成例10と同様の方法により下記式(P-11)で表される構造の樹脂11を合成した。
 樹脂11のMwは20,000であった。
[Synthesis Example 11: Synthesis of cyclized resin precursor (resin 11)]
Resin 11 having a structure represented by the following formula (P-11) was synthesized in the same manner as in Synthesis Example 10, except that the compounds used were changed as appropriate.
The Mw of Resin 11 was 20,000.

<実施例及び比較例>
 各実施例において、それぞれ、下記表に記載の成分を混合し、各樹脂組成物を得た。また、比較例において、下記表に記載の成分を混合し、比較用組成物を得た。
 具体的には、溶剤以外の表に記載の各成分の含有量(配合量)は、表の各欄の「質量部」の欄に記載の量(質量部)とした。
 溶剤の含有量(配合量)は、組成物の固形分濃度が表中の「固形分濃度」の値(質量%)となるようにし、溶剤の全質量に対する各溶剤の含有量の比率(質量比)は、表中の「比率」の欄に記載の比率となるようにした。
 得られた樹脂組成物及び比較用組成物を、細孔の幅が0.8μmのポリテトラフルオロエチレン製フィルターを用いて加圧ろ過した。
 また、表中、「-」の記載は該当する成分を組成物が含有していないことを示している。
<Examples and comparative examples>
In each Example, the components listed in the table below were mixed to obtain each resin composition. Further, in a comparative example, the components listed in the table below were mixed to obtain a comparative composition.
Specifically, the content (compounding amount) of each component listed in the table other than the solvent was the amount (parts by mass) listed in the "parts by mass" column in each column of the table.
The content (compounding amount) of the solvent is determined so that the solid content concentration of the composition is the value (mass %) of "solid content concentration" in the table, and the ratio of the content of each solvent to the total mass of the solvent (mass %) is determined. The ratio) was set to be the ratio described in the "Ratio" column in the table.
The obtained resin composition and comparative composition were pressure-filtered using a polytetrafluoroethylene filter with a pore width of 0.8 μm.
Furthermore, in the table, the description "-" indicates that the composition does not contain the corresponding component.
 表に記載した各成分の詳細は下記の通りである。 The details of each component listed in the table are as follows.
〔樹脂〕
・樹脂1~樹脂11:上記合成例により得られた樹脂1~樹脂11
〔resin〕
・Resin 1 to Resin 11: Resin 1 to Resin 11 obtained by the above synthesis example
〔モノマー(重合性化合物)〕
・M-1:下記構造の化合物。括弧の添え字は繰返し数を表す。
 
・DPHA:ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート
[Monomer (polymerizable compound)]
-M-1: Compound with the following structure. The subscript in parentheses indicates the number of repetitions.

・DPHA: dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate
〔重合開始剤又は光酸発生剤〕
・I-1~I-5:下記構造の化合物
・I-6:Omnirad 1312(IGM社製)
・I-7:Omnirad TPO H(IGM社製)
[Polymerization initiator or photoacid generator]
・I-1 to I-5: Compounds with the following structure ・I-6: Omnirad 1312 (manufactured by IGM)
・I-7: Omnirad TPO H (manufactured by IGM)
〔塩基発生剤〕
・A-1~A-5:下記構造の化合物
[Base generator]
・A-1 to A-5: Compounds with the following structure
〔重合禁止剤〕
・B-1~B-4:下記構造の化合物
[Polymerization inhibitor]
・B-1 to B-4: Compounds with the following structure
〔シランカップリング剤(金属接着性改良剤)〕
・C-1~C-3:下記構造の化合物。下記式中、Etはエチル基を表す。
・C-4:X-12-1293(信越化学工業株式会社製、イソシアネート基を保護したシランカップリング剤)
・C-5:KR-513(信越化学工業株式会社製、アクリル基含有オリゴマーであるシランカップリング剤)
[Silane coupling agent (metal adhesion improver)]
- C-1 to C-3: Compounds with the following structure. In the following formula, Et represents an ethyl group.
・C-4: X-12-1293 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., silane coupling agent with protected isocyanate group)
・C-5: KR-513 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., silane coupling agent that is an acrylic group-containing oligomer)
〔マイグレーション抑制剤〕
・D-1~D-4:下記構造の化合物
[Migration inhibitor]
・D-1 to D-4: Compounds with the following structure
〔添加剤〕
・E-1~E-7、E-9:下記構造の化合物
 E-8は特開2019-206689号公報の段落0184に記載の方法で合成した。
 具体的には、撹拌機、滴下ロート及び温度計を付したセパラブルフラスコ内で4,4’-(1-(2-(4-ヒドロキシフェニル)-2-プロピル)フェニル)エチリデン)ビスフェノール(本州化学工業社製  商品名  Tris-PA)30g(0.0707モル)を、このOH基の83.3モル%に相当する量の1,2-ナフトキノンジアジド-5-スルホン酸クロライド47.49g(0.177モル)をアセトン300gに撹拌溶解した後、フラスコを恒温槽にて30℃に調整した。
 次に、アセトン18gにトリエチルアミン17.9gを溶解し、滴下ロートに仕込んだ後、これを30分掛けてフラスコ中へ滴下した。滴下終了後、更に30分間撹拌を続け、その後、塩酸を滴下し、更に30分間撹拌を行なって、反応を終了させた。その後、反応物を濾過して、トリエチルアミン塩酸塩を除去した。ビーカー中で純水1640gと塩酸30gを混合撹拌し、混合物に濾液を撹拌しながら滴下して、析出物を得た。この析出物を水洗、濾過した後、40℃減圧下で48時間乾燥し、E-8を得た。
〔Additive〕
- E-1 to E-7, E-9: Compounds with the following structure E-8 was synthesized by the method described in paragraph 0184 of JP 2019-206689 A.
Specifically, 4,4'-(1-(2-(4-hydroxyphenyl)-2-propyl)phenyl)ethylidene)bisphenol (Honshu) was prepared in a separable flask equipped with a stirrer, dropping funnel, and thermometer. 30 g (0.0707 mol) of Tris-PA (trade name, manufactured by Kagaku Kogyo Co., Ltd.) was mixed with 47.49 g (0.07 mol) of 1,2-naphthoquinonediazide-5-sulfonic acid chloride in an amount corresponding to 83.3 mol% of the OH group. After stirring and dissolving .177 mol) in 300 g of acetone, the flask was adjusted to 30°C in a constant temperature bath.
Next, 17.9 g of triethylamine was dissolved in 18 g of acetone and charged into a dropping funnel, which was then dropped into the flask over 30 minutes. After the dropwise addition was completed, stirring was continued for an additional 30 minutes, and then hydrochloric acid was added dropwise and stirring was continued for an additional 30 minutes to complete the reaction. The reaction was then filtered to remove triethylamine hydrochloride. 1640 g of pure water and 30 g of hydrochloric acid were mixed and stirred in a beaker, and the filtrate was added dropwise to the mixture with stirring to obtain a precipitate. This precipitate was washed with water, filtered, and then dried at 40° C. under reduced pressure for 48 hours to obtain E-8.
〔化合物A〕
 F-1~F-20:下記構造の化合物。F-1~F-20は上述の化合物Aに該当する化合物である。
 FR-1:下記構造の化合物。FR-1は上述の化合物Aには該当しない化合物である。
[Compound A]
F-1 to F-20: Compounds with the following structure. F-1 to F-20 are compounds corresponding to the above-mentioned compound A.
FR-1: Compound with the following structure. FR-1 is a compound that does not fall under the above-mentioned compound A.
-F-2の合成-
 フラスコ中、tert-ブチル N-(2-アミノエチル)カルバマート 8.3 g、6-クロロプリン 4.0 g、トリエチルアミン 15.7 gおよび1-ブタノール 70 gを室温で混合し、80 ℃に昇温した後に3時間撹拌した。反応液を室温に冷却後、溶液と固体析出物をろ過により分離した。ろ取した固体を水200 mLに懸濁させ、室温中1時間撹拌した後に溶液と固体をろ過により分離した。さらに、ろ取した固体を酢酸エチル200 mLに懸濁させ、室温中1時間撹拌した後に溶液と固体をろ過により分離した。得られた固体を風乾することで、目的物F-2を5.64 g得た(収率 78%)。
 1H-NMR,400MHz,δ((DMSO-d6) ppm:1.29 and 1.36 (9H, a pair of s), 3.17 (2H, q, J=6 Hz), 3.52 (2H, br-s), 6.49 and 6.92 (1H, a pair of s), 7.58 (1H, br-s), 8.10 (1H, s), 8.18 (1H, s), 12.73 (1H, br-s).
-F-4の合成-

 フラスコ中、アデニン 5.1 g、二炭酸ジ-tert-ブチル19.4 g、テトラヒドロフラン 89 gを室温で混合し、4-ジメチルアミノピリジン 0.3 gを加えた後に16時間撹拌した。反応液を減圧化で溶媒留去し、得られた固体を酢酸エチル80 mLに溶解させた。有機層を1 M 塩酸 40 mL (1回)、水 40 mL (2回)、希釈重層水 40 mL (1回)で順に分液洗浄し、有機層を硫酸ナトリウムで乾燥し、ろ液を減圧下で濃縮することでF-4-1を粗生成体として得た。
 フラスコ中、F-4-1 13.1 g、1 M 水酸化ナトリウム水溶液 180 mL、エタノール 375 mLを室温で混合し、72時間撹拌した。反応液を0 ℃に冷却後、1 M 塩酸 120 mLを滴下して反応液を中和し(pH 7)、室温で5時間撹拌した。反応液をジクロロメタン133 mLで3回抽出し、有機層を硫酸ナトリウムで乾燥し、ろ液を減圧下で濃縮することで粗生成体を得た。得られた固体を水100 mLに懸濁させ、室温中1時間撹拌した後に溶液と固体をろ過により分離した。さらに、ろ取した固体を酢酸エチル20 mLに懸濁させ、60 ℃で1時間撹拌した後に溶液と固体をろ過により分離した。得られた固体を風乾することで、目的物F-4を1.28 g得た(収率 18%)。
1H-NMR,400MHz,δ((DMSO-d6) ppm:1.52 (9H, s), 8.41 (1H, s), 8.56 (1H, s), 10.51 (1H, br-s), 12.23 (1H, br-s).
-F-20の合成-

 フラスコ中、エチレンジアミン 36.1 g、6-クロロプリン 9.3 g、水 30.0 gおよび1-ブタノール 146.0 gを室温で混合し、80 ℃に昇温した後に5時間撹拌した。反応液を室温に冷却後、加熱減圧下で反応液を濃縮した。得られた固体をメタノール200 mLに懸濁させ、室温中1時間撹拌した後に溶液と固体をろ過により分離した。さらに、ろ取した固体をアセトン200 mLに懸濁させ、室温中1時間撹拌した後に溶液と固体をろ過により分離した。得られた固体を風乾することで、目的物F-20-1を9.16 g得た(収率86%)。
1H-NMR,400MHz,δ((D2O) ppm:3.02 (2H, t, J=6 Hz), 3.57 (2H, t, J=6 Hz), 7.86 (1H, s), 7.91 (1H, d, J=1 Hz).
 フラスコ中、F-20-1 3.0 g、2-クマラノン4.6 g、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド 16.1 gを室温で混合し、80 ℃に昇温した後に14時間撹拌した。反応液を0 ℃に冷却後、ジイソプロピルエーテル100 mLを加えて30分撹拌し、析出した固体をろ過により分離した。得られた固体を水100 mLに懸濁させ、室温中1時間撹拌した後に溶液と固体をろ過により分離した。さらに、ろ取した固体をアセトン70 mLに懸濁させ、50 ℃で1時間撹拌した後に0 ℃に冷却し、溶液と固体をろ過により分離した。得られた固体を風乾することで、目的物F-20を2.14 g得た(収率 41%)。
1H-NMR,400MHz,δ((DMSO-d6+D2O) ppm:3.39 (2H, t, J=6 Hz), 3.40 (2H, s), 3.64 (2H, br-s), 6.71 (1H, td, J=7, 1 Hz), 6.79 (1H, d, J=8 Hz), 7.02 (1H, d, J=7 Hz), 7.08 (1H, td, J=8, 1 Hz), 8.13 (1H, s), 8.16 (1H, s).
-Synthesis of F-2-
In a flask, 8.3 g of tert-butyl N-(2-aminoethyl)carbamate, 4.0 g of 6-chloropurine, 15.7 g of triethylamine, and 70 g of 1-butanol were mixed at room temperature, heated to 80 °C, and stirred for 3 hours. did. After cooling the reaction solution to room temperature, the solution and solid precipitate were separated by filtration. The filtered solid was suspended in 200 mL of water and stirred at room temperature for 1 hour, and then the solution and solid were separated by filtration. Further, the filtered solid was suspended in 200 mL of ethyl acetate, stirred at room temperature for 1 hour, and then the solution and solid were separated by filtration. The obtained solid was air-dried to obtain 5.64 g of target product F-2 (yield 78%).
1H-NMR, 400MHz, δ((DMSO-d6) ppm: 1.29 and 1.36 (9H, a pair of s), 3.17 (2H, q, J=6 Hz), 3.52 (2H, br-s), 6.49 and 6.92 (1H, a pair of s), 7.58 (1H, br-s), 8.10 (1H, s), 8.18 (1H, s), 12.73 (1H, br-s).
-Synthesis of F-4-

In a flask, 5.1 g of adenine, 19.4 g of di-tert-butyl dicarbonate, and 89 g of tetrahydrofuran were mixed at room temperature, and after adding 0.3 g of 4-dimethylaminopyridine, the mixture was stirred for 16 hours. The solvent of the reaction solution was distilled off under reduced pressure, and the obtained solid was dissolved in 80 mL of ethyl acetate. The organic layer was separated and washed in order with 40 mL of 1 M hydrochloric acid (once), 40 mL of water (twice), and 40 mL of diluted layered water (once), dried over sodium sulfate, and the filtrate was vacuumed. F-4-1 was obtained as a crude product by concentration below.
In a flask, 13.1 g of F-4-1, 180 mL of 1 M aqueous sodium hydroxide solution, and 375 mL of ethanol were mixed at room temperature and stirred for 72 hours. After cooling the reaction solution to 0° C., 120 mL of 1 M hydrochloric acid was added dropwise to neutralize the reaction solution (pH 7), and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 5 hours. The reaction solution was extracted three times with 133 mL of dichloromethane, the organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate, and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure to obtain a crude product. The obtained solid was suspended in 100 mL of water, stirred at room temperature for 1 hour, and then the solution and solid were separated by filtration. Furthermore, the solid collected by filtration was suspended in 20 mL of ethyl acetate, and after stirring at 60° C. for 1 hour, the solution and solid were separated by filtration. The obtained solid was air-dried to obtain 1.28 g of target product F-4 (yield 18%).
1H-NMR, 400MHz, δ((DMSO-d6) ppm: 1.52 (9H, s), 8.41 (1H, s), 8.56 (1H, s), 10.51 (1H, br-s), 12.23 (1H, br -s).
-Synthesis of F-20-

In a flask, 36.1 g of ethylenediamine, 9.3 g of 6-chloropurine, 30.0 g of water, and 146.0 g of 1-butanol were mixed at room temperature, heated to 80° C., and then stirred for 5 hours. After cooling the reaction solution to room temperature, the reaction solution was concentrated under heating and reduced pressure. The obtained solid was suspended in 200 mL of methanol, and after stirring at room temperature for 1 hour, the solution and solid were separated by filtration. Further, the solid collected by filtration was suspended in 200 mL of acetone, and after stirring at room temperature for 1 hour, the solution and solid were separated by filtration. By air-drying the obtained solid, 9.16 g of target product F-20-1 was obtained (yield: 86%).
1H-NMR, 400MHz, δ((D2O) ppm: 3.02 (2H, t, J=6 Hz), 3.57 (2H, t, J=6 Hz), 7.86 (1H, s), 7.91 (1H, d, J=1 Hz).
In a flask, 3.0 g of F-20-1, 4.6 g of 2-coumaranone, and 16.1 g of N,N-dimethylformamide were mixed at room temperature, heated to 80° C., and then stirred for 14 hours. After cooling the reaction solution to 0° C., 100 mL of diisopropyl ether was added and stirred for 30 minutes, and the precipitated solid was separated by filtration. The obtained solid was suspended in 100 mL of water, stirred at room temperature for 1 hour, and then the solution and solid were separated by filtration. Further, the filtered solid was suspended in 70 mL of acetone, stirred at 50° C. for 1 hour, and then cooled to 0° C., and the solution and solid were separated by filtration. The obtained solid was air-dried to obtain 2.14 g of the target product F-20 (yield 41%).
1H-NMR, 400MHz, δ((DMSO-d6+D2O) ppm: 3.39 (2H, t, J=6 Hz), 3.40 (2H, s), 3.64 (2H, br-s), 6.71 (1H, td , J=7, 1 Hz), 6.79 (1H, d, J=8 Hz), 7.02 (1H, d, J=7 Hz), 7.08 (1H, td, J=8, 1 Hz), 8.13 (1H , s), 8.16 (1H, s).
〔溶剤〕
・NMP:N-メチル-2-ピロリドン
・EL:乳酸エチル
・DMSO:ジメチルスルホキシド
・GBL:γ-ブチロラクトン
・GVL:γ-バレロラクトン
・MDMPA:3-メトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロパンアミド
・toluen:トルエン
〔solvent〕
・NMP: N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone ・EL: ethyl lactate ・DMSO: dimethyl sulfoxide ・GBL: γ-butyrolactone ・GVL: γ-valerolactone ・MDMPA: 3-methoxy-N,N-dimethylpropanamide ・Toluen: toluene
<評価>
〔耐熱試験後の密着性の評価〕
 各実施例及び比較例において調製した樹脂組成物又は比較用組成物を、それぞれ、銅基板上にスピンコート法により層状に適用して、樹脂組成物層又は比較用組成物層を形成した。得られた樹脂組成物層又は比較用組成物層を形成した銅基板をホットプレート上で、100℃で5分間乾燥し、銅基板上に表の「膜厚(μm)」の欄に記載の膜厚であって、厚さの均一な樹脂組成物層又は比較用組成物層とした。銅基板上の樹脂組成物層又は比較用組成物層を、500mJ/cmの露光エネルギーで、表の「現像条件」の欄に「ネガ」と記載された例においては100μm四方の正方形状の非マスク部が形成されたフォトマスクを、表の「現像条件」の欄に「ポジ」と記載された例においては100μm四方の正方形状のマスク部が形成されたフォトマスクをそれぞれ使用して表の「露光波長(nm)」の欄に記載の露光波長(nm)の光により露光した。
 露光条件の欄に「M」と記載された例においては、光源としてステッパーを用いて露光した。
 露光条件の欄に「D」と記載された例においては、光源として、ダイレクト露光装置(アドテック DE-6UH III)を用いて、フォトマスクは使用せず、100μm四方の範囲にレーザーダイレクトイメージング露光を行った。
 その後、表に記載の現像液で60秒間現像して、100μm四方の正方形状の樹脂層を得た。表の「TMAH水溶液」の記載は、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシドの2.38質量%水溶液を意味している。
 「キュア温度」の欄に数値が記載された例においては、ホットプレートを使用して、上記露光後の樹脂組成物層を、窒素雰囲気下で、10℃/分の昇温速度で昇温し、表の「キュア温度(℃)」の欄に記載の温度に達した後、上記温度を表の「キュア時間(min)」の時間において維持し、硬化物を得た。
 「キュア温度(℃)」の欄に「IR」と記載された例においては、赤外線ランプ加熱装置(アドバンス理工社製、RTP-6)を用いて、各実施例において得られた樹脂膜を、窒素雰囲気下で、10℃/分の昇温速度で昇温し、230℃に達した後、上記温度を表の「キュア時間(min)」の時間において維持し、硬化物を得た。
 得られた硬化物付きの銅基板を、温度175℃、大気下の槽内で192時間経過させた。
 銅基板上の100μm四方の正方形状の硬化物に対して、25℃、65%相対湿度(RH)の環境下にて、ボンドテスター(XYZTEC社製、CondorSigma)を用いて、せん断力を測定し、下記評価基準に従って評価した。評価結果は表の「耐熱試験後の密着性」の欄に記載した。せん断力が大きければ大きいほど耐熱試験後の硬化膜の密着性に優れるといえる。
-評価基準-
A:せん断力が30gfを超えた。
B:せん断力が25gfを超えて30gf以下であった。
C:せん断力が20gfを超えて25gf以下であった。
D:せん断力が20gf以下であった。
 また、1gfは0.00980665Nである。
<Evaluation>
[Evaluation of adhesion after heat resistance test]
The resin composition or comparative composition prepared in each Example and Comparative Example was applied in a layered manner onto a copper substrate by a spin coating method to form a resin composition layer or a comparative composition layer. The copper substrate on which the obtained resin composition layer or comparative composition layer was formed was dried on a hot plate at 100°C for 5 minutes, and the film thickness (μm) described in the column of the table was applied to the copper substrate. A resin composition layer or a comparative composition layer having a uniform thickness was used. The resin composition layer or the comparative composition layer on the copper substrate was exposed to an exposure energy of 500 mJ/ cm2 , and in the examples where "negative" was written in the "Development conditions" column of the table, a 100 μm square square shape was formed. In examples where "Positive" is written in the "Development Conditions" column of the table, a photomask with a non-mask area formed thereon is used, and a photomask with a 100 μm square mask area formed thereon is used. It was exposed to light having the exposure wavelength (nm) described in the "Exposure wavelength (nm)" column.
In the examples described as "M" in the column of exposure conditions, exposure was performed using a stepper as a light source.
In the example where "D" is written in the exposure condition column, a direct exposure device (Adtech DE-6UH III) is used as the light source, and a laser direct imaging exposure is performed on a 100 μm square area without using a photomask. went.
Thereafter, development was performed for 60 seconds using the developer shown in the table to obtain a square resin layer of 100 μm square. The description of "TMAH aqueous solution" in the table means a 2.38% by mass aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide.
In examples where a numerical value is listed in the "cure temperature" column, the exposed resin composition layer is heated at a rate of 10°C/min in a nitrogen atmosphere using a hot plate. After reaching the temperature listed in the "Cure Temperature (° C.)" column of the table, the temperature was maintained for the time "Cure Time (min)" in the table to obtain a cured product.
In the examples where "IR" is written in the "Cure temperature (℃)" column, the resin film obtained in each example was heated using an infrared lamp heating device (RTP-6, manufactured by Advance Riko Co., Ltd.). The temperature was raised at a rate of 10° C./min in a nitrogen atmosphere, and after reaching 230° C., the temperature was maintained for the “cure time (min)” in the table to obtain a cured product.
The obtained copper substrate with the cured product was placed in a tank at a temperature of 175° C. in the atmosphere for 192 hours.
The shear force was measured on a 100 μm square cured product on a copper substrate using a bond tester (Condor Sigma, manufactured by XYZTEC) in an environment of 25 ° C. and 65% relative humidity (RH). , evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. The evaluation results are listed in the column of "Adhesion after heat resistance test" in the table. It can be said that the greater the shearing force, the better the adhesion of the cured film after the heat resistance test.
-Evaluation criteria-
A: Shear force exceeded 30 gf.
B: Shear force exceeded 25 gf and was 30 gf or less.
C: Shear force exceeded 20 gf and was 25 gf or less.
D: Shear force was 20 gf or less.
Moreover, 1 gf is 0.00980665N.
〔組成物安定性〕
 各実施例又は比較例において調製した樹脂組成物又は比較用組成物を、遮光条件下で38℃、3日間において静置した。上記静置の完了後、粘度計(東機産業 RE-85L)を用いて、粘度を測定し、初期状態(上記静置実施前)と比較して、上記静置完了後の粘度変化率を下記式に従って算出し、下記評価基準に従って評価した。評価結果は表の「組成物安定性」の欄に記載した。粘度変化率が小さいほど組成物は組成物安定性に優れるといえる。
 粘度変化率(%)=|(上記静置完了後の粘度-上記静置実施前の粘度)|/(上記静置実施前の粘度)×100
-評価基準-
A:上記粘度変化率の絶対値が3%以下であった。
B:上記粘度変化率の絶対値が3%を超え5%以下であった。
C:上記粘度変化率の絶対値が5%を超え8%以下であった。
D:上記粘度変化率の絶対値が8%を超え10%以下であった。
E:上記粘度変化率の絶対値が10%を超えた。
[Composition stability]
The resin composition or comparative composition prepared in each Example or Comparative Example was allowed to stand at 38° C. for 3 days under light shielding conditions. After the above-mentioned standing is completed, the viscosity is measured using a viscometer (Toki Sangyo RE-85L), and compared with the initial state (before the above-mentioned standing), the viscosity change rate after the above-mentioned standing is completed is determined. It was calculated according to the following formula and evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. The evaluation results are listed in the "composition stability" column of the table. It can be said that the smaller the viscosity change rate, the more excellent the composition stability is.
Viscosity change rate (%) = | (Viscosity after the completion of the above-mentioned standing − Viscosity before the above-mentioned standing) | / (Viscosity before the above-mentioned standing) × 100
-Evaluation criteria-
A: The absolute value of the above viscosity change rate was 3% or less.
B: The absolute value of the viscosity change rate was more than 3% and less than 5%.
C: The absolute value of the viscosity change rate was more than 5% and less than 8%.
D: The absolute value of the viscosity change rate was more than 8% and less than 10%.
E: The absolute value of the above viscosity change rate exceeded 10%.
 以上の結果から、本発明の樹脂組成物から形成される硬化物は、耐熱試験後であっても密着性に優れることが分かる。
 比較例1に係る比較用組成物は、化合物Aを含有しない。このような比較用組成物については、耐熱試験後の硬化物の密着性に劣ることが分かる。
From the above results, it can be seen that the cured product formed from the resin composition of the present invention has excellent adhesion even after the heat resistance test.
The comparative composition according to Comparative Example 1 does not contain Compound A. It can be seen that such comparative compositions have poor adhesion after the heat resistance test.
<実施例101>
 実施例1において使用した樹脂組成物を、表面に銅薄層が形成された樹脂基材の銅薄層の表面にスピンコート法により層状に適用して、100℃で5分間乾燥し、膜厚20μmの感光膜を形成した後、ステッパー((株)ニコン製、NSR1505 i6)を用いて露光した。露光はマスク(パターンが1:1ラインアンドスペースであり、線幅が10μmであるバイナリマスク)を介して、波長365nmで行った。上記露光後、シクロペンタノンで2分間現像し、PGMEAで30秒間リンスし、層のパターンを得た。
 次いで、窒素雰囲気下で、10℃/分の昇温速度で昇温し、230℃に達した後、230℃で180分間維持して、再配線層用層間絶縁膜を形成した。この再配線層用層間絶縁膜は、絶縁性に優れていた。
 また、この再配線層用層間絶縁膜を使用して半導体デバイスを製造したところ、問題なく動作することを確認した。
<Example 101>
The resin composition used in Example 1 was applied in a layered manner by spin coating to the surface of the thin copper layer of the resin base material on which the thin copper layer was formed, and dried at 100°C for 5 minutes to determine the film thickness. After forming a 20 μm photoresist film, it was exposed using a stepper (NSR1505 i6, manufactured by Nikon Corporation). Exposure was performed at a wavelength of 365 nm through a mask (a binary mask with a 1:1 line-and-space pattern and a line width of 10 μm). After the above exposure, it was developed with cyclopentanone for 2 minutes and rinsed with PGMEA for 30 seconds to obtain a layer pattern.
Next, the temperature was raised at a rate of 10° C./min in a nitrogen atmosphere, and after reaching 230° C., the temperature was maintained at 230° C. for 180 minutes to form an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer. This interlayer insulating film for rewiring layer had excellent insulation properties.
Furthermore, when a semiconductor device was manufactured using this interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer, it was confirmed that it operated without any problems.

Claims (16)

  1.  環化樹脂及びその前駆体よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の樹脂と、
     下記化合物a1及び化合物a2の少なくとも一方に該当する化合物Aとを含む
     樹脂組成物。
    化合物a1:保護された第1級アミン構造、並びに、オキサゾール環、チアゾール環、ピリミジン環、シッフ塩基基、フェノール性水酸基、下記式(1-1)で表される基、下記式(1-2)で表される基、及び、下記式(1-4)で表される基よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の構造を有する
    化合物a2:保護された第1級アルキルアミン構造、及び、下記式(1-1)~式(1-4)のいずれかで表される基を有する

     式(1-1)中、Xは-C(R-、-NR-、-S-又は-O-を表し、X~Xはそれぞれ独立に、=CR-又は=N-を表し、Xが-C(R-又は-O-である場合、X~Xのうち少なくとも2つが=N-を表し、Xが-NR-又は-S-である場合、X~Xのうち少なくとも1つが=N-を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、*で表される他の構造との結合部位、水素原子又は1価の置換基を表し、X~Xの1つが、*で表される他の構造との結合部位であるRを含み、式(1-1)で表される基において*で表される他の構造との結合部位であるRは1つのみである。
     式(1-2)中、X14は-C(R-、-NR-、-S-又は-O-を表し、X~X13はそれぞれ独立に、=CR-又は=N-を表し、X14が-C(R-又は-O-である場合、X~X13のうち少なくとも2つが=N-を表し、X14が-NR-又は-S-である場合、X~X13のうち少なくとも1つが=N-を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、*で表される他の構造との結合部位、水素原子又は1価の置換基を表し、X、X13及びX14の1つが、*で表される他の構造との結合部位であるRを含み、式(1-2)で表される基において*で表される他の構造との結合部位であるRは1つのみである。
     式(1-3)中、X15は-C(R-、-NR-、-S-又は-O-を表し、X16~X18はそれぞれ独立に、=CR-又は=N-を表し、X15が-C(R-又は-O-である場合、X16~X18のうち少なくとも2つが=N-を表し、X13が-NR-又は-S-である場合、X16~X18のうち少なくとも1つが=N-を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の置換基を表す。
     式(1-4)中、X19~X26はそれぞれ独立に、=CR-又は=N-を表し、X19~X26のうち少なくとも2つが=N-を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、*で表される他の構造との結合部位、水素原子又は1価の置換基を表し、X19~X26の1つが、*で表される他の構造との結合部位であるRを含み、式(1-4)で表される基において*で表される他の構造との結合部位であるRは1つのみである。
    At least one resin selected from the group consisting of cyclized resins and precursors thereof;
    A resin composition comprising a compound A corresponding to at least one of the following compounds a1 and compound a2.
    Compound a1: Protected primary amine structure, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyrimidine ring, Schiff base group, phenolic hydroxyl group, group represented by the following formula (1-1), the following formula (1-2) ) and a group represented by the following formula (1-4) Compound a2 having at least one structure selected from the group consisting of a group represented by the following formula (1-4): a protected primary alkylamine structure, and Having a group represented by any of the following formulas (1-1) to (1-4)

    In formula (1-1), X 1 represents -C(R x ) 2 -, -NR x -, -S-, or -O- , and X 2 to =N-, and when X 1 is -C(R x ) 2 - or -O-, at least two of X 2 to X 7 represent =N-, and X 1 is -NR In the case of S-, at least one of X 2 to X 7 represents =N-, and each R and one of X 4 to X 7 contains R x which is a bonding site with another structure represented by *, and in the group represented by formula (1-1), There is only one R x that is a binding site with the structure.
    In formula (1-2), X 14 represents -C(R x ) 2 -, -NR x -, -S-, or -O- , and X 8 to =N-, and when X 14 is -C(R x ) 2 - or -O-, at least two of X 8 to X 13 represent =N-, and X 14 is -NR When S-, at least one of X 8 to X 13 represents =N-, and each R X independently represents a bonding site with another structure represented by *, a hydrogen atom, or a monovalent substituent , one of X 8 , X 13 and X 14 contains R x which is a bonding site with another structure represented by *, and in the group represented by formula (1-2), There is only one R x that is a binding site with other structures.
    In formula (1-3), X 15 represents -C(R x ) 2 -, -NR x -, -S-, or -O- , and X 16 to =N-, and when X 15 is -C(R x ) 2 - or -O-, at least two of X 16 to X 18 represent =N-, and X 13 is -NR When S-, at least one of X 16 to X 18 represents =N-, and R X each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent.
    In formula (1-4), X 19 to X 26 each independently represents =CR X - or =N-, at least two of X 19 to X 26 represent =N-, and R R represents a bonding site with another structure represented by *, a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, and one of X 19 to X 26 is a bonding site with another structure represented by * In the group represented by formula (1-4), there is only one R x which is a bonding site with another structure represented by *.
  2.  前記化合物Aが、光、熱又は塩基の作用により分解し脂肪族第1級アミンを発生させる化合物である、請求項1に記載の樹脂組成物。 The resin composition according to claim 1, wherein the compound A is a compound that decomposes under the action of light, heat, or a base to generate an aliphatic primary amine.
  3.  前記化合物a1が、保護された第1級アミン構造、並びに、式(1-1)で表される基、及び、式(1-2)で表される基よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の構造を有する、請求項1又は2に記載の樹脂組成物。 The compound a1 has at least one group selected from the group consisting of a protected primary amine structure, a group represented by formula (1-1), and a group represented by formula (1-2). The resin composition according to claim 1 or 2, which has a seed structure.
  4.  前記化合物Aが下記式(A-2)又は式(A-3)で表される化合物である、請求項1又は2に記載の樹脂組成物。

     式(A-2)中、Rはそれぞれ独立に、置換基を有してもよいアルキル基を表し、複数のRが結合して環構造を形成してもよく、Rは式(1-1)~式(1-4)のいずれかで表される基、オキサゾール環、チアゾール環、ピリミジン環、シッフ塩基機、及び、フェノール性水酸基、よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の構造を有する有機基を表し、Lは単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
     式(A-3)中、Rは式(1-1)~式(1-4)のいずれかで表される基、オキサゾール環、チアゾール環、ピリミジン環、シッフ塩基基、及び、フェノール性水酸基、よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の構造を有する有機基を表し、Lは単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
    The resin composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the compound A is a compound represented by the following formula (A-2) or formula (A-3).

    In formula (A-2), R 7 each independently represents an alkyl group that may have a substituent, a plurality of R 7 may be combined to form a ring structure, and R 8 is represented by formula ( At least one type selected from the group consisting of a group represented by any one of 1-1) to formula (1-4), an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, a pyrimidine ring, a Schiff base, and a phenolic hydroxyl group. represents an organic group having a structure, and L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
    In formula (A-3), R 9 is a group represented by any one of formulas (1-1) to (1-4), an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, a pyrimidine ring, a Schiff base group, and a phenolic group. represents an organic group having at least one type of structure selected from the group consisting of a hydroxyl group, and L 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  5.  前記樹脂がポリイミド又はポリイミド前駆体である、請求項1又は2に記載の樹脂組成物。 The resin composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the resin is polyimide or a polyimide precursor.
  6.  前記化合物Aとは異なる芳香族複素環化合物を更に含む、請求項1又は2に記載の樹脂組成物。 The resin composition according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising an aromatic heterocyclic compound different from the compound A.
  7.  光重合開始剤と重合性化合物を更に含む、請求項1又は2に記載の樹脂組成物。 The resin composition according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising a photopolymerization initiator and a polymerizable compound.
  8.  再配線層用層間絶縁膜の形成に用いられる、請求項1又は2に記載の樹脂組成物。 The resin composition according to claim 1 or 2, which is used for forming an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer.
  9.  請求項1又は2に記載の樹脂組成物を硬化してなる硬化物。 A cured product obtained by curing the resin composition according to claim 1 or 2.
  10.  請求項9に記載の硬化物からなる層を2層以上含み、前記硬化物からなる層同士のいずれかの間に金属層を含む積層体。 A laminate comprising two or more layers made of the cured product according to claim 9, and a metal layer between any of the layers made of the cured product.
  11.  請求項1又は2に記載の樹脂組成物を基材上に適用して膜を形成する膜形成工程を含む、硬化物の製造方法。 A method for producing a cured product, comprising a film forming step of applying the resin composition according to claim 1 or 2 onto a base material to form a film.
  12.  前記膜を選択的に露光する露光工程及び前記膜を現像液を用いて現像してパターンを形成する現像工程を含む、請求項11に記載の硬化物の製造方法。 The method for producing a cured product according to claim 11, comprising an exposure step of selectively exposing the film and a development step of developing the film using a developer to form a pattern.
  13.  前記膜を50~450℃で加熱する加熱工程を含む、請求項11に記載の硬化物の製造方法。 The method for producing a cured product according to claim 11, comprising a heating step of heating the film at 50 to 450°C.
  14.  請求項11に記載の硬化物の製造方法を含む、積層体の製造方法。 A method for manufacturing a laminate, comprising the method for manufacturing a cured product according to claim 11.
  15.  請求項11に記載の硬化物の製造方法を含む、半導体デバイスの製造方法。 A method for manufacturing a semiconductor device, comprising the method for manufacturing a cured product according to claim 11.
  16.  請求項9に記載の硬化物を含む、半導体デバイス。 A semiconductor device comprising the cured product according to claim 9.
PCT/JP2023/030663 2022-08-30 2023-08-25 Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device WO2024048436A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2022-137029 2022-08-30
JP2022137029 2022-08-30

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024048436A1 true WO2024048436A1 (en) 2024-03-07

Family

ID=90099868

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2023/030663 WO2024048436A1 (en) 2022-08-30 2023-08-25 Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2024048436A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2010114103A1 (en) * 2009-04-02 2010-10-07 日産化学工業株式会社 Polyimide precursor composition containing polyamic alkyl ester
JP2016212380A (en) * 2015-04-28 2016-12-15 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition, production method of cured film, cured film, liquid crystal display device, organic electroluminescence display device and touch panel
WO2022059622A1 (en) * 2020-09-16 2022-03-24 富士フイルム株式会社 Resin composition, cured object, layered product, method for producing cured object, and semiconductor device

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2010114103A1 (en) * 2009-04-02 2010-10-07 日産化学工業株式会社 Polyimide precursor composition containing polyamic alkyl ester
JP2016212380A (en) * 2015-04-28 2016-12-15 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition, production method of cured film, cured film, liquid crystal display device, organic electroluminescence display device and touch panel
WO2022059622A1 (en) * 2020-09-16 2022-03-24 富士フイルム株式会社 Resin composition, cured object, layered product, method for producing cured object, and semiconductor device

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7259141B1 (en) Method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and treatment liquid
WO2022059622A1 (en) Resin composition, cured object, layered product, method for producing cured object, and semiconductor device
CN114008526A (en) Curable resin composition, method for producing curable resin composition, cured film, laminate, method for producing cured film, and semiconductor device
JP7196121B2 (en) Pattern forming method, photosensitive resin composition, laminate manufacturing method, and electronic device manufacturing method
WO2022172996A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminated body, method for producing cured product, semiconductor device, and base generator
WO2022050135A1 (en) Cured product production method, laminate production method, and semiconductor device production method
WO2022050041A1 (en) Cured product production method, laminate production method, and electronic device production method
WO2024048436A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2024101295A1 (en) Production method for cured product, production method for laminate, production method for semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2024048435A1 (en) Resin composition, cured article, laminate, method for producing cured article, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2023190064A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2024053655A1 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2024071237A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2024048605A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, layered body, method for producing cured product, method for producing layered body, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2024095885A1 (en) Resin composition, cured object, layered object, method for producing cured object, method for producing layered object, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2024090460A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, production method for cured product, production method for laminate, manufacturing method for semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2023032475A1 (en) Method for producing cured product, method for producing multilayer body, method for producing semiconductor device, and treatment solution and resin composition
WO2024048603A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2022176869A1 (en) Method for producing permanent film, method for producing multilayer body, and method for producing semiconductor device
WO2024101266A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2024048604A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2023112573A1 (en) Method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate , method for producing semiconductor device, and treatment liquid
WO2024063025A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2024095884A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for manufacturing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2023190060A1 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, cured product, multilayer body, method for producing cured product, method for producing multilayer body, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23860198

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1